CivilGEOCivilGEO
GeoSTORMGeoHECRASGeoHECHMSCustomer StoriesKnowledge BaseProduct TutorialsEngineering Resources
Customer ReviewsCustomer StoriesCustomer VideosCase StudiesWall of LoveProductsKnowledge BaseProduct Tutorials
Training ClassesTraining WebinarsProduct TutorialsProductsKnowledge BaseAbout Us
Get SupportKnowledge BaseFeature RequestsEngineering ResourcesProductsCustomer StoriesAbout Us
About UsPrivacy CenterNewsBlogProductsCustomer StoriesKnowledge Base
Contact
Free Trial
CivilGEO Knowledge Base

GeoSTORM

Stormwater drainage design, storm sewer networks, and detention modeling with native GIS workflows.

108 articles · Generated August 19, 2026

Contents

  1. GeoSTORM
  2. Draw and Assign LID Structures Command
  3. Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM)
  4. Subbasin LID Structures Command
  5. Compute Slopes Command
  6. Getting Started & Project Workflow › GeoSTORM Overview
  7. Stormwater Hydrology Methods
  8. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting
  9. Import Stormwater Shapefile Geometry Command
  10. Exporting Your Project to LandXML
  11. Exporting Your Project to EPA SWMM
  12. Importing an EPA SWMM Project
  13. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans
  14. Understanding Storm Scenarios
  15. Delete Scenarios (GeoSTORM)
  16. Duplicate Current Scenario (GeoSTORM)
  17. Scenario Summary (GeoSTORM)
  18. Multiple Plan Analysis (GeoSTORM)
  19. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Display & Element Properties
  20. Stormwater Element Display Properties
  21. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling
  22. Compute RC Command
  23. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Drawing & Properties
  24. Subbasin Data Command (GeoSTORM)
  25. Subbasin Table Edit Command (GeoSTORM)
  26. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › LID Specifications
  27. Subbasin Data – LID Specifications
  28. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Urban Impervious Areas
  29. Urban Subbasins with Storm Sewer Interconnects
  30. Storm Sewer Network › Manholes
  31. Flow Control Manhole and Back Flows
  32. Manhole Data Command
  33. Assign Manhole Elevations Command
  34. Manhole Table Edit Command
  35. Renumber Interconnected Manholes Command
  36. Draw and Assign Manholes Command
  37. Georeferencing Manholes
  38. Storm Sewer Network › Pipes
  39. Pipe Data Command
  40. Water Surface Profile within a Pipe
  41. Draw and Assign Pipes Command
  42. Assign Pipe Invert Elevations Command
  43. Assigning Invert Elevations
  44. Renumber Interconnected Pipes Command
  45. Georeferencing Pipes
  46. Recompute Pipe Properties Command
  47. Pipe Table Edit Command
  48. Merge Pipes Command
  49. Storm Sewer Network › Cyclic Loop Networks
  50. Cyclic Loop Network
  51. Storm Sewer Network › Underground Pipe Galleries
  52. Defining Underground Pipe Gallery
  53. Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Segments
  54. Draw and Assign Roadway Segments Command
  55. Automated Draw Roadway Segments Command
  56. Recompute Roadway Segment Properties Command
  57. Georeferencing Roadway Segments
  58. Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments Command
  59. Merge Roadway Segments Command
  60. Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Crossings
  61. Draw and Assign Roadway Crossings Command (GeoSTORM)
  62. Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties Command
  63. Georeferencing Roadway Crossings (GeoSTORM)
  64. Roadway Crossing Table Edit Command
  65. Roadway Crossing Data Command
  66. Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Catch Basin Inlets
  67. Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit Command
  68. Roadway & Inlet Modeling › TOC Widths
  69. Compute TOC Widths Command
  70. Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Junctions
  71. Routing Junction Table Edit Command
  72. Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions Command
  73. Assign Routing Junction Elevations Command
  74. Routing Junction Data Command
  75. Georeferencing Routing Junctions
  76. Draw and Assign Routing Junctions Command
  77. Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Reaches
  78. Routing Reach Data Command
  79. Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches Command
  80. Import Routing Reach Alignment Command
  81. Draw and Assign Routing Reaches Command
  82. Routing Reach Table Edit Command
  83. Merge Routing Reaches Command
  84. Recompute Routing Reach Properties Command
  85. Georeferencing Routing Reaches
  86. Routing Junctions & Reaches › Flow Routing Methods
  87. Flow Routing Methods
  88. Terminal Outfalls › Terminal Outfall
  89. Setting Outfall Boundary Condition
  90. Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations Command
  91. Terminal Outfall
  92. Terminal Outfall Data Command
  93. Terminal Outfall Table Edit Command
  94. Draw and Assign Terminal Outfalls Command
  95. Georeferencing Terminal Outfalls
  96. Storage Areas & Detention › Storage Area Drawing & Data
  97. Storage Area Data Command (GeoSTORM)
  98. Defining Storage Area Volume
  99. Storage Area Table Edit Command
  100. Storage Areas & Detention › Outflow Control Structures
  101. Understanding Outflow Control Structures
  102. Defining Storage Area Spillways
  103. Defining Riser Outflow Pipe
  104. Defining Storage Area Culvert
  105. Defining Pump Outflow
  106. Defining Riser Outflow Structure
  107. Pump Curve Data Command
  108. Storage Areas & Detention › Underground Storage Chambers
  109. Defining Underground Storage Chambers
  110. Storage Areas & Detention › Seepage and Infiltration Loss
  111. Storage Unit Seepage and Infiltration Loss
  112. Cross Sections & Channels › Cross Section Drawing
  113. Automated Draw Cross Sections Command (GeoSTORM)
  114. Draw and Assign Cross Sections Command (GeoSTORM)
  115. Cross Sections & Channels › Cross Section Editing & Import
  116. Import Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM)
  117. Cross Sections & Channels › Hydraulic Jump
  118. Hydraulic Jump
  119. Hydrology & Precipitation › Rain Gages
  120. Rain Gage Data Command (GeoSTORM)
  121. Hydrology & Precipitation › Storm Data
  122. Storm Data Command
  123. Hydrology & Precipitation › Rainfall Lookup
  124. Lookup Rainfall Command (GeoSTORM)
  125. Hydrology & Precipitation › Time Patterns / Time Series
  126. Time Series Command
  127. Time Patterns Command
  128. Hydrology & Precipitation › Computations (Hydrology)
  129. Determining BDE Coefficients
  130. Infiltration & Soils › EPA SWMM Infiltration Methods
  131. EPA SWMM Infiltration Methods
  132. Subbasin Data - Selecting EPA SWMM Infiltration Method
  133. Infiltration & Soils › EPA SWMM Structure Losses
  134. EPA SWMM Structure Losses
  135. Flow Paths › Flow Path Drawing & Computation
  136. Draw and Assign Flow Paths Command (GeoSTORM)
  137. Computational Analysis › Analysis Specifications
  138. Analysis Specifications Command
  139. Reporting & Output › Excel Report
  140. Excel Report Command
  141. Reporting & Output › Profile Plots
  142. Profile Plot Command
  143. Exporting Profile Plot
  144. Reporting & Output › Underground Storage Chamber Report
  145. Generating Underground Storage Chamber Report
  146. Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools
  147. Copy & Paste Element Properties
  148. Reversing Project Elements
  149. Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources
  150. Contributing Streams Command

Draw and Assign LID Structures Command

In GeoSTORM, LID structures can be defined by either drawing or assigning polygons/polylines on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw LID Structures
  • Assign LID Structures

After adding LID structures to the stormwater project, the Subbasin LID Structures command can be used to define additional LID structure data. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Subbasin LID Structures command.

Drawing/Assigning LID Structures

The Draw/Assign LID Structures command allows the user to manually draw/assign single or multiple polygons on the Map View as LID structures.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign LID Structures command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and select the Draw/Assign LID Structures command.
    unknown node
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed.
    • Draw LID Structures:
      unknown node
    • Assign LID Structures:
      unknown node

The following sections describe the Draw LID Structures and Assign LID Structures commands and how to interact with the above dialog boxes.

Drawing LID Structure Polygons

The Draw LID Structure Polygons section allows the user to draw single or multiple polygons on the Map View as LID structures.

To draw LID structure polygons, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. Use the Draw curvilinear polygon checkbox option to draw the polygon using curvilinear segments.
    unknown node
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw LID structure polygons on the Map View. Click on the Map View to draw the LID structure polygons.

Note: From the LID Structure Specifications section, if:

    • LID structure ID option is selected, then the user can draw only one polygon on the Map View.
    • Auto-name LID structure ID option is selected, then the user can draw multiple polygons on the Map View, one after another, until completed.
  1. After drawing LID structure polygons, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  2. The Draw LID Structures dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the LID structure polygons read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    unknown node

Assigning LID Structure Polygons/Polylines

The Select LID Structure Polygons/Polylines section can be used to assign previously drawn polygons/polylines on the Map View as LID structures. Note that the polylines must be selected in such a way that a closed polygon is created.

To assign LID structure polygons, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    unknown node
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to select previously drawn polygons/polylines from the Map View to assign them as LID structures. Click on polygons/polylines to select them.

Note: From the LID Structure Specifications section, if:

    • LID structure ID option is selected, then the user can select only one polygon on the Map View.
    • Auto-name LID structure ID option is selected, then the user can select multiple polygons on the Map View one after another until completed.
  1. After selecting polygons/polylines, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  2. The Assign LID Structures dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the LID structure polygons/polylines read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    unknown node
  3. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

LID Structure Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw LID Structures and Assign LID Structures dialog boxes and allows the user to specify the LID structure ID for each drawn/assigned LID structure. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to define naming specifications for LID structures:

  1. If a LID structure was drawn while the LID structure ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the LID structure ID in the corresponding field, as shown below.
    unknown node
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name LID structure ID radio button option in order to automatically name every newly drawn LID structure as per the user’s predefined naming formats, as shown below.
    unknown node

The different LID structure naming formats present in the Auto-name LID structure ID radio button option are as follows:

    • LID structure ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the LID structure ID.
    • LID structure ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the LID structure ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the LID structure ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on, as new LID structures are created.
    • Next available LID structure ID: This option defines the next LID structure ID number to be used.
    • LID structure ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering LID structures. The default value is 1.
    • LID structure ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the LID structure ID.
    • LID structure ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the LID structure naming specifications defined above.

Other Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw LID Structures and Assign LID Structures dialog boxes and contains a LID structure type dropdown combo box.

Draw and Assign LID Structures Command Img 10

The LID structure type dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of LID structure for each drawn/assigned LID structure. The following LID structure types are available in the dropdown combo box:

  • Bioretention Cell
  • Bioswale
  • Green Roof
  • Infiltration Trench
  • Permeable Pavement
  • Rain Barrel
  • Rain Garden
  • Rooftop Capture

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete drawing/assigning LID structures. Note that if LID structures are drawn/assigned using the Auto-name LID structure ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed as disabled since the just drawn/assigned LID structures have already been named and created.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM)

The Extract Cross Section Geometry command allows the user to extract the cross section geometry from an underlying elevation grid where valid elevation data are present. The software will automatically recognize the limits of the elevation data and extract the cross section geometry for that data. It will not try to extract cross section geometry data where valid elevation data are not present.

For example, the underlying elevation grid might be of the river channel only. Previously, extracting the cross section geometry for this area required that the user define the channel bank stations at the limits of the elevation data and then extract the cross section geometry only for the cross section channel. If the user tried to extract the cross section geometry for the overbank areas, the overbank geometry would be flat.

Follow the steps below to use the Extract Cross Section Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Extract Cross Section Geometry command.
    unknown node
  2. The Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node

The following sections describe how to use the Extract Cross Section Geometry command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Sections

The Select Cross Sections section is used to manually select single or multiple cross section(s) to extract geometry. This section includes a table listing all cross section(s) in the current scenario of the project, as shown below.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) 3

The user can select the cross section(s) using any of the following methods for extracting geometry:

  • Check the checkboxes corresponding to each cross section in the Select Cross Sections section.
  • Click the [Pick] button, the Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the cross section(s) from the Map View. Either select cross sections one by one or click on the reach and all associated cross sections will be selected from the Map View. After selecting the cross section(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box will be redisplayed.
  • Alternatively, press and hold down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the cross section(s) directly from the Map View. When finished, open the Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box, and the selected cross section(s) will be shown as selected/checked within the Select Cross Sections section.

After selecting the cross section(s), the total number of selected cross section(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 4

Other Specifications

The Other Specifications section is used to define additional specifications for extracting cross section geometry, including elevation data sources, extraction limits, roughness values, and bank station assignments. The following panels are available in this section:

  • Extraction Data
  • Other Data
  • Roughness

Extraction Data

The Extraction Data panel is used to define the data extraction specifications for the selected cross sections.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) 5

Extracting Elevation Data

The Extract Elevation Data subsection is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending on the terrain elevation source selected, the content of this subsection changes to specify additional elevation data information. Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for extracting cross sections.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 6

The following options are available in the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN Surface
CAD Drawing

If the user selects CAD Drawing as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 7

The following options are displayed when CAD Drawing is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • CAD drawing layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the CAD drawing layer available in the project.
  • Drawing layers: Clicking the [Define] button adjacent to the Drawing layers entry displays the CAD Drawing Layers dialog box, allowing the user to define the properties of the drawing layers, as shown below.
    unknown node
Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 9

The following option is displayed when the Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.
GIS Contours

If the user selects GIS Contours as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 10

The following options are displayed when GIS Contours is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • GIS polyline layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polyline layer type.
  • Elevation attribute: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute type.
LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 11

The following options are displayed when the LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.
Terrain Surface

If the user selects Terrain Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 12

The following option is displayed when the Terrain Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Terrain surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the terrain surface layer type.
TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 13

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

The Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control subsection is used to control the amount of cross section geometry data to be extracted from the terrain model for the selected cross section polylines. These controls provide additional intelligence on whether to extend or limit the cross section cutting, based upon whether specific criteria have been met. This ensures that adequately deep cross sections are created on both sides of the river reach. The software will try to compute the cross section geometry data up to the specified depth and within the maximum cross section width defined in this subsection. Note that the checkbox at the Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control subsection should be checked to enable the content of this subsection. Otherwise, the content of this subsection is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 14

If the selected polylines do not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the cross sections further outward. Similarly, if the selected polylines extend too far outward for the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically trim the cross sections.

Cross Section Extraction Options

The Cross Section Extraction Options subsection is used to control which portions of the cross section(s) are to be extracted.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 15

For example, the user may have survey data for the cross section channel and a LIDAR digital terrain surface for the overbank areas. In this example, the user would only want to extract the cross section geometry for the overbank areas since the surveyed channel geometry is already accurate.

The Extract cross section geometry for dropdown combo box entry contains the following options:

  • Both Overbanks
  • Channel Only
  • Entire Cross Section (default)
  • Left Overbank Only
  • Right Overbank Only
    unknown node

The Retain existing cross section geometry checkbox option is used to retain the geometry of the cross sections that were extracted previously using the CAD file. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.

Other Data

The Other Data panel allows the user to assign bank stations for the cross sections using channel width, channel depth, or bank polylines/polygons. The checkbox at the Assign Bank Stations subsection should be checked to enable the content of this panel. Otherwise, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 17

Assign Bank Stations

The Assign Bank Stations subsection is used to extract channel bank locations based on the selected option.

The following options are available in this subsection:

  • Define by channel width
    This radio button option is used to assign the bank stations using a defined channel width. The software first identifies the thalweg location on the cross section, then extends outward from the thalweg symmetrically until the required channel width is achieved. Clicking the […] button allows the user to measure the channel width from the Map View.
  • Define by channel depth
    This radio button option is used to assign the bank stations using an assumed normal flow depth and a maximum channel width search distance. The software first identifies the thalweg location on the cross section, then extends outward from the thalweg until the required channel depth is reached while staying within the specified maximum channel width. Clicking the […] button allows the user to measure the maximum channel width from the Map View.
  • Define by bank polylines/polygons
    This radio button option is used to assign the bank stations using selected polylines or polygons. Using the corresponding [Pick] buttons, the user can interactively select individual polylines or polygons on the Map View to be associated as bank stations. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process. The software first identifies the thalweg location on the cross section, then extends outward from the thalweg until it reaches a previously selected bank polyline or polygon edge.

Assigning Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the extraction of the cross section geometry, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. However, the user can adjust these Manning’s roughness values in the Roughness panel, as shown below.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 18

Note that, while defining the Manning’s n values, the user can click the […] lookup buttons adjacent to these Manning’s roughness entry fields to display the Manning’s Roughness dialog box. This dialog box provides a reference to Manning’s roughness coefficients for some commonly used surface materials.

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM) Img 19

Extracting Cross Section Geometry

When all the options have been defined in the Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box, click the [OK] button. The software will then extract the cross section geometry from the elevation terrain.

Subbasin LID Structures Command

Low Impact Development (LID) is a modern stormwater management approach that supports natural hydrologic processes rather than disrupting them. Instead of routing runoff quickly into pipes and channels, LID structures slow, spread, infiltrate, and reuse stormwater close to where it falls. This allows developed sites to more closely resemble pre-development conditions, helping reduce downstream flood peaks, improve water quality, and recharge groundwater.

The Subbasin LID Structures command allows the user to create Low Impact Design (LID) structures within the defined subbasins.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Subbasin LID Structures command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and select the Subbasin LID Structures command.
    unknown node
  2. The Subbasin LID Structures dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    unknown node

The following sections describe how to use the Subbasin LID Structures command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting LID Structure

The Select LID Structure section allows the user to select the LID structure for which LID structure data will be defined. In this section, the user can create, delete, copy existing LID structure data to a new LID structure, and select the type of LID structure. In addition, the user can navigate between LID structures and view a description for each LID structure type.
unknown node

The following entries are available in this section:

  • LID structure ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the LID structures defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., pencil icon) to edit the LID structure name. The user can navigate between the previous and next LID structure using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains a single LID structure.
  • LID structure type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of LID structure to be defined. The following LID structure types are available:
    • Bioretention Cell
    • Bioswale
    • Green Roof
    • Infiltration Trench
    • Permeable Pavement
    • Rain Barrel
    • Rain Garden
    • Rooftop Capture
  • Description
    This field shows additional information that describes the selected LID structure type.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new LID structure on the Map View. The ID of every newly created LID structure must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy an existing LID structure along with its associated data to a new LID structure. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied LID structure.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected LID structure from the current scenario.
  • LID element picture
    The image available to view in this section displays the preview of the selected LID element. Clicking the LID element image displays a dialog box with a detailed view of the selected LID element type.
    unknown node

LID Structure Specifications

The dropdown combo box at the LID Structure Specifications section header contains the following data panel entries, which allow the user to define LID structure data:

  • Layer Specifications
  • Discharge Specifications
Subbasin LID Structures Command Img 5

These data panel entries will be enabled or disabled depending on the selected type of LID structure. The following table shows which data panel entries are enabled or disabled for each LID structure type:

unknown node

unknown node

LID Drain System

The drain system in an LID unit is performance-based rather than design-based. Rather than specifying physical pipe dimensions, the user controls how the drain behaves by specifying its height above the bottom of the storage layer and how the drain flow rate (per unit area) changes based on the height of saturated media above it.

When defining the parameters of an LID drain system, consider the following guidelines:

  • If the storage layer has an impermeable bottom, place the drain at the bottom with zero offset. If the goal is to allow the storage volume to fill completely before drainage begins, place the drain at the top of the storage layer.
  • If the storage layer does not contain a drain, set the drain coefficient to 0.
  • If the drain can handle all inflow into the storage layer up to a specific maximum limit, set the drain coefficient equal to that flow limit and set the drain exponent to 0.
  • If the drain consists of slotted pipes (where slots function like orifices), set the drain exponent to 0.5. The drain coefficient can then be estimated as:
    Drain Coefficient = 60,000 × (Total Slot Area ÷ LID Area).
    For example, drain pipes with five 1/4 inch diameter holes per foot spaced 50 feet apart produce an area ratio of 0.000035, which results in a drain coefficient of approximately 2.
  • If the goal is to drain a fully saturated unit within a specified time, set the drain exponent to 0.5 (for orifice flow) and calculate the drain coefficient.
    Drain Coefficient = 2D1/2
    where:
    • D = Distance from the drain to the surface plus any berm height (in inches or mm)
    • o   T = Required drain time (hours)

For example, to drain a depth of 36 inches of water in 12 hours, the drain coefficient would be 1. If this drain uses the slotted pipes described in the previous example (with a coefficient = 2), then a flow regulator (such as a capped orifice) must be placed at the discharge outlet to achieve the reduced flow rate.

unknown node

The following sections describe each type of LID structure and how to define its associated data.

Bioretention Cell

A bioretention cell is an LID structure that consists of a depression filled with vegetation and engineered soil above a gravel drainage bed, designed to store, infiltrate, and evaporate rainwater and runoff. Bioretention cells are among the most versatile LID controls available, performing well in a wide range of climates and site conditions.
unknown node

Layer Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the layer specifications of the Bioretention Cell LID structure.

Surface Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the surface properties of the LID structure. The following entries are available in this section:

  • Berm height
    This entry field defines the maximum depth to which water can pond above the surface of the LID structure before overflow occurs. Clicking the [...] button displays the Berm Height lookup dialog box, showing depression storage values based upon land surface type.
    unknown node
  • Vegetative volume fraction
    This spin control entry field represents the fraction of the volume within the storage depth that is filled with vegetation. This is the volume occupied by stems and leaves, not their surface area coverage. Normally, this volume can be ignored, but it may be as high as 20% for very dense vegetative growth. By default, the software uses a value of 5. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.
  • Manning’s overland flow roughness
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness coefficient for bioretention cell overland flow. Clicking the […] button displays the Overland Flow Roughness lookup dialog box, showing Manning’s roughness values for overland flow.
    unknown node
  • Surface slope (H:V)
    This entry field defines the slope of the surface layer of the bioretention cell.
Soil Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the soil properties of the LID structure. The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Soil layer thickness
    This entry field defines the thickness of the soil layer.
  • Soil porosity
    This entry field represents the volume of pore space relative to the total soil volume. Clicking the […] button displays the Soil Porosity lookup dialog box, showing soil porosity values for typical soils.
    unknown node
  • Field capacity
    This entry field represents the volume of pore water relative to the total soil volume after the soil has been allowed to fully drain. Below this level, vertical drainage of water through the soil layer does not occur. Clicking the […] button displays the Field Capacity lookup dialog box, showing field capacity values for typical soils.
    unknown node
  • Wilting point
    This entry field represents the volume of pore water relative to the total volume of well-dried soil, where only bound water remains. The soil moisture content cannot fall below this limit. Clicking the […] button displays the Wilting Point lookup dialog box, showing wilting point values for typical soils.
    unknown node
  • Hydraulic conductivity
    This entry field represents the hydraulic conductivity for fully saturated soil. Clicking the […] button displays the Hydraulic Conductivity lookup dialog box, showing hydraulic conductivity values for typical soils.
    unknown node
  • Conductivity slope
    This entry field represents the average slope of the curve of log (hydraulic conductivity) versus soil moisture deficit (i.e., porosity minus moisture content).
  • Suction head
    This entry field represents the average soil capillary suction along the wetting front. Clicking the […] button displays the Suction Head lookup dialog box, showing suction head values for typical soils.
    unknown node
Storage Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the storage properties of the crushed stone or gravel layer used in bioretention cells. The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Storage layer thickness
    This entry field defines the thickness of the bottom gravel layer. Crushed stone and gravel layers are typically 6 to 18 inches (15 to 45 cm) thick.
  • Void ratio
    This spin control entry field represents the volume of void space relative to the volume of solids in the layer. By default, the software uses a value of 40. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 1 to 100.
  • Seepage rate
    This entry field represents the rate at which water seeps into the native soil below the layer. Clicking the […] button displays the Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity lookup dialog box, showing saturated hydraulic conductivity values for typical soils.
    unknown node
  • Clogging factor
    This checkbox entry field represents the total volume of runoff processed by the LID structure to completely clog the storage layer, divided by the void volume of the layer. The user can use a value of 0 to ignore clogging. Clogging progressively reduces the infiltration rate in direct proportion to the cumulative volume of runoff processed by the LID structure and may only be of concern for infiltration trenches with permeable bottoms and no underdrains. By default, this checkbox is unchecked, and the entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Discharge Specifications

This optional panel allows the user to define discharge specifications of the Bioretention Cell LID structure.
unknown node

Storage Layer Discharge Specifications

This section is used in a situation where the bioretention cell does not directly discharge any of the stored rainwater. By default, the checkbox at the section header is unchecked, and the contents are disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the checkbox to enable the contents of this section.

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Discharge flow coefficient
    This entry field defines the discharge flow coefficient “C.” This coefficient value is applied to the following equation that computes the flow rate (per LID unit area) through an outlet as a function of the height of stored water above the discharge outlet’s offset. The user can use a discharge flow coefficient of 0 if the layer has no drain.
    Q = C x he
    Where:
    Q = Outflow per unit area
    C = Coefficient, dependent upon unit system and assigned exponent
    h = Height of saturated media above the discharge outlet
    e = Exponent, typically 0.5 to act as an orifice
  • Discharge flow exponent
    This entry field defines the discharge flow exponent “e.” This exponent value is applied to the previous entry’s equation that computes the flow rate (per LID unit area).
  • Discharge outlet height
    This entry field represents the height of the outlet above the bottom of the bioretention cell.
  • Open discharge outlet at height
    This checkbox entry field defines the height of stormwater contained in the bioretention cell’s storage layer at which the discharge outlet automatically opens when the water level rises above it. By default, this checkbox is unchecked, and the entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Close Discharge outlet at height
    This entry field defines the height of the stormwater in the bioretention cell’s storage layer at which the discharge outlet automatically closes when the water level falls below it. Note that this entry field is only enabled when the Open discharge outlet at height checkbox is checked.
Storage Layer Discharge Adjustment

This section allows the user to define the control curve that adjusts the computed outflow based on the water head above the discharge outlet. By default, the checkbox at the section header is unchecked, and the contents are disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the checkbox to enable the contents of this section.

This section contains a table with Water Head Above Outlet and Adjustment Factor columns. The Water Head Above Outlet column specifies the water head above the discharge outlet. The Adjustment Factor column specifies the adjustment factor applied to the computed outflow. Once the control curve data is entered, the corresponding graphical plot is displayed next to this table.

Bioswale

A bioswale is an LID structure consisting of a shallow channel or depression with sloped, vegetated sides. It is designed to slow runoff and promote infiltration into the native soil. Bioswales are commonly used along roadways and parking lots to intercept sheet flow before it reaches storm drains.
unknown node

Layer Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the layer specifications of the Bioswale LID structure.

Surface Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the surface properties of the LID structure. The following entries are available in this section:

  • Bioswale cross section depth
    This entry field defines the maximum depth to which water will start to overflow the bioswale cross section.
  • Vegetative volume fraction
    This spin control entry field represents the fraction of the volume within the storage depth that is filled with vegetation. This is the volume occupied by stems and leaves, not their surface area coverage. Normally, this volume can be ignored, but it may be as high as 10 to 20% for very dense vegetative growth. By default, the software uses a value of 5. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.
  • Manning’s overland flow roughness
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness coefficient for bioswale overland flow. Clicking the […] button displays the Overland Flow Roughness lookup dialog box, showing Manning’s roughness values for overland flow.
    unknown node
  • Bioswale longitudinal slope (H:V)
    This entry field defines the longitudinal slope (in the implied flow direction) of the bioswale.
  • Bioswale cross section side slope (H:V)
    This entry field defines the slope of the bioswale cross section side walls.

Green Roof

A green roof is an LID structure that is a variation of bioretention cells, featuring a soil layer on a drainage mat to manage excess rainfall from rooftops. Green roofs reduce the volume and peak rate of rooftop runoff, improve building insulation, and reduce the urban heat island effect.
unknown node

Layer Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the layer specifications of the Green Roof LID structure.

Surface Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the surface properties of the LID structure. The following entries are available in this section:

  • Berm height
    This entry field defines the maximum depth to which water can pond above the surface of the LID structure before overflow occurs. Clicking the [...] button displays the Berm Height lookup dialog box, showing depression storage values based upon land surface type.
    unknown node
  • Vegetative volume fraction
    This spin control entry field represents the fraction of the volume within the storage depth that is filled with vegetation. This is the volume occupied by stems and leaves, not their surface area coverage. Normally, this volume can be ignored, but it may be as high as 20% for very dense vegetative growth. By default, the software uses a value of 5. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.
  • Manning’s overland flow roughness
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness coefficient for green roof overland flow. Clicking the […] button displays the Overland Flow Roughness lookup dialog box, showing Manning’s roughness values for overland flow.
    unknown node
  • Surface slope (H:V)
    This entry field defines the slope of the surface layer of the green roof.
Soil Layer Definition

This section is similar to the Soil Layer Definition section explained above for the Bioretention Cell LID structure type.

Drainage Mat Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the drainage mat layer properties of the LID structure. The following entries are available in this section:

  • Drainage mat layer thickness
    This entry field defines the thickness of the bottom drainage mat. Drainage mat layers are typically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5 cm) thick.
  • Void fraction
    This spin control entry field represents the volume of void space relative to the volume of solids in the mat layer. By default, the software uses a value of 50. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 1 to 100.
  • Drainage mat Manning’s roughness
    This entry field defines Manning's roughness coefficient used to compute the horizontal flow rate of drained water through the mat. Clicking the […] button displays the Overland Flow Roughness lookup dialog box, showing Manning’s roughness values for overland flow.
    unknown node

Infiltration Trench

An infiltration trench is an LID structure consisting of a narrow gravel-filled ditch that captures runoff from impermeable surfaces, allowing it to be stored and infiltrated into the native soil. Infiltration trenches are particularly effective in areas with well-draining soils and where horizontal space for LID controls is limited.
unknown node

Layer Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the layer specifications of the Infiltration Trench LID structure.

Surface Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the surface properties of the LID structure. The following entries are available in this section:

  • Berm height
    This entry field defines the maximum depth to which water can pond above the surface of the LID structure before overflow occurs. Clicking the [...] button displays the Berm Height lookup dialog box, showing depression storage values based upon land surface type.
    unknown node
  • Vegetative volume fraction
    This spin control entry field represents the proportion of volume within the storage depth that is filled with vegetation. This is the volume occupied by stems and leaves, not their surface area coverage. Normally, this volume can be ignored, but it may be as high as 10 to 20% for very dense vegetative growth. By default, the software uses a value of 0. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.
  • Manning’s overland flow roughness
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness coefficient for infiltration trench overland flow. Clicking the […] button displays the Overland Flow Roughness lookup dialog box, showing Manning’s roughness values for overland flow.
    unknown node
  • Surface slope (H:V)
    This entry field represents the slope of the infiltration trench.
Storage Layer Definition

This section is similar to the Storage Layer Definition section explained above for the Bioretention Cell LID structure type.

Discharge Specifications

This panel is similar to the Discharge Specifications panel explained above for the Bioretention Cell LID structure type.
unknown node

Permeable Pavement

Permeable pavement is an LID structure that consists of an excavated area filled with gravel and topped with porous concrete or asphalt to facilitate water drainage. Permeable pavement allows stormwater to pass through the surface into the underlying layers where it is stored and gradually infiltrated into the native soil, reducing surface runoff volumes and peak flows.
unknown node

Layer Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the layer specifications of the Permeable Pavement LID structure.

Surface Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the surface properties of the LID structure. The following entries are available in this section:

  • Berm height
    This entry field defines the maximum depth to which water can pond above the surface of the LID structure before overflow occurs. Clicking the [...] button displays the Berm Height lookup dialog box, showing depression storage values based upon land surface type.
    unknown node
  • Vegetative volume fraction
    This spin control entry field represents the proportion of volume within the storage depth that is filled with vegetation. This is the volume occupied by stems and leaves, not their surface area coverage. Normally, this volume can be ignored, but it may be as high as 10 to 20% for very dense vegetative growth. By default, the software uses a value of 0. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.
  • Manning’s overland flow roughness
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness coefficient for permeable pavement overland flow. Clicking the […] button displays the Overland Flow Roughness lookup dialog box, showing Manning’s roughness values for overland flow.
    unknown node
  • Surface slope (H:V)
    This entry field defines the slope of the surface layer of the permeable pavement.
Pavement Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the pavement properties of the LID structure. The following entries are available in this section:

  • Pavement layer thickness
    This entry field defines the thickness of the pavement layer.
  • Void ratio
    This spin control entry field represents the volume of void space relative to the volume of solids in the pavement in the case of continuous systems or the fill material in the context of modular systems. By default, the software uses a value of 15. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 1 to 100.
  • Impervious surface fraction
    This spin control entry field represents the ratio of impervious paver material to the total area for modular systems. A zero value should be defined for continuous porous pavement systems. By default, the software uses a value of 0. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.
  • Permeability
    This entry field represents the permeability of the concrete or asphalt used in continuous systems or the hydraulic conductivity of the fill material (i.e., gravel or sand) used in modular systems. For fill material, the nominal conductivity should be multiplied by the fraction of the total area it covers. The permeability of new porous concrete or asphalt is extremely high (i.e., 700 to 5,700 inches/hr, 1,800 to 14,400 cm/hr) but can drop off over time due to clogging by fine particulates in the runoff.
    This entry field defines the number of pavement layer void volumes of runoff treated that it takes to completely clog the pavement. A value of 0 can be used to ignore clogging. Clogging progressively reduces the pavement's permeability in direct proportion to the cumulative volume of runoff treated.
  • Regeneration interval
    This entry field defines the number of days that the pavement layer is allowed to clog before its permeability is restored, typically by vacuuming its surface. By default, the software uses a value of 0 that indicates no permeability regeneration occurs.
  • Regeneration fraction
    This spin control entry field defines the fractional degree to which the pavement's permeability is restored when a regeneration interval is reached. A value of 0 indicates no restoration, while a value of 100 indicates complete restoration to the original permeability value. Once regeneration occurs, the pavement begins to clog once again at a rate determined by the clogging factor. By default, the software uses a value of 80. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.
Pavement Bedding Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the permeable pavement bedding properties for the LID structure. If the pavement bedding layer does not need to be defined, then uncheck the header checkbox. By default, the checkbox at the section header is checked. If unchecked, the contents of this section are disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Note that this section is similar to the Soil Layer Definition section explained above for the Bioretention Cell LID structure type, except for the additional Pavement bedding layer thickness entry field. The Pavement bedding layer thickness entry field defines the thickness of the pavement bedding layer.

Storage Layer Definition

This section is similar to the Storage Layer Definition section explained above for the Bioretention Cell LID structure type.

Discharge Specifications

This panel is similar to the Discharge Specifications panel explained above for the Bioretention Cell LID structure type.

Rain Barrel

A rain barrel is an LID structure that consists of a container used to collect roof runoff during storms, allowing for the storage and reuse of rainwater during dry periods. Rain barrels provide a simple, cost-effective way to reduce stormwater runoff volumes and conserve water for irrigation.
unknown node

Layer Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the layer specifications of the Rain Barrel LID structure.

Rain Barrel Definition

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Rain barrel height
    This entry field defines the maximum depth of the rain barrel structure before overflow occurs.
  • Covered rain barrel
    This checkbox option allows the user to define whether the rain barrel is covered or not. A covered rain barrel receives no direct rainfall. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.

Discharge Specifications

This panel is similar to the Discharge Specifications panel explained above for the Bioretention Cell LID structure type, except for the additional Rain barrel discharge delay checkbox entry field. The Rain barrel discharge delay checkbox entry field defines the number of dry-weather hours that must lapse before the discharge outlet in a rain barrel is opened. By default, this checkbox is unchecked, meaning the discharge outlet remains open and drains continuously. When checked, the outlet is assumed to close once rainfall begins and will reopen only after the specified delay period has passed.
unknown node

Rain Garden

A rain garden is an LID structure that is a type of bioretention cell with an engineered soil layer but without a gravel bed, designed to manage stormwater through infiltration and evapotranspiration. Rain gardens are shallow, planted depressions that collect and absorb runoff from impervious surfaces such as roofs, driveways, and walkways.
unknown node

Layer Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the layer specifications of the Rain Garden LID structure.

Surface Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the surface properties of the LID structure. The following entries are available in this section:

  • Berm height
    This entry field defines the maximum depth to which water can pond above the surface of the LID structure before overflow occurs. Clicking the [...] button displays the Berm Height lookup dialog box, showing depression storage values based upon land surface type.
    unknown node
  • Vegetative volume fraction
    This spin control entry field represents the proportion of volume within the storage depth that is filled with vegetation. This is the volume occupied by stems and leaves, not their surface area coverage. Normally, this volume can be ignored, but it may be as high as 20% for very dense vegetative growth. By default, the software uses a value of 5. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 1 to 100.
  • Manning’s overland flow roughness
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness coefficient for rain garden overland flow. Clicking the […] button displays the Overland Flow Roughness lookup dialog box, showing Manning’s roughness values for overland flow.
  • Surface slope (H:V)
    This entry field defines the slope of the surface layer of the rain garden.
Soil Layer Definition

This section is similar to the Soil Layer Definition section explained above for the Bioretention Cell LID structure type.

Storage Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the storage properties of the crushed stone or gravel layer used in rain gardens. The following parameter is provided in this section:

  • Seepage rate
    This entry field represents the rate at which water seeps into the native soil below the layer. Clicking the […] lookup button displays a Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity dialog box, showing saturated hydraulic conductivity values for typical soils.
    unknown node

Rooftop Capture

A rooftop capture is an LID structure that directs downspouts to permeable areas and lawns rather than storm drains. It can also simulate roofs that overflow onto these surfaces. Rooftop capture controls are particularly useful for modeling disconnected impervious areas and green infrastructure strategies that leverage existing rooftop drainage systems.
unknown node

Layer Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the layer specifications of the Rooftop Capture LID structure.

Surface Layer Definition

This section allows the user to define the surface properties of the LID structure. The following entries are available in this section:

  • Rooftop depression storage depth
    This entry field defines the maximum depth to which water can pond above the surface of the LID structure before overflow occurs. Clicking the [...] button displays the Rooftop Depression Storage Depth lookup dialog box, showing depression storage values based upon land surface type.
    unknown node
  • Manning’s overland flow roughness
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness coefficient for rooftop runoff. Clicking the […] button displays the Overland Flow Roughness lookup dialog box, showing Manning’s roughness values for overland flow.
    unknown node
  • Rooftop surface slope (H:V)
    This entry field defines the slope of the surface layer of the rooftop capture.

Discharge Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the discharge specifications of the LID structure.
unknown node

Rooftop Capture Discharge Specifications

This section allows the user to define the rooftop capture discharge specifications of the LID structure. The following parameter is provided in this section.

  • Rain gutter maximum flow rate
    This checkbox entry field defines the maximum flow rate that the roof’s drainage system (i.e., gutters, downspouts, etc.) can manage before overflowing. By default, this checkbox entry field is checked. If unchecked, no maximum flow rate is applied, meaning the LID structure can manage any flow rate.

Compute Slopes Command

Computing subbasin slopes is a critical aspect of hydrologic modeling and watershed analysis. Some of the runoff methods being used in the stormwater project utilize the computed subbasin slope.

This article describes the computational method used to compute the subbasin slope and how the Compute Slopes command works in the CivilGEO software.

unknown node

Subbasin Slope Computational Method

When calculating the slope for subbasins, the software uses an elevation grid, or Digital Elevation Model (DEM), and applies an algorithm that divides the subbasin area into smaller grid cells. The slope of each grid cell is then calculated based on the rate of change in both the horizontal and vertical directions from the center of the neighboring grid cells.

The illustration below demonstrates how the algorithm computes the slope of a subbasin on a cell-by-cell basis, analyzing the cells from left to right and top to bottom.

Compute Slopes Command Algorithm
  • The algorithm of the software does not store the slope for every grid cell. Instead, a slope accumulator keeps track of the total slope, and a cell count accumulator counts how many cells have had their slope calculated.
  • The slope is only calculated in four directions (shown as blue lines in the illustration). The other four directions (grey lines) do not need to be calculated again because they were already processed in the previous row of cells.
  • Only the cells within the subbasin boundary are considered. Cells outside the boundary are skipped.
  • For each cell, the slope is calculated in all four directions, and the absolute value of each slope is determined. The slope can represent either an upward or downward gradient, but by taking the absolute value, the algorithm is only concerned with the steepness or rate of change, not the direction (up or down). For example, a slope of -5 (downward) and a slope of +5 (upward) both have an absolute value of 5, focusing purely on the steepness.
  • The direction with the steepest slope is assigned to the cell whose slope is being computed. This maximum slope value is added to the slope accumulator, and the cell count accumulator is increased by one.
  • The above algorithm is repeated for every cell in the subbasin.

For the above illustration, the following equations are used to compute the cell slopes:

Equations for Compute Slopes Command

Where, abs = Absolute slope value

Note: The subbasin slope is equal to the slope accumulator divided by the cell count accumulator.

Compute Slopes Command

Follow these steps to use the Compute Slopes command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Compute Slopes command.
    Compute Slopes Command
  2. The Compute Slopes dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute Slopes Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Compute Slopes command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select Subbasins section includes a table that lists all the subbasins contained within the current scenario.

This section is used to manually select subbasins from the Map View. If a subbasin is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same subbasin will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively select subbasins from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select subbasins from the Map View. Upon returning to the Compute Slopes dialog box, the total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected entry.

Selecting Terrain Surface

The Terrain surface dropdown combo box lists all the elevation grids (i.e., DEMs) loaded in the project. Select the elevation grid to be used in computing the subbasin slope.

Computing Subbasin Slopes

Once the data have been defined in the Compute Slopes dialog box, click the [Compute] button. The software will then look at each subbasin selected and compute the average overland flow slope for each subbasin.

After the slopes are computed, the values will be shown in the Computed Slope (ft/ft) editable column, as shown below. The software also allows the user to modify these computed values.

Computing Subbasin Slopes

Once the slope is computed, all stormwater runoff methods that require a subbasin slope will have the data populated into the appropriate fields.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › GeoSTORM Overview

Stormwater Hydrology Methods

Hydrology methods are used to estimate runoff volumes, peak flow rates, and the manner by which rainfall interacts with land surfaces. These methods help engineers design effective drainage and flood control systems, and stormwater infrastructure.

GeoSTORM includes several methods for modeling physical runoff processes. The user can select the most suitable hydrology method based on data availability (e.g., Rainfall data, soil properties, land use/land cover data, etc.) and project requirements. Selecting the right hydrology method ensures accurate modeling, reduces flood risks, and supports sustainable stormwater management.

The following hydrology methods are supported:

  • DeKalb Rational
  • EPA SWMM
  • Modified Rational
  • Rational Method
  • SCS TR-20/TR-55

Follow the steps below to select a hydrology method in GeoSTORM:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Scenario Manager dropdown menu, and select the Scenario Manager command. Scenario Manager command
  2. The Scenario Manager dialog box will be displayed, as shown below. Scenario Manager dialog box
  3. From the Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box, select the hydrology method to use. Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Scenario Manager command.

The following sections describe each hydrology method available in GeoSTORM.

DeKalb Rational Method

The DeKalb Rational method was developed by DeKalb County Public Works Department located in Decatur, Georgia. This method computes runoff ordinates by scaling the peak discharge by a scale factor. One of the deficiencies of the Rational method is that it produces only a peak rate of runoff and not a complete flood hydrograph. The DeKalb County Dimensionless Hydrograph method was developed to generate a flood hydrograph based on the Rational Formula and the unit hydrograph theory. This hydrology method can be used with either the hydrodynamic or kinematic wave hydraulic routing methods for computing flows through a stormwater network.

The application of this method includes designing detention ponds and outlet drainage structures. This method assumes that the land uses in the subbasin are homogeneously distributed. If a large portion of a residential subbasin contains commercial, woodland, or other non-residential land use, the subbasin should be further subdivided into separate smaller homogeneous subbasins when using the hydrology method. This hydrology method can be used for calculating runoff hydrographs for subbasins of less than 10 acres.

Limitations

  • Limited to small subbasin areas (less than 10 acres).
  • Assumes uniform land use within the subbasin.
  • Not suitable for large or complex watersheds.

EPA SWMM Method

The EPA SWMM hydrology method is used to simulate how rainfall turns into surface and subsurface runoff for both single storm and long-term (continuous) events. It is primarily applied in urban and suburban areas and operates on a collection of subcatchments within a subbasin. These subcatchments receive precipitation and generate runoff after simulation of evaporation and infiltration losses from the subcatchments.

In EPA SWMM, each subcatchment is conceptualized as a nonlinear reservoir to simulate the rainfall-runoff process. Unlike traditional hydrology methods that rely on simplified empirical equations, EPA SWMM dynamically models runoff by continuously solving a water balance equation.

In the nonlinear reservoir model, inflow components include precipitation and any designated upstream subcatchments. Outflow components include infiltration, evaporation, and surface runoff. The reservoir capacity is defined by maximum depression storage, which represents the surface storage due to ponding, interception, and surface wetting. Surface runoff occurs when the water level in the reservoir exceeds the maximum depression storage, with the outflow calculated using Manning's equation. The depth of water over the subcatchment is continuously updated with time by solving numerically a water balance equation.

The image below illustrates how rainfall runoff is modeled using a nonlinear reservoir model.

Nonlinear reservoir model representation

The EPA SWMM method calculates the rainfall runoff value using the following equation:

EPA SWMM method calculation equation

Where:

𝑄 = Flow rate (cfs or m³/s)

𝑛 = Manning’s roughness coefficient

𝐴 = Flow area (ft² or m²)

𝑅 = Hydraulic radius (ft or m)

𝑆 = Slope of the subcatchment

Since the flow area and hydraulic radius depend on the evolving depth of water in the subcatchment, EPA SWMM solves this equation iteratively over time to update runoff conditions dynamically

Limitations

  • Requires accurate parameter estimation (e.g., roughness, depression storage).
  • Not optimized for real-time monitoring or operational control.

Rational Method

The Rational method is a simplified approach used to estimate peak flow rates for stormwater design when hydrograph information is not required. It is widely used in urban drainage design, particularly for sizing storm sewers. For example, this method is commonly used when designing catch basin inlets because it provides a peak flow value that helps determine captured flow, bypass flow, and gutter spread.

The Rational method estimates the peak flow rate using the following equation:

Q = CIA

Where:

Q = Peak flow rate (acre-inch/hr)

C = Dimensionless runoff coefficient used to adjust for the rainfall abstraction, where C has been adjusted with the storm frequency factor

I = Rainfall intensity for a duration equal to the time of concentration of the individual basin (inch/hr)

A = Basin area (acres or hectares)

Limitations

  • Limited to small drainage areas (not recommended for areas larger than 100 - 200 acres).
  • Not recommended for storage volume design, like detention pond sizing.
  • Less accurate for complex basins with varied land uses or topography changes.

Modified Rational Method

The Modified Rational method extends the Rational method by generating a runoff hydrograph, which provides flow variation over time instead of just a peak flow. It is commonly used for detention pond sizing.

This method first applies the following equation to estimate the peak flow rate:

Q = CIA

Then, the hydrograph is computed based on the following assumptions:

  • Time of Concentration (Tc) = Time to Peak (Tp) = Time to Recede (Tr)
  • The length of the Critical Duration Storm (De) is from 0 minutes until the time of selected duration.
  • The flow rate is 0 at time 0 minutes, which increases linearly with time until the peak flow rate is reached at time Tp.
  • The peak flow rate is maintained from time Tp until the duration of the Critical Duration Storm (De). The flow rate then decreases to 0 at time De plus Tr.
  • The peak flow rate is based on the average rainfall intensity (I) for the given storm duration.

Limitations

  • Same limitations as the Rational method, so it is not good for large or complex areas.
  • Assumes uniform rainfall intensity, which may not match real storm patterns.
  • Better suited for urban areas with well-defined drainage systems.

SCS TR-20/TR-55 Method

The Soil Conservation Service (SCS) TR-20 and TR-55 methods are widely used hydrologic models developed by the USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS, formerly SCS). These methods estimate stormwater runoff based on rainfall, land use, and watershed characteristics, making them essential for designing drainage systems, flood control structures, and stormwater management plans.

SCS TR-20

SCS TR-20 is a complex hydrologic model designed for the simulation of rainfall runoff occurring from a single storm event in watersheds of any size. It provides a detailed flood hydrograph from rainfall runoff and routes the flow through stream channels and reservoirs. Hydrographs, peak discharges, and peak elevations can be obtained at any cross section along the stream at the outlet of a structure. The application of this method includes designing detention ponds and reservoirs, floodplain analysis, FEMA flood mapping, etc.

SCS TR-55

SCS TR-55 is a simplified hydrologic model designed for estimating peak discharge and runoff volume in small watersheds (typically less than 25 square miles). The application of this method includes designing small urban and rural watersheds (≤10 mi² or 6,400 acres).

Limitations

  • Less accurate for small storm events.
  • Assumes uniform soil and land use, which may not reflect groundwater variations.
  • Uses predefined design storms that may not match actual rainfall events.
  • Not suitable for detailed urban drainage systems or engineered infrastructure.

Hydrology Method Comparisons

unknown node
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting

Import Stormwater Shapefile Geometry Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Import Stormwater Shapefile Geometry command is used to import GIS geometry data shapefiles to create a new stormwater project.

Follow the steps below to use the Import Stormwater Shapefile Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Import Data dropdown menu and select the Import Stormwater Shapefile Geometry command.
    Import Stormwater Shapefile Geometry command
  2. The Import Stormwater Shapefile Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Import Stormwater Shapefile Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Import Stormwater Shapefile Geometry command and interact with the above dialog box.

Subbasins

The Subbasins panel allows the user to import the subbasin geometry using the polygon shapefile, which can be used to define the subbasin elements. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the checkbox option at the Subbasins panel to enable the content of this panel.

Note that the subbasin shapefile should be loaded before using this panel. Otherwise, no geometry will be imported.

Subbasins panel

General Subbasin Shapefile Data

The following options are available in this section:

  • Polygon Shapefile: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the subbasin shapefile to be imported into the stormwater project. This dropdown combo box lists only polygon shapefiles.
  • Subbasin ID field: This naming option allows the user to define the subbasin ID using the subbasin attributes defined in the imported shapefile data. The adjacent dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain text.
  • Auto-name subbasin ID: This radio button option allows the user to automatically specify the ID for each subbasin. The user can assign these IDs using a predefined format or by manually defining the format of the ID.

The different subbasin naming formats present in the Auto-name subbasin ID option are as follows:

    1. Subbasin ID prefix: This checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the subbasin ID.
    2. Subbasin ID digits: This entry field allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for subbasin ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the subbasin ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
    3. Next available subbasin ID: This entry field defines the next subbasin ID number to be used.
    4. Subbasin ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering subbasins. The default value is 1.
    5. Subbasin ID suffix: This checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the subbasin ID.
    6. Subbasin ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the subbasin ID defined in this section.
  • Drainage area field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the subbasin area using the subbasin attributes defined in the shapefile data. The user can select the attribute field from the dropdown combo box provided next to this option. This dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain numeric values.
  • Compute drainage area from subbasin polygons (for missing data): This checkbox option causes the software to automatically compute the drainage area from the digitized polygon. This option allows the user to compute drainage area when data are missing or present an unreadable value. Note that this option is checked by default.

Other Subbasin Shapefile Data

This section allows the user to define various subbasin properties using the subbasin attributes defined in the imported shapefile data as:

  • Curve number
  • Impervious data
  • Lag time
  • Time of concentration, and
  • Overland flow slope

Subbasin Network Connectivity Options

The following options are available in this section:

  • Downstream connection element field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select downstream connection element attributes within the set snap distance that the selected subbasin drains to.
  • Auto-snap to downstream connection element (for missing data): While importing GIS data, if downstream connection data are missing or do not match other elements, the software will automatically search the nearest node for the digitized polygon. In this subsection, the Element connection snap distance entry field allows the user to define the search distance to snap the subbasin to an element.Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to measure the snap distance from the Map View. The auto-snap option can be utilized for the following project elements:
    1. Manhole and junctions
    2. Pipes and reaches
    3. Ponds and storage areas

Manholes

The Manholes panel allows the user to import the manhole geometry using the node shapefile, which can be used to define manhole elements. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the checkbox option at the Manholes panel to enable the content of this panel.

Note that the manhole shapefile should be loaded before using this panel. Otherwise, no geometry will be imported.

Manholes panel

General Manhole Shapefile Data

This section contains the following options:

  • Node shapefile: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the manhole shapefile to be imported into the stormwater project. This dropdown combo box lists only node shapefiles.
  • Manhole ID field: This naming option allows the user to define the manhole ID using the manhole attributes defined in the imported shapefile data. The adjacent dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain text.
  • Auto-name manhole ID: This radio button option allows the user to automatically specify the ID for each manhole. The user can assign these IDs using a predefined format or manually define the format of the ID. Note that this auto-name option is similar to the Auto-name subbasin ID option explained above for the Subbasins panel.

Assign Rim Elevation

This section contains the following options:

  • Rim elevation field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to assign the manhole rim elevation using the manhole attributes defined in the imported shapefile data. This dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain numeric values.
  • Compute rim elevation from terrain surface (for missing data): If the imported manhole rim elevation data contain missing or unreadable values, this section causes the software to automatically compute the rim elevation from the defined terrain surface. To assign rim elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:
    1. CAD Drawing
    2. Elevation Grid
    3. GIS Contours
    4. LandXML Data
    5. Terrain Surface
    6. TIN Surface

    Based on the selected terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Rim Elevation section will change accordingly.

Assign Invert Elevation

This section contains the following options:

  • Invert elevation field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to assign the manhole invert elevation using the manhole attributes defined in the imported shapefile data. The dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain numeric values.
  • Compute invert elevation from terrain surface (for missing data): If the imported invert elevation data for the manhole contain missing or unreadable values, this section causes the software to automatically compute the invert elevation from the defined terrain surface. To assign invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:
    1. CAD Drawing
    2. Elevation Grid
    3. GIS Contours
    4. LandXML Data
    5. Terrain Surface
    6. TIN Surface

    Based on the selected terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevation section will change accordingly.

  • Manhole depth field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define an invert depth by raising or lowering the invert of the manhole by the specified amount.
  • Default depth (for missing data): If during computation of the invert elevation data, the terrain surface data are missing or contain unreadable values for manhole depth, this entry causes the software to assume a manhole depth to compute the invert elevation from the defined terrain surface.
  • Manhole sump depth field: This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to define sump depth for the defined manholes.
  • Default sump depth (for missing data): If during computation of the invert elevation data, the terrain surface data are missing or contain unreadable values for manhole sump depth, this entry causes the software to automatically compute the invert elevation from the defined terrain surface.

Junctions

The Junctions panel allows the user to import the junction geometry using the node shapefile, which can be used to define junction elements. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the checkbox option at the Junctions panel to enable the content of this panel.

Note that the junction shapefile should be loaded before using this panel. Otherwise, no geometry will be imported.

Junctions panel

General Routing Junction Shapefile Data

This section contains the following options:

  • Node shapefile: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the junction shapefile to be imported into the stormwater project. This dropdown combo box lists only node shapefiles.
  • Routing junction ID field: This naming option allows the user to define the routing junction ID using the junction attributes defined in the imported shapefile data. The adjacent dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain text.
  • Auto-name routing junction ID: This radio button option allows the user to automatically specify the ID for each routing junction. The user can assign these IDs using a predefined format or manually define the format of the ID. Note that this auto-name option is similar to the Auto-name subbasin ID option explained above for the Subbasins panel.

Assign Routing Junction Elevation

This section contains the following options:

  • Routing junction elevation field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the junction elevation using the junction attributes defined in the imported shapefile data. This dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain numeric values.
  • Compute routing junction elevation from terrain surface (for missing data): If the imported junction elevation data contain missing or unreadable values, this section causes the software to automatically compute the routing junction elevation from the defined terrain surface. To assign routing junction elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:
    1. CAD Drawing
    2. Elevation Grid
    3. GIS Contours
    4. LandXML Data
    5. Terrain Surface
    6. TIN Surface

    Based on the selected terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Routing Junction Elevation section will change accordingly.

Storage Areas

The Storage Areas panel allows the user to import the storage area geometry using the polygon shapefile, which can be used to define the storage area elements. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the checkbox option at the Storage Areas panel to enable the content of this panel.

Note that the storage area shapefile should be loaded before using this panel. Otherwise, no geometry will be imported.

Storage Areas panel

General Storage Area Shapefile Data

This section contains the following options:

  • Polygon shapefile: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storage area shapefile to be imported into the stormwater project. This dropdown combo box lists only polygon shapefiles.
  • Storage Area ID field: This naming option allows the user to define the storage area ID using the storage area attributes defined in the imported shapefile data. The adjacent dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain text.
  • Auto-name storage area ID: This radio button option allows the user to automatically specify the ID for each storage area. The user can assign these IDs using a predefined format or manually define the format of the ID. Note that this auto-name option is similar to the Auto-name subbasin ID option explained above for the Subbasins panel.

Assign Invert Elevation

This section is similar to the Assign Invert Elevation section of the Manholes panel. Refer to this section of this article as explained above.

Storage Area Network Connectivity Options

This section is similar to the Subbasin Network Connectivity Options section of the Subbasins panel. Refer to this section of this article as explained above.

Pipes

The Pipes panel allows the user to import the pipe geometry using the polyline shapefile, which can be used to define the pipe elements. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the checkbox option at the Pipes panel to enable the content of this panel.

Note that the pipe shapefile should be loaded before using this panel. Otherwise, no geometry will be imported.

Pipes panel

General Pipe Shapefile Data

This section contains the following options:

  • Polyline shapefile: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the pipe shapefile to be imported into the stormwater project. This dropdown combo box lists only polyline shapefiles.
  • Pipe ID field: This naming option allows the user to define the pipe ID using the pipe attributes defined in the imported shapefile data. The adjacent dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain text.
  • Auto-name pipe ID: This radio button option allows the user to automatically specify the ID for each pipe. The user can assign these IDs using a predefined format or manually define the format of the ID. Note that this auto-name option is similar to the Auto-name subbasin ID option explained above for the Subbasins panel.

Other Pipe Shapefile Data

This section contains the following sections:

  • Pipe diameter field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the pipe diameter using the pipe attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Default diameter (for missing data): If during the importing of the pipe diameter data, the data are missing or contain unreadable values, this entry causes the software to assign a default diameter to the pipe.
  • Pipe Manning’s roughness field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define Manning’s roughness for the pipe using the pipe attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Default roughness (for missing data): If during the importing of the pipe roughness data, the data are missing or contain unreadable values, this entry causes the software to assign a default roughness for the pipe. Clicking the […] lookup button allows the user to view the reference Manning’s roughness values.
  • Upstream invert elevation field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define upstream invert elevation using the pipe attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Downstream invert elevation field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define downstream invert elevation using the pipe attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Default sump depth (for missing data): If during the importing of the pipe invert data, the data are missing or contain an unreadable value, this entry causes the software to automatically compute the pipe inverts using the defined sump depth and the connecting manhole invert elevations.
  • Pipe length field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define pipe length using the pipe attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Compute lengths for missing pipe length data: If there is missing or unreadable data while importing pipe length data, enabling this checkbox option will cause the software to automatically calculate the pipe length based on the digitized pipe polyline.

Pipe Network Connectivity Options

This section contains the following options:

  • Upstream connecting node ID field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the upstream connection node ID using the pipe attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Downstream connecting node ID field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the downstream connection node ID using the pipe attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Compute nearest node connection for missing pipe connectivity data: If during the importing of the connection element data, data are missing or do not correspond to any other element in the imported GIS data, this checkbox option causes the software to automatically determine the closest node for the digitized pipe end. This checkbox is checked by default.
  • Create manholes (if missing) at pipe ends: This checkbox option will create a manhole at the pipe end if there is no node already defined within the connection snap distance. The manhole rim elevation is set equal to the terrain surface elevation. The manhole invert elevation is set equal to the pipe invert elevation. This entry is checked by default.
  • Connection snap distance: This entry field defines the search distance to snap the pipe end to a node (i.e., manhole or junction) element or a storage area element. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to measure the snap distance from the Map View.
  • Correct pipe direction (flip end for end) to maintain downstream pipe slope: If after importing it is determined that the GIS definition of upstream and downstream pipe ends is backward (as the pipe should always slope downstream), this checkbox option causes the pipe ends to be flipped.
    Note that whenever this issue occurs, it is reported in the Shapefile Import Validation Report.

Reaches

The Reaches panel allows the user to import the routing reach geometry using the polyline shapefile, which can be used to define the routing reach elements. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the checkbox option at the Reaches panel to enable the content of this panel.

Note that the routing reach shapefile should be loaded before using this panel. Otherwise, no geometry will be imported.

Reaches panel

General Routing Reach Shapefile Data

This section contains the following options:

  • Polyline shapefile: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the routing reach shapefile to be imported into the stormwater project. This dropdown combo box lists only polyline shapefiles..
  • Routing Reach ID field: This naming option allows the user to define the routing reach ID using the routing reach attributes defined in the imported shapefile data. The adjacent dropdown combo box lists only those attributes that contain text.
  • Auto-name routing reach ID: This radio button option allows the user to automatically specify the ID for each routing reach. The user can assign these IDs using a predefined format or manually define the format of the ID. Note that this auto-name option is similar to the Auto-name subbasin ID option explained above for the Subbasins panel.

Other Routing Reach Shapefile Data

This section contains the following options:

  • Channel bottom width field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the channel bottom width of reach using the reach attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Default bottom width (for missing data): If during the importing of the channel bottom width data, data are missing or contain an unreadable value, this entry causes the software to automatically assign the channel bottom width using the defined value.
  • Channel height field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the channel height of reach using the reach attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Default channel height (for missing data): If during the importing of the channel height data, data are missing or contain an unreadable value, this entry causes the software to automatically assign the channel height using the defined value.
  • Channel side slope field (V:H): This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the channel side slope using the reach attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Default side slope (for missing data, V:H): If during the importing of the channel side slope data, data are missing or contain an unreadable value, this entry causes the software to automatically assign the channel side slope using the defined value.
  • Channel Manning’s roughness field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define Manning’s roughness for the reach using the reach attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Default roughness (for missing data): If during the importing of the reach roughness data, the data are missing or contain an unreadable value, this entry causes the software to assign a default roughness to the reach. Clicking the […] lookup button allows the user to view the reference Manning’s roughness values.
  • Reach length field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define reach length using the reach attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Compute lengths for missing reach length data: If there are missing or unreadable data while importing reach length data, enabling this checkbox option will cause the software to automatically calculate the length based on the digitized pipe polyline.

Assign Invert Elevation

This section contains the following options:

  • Upstream invert elevation field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the upstream invert elevation using the reach attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Downstream invert elevation field: This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the downstream invert elevation using the reach attributes defined in the imported shapefile data.
  • Compute invert elevation from terrain surface (for missing data): If the imported invert elevation data for the routing reach contain missing or unreadable values, this section causes the software to automatically compute the invert elevation from the defined terrain surface. To assign invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:
    1. CAD Drawing
    2. Elevation Grid
    3. GIS Contours
    4. LandXML Data
    5. Terrain Surface
    6. TIN Surface

    Based on the selected terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevation section will change accordingly.

Routing Reach Network Connectivity Options

This section is similar to the Pipe Network Connectivity Options section of the Pipes panel. Refer to this section of this article as explained above.

Importing GIS Geometry Data Shapefiles

When all the options have been properly defined, click the [Import] button to import GIS geometry data shapefiles for the stormwater project.

[Import] button

After importing the stormwater shapefile geometry, the extent of the project will be displayed on the Map View.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting

Exporting Your Project to LandXML

In GeoSTORM software, the Export Project to LandXML command allows the user to export subbasins (catchments), pipes, manholes, and other related data to a LandXML file. This exported data can then be used with other applications effortlessly.

Follow the steps below to use the Export Project to LandXML command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Export Data dropdown menu and select the Export Project to LandXML command.
    Exporting-Your-Project-to-LandXML-Image-1.png
  2. The Export Project to LandXML dialog box will be displayed.
    Exporting-Your-Project-to-LandXML-Image-2.png

The following sections describe how to use the Export Project to LandXML command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Data to Export

The Select Data to Export section allows the user to select the subbasins and the pipe network data to be exported. This section consists of two panels:

  • Subbasins
  • Pipe Network

Subbasins

In the Subbasins panel, the Select Subbasins to Export section contains a radio button group, which allows the user to select the subbasins to be exported.

The following radio button options are available:

  • No subbasins
    This radio button option allows the user to export the project without including any subbasins. By default, this radio button option is selected.
  • All subbasins
    This radio button option allows the user to export all subbasins contained within the current scenario of the project.
  • Select subbasins
    This radio button option allows the user to export specific subbasins. It includes a data grid that lists all subbasins contained within the current scenario of the project.
    Exporting-Your-Project-to-LandXML-Image-3.png
    The user can select subbasins using any of the following methods:

    1. By pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the subbasins directly from the Map View. After selecting subbasins, open the Export Project to LandXML dialog box, and the selected subbasins will be shown as selected/checked in the data grid under the Select subbasins option.
    2. By checking the checkboxes corresponding to each subbasin in the data grid under the Select subbasins option.
    3. By clicking the [Pick] button, the Export Project to LandXML dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the subbasins from the Map View. After selecting subbasins, pressing the [Enter] key or right-clicking and choosing Done from the displayed context menu redisplays the Export Project to LandXML dialog box.

    After selecting subbasins, the total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

    Exporting-Your-Project-to-LandXML-Image-4.png

Pipe Network

In the Pipe Network panel, the Select Pipes & Connected Manholes to Export section contains a radio button group, which allows the user to select the pipes to be exported. The manholes associated with the pipes also get exported.

Exporting-Your-Project-to-LandXML-Image-5.png

The following radio button options are available:

  • No pipes & manholes
    This radio button option allows the user to export the project without including pipes and associated manholes. By default, this radio button option is selected.
  • All pipes & connected manholes
    This radio button option allows the user to export all pipes along with their associated manholes contained within the current scenario of the project.
  • Select pipes & connected manholes
    This radio button option allows the user to export specific pipes along with their associated manholes. It includes a data grid that lists all pipes contained within the current scenario of the project.
    Exporting-Your-Project-to-LandXML-Image-6.png
    The user can select pipes using any of the following methods:

    1. By pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the pipes directly from the Map View. After selecting pipes, open the Export Project to LandXML dialog box, and the selected pipes will be shown as selected/checked in the data grid under the Select pipes & connected manholes option.
    2. By checking the checkboxes corresponding to each pipe in the data grid under the Select pipes & connected manholes option. Note: To select all pipes at once, check the checkbox at the Pipe ID column header.
    3. By clicking the [Pick] button, the Export Project to LandXML dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the pipes from the Map View. After selecting pipes, pressing the [Enter] key or right-clicking and choosing Done from the displayed context menu redisplays the Export Project to LandXML dialog box.

    After selecting pipes, the total number of selected pipes will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

    Exporting-Your-Project-to-LandXML-Image-7.png

Specify LandXML Export File

In the Specify LandXML Export File section, the user can specify the file path and name for the exported LandXML file by clicking the […] browse button next to the LandXML file field.

Exporting-Your-Project-to-LandXML-Image-8.png

Exporting the Project

After all the options have been defined, click the [Export] button and the software will export the project to a LandXML file at the specified location.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting

Exporting Your Project to EPA SWMM

In GeoSTORM software, users can export their stormwater project to EPA SWMM input data files using the Export Project to EPA SWMM command. This allows the exported stormwater project to be used with EPA SWMM software.

Follow the steps below to export a stormwater project to EPA SWMM input data files:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Export Project to EPA SWMM command from the Export Data dropdown combo box.
    Input ribbon menu
  2. The Export EPA SWMM Project dialog box will be displayed as shown below.
    Export Project to EPA SWMM dialog box
  3. From the Select EPA SWMM File Type to Export section, select one of the following radio button options:
    • EPA SWMM input data folder: Select this radio button option to export all input data files of the stormwater project into a specific folder. Click the [...] browse button to define the directory location and folder name. Note that this radio button option is selected by default.
    • EPA SWMM archive (ZIP) file: Select this radio button option to archive all input data files of the stormwater project into a single ZIP file. After selecting this radio button option, click the [...] browse button to define the directory location and ZIP file name.
  4. If the user selected the EPA SWMM archive (ZIP) file radio button option, the Include output results checkbox option will be enabled. Select this checkbox option to move all analysis output files into the previously defined ZIP file.
  5. From the Select Scenarios (Plans) to Export section, select one of the following radio button options:
    • All scenarios: Select this option to export all scenarios contained within the stormwater project. This radio button option is selected by default.
    • Select scenarios: Select this option to export specific scenarios. Click the dropdown combo box adjacent to this option and select the scenarios to be exported.
      Select scenarios dropdown combo box
  6. When all options have been properly defined, click the [Export] button to export the stormwater project to EPA SWMM input data files.
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting

Importing an EPA SWMM Project

In GeoSTORM software, the Import EPA SWMM Project command allows the user to import EPA SWMM input data files to create a new stormwater project.

Follow the steps below to import an EPA SWMM input file:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Import EPA SWMM Project command from the Import Data dropdown combo box.
    Input ribbon menu
  2. The Import EPA SWMM Project dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Import EPA SWMM Project dialog box
  3. From the Select EPA SWMM Project section, click the […] browse button to select the EPA SWMM input data file.
  4. The Import EPA SWMM Project File dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Import EPA SWMM Project File dialog box
  5. Select the required EPA SWMM input data file and click the [Open] button.
    Select EPA SWMM input file
  6. The Import EPA SWMM Project dialog box will be redisplayed. The directory location of the selected input data file will be displayed in the EPA SWMM project file entry field.
    Import EPA SWMM Project dialog box
  7. Click the [Import] button to import the selected EPA SWMM input data file into the GeoSTORM software.
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Understanding Storm Scenarios

For stormwater projects, GeoSTORM software allows the user to create, edit, analyze, and review an unlimited number of variations to the project’s scenarios (or plans). Each project scenario associates a specific geometry model, storm data, and a set of analysis specifications with a specific condition or circumstance, such as pre-developed and post-developed phases of a project. This allows the user to work with multiple scenarios in a single project and analyze computational results as different parameters are applied to the project.

Elements of a Project

The following data are used to construct a complete stormwater project within a scenario:

  • Geometry data – Defines the geometric representation of a model.
  • Storm data – Defines precipitation data.
  • Analysis specifications – Defines the configuration for start time, end time, and time interval.
  • Model calibration data – References the above files when performing an analysis.

Selecting Active (Current) Scenarios

In GeoSTORM software, the Input ribbon menu displays the Scenario ID of the currently selected scenario. The read-only field below the Scenario ID dropdown combo box displays the description of the current scenario.

Active (Current) Scenarios dropdown combo boxes

The Scenario ID dropdown combo box allows the user to quickly switch between scenarios. Moving from one scenario to another will cause the contents of the Map View to change to represent the geometry of the selected scenario.

Scenario ID dropdown combo box

From the Input ribbon menu, expand the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box and the following commands will be displayed:

  • Scenario Manager
  • Duplicate Current Scenario
  • Delete Scenarios
  • Scenario Summary
Scenario Manager dropdown combo box

Scenario Manager

Selecting the Scenario Manager command will display the below dialog box. The Scenario Manager dialog box displays the details of the currently selected scenario in the project.

Scenario Manager command

This dialog box is used to manage geometry data, storm data, analysis specifications and model calibration data associated with the current scenario. In addition, a new scenario, geometry model, storm model, and analysis specifications can be created, as well as copied from an existing scenario.

The following sections describe how to use the Scenario Manager command and interact with the above dialog box.

Scenario (Simulation Run)

This section allows the user to create new scenarios as well as manage existing scenarios. The Scenario (simulation run) dropdown combo box lists all the scenarios in the project. The user can select the preferred scenario to view or modify its corresponding data. The other sections of the dialog box will be updated based on the user’s selection.

Scenario (simulation run) dropdown combo box

To create a new scenario, the user can select the Add New Scenario option from the Scenario (simulation run) dropdown combo box or alternatively, click the [New] button in the section. This will apply the default settings to the other sections of the Scenario Manager dialog box. The user can then specify the details for geometry, storm, analysis, and calibration in their respective sections.

To copy the current scenario for use in another scenario, the user can click the [Copy] button. To delete the currently selected scenario, the user can click the [Delete] button.

Scenario (Simulation Run) section buttons

Geometry

The Geometry panel outlines the geometry data (i.e., subbasins, pipes, routing reaches, manholes, junctions, 2D mesh, etc.) that defines a model.

Geometry panel

The Geometry data dropdown combo box lists all existing geometry models in the current project. In addition, the adjacent Edit icon allows the user to edit the selected geometry model ID.

The Terrain surface dropdown combo box lists the existing terrain surfaces in the project. Note that the user can select the blank option from the Terrain surface dropdown combo box to disassociate a terrain surface from the selected geometry model.

Terrain surface dropdown combo box

The user can define a new geometry model, copy the details of an existing geometry model to use in another geometry model, and delete the selected geometry model using the [New], [Copy], and [Delete] buttons, respectively.

Storm

The Storm panel outlines the storm specifications (i.e., rainfall, distribution, etc.) that define the boundary conditions applied to the model.

Storm panel

The Rainfall data dropdown combo box lists all the existing storm models in the current project. Any descriptive information about the storm model can be included in the Description text box.

The user can define a new storm model, copy the details of an existing storm model to use in another storm model, and delete the selected storm model using the [New], [Copy], and [Delete] buttons, respectively.

Analysis

The Analysis panel defines the analysis specifications that are used in running the stormwater analysis for the defined model.

Analysis panel

The Analysis data dropdown combo box lists all the existing analysis specifications in the current project. Any descriptive information about the analysis specification can be included in the Description text box.

The user can define a new analysis specification, copy the details of an existing analysis specification to use in another analysis specification, and delete the selected analysis specification using the [New], [Copy], and [Delete] buttons, respectively.

Note that the Analysis panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the Rational Method option is selected in the Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box of the Analysis Options section.

Calibration

The Calibration panel is used to define the model calibration data.

Calibration panel

The following entries are available in this panel:

  • Calibration type
  • Calibration multiplier (ratio)

Calibration type

The Calibration type dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of calibration to aid the simulation run.

Note that the Calibration panel is enabled only when the SCS TR-20/TR-55 option is selected from the Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box of the Analysis Options section.

The following options are available in this dropdown combo box:

  • None (default)
  • Flow
  • Precipitation
Calibration type dropdown combo box

Calibration multiplier (ratio)

The Calibration multiplier (ratio) spin control defines the multiplication ratio to be applied to the data. By default, this entry is listed as 1.000. The spin control will go up and down in increments of 0.010.

Analysis Options

The Analysis Options section is used to define analysis options within a project.

Analysis Options section

The following entries are used to define the analysis options:

  • Hydrology analysis engine
  • EPA SWMM infiltration method
  • Flow routing method
  • Precipitation type

Hydrology analysis engine

This dropdown combo box defines the hydrology method to be used in the project. Note that the default selection is determined by the option defined in the Analysis Options section of the Options backstage page.

The following options are available:

  • EPA SWMM
  • Modified Rational
  • Rational Method
  • SCS TR-20/TR-55
Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box

EPA SWMM infiltration method

This dropdown combo box defines the EPA SWMM infiltration method to be used in the project. Note that the default selection is determined by the option defined in the Analysis Options section of the Options backstage page.

The following options are available:

  • Green Ampt
  • Horton
  • Modified Green Ampt
  • Modified Horton
  • SCS Curve Number
EPA SWMM infiltration method dropdown combo box

Note that the EPA SWMM infiltration method dropdown combo box is enabled only when the EPA SWMM option is selected from the Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box.

Flow routing method

This dropdown combo box entry defines the routing method to be used in the project. The following options are available in this dropdown combo box:

  • Hydrodynamic
  • Kinematic Wave
  • Steady State Peak Flow
Flow routing method dropdown combo box

Note that the default selection is determined by the option defined in the Analysis Options section of the Options backstage page.

Precipitation type

This dropdown combo box entry defines the precipitation type to be used in the project. Note that the default selection is determined by the option defined in the Analysis Options section in the Options backstage page.

Note that the options displayed in the Precipitation type dropdown combo box will change based on the option selected in the Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box.

If the user selects the EPA SWMM option in the Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box, the following options will be displayed in the Precipitation type dropdown combo box.

  • Rain Gage
  • Rainfall Distribution
Precipitation type dropdown combo box

If the user selects the SCS TR-20/TR-55 option in the Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box, the following options will be displayed in the Precipitation type dropdown combo box.

  • HMR52 Storm
  • Rainfall Distribution
  • SCS Storm
Precipitation type dropdown combo box

Note that the Precipitation type dropdown combo box is disabled (i.e., grayed out) when either the Rational Method or Modified Rational option is selected in the Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box.

Duplicate Current Scenarios

The Duplicate Current Scenario command allows the user to make an identical copy of the current scenario (simulation run). Once the copy has been made, it is independent of the original and they do not interact.

To learn more about the Duplicate Current Scenario command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Delete Scenarios

The Delete Scenarios command allows the user to delete data that no longer apply to the project and should not be submitted as part of the project. The following types of data can be removed: Scenario (simulation run), Geometry, Storm, and Analysis Specification.

To learn more about the Delete Scenarios command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Scenario Summary

In the Scenario Manager dialog box, clicking on the [Summary] button will display an informational dialog box that provides information for all scenarios contained in a project. It includes a complete summary of all the scenarios, geometry models, storm models, analysis specifications, and other details of the current scenario.

[Summary] button

Alternatively, the user can view the scenario summary by selecting the Scenario Summary command from the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box.

Scenario Summary command from the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box

To learn more about the Scenario Summary command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Multiple Plan Analysis

Computations on the multiple scenarios can be performed sequentially (one immediately after the other) using the Multiple Scenarios command.

To learn more about the Multiple Scenarios command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Displaying Multiple Scenario Results

After the computations have been performed, the software can display results from multiple scenarios for all elements (i.e., subbasins, pipes, manholes, routing junctions, etc.).

To view the output results, select the Plot Hydrographs command from the Results ribbon menu.

Plot Hydrographs command from the Results ribbon menu

The Plot Hydrographs dialog box will be displayed.

The Plot Hydrographs dialog box

The above dialog box has separate panels (i.e., Subbasins, Pipes, Routing Reaches, Roadway Crossings etc.) to show output results for each element type present in the project. Within each element type panel, the user can select the preferred scenario from the Scenarios dropdown combo box of the Select Items panel.

Scenarios dropdown combo box

The Variables dropdown combo box allows the user to select the desired output variables associated with an element type whose results are to be displayed.

Variables dropdown combo box

Note that the Variables dropdown combo box is not available in the Result Summary panel. The Result Summary panel displays the summary of the current stormwater analysis results for each element in tabular form.

All elements (corresponding to the element type) present in the stormwater model of the selected scenario will be displayed under the Elements section. The user can check the checkbox corresponding to the preferred element(s) from the Elements section to see output results associated with them. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick Elements] button to select the element(s) from the Map View. The user can click the [Clear Elements] button to clear the selected element(s). The output results related to the selected element(s) will be displayed under the Plots, Data Tables and Data Summary panels.

Plots, Data Tables and Data Summary panels
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Delete Scenarios (GeoSTORM)

The Delete Scenarios command in GeoSTORM allows the user to select and delete scenario data, geometry data, storm data, and analysis specification data from a project. This command helps to reduce project file size by deleting data that are no longer relevant to a project or otherwise necessary.

Follow the steps below to use the Delete Scenarios command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Delete Scenarios command from the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box.
    Scenario Manager dropdown menu
  2. The Delete Scenarios dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box displays scenario (simulation run), geometry, storm, and analysis specification data associated with the project.
    Delete Scenarios dialog box
  3. Select the checkboxes corresponding to scenario, geometry, storm, and analysis specification data that needs to be removed from the project.
  4. Click the [Delete] button.
    [Delete] button
  5. The software will successfully delete the selected scenario, geometry, storm, and analysis specification data.

Note that after the scenario data have been deleted from the project, they cannot be recovered with the Undo command. However, if the project is not saved, then the user can reload the project and the scenario data will still be present. Alternatively, if the project has been saved, then the project backup file can be used to recover the previous state of scenario data.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Duplicate Current Scenario (GeoSTORM)

The Duplicate Current Scenario command in GeoSTORM allows the user to make an identical copy of the current scenario. This copy is independent of and does not interact with the original after it has been created. If required, the user can also create copies of the current geometry model, storm model, or analysis specification data.

Follow the steps given below to use the Duplicate Current Scenario command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Duplicate Current Scenario command from the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box.
    Scenario Manager dropdown menu
  2. The Duplicate Current Scenario dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Duplicate Current Scenario dialog box
  3. Enter the scenario name in the Scenario (simulation run) entry field to create an identical copy of the current scenario. By default, the Scenario (simulation run) checkbox is checked. If unchecked, then the Scenario (simulation run) and Description entries are disabled.
  4. Enter the description in the Description entry to describe the scenario.
  5. By default, the software utilizes the current scenario’s geometry model, storm data, and analysis specifications for the duplicated scenario.
  6. Additionally, the user can check the Geometry model, Storm data, and Analysis specification checkboxes to create identical copies of the current scenario’s geometry, storm, and analysis specification data. Note that this is useful when creating alternative designs for comparison.
  7. Click the [Apply] button.
    [Apply] button
  8. A copy of the current scenario will be successfully created.
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Scenario Summary (GeoSTORM)

In GeoSTORM, the Scenario Summary command provides an overview of all scenarios, geometry models, storm models, analysis specifications and other details (such as element details, modeling specifications, and storm data) associated with a project.

Follow the steps given below to use the Scenario Summary command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Scenario Summary command from the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box.
    Scenario Manager dropdown menu
  2. The Scenario Summary dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Scenario Summary
    Note that the Scenario Summary dialog box can also be displayed by clicking the [Summary] button of the Scenario Manager dialog box.
    [Summary] button in the Scenario Manager dialog box

The below sections describe the information displayed in the Scenario Summary dialog box.

General Information

This section displays the project name, the project run file name, and the directory path for the project. It also displays a read-only field containing the project description added by the user.

Scenario (Geometry Models)

This section lists the names of all scenarios and their corresponding geometry models, storm models and analysis specifications in a tabular format. The current scenario of the project is selected by default. The user can select a scenario and its corresponding storm model and analysis specification will also be selected in the Storm Models and Analysis Specifications sections.

Storm Models

This section lists all storm models associated with the project.

Analysis Specifications

This section lists all analysis specifications associated with the project.

Current Simulation Run Detailed Information

This section provides detailed information relating to the scenario selected in the Scenario (Geometry Models) section.

Element Details

The Element Details panel lists all the elements contained within the selected scenario (e.g., subbasins, junctions, manholes, pipes, etc.).

Element Details panel

Modeling Specifications

The Modeling Specifications panel lists the selected hydrology engine and other modeling specifications defined for the selected scenario.

Modeling Specifications panel

Storm Data

The Storm Data panel lists the precipitation type and other related storm data defined for the selected scenario.

Storm Data panel

Note that by clicking the [Copy to Clipboard] button, the contents of the Scenario Summary dialog box is copied to the Windows clipboard.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Multiple Plan Analysis (GeoSTORM)

The GeoSTORM software includes functionality that permits the user to perform analysis on multiple scenarios (plans) at the same time. The Multiple Scenarios command can be used to perform computations on multiple plans sequentially (one immediately after the other). The user can specify which scenarios to compute, and the order in which they should be computed.

This article describes how to use the Multiple Scenarios command in the GeoSTORM software.

Follow the steps below to use the Multiple Scenarios command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, click the Compute Analysis dropdown menu and select the Multiple Scenarios command.
    Multiple Scenarios command
  2. The Compute Analysis – Multiple Scenarios dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute Analysis – Multiple Scenarios dialog box
  3. From the Available Scenarios section, check the checkboxes corresponding to the scenarios that needs to be computed. The user can also navigate between the scenarios using the up and down arrow buttons.
    Available Scenarios section
    Note: To select/deselect all scenarios at once, check/uncheck the Compute Scenario checkbox option.
  4. Check the Show only selected scenarios checkbox option to hide unselected scenarios in the data grid as shown below. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
    Show only selected scenarios checkbox option
  5. Click the [Compute] button to start the analysis.
  6. Once the analysis is performed, the name of the scenario selected for analysis is displayed in the Scenario being analyzed read-only field of the Analysis Summary section. In addition, the elapsed analysis time is displayed in the Elapsed analysis time read-only field.
    Analysis Summary section
  7. Once the analysis is complete, the status will be displayed in the Analysis Progress read-only section as shown below.
    Analysis Progress read only section
    Note: If the Exit status is equal to 0, the analysis was successful. If the Exit status is equal to -1, the analysis failed, and the corresponding error(s)/warning(s) will be displayed under the Analysis Progress read-only section.
    Analysis Progress read only section
  8. The user can click the [Copy to Clipboard] button to copy the computed analysis progress into the clipboard.

Once the analysis has been computed successfully, the user can evaluate the results of the simulation to ensure that they are reasonable and consistent. The user can click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Display & Element Properties

Stormwater Element Display Properties

In GeoSTORM, the appearance of stormwater model elements in the Map View can be customized using the Stormwater Properties dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to adjust colors, line thicknesses, symbol sizes, label visibility and placement, border styles, fill colors, transparency, and other display settings for each type of stormwater element shown on the Map View.

Customizing these display properties is especially useful when working with dense models in which multiple element types overlap, preparing Map Views for reports or project deliverables, or maintaining a consistent visual standard across a project team.

The user can change the display properties of the following stormwater elements shown on the Map View:

  • Cross Sections
  • Junctions
  • LID Structures
  • Manholes
  • Pipes
  • Rain Gages
  • Reaches
  • Roadway Crossings
  • Roadway Gutters
  • Storage Areas
  • Subbasin TOC/Lag Time Flow Paths
  • Subbasins
  • Terminal Outfalls
  • and more…

Follow the steps below to view or edit the display properties of stormwater elements:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click the […] button next to the Stormwater layer.
    unknown node
  2. The Stormwater Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node

The Stormwater Properties dialog box contains the following panels:

  • General Options
  • Spatial Reference
  • Transformation
  • Label Options

General Options

The General Options panel is used to adjust the display properties for all stormwater element types shown on the Map View. The following sections are available in this panel:

Subbasin Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of subbasins on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 3

The following options are available in this section:

  • Subbasin
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of subbasins and their associated properties on Map View.
  • Subbasin symbol
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the size of the subbasin symbol. Unchecking this option hides all subbasin symbols from the Map View. The size of subbasin symbols can be adjusted to small, medium, and large using the adjacent dropdown combo box.
  • Subbasin connection line
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the thickness, color, and style of the subbasin connection lines. Unchecking this option hides all subbasin connection lines from the Map View. The user can set the thickness of the subbasin connection lines on a scale of 1 to 11 using the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Subbasin border
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the thickness, color, and style of the subbasin borders. Unchecking this option disables all the subbasin display properties within this section and also hides subbasins from the Map View. The user can set the thickness of subbasin borders on a scale of 1 to 11 using the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Filled-in subbasins
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color and transparency of subbasins. Unchecking this option will only display subbasin borders on the Map View.

LID Structures Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of the LID (Low Impact Design) structures on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 4

The following options are available in this section:

  • LID structures
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of LID structures and their associated properties on Map View.
  • LID structure border
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the thickness, color, and style of the LID structure borders. Unchecking this option disables all the LID structure display properties within this section and also hides LID structures from the Map View. The user can set the thickness of the LID structure borders on a scale of 1 to 11 using the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Bioretention cell
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of bioretention cell LID structures using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all bioretention cell LID structures from the Map View.
  • Bioswale
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of bioswale LID structures using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all bioswale LID structures from the Map View.
  • Green roof
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of green roof LID structures using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all green roof LID structures from the Map View.
  • Infiltration trench
    This checkbox option enables the user to change the color of infiltration trench LID structures using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all infiltration trench LID structures from the Map View.
  • Permeable pavement
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of permeable pavement LID structures using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all permeable pavement LID structures from the Map View.
  • Rain barrel
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of rain barrel LID structures using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all rain barrel LID structures from the Map View.
  • Rain garden
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of rain garden LID structures using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all rain garden LID structures from the Map View.
  • Rooftop capture
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of rooftop capture LID structures using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all rooftop capture LID structures from the Map View.

Subbasin TOC/Lag Time Flow Path Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of the subbasin TOC (time of concentration) and lag time flow paths.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 5

The following options are available in this section:

  • Flow path
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of flow paths and their associated properties on the Map View.
  • Flow path direction arrows
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of the flow path direction arrows. Unchecking this option hides all flow path direction arrows from the Map View.
  • Sheet flow segment color
    This dropdown color palette allows the user to change the color of the sheet flow segment.
  • Shallow concentrated flow segment color
    This dropdown color palette allows the user to change the color of the shallow concentrated flow segment.
  • Channel flow segment color
    This dropdown color palette allows the user to change the color of the channel flow segment.

Manhole Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of manholes on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 6

The following option is available in this section:

  • Manhole
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of manholes and their associated properties on the Map View. The size of manhole symbols can be adjusted to small, medium, and large using the adjacent dropdown combo box.

Junction Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of junctions on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 7

The following option is available in this section:

  • Junction
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of junctions and their associated properties on Map View. Enabling this checkbox option allows the user to change the color, size, style, border, and border color of the junctions. The size of junction symbols can be adjusted to small, medium, and large using the adjacent dropdown combo box.

Terminal Outfall Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of terminal outfalls on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 8

The following option is available in this section:

  • Terminal outfall
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of terminal outfalls and their associated properties on the Map View. The size of terminal outfall symbols can be adjusted to small, medium, and large using the adjacent dropdown combo box.

Rain Gage Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of rain gages on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 9

The following option is available in this section:

  • Rain gage
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of rain gages and their associated properties on Map View. Enabling this checkbox option allows the user to change the color, size, style, border, and border color of the rain gages. The size of rain gage symbols can be adjusted to small, medium, and large using the adjacent dropdown combo box.

Pipe Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of pipes on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 10

The following options are available in this section:

  • Pipe
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of pipes and their associated properties on Map View. Enabling this checkbox option allows the user to change the size and border color of the pipes. The size of pipe symbols can be adjusted to small, medium, and large using the adjacent dropdown combo box.
  • Pipe direction arrow
    This checkbox option is used to change the color of pipe direction arrows using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all pipe direction arrows from the Map View.

Reach Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of routing reaches on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 11

The following options are available in this section:

  • Reach
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of routing reaches and their associated properties on the Map View. Enabling this checkbox option allows the user to change the color, thickness, and style of the routing reaches. The user can set the thickness of routing reaches on a scale of 1 to 11 using the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Reach direction arrow
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of routing reach direction arrows using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all routing reach direction arrows from the Map View.

Roadway Gutter Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of roadway gutters, ditches, or inlets on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 12

The following options are available in this section:

  • Roadway
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of roadway segments and their associated properties on the Map View. Enabling this checkbox option allows the user to change the color, thickness, and style of the roadway segments. The user can set the thickness of roadway segments on a scale of 1 to 11 using the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Roadway direction arrow
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of roadway segment direction arrows using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all roadway segment direction arrows from the Map View.

Roadway Crossings Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of roadway crossings on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 13

The following options are available in this section:

  • Roadway
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of roadway crossings and their associated properties on the Map View. Enabling this checkbox option allows the user to change the color, thickness, and style of the roadway crossings. The user can set the thickness of roadway crossings on a scale of 1 to 11 using the spin control entry field.
  • Roadway direction arrow
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of roadway crossing direction arrows using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all roadway crossing direction arrows from the Map View.

Cross Section Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of cross sections on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 14

The following options are available in this section:

  • Cross section
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of cross sections and their associated properties on the Map View. Enabling this checkbox option allows the user to change the color, thickness, and style of the cross sections. The user can set the thickness of cross sections on a scale of 1 to 11 using the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Cross section direction arrows
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color of cross section direction arrows using the adjacent dropdown color palette. Unchecking this option hides all the cross section direction arrows from the Map View. By default, this option is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Roughness segments
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the thickness of roughness segments of given cross sections. Unchecking this option hides all the roughness segments from the Map View. The user can set the thickness of roughness segments on a scale of 1 to 20 using the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Bank stations
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color, size, style, border, and border color of the bank stations. Unchecking this option hides all bank stations from the Map View. The size of bank station symbols can be adjusted to small, medium, and large using the adjacent dropdown combo box.

Storage Area Display Properties

This section is used to configure the display properties of storage areas on the Map View.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 15

The following options are available in this section:

  • Storage area
    This checkbox option is used to enable or disable the display of storage areas and their associated properties on the Map View.
  • Storage area symbol
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the size of the storage area symbol. Unchecking this option hides all storage area symbols from the Map View. The size of storage area symbols can be adjusted to small, medium, and large using the adjacent dropdown combo box.
  • Storage area connection line
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the thickness, color, and style of the storage area connection lines. Unchecking this option hides all storage area connection lines from the Map View. The user can set the thickness of storage area connection lines between 1 and 11 using the spin control.
  • Storage area border
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the thickness, color, and style of the storage area borders. Unchecking this option disables all the storage area properties within this section and hides storage areas from the Map View. The user can set the thickness of the storage area borders on a scale of 1 to 11 using the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Filled-in storage areas
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the color and transparency of storage areas. Unchecking this option will only display storage area borders on the Map View.

Other Display Properties

This section is used to configure additional display properties that apply across all stormwater element types.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 16

The following options are available in this section:

  • Stamp geometry polylines
    This checkbox option allows the user to hide or unhide stamp geometry polylines.
  • Disable adaptive element display
    This checkbox option, when checked, disables adaptive elements from being displayed in the Map View when the user zooms out. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference panel allows the user to manually assign the project’s coordinate reference system (CRS) to the stormwater layer. This panel is useful when the layer’s data coordinates fall within the extent of the project’s CRS, but the layer does not contain embedded CRS information. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Transformation

The Transformation panel allows the user to automatically apply a transformation scale factor to the stormwater layer so that it accurately maps to the project's coordinate reference system. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about layer transformation.

Label Options

The Label Options panel allows the user to define how each stormwater element is labeled on the Map View. The user can select the attributes included in each label, define the field order and separator, and configure the font, color, border, and other visual label settings. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about label options.

After configuring the display properties of stormwater elements, click the [OK] button to apply them on the Map View.

unknown node

Modifying Stormwater Element Properties From the Ribbon Menu

Stormwater element properties can also be modified directly from the ribbon menu. When a stormwater layer is selected in the Map Data Layers panel, a dedicated Display Options ribbon menu becomes available. This ribbon menu provides quick access to the most commonly used display customization options for the element type. To learn more about project layer display properties, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Stormwater Element Display Properties Img 17


Watershed & Subbasin Modeling

Compute RC Command

The Rational Method and Modified Rational Method require that the user define the Runoff Coefficient (RC) for each subbasin in order to compute runoff amount given storm intensity. In GeoSTORM software, the Compute RC command can be used to utilize the land use layer, soil map layer, and subbasin average slope to determine a composite runoff coefficient for each subbasin.

Follow the steps below to use the Compute RC command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Compute RC command.
    Compute RC Command
  2. The Compute RC dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Compute RC Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Compute RC command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select Subbasins section allows the user to select the subbasins for which the runoff coefficient value is to be computed. If a subbasin is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same subbasin will be shown selected within the given data grid table.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to manually select the subbasins from the Map View. The Compute RC command will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the desired subbasins. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.

The dialog box will be redisplayed and the total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Select Subbasins Section

Note that the user can select multiple subbasins from the Map View prior to running the Compute RC command by holding the [Ctrl] key while selecting the desired subbasins.

Defining Computational Data

The Define Computational Data section allows the user to define the land cover data and hydrologic soil group data used for computing the runoff coefficient for the selected subbasins. This section contains three panels:

  • Land Use Data
  • Hydrologic Soil Type Data
  • Intermediate Results

Land Use Data

The Land Use Data panel contains three subpanels, which are described below:

NLCD Layer

The NLCD Layer subpanel is used to determine land type with data from the National Land Cover Database (NLCD), which is represented by 75 ft cells throughout the USA. The NLCD map service is used to determine the runoff coefficient based upon the hydrologic soil group (i.e., A, B, C, D) as shown below.

NLCD Layer Subpanel

Notes:

  • This subpanel will only be displayed for a project having an assigned Coordinate Reference System (CRS).
  • For countries other than the USA, the software provides similar land cover databases. The content of this data panel will change to represent the one that is available for the project area. Currently, our software supports Africa, Australia, Canada, Europe, India, New Zealand, and the USA land cover database.

The Land cover data source dropdown combo box allows the user to select which land use data source to use for the newly created land cover layer. By default, the software selects the most recent land use data.

The following options are available in the Land cover data source dropdown combo box:

  • NLCD Land Cover 2021
  • NLCD Land Cover 2019
  • NLCD Land Cover 2016
  • NLCD Land Cover 2013
  • NLCD Land Cover 2011
  • NLCD Land Cover 2008
  • NLCD Land Cover 2006
  • NLCD Land Cover 2004
  • NLCD Land Cover 2001
    Land Cover Data Source Dropdown Combo Box

If the “Overwrite existing data” checkbox option is checked, then the new land cover data selected in the Land cover data source dropdown combo box will overwrite the existing land cover data (if one exists).

Additionally, the user can click the [Edit] button to display the NLCD Land Cover dialog box that provides an editable data grid, allowing the user to change the RC values of different hydrologic soil groups.

NLCD Land Cover Dialog Box

After editing the required cell values, the user can click the following buttons:

  • [Default] – This button will restore the default RC values and close the dialog box.
  • [Save] – This button will save the user changes and close the dialog box.
  • [Cancel] – This button will discard any user changes and close the dialog box.

Note that the NLCD Layer subpanel will be replaced by other subpanels based on the modeling region, as described below:

unknown node

GIS Polygon Layer

The GIS Polygon Layer subpanel is used for user-defined land use polygon data. The land use data can either directly assign the RC value for each polygon or provide a standard land use type for the software to cross reference.

When the user selects the Standardized land use type attribute field radio button option, then the Soil Group RC attribute field dropdown combo box entries become enabled. The Soil Group RC attribute field dropdown combo box entries show text, float, and integer fields contained within the selected GIS land use layer. Then, the software determines which RC value should be applied based upon the corresponding soil type and RC attribute field value.

GIS Polygon Layer Subpanel

Default Values

The Default Values subpanel allows the user to either define the default RC value or leverage Use standardized land use RC values option for the software to cross-reference. The user can enter integer or float values into these default value fields.

Default Values Subpanel

Hydrologic Soil Type Data

The Hydrologic Soil Type Data panel contains three subpanels, which are described below:

NRCS Layer

The NRCS Layer subpanel allows the user to utilize data from the NRCS Soil Survey Database for determining the hydrologic soil group data for the watershed region.

NRCS Layer Subpanel

Note that for countries other than the USA, the software provides similar soil survey databases. The content of this data panel will change to represent the one that is available for the project area. Currently, our software supports Africa, Australia, Canada, Europe, India, New Zealand, and the USA land cover database.

The NRCS Layer subpanel will be replaced by other subpanels based on the modeling region, as described below:

unknown node

GIS Polygon Layer

The GIS Polygon Layer subpanel is used for the user-defined soil map polygon data. The soil map data provides hydrologic soil group data for each defined polygon.

GIS Polygon Layer subpanel - Hydrological Soil Type Data

Default Value

The Default Value subpanel is used to define a default hydrologic soil type for the software to cross-reference, as shown below.

Default Value Subpanel

Intermediate Results

The Intermediate Results panel allows the user to compute the intermediate results of the selected subbasin(s) in a shapefile, save the results at the user-specified location and load the results in a project.

By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the Compute Intermediate Results checkbox to enable the content of this panel.

Intermediate Results Panel

Clicking the […] browse button adjacent to the Intermediate results shapefile path entry field allows the user to define the location where the intermediate computed results are to be saved.

Note that the Load intermediate results checkbox option must be checked to load the computed intermediate results in the specified project.

Computing Runoff Coefficient

After defining the data in the Compute RC dialog box, click the [Compute] button to compute the runoff coefficient for the selected subbasin(s).

Once the runoff coefficients are computed, the values will be shown in the Computed RC column, which can be further edited by the user, as shown below.

Computing Runoff Coefficients

In addition, all stormwater methods that require runoff coefficients will have the data populated into their respective fields within the software.

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software provides a data legend for computed intermediate results of each subbasin that lists the land covers included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend.

Map Data Layers Panel

Click the […] button adjacent to the intermediate results computed for the subbasin(s) to display the GIS polygon properties dialog box. This allows the user to adjust the color and style of the polygon(s) according to the land and soil type. To learn more about the GIS polygon properties dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Drawing & Properties

Subbasin Data Command (GeoSTORM)

Subbasins define the drainage area polygons that produce runoff to the other elements in the stormwater model. In the GeoSTORM software, the Subbasin Data command allows users to add new subbasins, edit subbasin data, and display the associated output results of a project.

The user can create or assign new subbasins using the Draw Subbasins or Assign Subbasins commands. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about these commands.

This article describes how to use the Subbasin Data command in the GeoSTORM software.

Follow the steps below to view or modify the subbasin data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and select the Subbasin Data command.
    Subbasin Data command
  2. The Subbasin Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Subbasin Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Subbasin Data dialog box.

Defining Subbasin Data

The Subbasin Data dialog box contains the following options to select and define subbasin data:

  • Select Subbasin Section
  • Subbasin Specifications Data Panel Selector:
    • General Specifications Data Panel
    • LID Specifications Data Panel

Selecting Subbasin

The Select Subbasin section allows the user to select the subbasin for defining the subbasin data. The user can create a new subbasin, copy existing subbasin data to a new subbasin, and delete a subbasin. In addition, the user can navigate between subbasins and enter a description detailing the defined subbasins.

Select Subbasin section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Subbasin ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the subbasins defined in the current scenario of the project. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the subbasin ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next subbasin using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the subbasin from the Map View. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains a single subbasin.
  • Description
    This optional field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected subbasin.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new subbasin on the Map View. The ID of every newly created subbasin must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy an existing subbasin along with its associated data to a new subbasin. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied subbasin.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected subbasin from the current scenario.
  • Less/More
    The [<Less] and [More>] buttons at the Select Subbasin section header allow the user to collapse or expand the Computed Results section.

Defining Subbasin Specifications

The Subbasin Specifications dropdown selector contains General Specifications and LID Specifications entries. Selecting these entries displays corresponding data panels to define general and low-impact design (LID) specifications for the subbasins defined in the current scenario of the project.

Subbasin Specifications dropdown selector

Defining General Specifications Based on Hydrology Method

In the Subbasin Data dialog box, the contents of the General Specifications data panel change based on the hydrology and infiltration methods selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box, as shown below.

Scenario Manager dialog box

In addition, selecting different hydrology methods enables and disables the infiltration methods. The table below shows the infiltration methods available depending on the hydrology method selected.

unknown node

EPA SWMM Hydrology Method

The combination of different infiltration methods with the selected EPA SWMM hydrology method changes the contents of the General Specifications data panel.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how the EPA SWMM hydrology method, along with different infiltration methods, changes the contents of the General Specifications data panel.

Modified Rational Hydrology Method

The following General Specifications data panel is displayed when the Modified Rational is selected as the hydrology method.

General Specifications data panel when the Modified Rational hydrology method is selected
General Specifications

This section allows the user to define the general parameters of the defined subbasin.

General Specifications section - Modified Rational

The following parameters are available in this section.

  • Drainage area
    This entry field defines the area of the selected subbasin. The user can click the […] button to measure the subbasin area from the Map View. Clicking the [Recalc] button will cause the software to recalculate the area of the digitized subbasin. Similarly, the [Recalc All] button will cause the software to recalculate the area of all the digitized subbasins.
  • Downstream connection
    This read-only entry field defines the downstream element that the selected subbasin drains to. The user can click the [...] button to select the subbasin downstream connection from the Map View.

The following elements can be selected:

    • Manhole
    • Routing Junction
    • Storage Area
    • Subbasin (only when using EPA SWMM hydrology method)
    • Terminal Outfall

The user can click the [Clear] button to remove the downstream element connection.

Modified Rational Method Specifications

The parameters in this section are important for running the analysis using the modified rational method.

Modified Rational Method Specifications

Note that the header of this section changes based on the selected hydrology method. For example, if the user selects Rational Method as the hydrology method, the header of this section changes to Rational Method Specifications. Similarly, for the DeKalb Rational hydrology method, the header of this section changes to DeKalb Rational Method Specifications.

The following parameters are available in this section:

  • Runoff coefficient
    This entry field defines the runoff coefficient for the defined subbasin. Clicking the […] button displays a Runoff Coefficients lookup table dialog box, as shown below.
    Runoff Coefficients lookup table dialog box
  • Time of concentration
    This entry field defines the time of concentration for the defined subbasin.
Computational Results

After successfully computing the analysis, this section provides a summary of the computational results for the defined subbasin.

Computational Results - Modified Rational

The following results are provided in this section:

  • Peak runoff rate
    This read-only field displays the peak runoff rate that occurred from the subbasin during the storm event.
  • Rainfall intensity
    This read-only field displays the rainfall intensity applied to the subbasin during the storm event.
  • Total runoff
    This read-only field displays the total runoff volume from the subbasin during the storm event.

DeKalb Rational Hydrology Method

The following General Specifications data panel is displayed when DeKalb Rational is selected as the hydrology method.

General Specifications data panel when DeKalb Rational hydrology method is selected

The contents of the dialog box for the DeKalb Rational hydrology method are similar to those for the Modified Rational hydrology method. Refer to the Modified Rational Hydrology Method section of this article for more information.

Rational Method Hydrology Method

The following General Specifications data panel is displayed when the Rational Method is selected as the hydrology method.

General Specifications data panel when the Rational Method hydrology method is selected

The contents of this dialog box for the Rational Method hydrology method are similar to those for the Modified Rational hydrology method. Refer to the Modified Rational section of this article for more information.

SCS TR-20/TR-55 Hydrology Method

The following General Specifications data panel is displayed when the SCS TR-20/TR-55 is selected as the hydrology method.

General Specifications data panel when the SCS TR-20/TR-55 hydrology method is selected
General Specifications

This section allows the user to define the general parameters of the defined subbasin.

General Specifications - SCS TR-20/TR-55 Hydrology Method

The following parameters are available in this section:

  • Drainage area
    This entry field is similar to the Drainage area entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Modified Rational hydrology method.
  • Downstream connection
    This entry field is similar to the Downstream connection entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Modified Rational hydrology method.
  • Runoff (flow) adjustment ratio
    This entry field defines an adjustment ratio for calibrating the runoff from the selected subbasin. The default value for this entry is 1.000, meaning that there is no adjustment.
SCS Hydrology Method Specifications

This section allows the user to define the SCS hydrology method parameters for the defined subbasin.

SCS Hydrology Method Specifications

The following parameters are available in this section:

  • Curve number
    This entry field defines the curve number for the defined subbasin. Clicking the […] button will display a SCS Curve Number lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    unknown node
  • Impervious surface area
    This entry field defines the percent impervious surface area for the selected subbasin.
  • Time of concentration
    This entry field is similar to the Time of concentration entry field available in the Modified Rational Method Specifications section for the Modified Rational hydrology method.
Computational Results

After successfully computing the analysis, this section allows the user to see a summary of the computational results for the defined subbasin.

Computational Results - SCS TR-20/TR-55 Hydrology Method

Note that the Detailed Results section provides additional analysis results computed for the defined subbasin.

Defining LID Specifications

The LID Specifications data panel of the Subbasin Data dialog box allows the user to define general specifications for Low Impact Design (LID) elements within the selected subbasin. Note that this data panel is only enabled when EPA SWMM is selected as the hydrology method.

LID Specifications data panel

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the LID Specifications data panel of the Subbasin Data dialog box.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Drawing & Properties

Subbasin Table Edit Command (GeoSTORM)

In GeoSTORM, the Subbasin Table Edit command allows the user to view and edit all the parameters of the subbasins in a single editable table. The user can also view the corresponding output results from this table.

Follow the steps below to use the Subbasin Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and select the Subbasin Table Edit command.
    Subbasin Table Edit command
  2. The Subbasin Table Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Subbasin Table Edit dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Subbasin Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Hydrology Analysis Engine & Infiltration Method

The content of the Subbasin Table Edit dialog box changes based on the hydrology analysis engine and infiltration method selected from the Scenario Manager dialog box, as shown below.

unknown node

Note: The infiltration method is only available when EPA SWMM is selected as the hydrology analysis engine.

Upon selecting the hydrology analysis engine and infiltration method, the parameters displayed in both the Subbasin Data and Result Data panels of the Subbasin Table Edit dialog box change. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Scenario Manager command.

Selecting Storm Results

In the Select Storm Results section, the Storm result to display dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storm frequency whose result is to be displayed.

Select Storm Results section

Note: The Select Storm Results section is only available if the Dekalb Rational Method or Modified Rational or Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this section is unavailable.

Subbasin Parameters

In the Subbasin Parameters section, the following panels are available:

  • Subbasin Data
  • Result Data

Subbasin Data

In the Subbasin Parameters section, the Subbasin Data panel contains a table with editable columns listing the subbasin parameters available in the current scenario.

Subbasin Data panel

Result Data

In the Subbasin Parameters section, the Result Data panel contains a table with read-only columns listing the corresponding output results for subbasins available in the current scenario.

Result Data panel

Sorting the Subbasin Parameters Table

The data in the Subbasin Parameters table can be sorted by multiple columns. The user can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up and Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Subbasin Parameters table sorting

Follow the steps below to sort the data using multiple columns:

  1. Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  2. Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  3. Repeat step 2 to sort the data of any additional column.

For example, first, select the Subbasin ID column and click the Up arrow to sort the data in ascending order. Then, while holding the [Shift] key, select the Drainage Area column and click the Down arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Subbasin Parameters table sorting

Copying and Exporting the Table

The data in the Subbasin Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using right-click context menu commands such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Right-click context menu commands

After editing the required subbasin parameters, click the [Close] button to close the Subbasin Table Edit dialog box.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › LID Specifications

Subbasin Data – LID Specifications

The LID Specifications data panel of the Subbasin Data dialog box allows the user to define general specifications for Low Impact Design (LID) elements within the selected subbasin. Note that this data panel is only enabled when EPA SWMM is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this data panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engine.

This article explains how to interact with the LID Specifications data panel of the Subbasin Data dialog box.

Follow the steps below to define the specifications for the LID elements:

  1. In the Subbasin Data dialog box, select the LID Specifications data panel from the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Subbasin Specifications Dropdown Combo Box
  2. The corresponding data panel with options for defining LID specifications will be displayed.
    LID Specifications data panel

The following sections describe how to define specifications for LID elements and interact with the above data panel.

Defined LID Elements

The table under this section lists all the LID elements defined for the current subbasin.

Defined LID Elements Section

The following read-only columns are available in this table:

  • LID Element ID
    This read-only column lists the IDs of the defined LID elements.
  • LID Element Type
    This read-only column lists the LID element types for the added LID elements.
  • Subbasin Area Collected
    This read-only column lists the total subbasin area being processed by the defined LID element.
  • Collected from Impervious Area
    This read-only column lists the percentage of the impervious portion of the subbasin non-LID area whose runoff is processed by the LID element.
  • Collected from Pervious Area
    This read-only column lists the percentage of the pervious portion of the subbasin non-LID area whose runoff is processed by the LID element.

LID Element Parameters

This section allows the user to define the LID element parameters for the selected LID element.

LID Element Parameters section

Note that these parameters change based upon the selected LID element listed in the table under the Defined LID Elements section. The following LID element parameters are available in this section:

  • Entire subbasin area processed by LID
    This checkbox option denotes that the entire subbasin drainage area is processed by the LID element.
  • Subbasin area processed by each LID unit
    This entry field defines the area processed by each LID unit. Click the [Pick] button to select a polygon from the Map View that represents the subbasin’s LID unit. Click the […] button to measure the area processed by subbasin’s LID unit from the Map View.
  • Number of LID units
    This spin control entry field defines how many LID units are defined for the subbasin.
  • Total subbasin area processed by LID
    This read-only entry field defines the total subbasin area being processed by the defined LID units.
    This value is computed using the following equation:

(Subbasin Area Processed by Each LID Unit) x (Number of LID Units)

  • Surface width processed by each LID unit
    This entry field defines the subbasin surface width processed by the defined LID unit. Click the [Pick] button to measure the subbasin surface width processed by each LID unit from the Map View. Note that this entry field and the [Pick] button are only enabled for the following LID element types:
    1. Bioswale
    2. Green Roof
    3. Infiltration Trench
    4. Permeable Pavement
    5. Rooftop Capture
  • LID unit initial saturation
    For most of the LID element types, this spin control entry field defines the degree to which their storage zone is initially filled with water.

However, for Bioretention Cell, Green Roof, and Rain Garden LID element types, this spin control entry field defines the degree to which the LID unit’s soil is initially filled with water. A value of 0% saturation corresponds to the wilting point moisture content, whereas a value of 100% saturation corresponds to a moisture content equal to the soil porosity. The storage zone beneath the soil zone of the LID unit is assumed to be completely dry.

  • Impervious area processed by LID
    This spin control entry field defines the percentage of the impervious portion of the subbasin non-LID area whose runoff is processed by the LID unit. Note that this entry will be displayed as disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the Entire subbasin area processed by LID checkbox is checked.
  • Pervious area processed by LID
    This spin control entry field defines the percentage of the pervious portion of the subbasin non-LID area whose runoff is processed by the LID unit. Note that this entry will be displayed as disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the Entire subbasin area processed by LID checkbox is checked.
  • LID unit drain flow connection
    This checkbox entry allows the LID outflow to be routed to a different location than the outlet of the current subbasin. By default, the element ID displayed in the Downstream connection entry in the General Specifications data panel of the Subbasin Data dialog box will be shown in this entry.

The user can click the […] button to select the LID unit drain flow connection from the Map View.

The user can click the [Clear] button to remove the LID unit drain flow connection.

  • Route LID outflow to pervious area
    This checkbox option causes all the outflow from the LID unit to be routed onto the pervious area of the current subbasin. Note that if the drain outflow was specified to be routed to a different location than the subbasin outlet, then only surface outflow will be routed to the pervious area of the current subbasin.

LID Results

After successfully computing the analysis, the table under this section will provide a summary of the LID results for the defined LID elements in the selected subbasin.

LID Results Section
Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Urban Impervious Areas

Urban Subbasins with Storm Sewer Interconnects

Urban subbasins with storm sewer interconnects are drainage areas that are hydraulically connected through an underground network of inlets, catch basins, manholes, pipes, and outfalls. Together, these components collect surface runoff, convey it through the storm sewer network, and discharge it safely at designated outfall locations.

For stormwater engineers, accurately modeling this connectivity is essential. An undersized or poorly connected storm sewer system can lead to surcharging, localized flooding, infrastructure damage, and regulatory non-compliance.

When designing storm sewer systems, engineers must consider factors such as subbasin imperviousness, topography, soil conditions, and drainage area characteristics. These factors directly influence runoff coefficients, peak flow calculations, and the overall hydraulic performance of the storm sewer network.

GeoSTORM provides a complete environment for building storm sewer models of interconnected storm sewer systems. Users can delineate subbasins, assign them to manholes or junctions, build hydraulic connectivity across the pipe network, analyze runoff using integrated hydrologic methods, and review system performance through profile plots — all within a single, map-based workflow.

Why Model Subbasins with Storm Sewer Interconnects

Inaccurately designed storm sewer systems lead to real consequences, including flooded roads, eroded channels, damaged utilities, and costly emergency repairs. A well-designed and accurately modeled storm sewer system provides several important benefits:

  • Reduced flood risk: Efficient conveyance of runoff minimizes surface water accumulation on roads, parking lots, and other urban surfaces.
  • Protected infrastructure and property: Properly sized pipes and well-placed outfalls reduce the risk of damage to roads, utilities, and buildings.
  • Sustainable urban development: Reliable stormwater infrastructure supports long-term land use planning and community resilience.
  • Public health and safety: Effective drainage reduces exposure to waterborne hazards and prevents the localized flooding that endangers pedestrians and vehicles.

Key Considerations for Effective Hydrological Management

Before building a storm sewer model, engineers should gather sufficient information about the watershed and the existing or proposed infrastructure. The accuracy of the model depends heavily on how well the drainage area and storm sewer network are represented. The following factors are essential for effective hydrological management in the design of storm sewer systems:

  1. Assess catchment characteristics.
    Review rainfall patterns, soil types, land use, and impervious cover for each subbasin. These inputs directly affect runoff volume and peak discharge calculations.
  2. Conduct hydrological analysis and modeling.
    Estimate stormwater runoff rates and volumes using an appropriate method for the drainage area size and available data. See the Design Principles section below for method guidance.
  3. Design for anticipated flows.
    Size pipes and other components to handle both peak discharge rates and total runoff volumes, while also accounting for future land use changes where applicable.
unknown node

Design Principles and Best Practices

Hydrological Analysis

Hydrologic analysis is the foundation of storm sewer system design. It estimates the runoff volume and peak discharge generated from each subbasin during a storm event. Selecting the right method is important because using a method outside the intended range can produce unreliable flow estimates and lead to under-designed or over-designed infrastructure.

Common hydrological analysis methods used for urban storm sewer design include:

  • Rational Method: Best suited for small urban catchments, typically under 80 hectares (200 acres). Estimates peak discharge using rainfall intensity, the runoff coefficient, and the time of concentration. Simple, widely accepted, and appropriate for inlet and pipe sizing in urban settings.
  • SCS Curve Number Method: Considers soil type, land use, and antecedent moisture conditions to estimate runoff volume and peak discharge. More appropriate for larger or more complex drainage areas where storage and routing effects are significant.
unknown node

Pipe Sizing

Proper pipe sizing is essential to ensure that storm sewer systems can convey peak flows without surcharge, overflow, or excessive backwater effects. Undersized pipes are one of the most common causes of localized urban flooding.

Key considerations for pipe sizing include:

  • Expected peak flow from upstream subbasins.
  • Pipe characteristics, such as material, roughness, and slope.
  • Available cover, utility conflicts, and right-of-way constraints.
  • Existing infrastructure limitations, such as fixed pipe alignments, inverts, or downstream capacity.

Pipe Slope

The longitudinal slope of a storm sewer pipe directly affects flow velocity, sediment transport, and hydraulic capacity. Pipes that are too flat allow sediment to accumulate and reduce capacity over time. Pipes that are too steep may cause erosion at outfall locations or generate excessive scour velocities inside the pipe barrel.

As a general design guideline, the pipe slope should be sufficient to maintain a minimum flow velocity of 0.75 m/s (2.5 ft/s) under peak flow conditions. This threshold helps prevent sediment deposition within the pipe. Always verify minimum velocity requirements against local design standards, which may differ from this general guideline.

unknown node

Components of Storm Sewer Systems

A storm sewer system consists of several interconnected components that collect, convey, and discharge stormwater runoff. Each component plays a specific role in moving runoff from the drainage area to the downstream outfall. Understanding these elements is important for building an accurate and reliable storm sewer model.

The table below provides a quick summary of each component and its role in the overall drainage network.

unknown node

Subbasins

Subbasins represent individual drainage areas that produce surface runoff during storm events. Subbasins are delineated based on surface topography, land use, and the direction of overland flow. Each subbasin is defined by parameters such as area, imperviousness, soil type, and slope, all of which influence how much runoff is generated and how quickly it reaches the downstream inlet, manhole, or junction. In GeoSTORM, subbasins can be drawn and assigned directly to manholes or junctions within the storm sewer network. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to draw subbasins.

Inlets and Catch Basins

Inlets are the points where stormwater enters the underground drainage system. They are commonly placed at low points along roads, parking lots, and other paved areas to capture runoff from impervious surfaces.

Catch basins are underground chambers positioned beneath inlets. Catch basins temporarily store stormwater runoff and trap sediment and debris to prevent clogging in downstream pipes. Regular maintenance of catch basins is essential to ensure effective pollutant removal and uninterrupted flow.

Pipes

Stormwater pipes convey collected runoff from inlets and catch basins through the underground network toward the terminal outfall. Pipes are typically made of materials such as concrete, cast iron, and PVC. Material selection affects roughness coefficients, structural capacity, and long-term durability. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to draw pipes.

Manholes

Manholes are covered openings in the ground that provide access to storm sewer pipes for inspection, maintenance, and cleaning. Manholes are typically located at pipe junctions, changes in pipe direction or size, and at regular intervals along the pipe run. Manholes are usually covered with heavy lids to prevent unauthorized access and to ensure safety. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to draw manholes.

Terminal Outfalls

Terminal outfalls are the downstream discharge points where the storm sewer system releases collected stormwater into a receiving water body, such as a river, lake, or ocean. Outfall design must account for outlet velocity and the potential for erosion of the receiving channel or streambank. Energy dissipaters, riprap aprons, or flared end sections are commonly used to reduce outlet velocity and protect receiving waters. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to draw terminal outfalls.

How Subbasins Connect to Storm Sewer Network

In a storm sewer model, each subbasin should be connected to the underground drainage network through an appropriate outlet point, such as a manhole, junction, or inlet. This connection defines where surface runoff enters the pipe network and how it is routed downstream.

Subbasins can be connected to the storm sewer network in the following ways:

Subbasin-to-Manhole/Junction Connection

Subbasins are typically connected to the storm sewer network by assigning each subbasin to a nearby manhole or junction. The outlet should represent the actual point where runoff from the drainage area enters the underground network.

When defining this connection,

  • Delineate subbasins based on the surface topography, land use, and the direction of overland flow.
  • Assign each subbasin an outlet point, typically a nearby manhole or junction within the underground pipe network.
  • Verify that runoff from the subbasin is routed into the intended portion of the underground pipe network.

Routing through the Storm Sewer Network

  • After runoff enters the storm sewer network, it is routed through the connected pipes, manholes, catch basins, and other hydraulic structures until it reaches the terminal outfall.
  • Where necessary, additional components such as detention storage, control structures, weirs, orifices, valves, or overflow connections can be included to regulate flow, manage surcharge conditions, or represent more complex stormwater infrastructure.
unknown node

Observing Pipe Profiles

After defining the storm sewer model and running a simulation, it is important to review pipe profiles to visualize and validate overall storm sewer system performance. In GeoSTORM, the Profile Plot command allows the user to display stormwater pipe and ditch profile (long section) plots. A profile plot helps you to:

  • Visualize the underground layout: See pipe inverts, manhole rim elevations, pipe grades, and the relative positions of all network components along the selected alignment.
  • Review hydraulic performance: Display the Hydraulic Grade Line (HGL) and Energy Grade Line (EGL) overlaid on the pipe profile to quickly identify surcharging, pressure flow conditions, or inadequate hydraulic capacity.
  • Adjust the design: Modify pipe diameters, slopes, and invert elevations directly within the profile view and immediately see the impact on computed hydraulic grades.
  • Export for documentation: Export profile drawings to AutoCAD or MicroStation for inclusion in construction plan sets and design documentation packages.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Profile Plot command.

The following image shows how subbasins are connected within a storm sewer model in GeoSTORM.

Urban Subbasins with Storm Sewer Interconnects Img 1

Advantages of Modeling Storm Sewer Systems

The key benefits of modeling storm sewer systems include:

  • Public Safety
    Prevents water accumulation on streets and sidewalks during storm events, reducing traffic hazards and risks of injury.
  • Property Protection
    Minimizes the risk of water intrusion, erosion, and flood damage to buildings, roads, and underground utilities.
  • Environmental Compliance
    Controls discharge and captures sediment to reduce pollutant transport to natural water bodies, supporting regulatory compliance and environmental health.
  • Infrastructure Planning
    Provides insights into system capacity and performance, helping engineers plan upgrades, optimize pipe sizing, and reduce costly future retrofits.

Conclusion

Urban subbasins with storm sewer interconnects should be modeled as part of a connected drainage system, not as isolated runoff areas. When subbasins, inlets, pipes, manholes, and outfalls are connected correctly in a storm sewer model, engineers can better evaluate system performance, identify capacity shortfalls, and design infrastructure that protects communities and the environment. GeoSTORM streamlines this process by combining subbasin delineation, hydrologic analysis, pipe network routing, and profile visualization in a single, map-based environment. As a final check, engineers should review the pipe profile, HGL, EGL, and outfall discharge to confirm that the storm sewer model reflects real-world system behavior.

Storm Sewer Network › Manholes

Flow Control Manhole and Back Flows

In stormwater drainage systems, flow-control manholes (FCMs) are critical elements used to regulate flow between different segments of a network, especially storage units and downstream conduits (pipes or culverts). These flow control manholes are crucial for managing the volume and velocity of stormwater in a drainage system, ensuring its efficiency and stability. Improper handling of flow direction or backflows can lead to downstream flooding during periods of heavy rainfall.

Flow Control Manhole

A flow control manhole is a junction structure included in a stormwater drainage system that is designed to restrict, delay, or control the movement of water through a conduit or open channel. These controls may be achieved through use of the following elements in a drainage system:

  • Orifices
  • Weirs
  • Flap gates
  • Internal restrictions caused by specific pipe geometry

Flow control manholes are often placed between a storage unit and an outlet pipe to prevent overflow or backflow during peak storm events.

Understanding Backflow Conditions

Backflow in a drainage system occurs when water flows in a direction opposite of its intended flow. This happens due to:

  • High tailwater elevations in the downstream system
  • Flat or zero-sloped conduits
  • Surcharged manholes or pipes
  • Improper configuration of pipe flow directions

Design Considerations and Best Practices for Modeling Flow Control Manholes

  • Check and verify pipe orientation to ensure expected flow behavior.
  • Utilize invert elevations and storage depth limits to manage surcharge and reverse flow in a drainage system.
  • Model orifices and flap gates correctly in the software to simulate the internal hydraulic behavior of flow control manholes.

Handling Outflows and Backflows in GeoSTORM

GeoSTORM simulates flow behavior using the dynamic wave routing method, including the reversal of flow when downstream hydraulic grades exceed upstream inverts. GeoSTORM uses the St. Venant equations, accounting for flow reversal based on head differentials between nodes.

Stormwater pipes are modeled with designated start and end nodes, and the flow direction is computed dynamically. If the downstream head (Hydraulic grade line) exceeds the upstream invert elevation, GeoSTORM allows flow reversal, and results may show negative flow rate values.

Note that a flap gate or control element (such as an orifice plate or vortex flow control device) must be correctly modeled for the software to prevent flow reversal.

In GeoSTORM, the user can navigate to the Outflow Control panel in the Manhole Data dialog box to specify how the manhole discharges flow from control devices to the downstream pipe.

Outflow Control panel in the Manhole Data dialog box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Outflow Control panel of the Manhole Data command.

Common Issues Affecting Flow Control and Backflows

unknown node
Storm Sewer Network › Manholes

Manhole Data Command

A manhole is a covered opening in the ground that provides access to underground public utilities such as sewers, storm drains, electricity, etc. for the purpose of inspection, cleaning, unblocking, or repair. In a stormwater drainage system, a manhole represents a physical junction that acts as a connection point between elements such as pipes.

In GeoSTORM software, manholes can be drawn or assigned using Draw Manholes and Assign Manholes commands. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to incorporate manholes into your stormwater project.

After adding manholes to the stormwater project, the Manhole Data command can be used to define additional data and view the corresponding output results associated with the manholes.

Follow the steps below to use the Manhole Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manhole Structures dropdown menu and select the Manhole Data command.
    Manhole-Data-Command-Img-1.png
  2. The Manhole Data dialog box will be displayed as shown below.
    Manhole Data dialog box

The following sections of this article describe how to use the Manhole Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Manhole

The Select Manhole section allows the user to select the manhole for which manhole data will be defined. In this section, the user can create, delete, and copy existing manhole data to a new manhole. In addition, the user can navigate between manholes and enter a description for each manhole.

Select Manhole section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Manhole ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all manholes defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the manhole ID. The Up and Down arrow buttons allow the user to switch between the next adjacent downstream and upstream manholes. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the manhole from the Map View. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains only one manhole.
  • Description
    This optional text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected manhole.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new manhole on the Map View. The ID of every newly created manhole must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the selected manhole on the Map View along with its associated data. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied manhole.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected manhole from the current scenario.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Manhole section header allow the user to expand or collapse the Computed Results section. Note that The Computed Results section will be unavailable when Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engine.

Manhole Specifications

This section allows the user to define general parameters for the selected manhole and the following data panel entries are available in this dropdown combo box:

  • General Specification
  • Additional Inflows
  • Outflow Control
Manhole Specifications dropdown combo box

General Specification

The General Specification panel allows the user to define general parameters for the selected manhole.

General Specification panel

Manhole Definition

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Manhole structure type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of manhole structure to be defined. The following manhole structure types are available:
    1. Bolted Cover Manhole
    2. Force Main Connection
    3. Junction Box
    4. Standard Manhole
    Manhole structure type dropdown combo box
  • Rim elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the manhole rim elevation. The user can click the […] button to select the manhole rim elevation from the Map View. Note that this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out) when Force Main Connection is selected as the manhole structure type.
  • Invert elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the manhole invert elevation.
  • Bolted cover blowout elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the maximum additional pressure head above the ground elevation that the manhole can sustain before overflowing. This value should be specified high enough above the rim elevation. Note that this entry field is only enabled when Bolted Cover Manhole is selected as the manhole structure type. Otherwise, this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Sump depth
    This entry field allows the user to define the sump depth required at the manhole. The sump depth of a manhole represents the vertical offset from the manhole bottom invert elevation to the lowest invert of the connected pipes. Note that this entry field is typically used when laying out a pipe run.
  • Interior footprint area
    This entry field allows the user to define the manhole’s interior storage area. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to measure interior storage area from the Map View by drawing a temporary polygon. Note that this entry field is only enabled when Junction Box is selected as the manhole structure type. Otherwise, this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Maximum pipe cover
    If a terrain surface has been defined in the model, the software automatically computes what the maximum pipe cover is for the selected manhole by examining all pipes connected to the manhole and determining the distance from the rim to the pipe crown.
    • Maximum pipe cover
  • Minimum pipe cover
    If a terrain surface has been defined in the model, the software automatically computes what the minimum pipe cover is for the selected manhole by examining all pipes connected to the manhole and determining the distance from the rim to the pipe crown.
  • Initial water surface elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the water surface elevation in the manhole at the start of the simulation.
  • Ponded area
    This entry field allows the user to define the storage area occupied by ponded water at the top of the manhole once the water depth exceeds the rim elevation of the manhole.

Additional Inflows

The Additional Inflows panel allows the user to specify any external inflows at the manhole. These inflows can consist of both a constant and a time-varying component. The additional inflows are applied directly to the manhole and can be used for flow routing in the absence of any runoff computations (e.g., in a study area where no subbasins are defined). In river or stream modeling, user-defined inflows can be used to define the baseflow.

Additional Inflows panel

Baseline Inflows

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Baseline inflow
    This entry field allows the user to define a constant baseline inflow. If this field is left blank, then no baseline inflow is assumed.
  • Baseline pattern (optional)
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an optional time pattern defined in the current scenario whose factors adjust the baseline inflow. If this dropdown list is left blank, then the baseline inflow will not be adjusted.
    Baseline pattern (optional) dropdown combo box
    Clicking on the [Define] button displays the Time Patterns Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a specific pattern to be applied to the defined Baseline Inflow. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Time Patterns Data dialog box.

Time Series Inflows

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Time series scale factor
    This entry field allows the user to define a multiplier to adjust the values of the inflow time series.
  • Time series inflow
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the time series inflow defined in the current scenario. If None is selected, no time series inflow will be assigned to the manhole.
    Time series inflow dropdown combo box
    Clicking on the [Define] button displays the Time Series Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a specific time series inflow data set to be used. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Time Series Data dialog box.

Outflow Control

The Outflow Control panel allows the user to specify how the manhole discharges flow from orifice and vortex control devices to the downstream pipe.

Manhole-Data-Command-Capture-11.png

Outflow Control Specifications

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Outflow control type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the outflow control type to be used. The following outflow control types are available:
    1. None
    2. Orifice Control
    3. Vortex Control
    Outflow control type dropdown combo box
  • Backflow flap gate
    This checkbox option specifies whether a flap gate will be enabled to prevent backflow (or flow reversal). By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
  • Routing reference method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the routing reference method to be used. Note that this dropdown combo box is only enabled when Vortex Control is selected as the outflow control type. Otherwise, this dropdown combo box is disabled (i.e., grayed out). The following routing reference methods are available:
    1. None
    2. Head Differential
    3. Water Surface Depth
    4. Water Surface Elevation
    Routing reference method dropdown combo box
  • Orifice shape
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the horizontal orifices that the software supports. Note that this dropdown combo box is only enabled when Orifice Control is selected as the outflow control type. Otherwise, this dropdown combo box is disabled (i.e., grayed out). The following orifice shapes are available:
    1. Circular
    2. Rectangular
    Orifice shape dropdown combo box
  • Control structure invert elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the invert elevation of the control structure defined.
  • Orifice diameter or width
    This entry field allows the user to define the width of a rectangular orifice or the diameter of a circular orifice. Note that this entry field is only enabled when Orifice Control is selected as the outflow control type. Otherwise, this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Orifice height
    This entry field allows the user to define the height of a rectangular orifice. Note that this entry field is only enabled when Orifice Control is selected as the outflow control type. Otherwise, this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Orifice coefficient
    This entry field allows the user to define the orifice discharge coefficient for the horizontal orifice embedded into the vertical riser structure. Clicking on the […] lookup button displays the Orifice Discharge Coefficients dialog box that allows the user to select the orifice discharge coefficient to be assigned. Note that this entry field is only enabled when Orifice Control is selected as the outflow control type. Otherwise, this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
    Orifice Discharge Coefficients dialog box
Rating Curve Data

This subpanel displays a data grid that defines the rating curve parameters corresponding to the method selected in the Routing reference method dropdown combo box. Note that this subpanel is only enabled when Vortex Control is selected as the outflow control type. Otherwise, this subpanel is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Rating Curve Data subpanel

The following columns are provided in the data grid:

  • Water Surface Depth
    This column defines the water surface depth that is used to construct the rating curve. Note that this column header name changes based upon the selected routing reference method, as shown in the below table.

    Routing Reference Method

    Column 1

    Column 2

    Head Differential

    Head Differential

    Flow Rate

    Water Surface Depth

    Water Surface Depth

    Flow Rate

    Water Surface Elevation

    Water Surface Elevation

    Flow Rate

  • Flow Rate
    This column references the flow rate that is used to construct the rating curve.
Rating Curve Plot

This subpanel displays a graphical plot corresponding to the data defined in the Rating Curve Data subpanel. Note that this subpanel is only enabled when Vortex Control is selected as the outflow control type. Otherwise, this subpanel is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Rating Curve Plot subpanel

Computational Results

After successfully computing the analysis, this section provides a summary of the stormwater computational results for the selected manhole.

Computational Results section

The following results are provided in this section:

  • Peak inflow
    This read-only field displays the peak inflow at the manhole during the storm event.
  • Maximum WSEL
    This read-only field displays the maximum water surface elevation at the manhole during the storm event.
  • Maximum water depth
    This read-only field displays the maximum water depth at the manhole during the storm event.
  • Minimum freeboard
    Freeboard height of the manhole is the distance between the rim elevation of the manhole and the water surface level. This read-only field displays the minimum freeboard at the manhole during the storm event.
  • Stored water volume
    This read-only field displays the total stored water volume at the manhole during the storm event.
Storm Sewer Network › Manholes

Assign Manhole Elevations Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Assign Manhole Elevations command allows the user to assign rim and invert elevations to the selected manhole(s). This command uses the elevation terrain surface to compute the rim and invert elevation of an individual manhole(s) with respect to the terrain surface available in the project.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Manhole Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manhole Structures dropdown menu and select the Assign Manhole Elevations command.
    Assign Manhole Elevations command
  2. The Assign Manhole Elevations dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Assign Manhole Elevations dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Manhole Elevations command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Manholes

The Select Manholes section allows the user to select one or more manholes to assign rim and invert elevations. This section includes a table that lists all the manhole(s) contained within the current scenario of the project, as shown below.

Select Manholes section

The user can select manhole(s) using any of the following methods to assign rim and invert elevations:

  • Check the checkboxes corresponding to each manhole in the Select Manholes section.

  • Click the [Pick] button, the Assign Manhole Elevations dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the manhole(s) from the Map View. After selecting the manhole(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign Manhole Elevations dialog box will be redisplayed.

  • Alternatively, press and hold down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the manhole(s) directly from the Map View. When finished, open the Assign Manhole Elevations dialog box, and the selected manhole(s) will be shown as selected/checked within the Select Manholes section.

After selecting the manhole(s), the total number of selected manhole(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Total selected read-only field

Assign Rim and Invert Elevations

This section allows the user to:

  • Assign the rim and invert elevations to the manhole(s) using a terrain model.

  • Define the invert depth using the Manhole depth entry field to raise or lower the invert of the manhole by the specified amount. A negative invert depth value lowers the manhole by the specified amount.

  • Define the sump depth required at a manhole using the Sump depth entry field. The sump depth of the manhole represents the vertical offset from the manhole bottom invert elevation to the lowest invert of the connected pipes.

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the terrain elevation source type selected, the contents of the Assign Rim & Invert Elevations section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

Assign Rim and Invert Elevations section

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN surface

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Rim & Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Rim & Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Rim & Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Assigning Manhole Elevations

Once the data have been defined in the Assign Manhole Elevations dialog box, click the [Assign] button and the software will assign the rim and invert elevations to the selected manhole(s).

Storm Sewer Network › Manholes

Manhole Table Edit Command

In GeoSTORM, the Manhole Table Edit command allows the user to view and edit all the parameters of the manholes in a single editable data grid. The user can also view the corresponding output results from this data grid.

Follow the steps below to use the Manhole Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manhole Structures dropdown menu and select the Manhole Table Edit command.
    Manhole Table Edit command
  2. The Manhole Table Edit dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Manhole Table Edit dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Manhole Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storm Results

In the Select Storm Results section, the Storm result to display dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storm frequency whose result is to be displayed.

Select Storm Results section

Note: The Select Storm Results section is only available when either the DeKalb Rational Method, Modified Rational, or Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this section is unavailable. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engine.

Manhole Parameters

In the Manhole Parameters section, the following panels are available:

  • Manhole Data
  • Results Data

Manhole Data

This panel displays editable data grid columns listing all the manhole parameters contained in the current scenario.

Manhole Data panel

The following manhole parameters are provided in the data grid columns:

  • Manhole ID
    This editable column lists all manhole IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Rim Elevation
    This editable column lists the manhole rim elevation. The user can manually edit the manhole rim elevation directly from the entry or by clicking the corresponding [...] button and measuring the manhole rim elevation from the Map View.
  • Invert Elevation
    This editable column lists the manhole invert elevation.
  • Sump Depth
    This editable column lists the sump depth at the manhole. The sump depth of the manhole represents the vertical offset from the manhole bottom invert elevation to the lowest invert of the connected pipes.
  • Structure Type
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that allows the user to select a type of manhole structure. The following manhole structure types are available:
    1. Bolted Cover Manhole
    2. Force Main Connection
    3. Junction Box
    4. Standard Manhole
    Structure Type dropdown combo box
  • Footprint Area
    This editable column lists the manhole’s interior storage area. Note that this column is enabled only when Junction Box is selected as the structure type. Otherwise, this column is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Initial WSEL
    This editable column lists the water surface elevation (WSEL) of the manhole at the start of the simulation.
  • Overflow Ponding Area
    This editable column lists the overflow ponded area. The overflow ponded area is the storage area occupied by the ponded water on the top of the manhole after flooding occurs.
  • Baseline Inflow
    This editable column lists the constant baseline inflow.
  • Time Series Inflow
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that allows the user to select the time series inflow. Clicking the […] button displays the Time Series Data dialog box, which allows the user to define time series inflow data for manholes. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Time Series Data dialog box.

Results Data

This panel displays data grid columns listing the corresponding output results for manholes contained in the current scenario after the analysis is successfully computed.

Results Data panel

The following manhole parameters are provided in the data grid columns:

  • Manhole ID
    This editable column lists all manhole IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Peak Inflow
    This read-only column lists the computed peak inflow at the manhole during the storm event.
  • Maximum WSEL
    This read-only column lists the computed maximum water surface elevation (WSEL) at the manhole during the storm event.
  • Maximum Depth
    This read-only column lists the computed maximum water depth at the manhole during the storm event.
  • Minimum Freeboard
    This read-only column lists the computed minimum freeboard height at the manhole during the storm event. Freeboard height of the manhole is the distance between the rim elevation of the manhole and the water surface level.
  • Max Stored Water Volume
    This read-only column lists the computed maximum stored water volume at the manhole during the storm event. Note that this column shows values only for the junction box structure type. Otherwise, this column will show N/A.
  • Maximum Pipe Cover
    This read-only column lists the computed maximum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.
  • Minimum Pipe Cover
    This read-only column lists the computed minimum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.

Sorting the Manhole Table

The data in the Manhole Parameters table can be sorted by multiple columns. Users can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up or Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Sorting Manhole Table

Follow the steps below to sort the data by using multiple columns:

  • Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  • Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  • Repeat step 2 to sort the data for any additional column.

For example, first, select the Manhole ID column and click the Up arrow to sort the data in ascending order. Then, while holding down the [Shift] key, select the Invert Elevation column and click the Down arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Sorting Manhole Table

Copying and Exporting Manhole Table

The data in the Manhole Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using right-click context menu commands such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Right-click context menu commands

After editing the required manhole parameters, click the [Close] button to close the Manhole Table Edit dialog box.

Storm Sewer Network › Manholes

Renumber Interconnected Manholes Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Renumber Interconnected Manholes command allows the user to automatically renumber manholes and connected pipes along a defined pipe path.

Follow the steps below to use the Renumber Interconnected Manholes command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on Manhole Structures dropdown menu and select the Renumber Interconnected Manholes command.
    Manhole Structures dropdown menu
  2. The Renumber Interconnected Manholes dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Renumber Interconnected Manholes

The following sections describe how to use the Renumber Interconnected Manholes command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Pipes

The Select Pipes panel allows the user to select pipes that define the pipe path.

Select Multiple (Interconnected) Pipes

The Select Multiple (Interconnected) Pipes section is used to sequentially number pipes and manholes along the selected pipe path that has pipes interconnected end-to-end with each other.Click the [Pick] button to manually select the pipes from the Map View. The Renumber Interconnected Manholes dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the downstream most and upstream most pipes from the Map View that make up the pipe path. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected pipes will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Total selected read only field

Alternatively, if pipes are pre-selected on the Map View, opening the Renumber Interconnected Manholes dialog box will show those pipes selected in the corresponding table section. The selected pipes can be further unselected by unchecking the checkboxes corresponding to them.

Note that the user can pre-select multiple pipes from the Map View by pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the pipes.

Manual Editing

This section contains a table that displays the selected pipes, manholes, pipe distances, and total pipe distances. The values in the New Pipe ID and New Manhole ID columns provide a preview of the renumbered pipes and manholes defined in the Pipe Renumbering and Manhole Renumbering panels.

Manual editing section

The data contained in a table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF commands of the right-click context menu.

Right-click context menu

Pipe Renumbering

The Pipe Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber pipes based on pipe length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) and pipe renumbering cannot be performed.

Pipe Renumbering panel

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Pipe ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the pipe ID.
  • Pipe ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the pipe ID.
  • Pipe ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the pipe ID defined in this panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the pipe IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    • Downstream
    • Upstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber pipes using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Pipe ID digits: This entry field allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for the pipe ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the pipe ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available pipe ID: This entry field defines the next pipe ID number to be used.
  • Pipe ID increment: This spin control entry defines the increment to use when numbering pipes. The default value is 1.

Use Pipe Length

The Use pipe length subsection allows the user to renumber pipes based on their length along the defined pipe path. By default, the Use pipe length radio button option is selected when the Pipe Renumbering panel is checked.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Downstream pipe ID: This entry provides a pipe ID that will be used as the downstream most pipe number. Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream pipe ID entry will be changed into the Upstream pipe ID, as shown below.
    Numbering direction dropdown combo box
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of pipe length. The available options are:
    • Feet
    • Miles
  • Decimal precision: This checkbox entry defines the decimal precision to be used in renumbering pipes. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered pipes in the New Pipe ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

New Pipe ID column

Manhole Renumbering

The Manhole Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber manholes based on pipe length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) and the manhole renumbering cannot be performed.

Manhole Renumbering panel

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Manhole ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the manhole ID defined in this panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the manhole IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    • Downstream
    • Upstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber manholes using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Manhole ID digits: This entry allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for manhole ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the manhole ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available manhole ID: This entry field defines the next manhole ID number to be used.
  • Manhole ID increment: This spin control entry defines the increment to use when numbering manholes. The default value is 1.

Use Pipe Length

The Use pipe length subsection allows the user to renumber manholes based on pipe length defined along the pipe path. By default, the Use pipe length radio button option is selected when the Manhole Renumbering panel is checked.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Downstream manhole ID: This entry provides a manhole ID that will be used as the downstream most manhole number. Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream manhole ID entry will be changed into the Upstream manhole ID, as shown below.
    Numbering direction dropdown combo box
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of pipe length. The available options are:
    • Feet
    • Miles
  • Decimal precision: This checkbox entry defines the decimal precision to be used in renumbering manholes. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered manholes in the New Manhole ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

New Manhole ID column

When all the required data have been defined in the Renumber Interconnected Manholes dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the user-defined changes to the pipes and the connected manholes along a defined pipe path. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Note that when the user clicks the [Preview] button and clicks the [Close] button without applying the changes, the following confirmational dialog box will be displayed.

renumber interconnected manholes command
Storm Sewer Network › Manholes

Draw and Assign Manholes Command

A manhole is a covered opening in the ground that provides access to underground public utilities such as sewers, storm drains, electricity, etc. for the purpose of inspection, cleaning, unblocking, or repair. In a stormwater drainage system, a manhole represents a physical junction that acts as a connection point between elements such as pipes. In GeoSTORM software, manholes can be defined by either drawing or assigning nodes on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Manholes
  • Assign Manholes

After drawing/assigning manholes, the user can use the Manhole Data command to define additional manhole data. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Manhole Data command.

Drawing/Assigning Manholes

The Draw/Assign Manholes command allows the user to manually draw/assign single or multiple manhole nodes on the Map View. Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Manholes command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manhole Structures dropdown menu and select the Draw/Assign Manholes command. Draw/Assign Manholes command of the Manhole Structures dropdown menu
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed.
    • Draw Manholes: Draw Manholes dialog box
    • Assign Manholes: Assign Manholes dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw/Assign Manholes command and interact with the above dialog boxes.

Drawing Manhole Nodes

The Draw Manhole Nodes section allows the user to draw single or multiple manhole nodes on the Map View. To draw a manhole node, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. [Draw] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw a manhole node on the Map View. Click on the Map View to draw the manhole node.Note: From the Manhole Specifications section, if:
    • Manhole ID option is selected, then the user can draw only one manhole node on the Map View.
    • Auto-name manhole ID option is selected, then the user can draw multiple manhole nodes on the Map View one after another until completed.
  3. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Draw Manholes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Manhole nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn. Manhole nodes read only field

Notes:

  • To place the node more accurately, use the mouse roller wheel to zoom into a specific location.
  • The Snap Mode option can be enabled to cause the drawn manhole to snap to the nearest stormwater element.

Assigning Manhole Nodes

The Select Manhole Nodes section can be used to manually assign single or multiple nodes on the Map View as manholes. To assign a manhole node, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to select a manhole node from the Map View. Click on the previously drawn manhole node on the Map View to select it.Note: From the Manhole Specifications section, if:
    • Manhole ID option is selected, then the user can select only one manhole node on the Map View.
    • Auto-name manhole ID option is selected, then the user can select multiple manhole nodes on the Map View one after another until completed.
  3. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Assign Manholes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Manhole nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. Manhole nodes read only field
  5. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Manhole Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw Manholes and Assign Manholes dialog boxes and allows the user to specify the manhole ID for each drawn/assigned manhole. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats. Follow the steps below to assign manhole IDs to the manholes:

  1. If a manhole was drawn/assigned while the Manhole ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the manhole ID in the corresponding field, as shown below. Manhole ID radio button option
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name manhole ID radio button option in order to automatically name every newly drawn/assigned manhole as per the user’s predefined naming formats as shown below. Manhole Specifications section

The different manhole naming formats present in the Auto-name manhole ID radio button option are as follows:

  • Manhole ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the manhole ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the manhole ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new elements are created.
  • Next available manhole ID: This option defines the next manhole ID number to be used.
  • Manhole ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering manholes. The default value is 1.
  • Manhole ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the manhole naming specifications defined above.

Assign Rim and Invert Elevations

This section allows the user to:

  • Assign the rim and invert elevation to the manhole using a terrain model.
  • Define the invert depth using the Manhole depth entry field to raise or lower the invert of the manhole by the specified amount. A negative invert depth value lowers the manhole by the specified amount.
  • Define the sump depth required at a manhole using the Sump depth entry field. The sump depth of the manhole represents the vertical offset from the manhole bottom invert elevation to the lowest invert of the connected pipes. Assign Rim and Invert Elevations

Note: Define this section before drawing/assigning manholes so that the rim and invert elevation can be assigned.

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the terrain elevation source type selected, the content of the Assign Rim & Invert Elevations section changes to specify additional elevation data information. The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN surface

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Rim & Invert Elevations section changes as shown below.

Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source

The following option is displayed when the Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Rim & Invert Elevations section changes as shown below.

LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Rim & Invert Elevations section changes as shown below.

TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete drawing/assigning manholes. Note that if manholes are drawn/assigned using the Auto-name manhole ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed as disabled since the just drawn/assigned manhole have already been named and created.

Storm Sewer Network › Manholes

Georeferencing Manholes

The Georeference Manholes command allows the user to manually georeference each of the manholes to the background base map displayed in the Map View.

The process of georeferencing a manhole to the Map View can be a trial and error process—especially when the exact location of the original manhole is not known. With the use of the Georeference Manholes command, the georeferencing process can be accelerated.

Note that a CRS should be assigned before running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the below informational dialog box.

CRS Not Assigned Informational Dialog Box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing manhole:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Manhole Structures dropdown menu and select the Georeference Manholes command.
    Georeference Manholes Command
  2. The Georeference Manholes dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Manholes Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing manhole and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Manhole to Georeference

The Select Manhole to Georeference section allows the user to select the manhole that is to be georeferenced.

Follow the steps below to select the manhole to be georeferenced:

  1. Select the manhole from the Manhole ID dropdown combo box listing all the manholes contained within the current scenario.
    Select Manhole to Georeference Section
  2. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the manhole from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Manholes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next.
  3. Upon selecting the manhole, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box, and the selected manhole will be highlighted on the Map View.
  4. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Once the manhole has been selected, the user can choose between the following options to georeference the manhole:

  • Snap to Alignment Point
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snapping Manhole to an Alignment Point

If an existing alignment point for the manhole exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Point option can be used to snap the manhole to the alignment point.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Point option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Point radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick] Button - Snap to Alignment Point
  3. The Georeference Manholes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment point.
  4. Select the alignment point on the Map View. Note that the user can select only one alignment point at a time to use for georeferencing.
  5. The Georeference Manholes dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment point read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
    Select Alignment Point Read-only Field
  6. Click the [Snap] button to snap the selected manhole to the alignment point.
    [Snap] Button
    Once the user clicks the [Snap] button, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Split Entity Informational Dialog Box
    Click the [Yes] button to split the entity or abort the split process by clicking the [No] button.

Sliding Manhole Along Alignment Polyline

If a manhole has been snapped to an alignment point on the Map View but is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option can be used to slide the manhole along the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option:

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick] Button - Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  3. The Georeference Manholes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the alignment polyline, the following informational dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Yes] button to select the polyline or abort the selection by clicking the [No] button.
    Snap Entity Dialog Box
  5. Once the alignment polyline is selected, the Georeference Manholes dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment polyline element read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. Then click the [Slide] button.
    [Slide] Button
  6. The Georeference Manholes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the manhole and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline.
  7. Click and drag the manhole on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  8. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Manholes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the manhole will be georeferenced at the new location.

Note that for more precision, the user can use the Snap to Alignment Point option first and then use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option.

Drawing Manhole on Map View

The Draw on Map View option allows the user to draw a manhole node on the Map View and automatically snap the selected manhole to the drawn node.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button.
    [Draw] Button
  2. The Georeference Manholes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the manhole node on the Map View.
  3. Draw the manhole node on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Manholes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the manhole will automatically snap to the drawn node.

Assigning Rim & Invert Elevations

The user can check the Assign Rim & Invert Elevations checkbox option to assign rim and invert elevations to the manhole using a terrain model.

Assigning Rim & Invert Elevations Section

Define this section before georeferencing manholes so that the rim and invert elevations can be assigned.

To assign rim and invert elevations, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

The user can define an invert depth using the Manhole depth entry field to raise or lower the invert of the manhole by the specified amount. A negative invert depth value lowers the manhole by the specified amount.

The user can use the Sump depth entry field to define the sump depth required at the manhole. The sump depth of a manhole represents the vertical offset from the manhole bottom invert elevation to the lowest invert of the connected pipes.

Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Pipe Data Command

Pipes are conduits in stormwater drainage systems, designed to transport captured runoff from one node to another. Pipes play a vital role in urban drainage by efficiently managing stormwater runoff and preventing flooding. Pipes connect various drainage system elements, such as manholes, catch basins, and outlets. Pipes can be constructed from materials like concrete, cast iron, and PVC.

In GeoSTORM software, pipes can be drawn or assigned using Draw Pipes and Assign Pipes commands. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to incorporate pipes into a stormwater project.

After adding pipes to a stormwater project, the Pipe Data command can be used to define additional data and view the corresponding output results associated with the pipes.

Follow the steps below to use the Pipe Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Stormwater Pipes dropdown menu and select the Pipe Data command.
    Pipe Data command
  2. The Pipe Data dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Pipe Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Pipe Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Pipe

The Select Pipe section allows the user to select the pipe for which pipe data will be defined. In this section, the user can create, delete, and copy existing pipe data to a new pipe. In addition , the user can navigate between pipes and enter a description for each pipe.

Select Pipe section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Pipe ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the pipes defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the pipe ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next pipe using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the [...] button to select the pipe from the Map View. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains a single pipe.
  • Description
    This optional field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected pipe.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new pipe on the Map View. The ID of every newly created pipe must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy an existing pipe along with its associated data to a new pipe. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied pipe.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected pipe from the current scenario.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Pipe section header allows the user to expand or collapse the Computed Results section.

Pipe Specifications

Pipe Specifications section

Pipe Definition

This section allows the user to define general parameters for the selected pipe.

Pipe Definition section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Shape
    This dropdown combo box lists all the pipe shapes that the software supports. By default, a Circular pipe shape is selected.
    Shape dropdown combo box
    Clicking on the [...] button displays the Select Pipe Shape dialog box, which allows the user to select any non-circular pipe shape that the software supports.
    Select Pipe Shape dialog box
  • Backflow flap gate
    This checkbox option specifies whether a flap gate will be enabled to prevent backflow (or flow reversal) for the pipe. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
  • Number parallel pipes
    This spin control entry field specifies the number of identical parallel pipes to be defined. By default, the software uses a value of 1. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 1 to 100.
  • Diameter
    This dropdown combo box defines the internal diameter for the selected pipe. The user can click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the pipe diameter. Clicking on the […] button displays the Define Standard Pipe Dimensions dialog box that allows the user to define additional pipe diameters. These additional pipe diameters will then be listed in the Pipe diameter dropdown combo box. Note that this dropdown combo box is available only for the Circular pipe shape.
    Define Standard Pipe Dimensions dialog box
  • Width
    This entry field defines the width of the pipe. The following table shows when this field is enabled or disabled based on the shape of the pipe:

    Pipe Shape

    Width

    Arch

    Enabled

    Basket Handle

    Disabled

    Basket Handel, Modified

    Enabled

    Catenary

    Disabled

    Circular

    Disabled

    Egg

    Disabled

    Ellipse, Horizontal

    Enabled

    Ellipse, Semi

    Disabled

    Ellipse, Vertical

    Enabled

    Gothic

    Disabled

    Horseshoe

    Disabled

    Rectangular

    Enabled

    Rectangular & Circular

    Enabled

    Rectangular & Triangular

    Enabled

    Semi-Circular

    Disabled


  • Size code
    This read-only entry field displays the specific code for each pipe dimension selected in the dropdown combo box next to this field. Note that the dropdown combo box is available only for the Arch, Ellipse Horizontal, or Ellipse Vertical pipe shape.
    Size code read-only field
  • Length
    This entry field defines the length of the pipe being modeled. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the pipe length from the Map View. Clicking on the [Recalc] button allows the software to recalculate the digitized length of the current pipe. Similarly, clicking on the [Recalc All] button allows the software to recalculate the digitized length of all pipes in the network.
  • Inlet invert elevation
    This entry field defines the pipe invert elevations on the upstream end. Clicking on the [Up] arrow button causes the pipe invert elevation to be set so that the crown (top) of the pipe matches the crown of the largest diameter pipe that already connects to the same node. Clicking on the [Down] arrow button causes the pipe invert elevation to be set equal to the connecting node invert elevation.
  • Outlet invert elevation
    This entry field defines the pipe invert elevation on the downstream end. Clicking on the [Up] arrow button causes the pipe invert elevation to be set so that the crown (top) of the pipe matches the crown of the largest diameter pipe that already connects to the same node. Clicking on the [Down] arrow button causes the pipe invert elevation to be set equal to the connecting node invert elevation.
  • From (Inlet node)
    This read-only field defines the node ID on the inlet end of the pipe. The user can click the […] button to select the inlet node from the Map View. Clicking on the [Swap] button allows the user to switch the inlet and outlet nodes, effectively reversing the direction of the pipe.
  • To (Outlet node)
    This read-only field defines the node ID on the outlet end of the pipe. The user can click the […] button to select the outlet node from the Map View.
  • Pipe slope (H:V)
    This entry field displays the slope of the pipe. In addition, this field can be used to set the slope of the pipe. The user can click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) adjacent to the Pipe slope (H:V) field to change the read-only field into an editable field. The user can then enter the pipe slope and click on the [Accept changes] button. The software will then adjust the unlocked pipe end invert elevation to meet the updated slope value.
    [Accept changes] button
    Note: To set the slope of the pipe, the user should first select the end of the pipe invert elevation that is to be locked. The following options are provided in the dropdown combo box adjacent to the Pipe slope (H:V) entry field:
    1. Lock Downstream Invert
    2. Lock Upstream Invert

Note that based upon the selected shape of the pipe, the following additional options will be available in the Pipe Definition section:

  • Height
    This entry field defines the height of the pipe. Note that this entry field is available only for the non-circular pipe shape.
    Height entry field
  • Triangle depth
    This entry field defines the depth of the triangular pipe, which is the vertical distance from the base to the topmost point (apex). Note that this entry field is available only for the Rectangular & Triangular pipe shape.
    Triangle depth entry field
  • Top radius
    This entry field defines the radius of the pipe, which is the distance from the center of the top curve to the outer edge of the pipe. Note that this entry field is available only for the Basket Handle, Modified pipe shape.
    Top radius entry field
  • Bottom radius
    This entry field defines the radius of the pipe, which is the distance from the center of the bottom curve to the outer edge of the pipe. Note that this entry field is available only for the Rectangular & Circular pipe shape.
    Bottom radius entry field

Pipe Coefficients

This section allows the user to define Manning’s roughness, entrance loss, exit loss, and other head losses coefficients for the selected pipe.

Pipe Coefficients section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry field defines the roughness of the pipe. Clicking on the [...] button displays the Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a pipe.
    Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box
  • Entrance loss coefficient
    This entry field defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the inlet of the pipe as the flow enters the pipe from a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking on the [...] button displays the Entrance Loss Coefficients For Pipes lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the entrance loss coefficient to be assigned to a pipe.
    Entrance Loss Coefficients For Pipes lookup dialog box
  • Exit/bend loss coefficient
    This entry field is used to define the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the outlet of the pipe as the flow leaves the pipe and enters a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking on the [...] button displays the Exit Loss Coefficients For Pipes lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the exit loss coefficient to be assigned to a pipe.
    Exit Loss Coefficients For Pipes lookup dialog box
  • Other head losses coeff
    This entry field defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses along the length of the pipe.

Computational Results

After successfully computing the analysis, this section provides a summary of the stormwater computational results for the selected pipe.

Computational Results section

The following results are provided in this section:

  • Peak flow rate
    This read-only field displays the peak flow rate in the pipe during the storm event.
  • Maximum flow velocity
    This read-only field displays the maximum flow velocity in the pipe during the storm event.
  • Design flow capacity
    This read-only field displays the flow rate capacity of the pipe for gravity flow conditions (i.e., non-pressurized).
  • Additional flow capacity
    This read-only field displays the difference between the Peak flow rate and the Design flow capacity values.
  • Max/design flow ratio
    This read-only field displays the ratio of the Peak flow rate to the Design flow capacity values.
  • Max/total depth ratio
    This read-only field displays the ratio of pipe flow depth to pipe diameter.
  • Total time surcharged
    This read-only field displays the duration (in minutes) during hydrodynamic routing when the pipe's Max/Total Depth Ratio was ≥ 100%.
  • Maximum pipe cover
    This read-only field displays the computed maximum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.
  • Minimum pipe cover
    This read-only field displays the computed minimum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.
Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Water Surface Profile within a Pipe

In stormwater modeling and drainage system design, understanding the behavior of water as it flows through a closed conduit, such as a pipe or culvert, is essential. One crucial aspect to determine this is the water surface profile, which represents the longitudinal variation in flow depth along the pipe.

Accurately determining the water surface profile helps the user anticipate flow conditions, locate hydraulic jumps, and verify that systems perform within acceptable limits.

Factors Impacting the Water Surface Profile

The following factors impact the water surface profile in a pipe:

  • Flow Rate
    Flow rates can change the flow pattern and affect how full the pipe is.
  • Pipe Slope
    The slope of the pipe impacts flow velocity and energy grade, which in turn affects depth variations.
  • Pipe Geometry
    The diameter, shape, and cross-section of the pipe determine the hydraulic radius and flow area, which further impacts the water surface profile.
  • Pipe Roughness
    The Manning’s roughness value (represented by “n”) impacts the flow velocity and depth.
  • Boundary Conditions
    Tailwater level, flow pattern, and inlet/outlet control also impact how the water surface profile develops.

Applications of Water Surface Profiling

The following represent widespread applications associated with determining water surface profiles within a pipe:

  • Stormwater Management
    Determining the water surface profile helps to design pipes that avoid surcharging or flooding during storm events.
  • Hydraulic Engineering
    Civil engineers can use the water surface profile to analyze the gradually varied flow and identify transitions such as supercritical to subcritical flow (hydraulic jump) within a pipe.
  • Water Distribution Systems and Drainage Network
    Determining the water surface profile also ensures optimal system performance and flow capacity under varied demand conditions.

Key Hydraulic Equations for Analysis

Continuity Equation

This equation expresses the conservation of mass in a flowing system. The discharge (Q) is the product of flow velocity (v) and cross-sectional flow area (A).

Continuity Equation

Where:

Q = Discharge (flow rate)

v = Flow velocity

A = Cross-sectional flow area

Manning’s Equation

This equation estimates flow in an open channel or under partially full pipe conditions. It accounts for pipe shape and cross-sectional area (A), surface roughness (or Manning’s roughness) coefficient (n), hydraulic radius (R), and channel slope (S).

Manning’s Equation

Where:

Q = Discharge (flow rate)

n = Manning's roughness coefficient

A = Cross-sectional flow area

R = Hydraulic radius

s = Channel slope

Energy Equation

This equation compares energy at two points in the system. It considers velocity head (v²/2g) and elevation head (Y), allowing engineers to evaluate changes in flow energy along the pipe.

Energy Equation

Where:

v2/2g = Velocity head

Y = Elevation head

Determining Water Surface Profile within a Pipe

The water surface profile within a pipe is determined by comparing energy levels at two sections along the pipe. Starting from a known depth at one end, the energy is calculated for the next section to estimate the flow depth there. This process is repeated along the length of the pipe until the profile is established from start to end.

To determine the water surface profile within a pipe, the user can:

Define the Pipe System

Define the pipe geometry, that is, length, diameter, and slope of the pipe.

Determine the Flow Pattern

Determine the pattern of the flow through the flow type. The full flow represents the pressurized flow conditions, and the partially full flow represents open channel flow conditions.

Apply the Key Hydraulic Equations

Use the appropriate equations (Continuity, Manning’s, and Energy) to compute the flow depth at each section.

Identify Potential Hydraulic Jumps

In some cases, a hydraulic jump may occur when supercritical flow transitions to subcritical flow, often causing a sudden rise in the water surface. This occurs due to a change in slope, downstream controls, or other energy-loss conditions. Identifying where a hydraulic jump might occur is important for assessing energy dissipation and flow behavior within the pipe. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydraulic jump.

Water Surface Profiles in GeoSTORM

In GeoSTORM, users can compute and visualize the water surface profile within a pipe using the Profile Plot command. The following illustration displays a typical water surface profile within a pipe in GeoSTORM:

Profile Plot command

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Profile Plot command.

Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Draw and Assign Pipes Command

In GeoSTORM, pipes can be defined by either drawing or assigning polylines on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Pipes
  • Assign Pipes

After adding pipes to a stormwater project, the user can use the Pipe Data command to define additional pipe data. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Pipe Data command.

Draw Pipes Command

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Pipes command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Stormwater Pipes dropdown menu and select the Draw Pipes command.
    Draw Pipes command
  2. The Draw Pipes dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Pipes dialog box

Drawing Pipe Elements

The Draw Pipe Elements section allows the user to draw single or multiple polylines on the Map View as pipes.

Follow the steps below to draw pipes:

  1. Click the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Draw] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw a pipe polyline on the Map View in the upstream to downstream direction.Note: From the Pipe Specifications section of the Pipe Naming panel, if:
    • Pipe ID option is selected, then the user can draw only one pipe polyline on the Map View.
    • Auto-name pipe ID option is selected, then the user can draw multiple pipe polylines on the Map View one after another until completed.
  3. After drawing pipe polyline(s), the Draw Pipes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the pipe polyline(s) will be drawn on the Map View.

Notes:

  • If the “Insert intermediate manholes at pipe bends” checkbox option is checked, then the software places intermediate manholes at the pipe where it bends. If this checkbox option is unchecked, manholes can only be inserted at the ends of the pipe.
  • If the “Discard accidentally digitized pipe less than” checkbox option is checked, then the software discards accidentally digitized pipes that are shorter than the defined length. The user can define the length of the pipe in the entry field next to this checkbox option.
  • The [Reverse Direction] button reverses the flow direction of the pipe polyline drawn.

Naming Specifications

This section allows the user to define the naming specifications for each drawn pipe along with the associated manholes.

Naming Specifications section

Pipe Naming

Pipe Specifications

In the Pipe Naming panel, the Pipe Specifications subsection allows the user to specify the pipe ID for each drawn pipe. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to define naming specifications for pipes:

  1. If a pipe was drawn while the Pipe ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the pipe ID in the corresponding field, as shown below.
    Pipe ID radio button option
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name pipe ID radio button option in order to automatically name every newly drawn pipe as per the user’s predefined naming formats, as shown below.
    Auto-name pipe ID radio button optionThe different pipe naming formats present in the Auto-name pipe ID radio button option are as follows:
    • Pipe ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the pipe ID.
    • Pipe ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the pipe ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the pipe ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new pipes are created.
    • Next available pipe ID: This option defines the next pipe ID number to be used.
    • Pipe ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering pipes. The default value is 1.
    • Pipe ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the pipe ID.
    • Pipe ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the pipe naming specifications defined above.

Manhole Naming

Auto-Name Manhole ID

In the Manhole Naming panel, the Auto-Name Manhole ID subsection allows the user to specify the IDs for each manhole that are created automatically while drawing pipes. The user can assign these IDs automatically using some predefined formats.

Auto-Name Manhole ID subsection

The different manhole naming formats present in the Auto-name manhole ID radio button option are as follows:

  1. Manhole ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the manhole ID.
  2. Manhole ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the manhole ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the manhole ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new manholes are created.
  3. Next available manhole ID: This option defines the next manhole ID number to be used.
  4. Manhole ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering manholes. The default value is 1.
  5. Manhole ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the manhole ID.
  6. Manhole ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the manhole naming specifications defined above.

Assigning Invert Elevations

This section allows the user to:

  • Assign an invert elevation to the pipe using a terrain model.
  • Define the invert depth using the Pipe invert depth entry field to raise or lower the invert of the pipe by the specified amount.
  • Define the sump depth required at a manhole using the Manhole sump depth entry field.
Assign Invert Elevations section

Note: Define this section before drawing pipes so that the invert elevation and manhole sump depth can be assigned.

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the type of terrain elevation source selected, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN Surface
Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

Assign Invert Elevations section

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.
LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.
TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Other Specifications

This section allows the user to define the physical properties for the drawn pipes.

Other Specifications section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Pipe diameter
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the internal diameter for the drawn pipe. The user can click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the pipe diameter. Clicking on the […] browse button displays the Define Standard Pipe Dimensions dialog box that allows the user to define additional pipe diameters. These additional pipe diameters will then be listed in the Pipe diameter dropdown combo box.
    Pipe diameter dropdown combo box
  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry field allows the user to define Manning’s roughness for the drawn pipe. Clicking on the […] browse button displays the Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to select a Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a pipe.
    Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness dialog box

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete drawing pipes.

Note that if pipes are drawn using the Auto-name pipe ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed disabled since the just drawn pipes have already been named and created.

Assign Pipes Command

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Pipes command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Stormwater Pipes dropdown menu and select the Assign Pipes command.
    Assign Pipes command
  2. The Assign Pipes dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Pipes dialog box

Selecting Pipe Polylines

The Select Pipe Polylines section allows the user to manually assign single or multiple polylines on the Map View as pipes.

Follow the steps below to assign polylines as pipes:

  1. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to click near the downstream end of the already drawn pipe polyline on the Map View to select it.Note: From the Pipe Specifications section, if:
    • Pipe ID option is selected, then the user can select only one pipe polyline on the Map View.
    • Auto-name pipe ID option is selected, then the user can select multiple pipe polylines on the Map View one after another until completed.
  3. After selecting polyline(s), the Assign Pipes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the pipe polyline(s) will be selected on the Map View.
  4. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Notes:

  • If the “Discard accidentally digitized pipe less than” checkbox option is checked, then the software discards accidentally digitized pipes that are shorter than the defined length. The user can define the length of the pipe in the entry field next to this checkbox option.
  • The [Reverse Direction] button reverses the flow direction of the pipe polyline assigned.

Pipe Specifications

This section is similar to the Pipe Specifications subsection explained above for the Draw Pipes dialog box.

Assigning Invert Elevations

This section is similar to the Assigning Invert Elevations section explained above for the Draw Pipes dialog box.

Other Specifications

This section is similar to the Other Specifications section explained above for the Draw Pipes dialog box. It contains an additional checkbox option “Create manholes (if missing) at pipe ends.” This checkbox option allows the software to create a manhole at the pipe ends if there is no node already defined within the connection snap distance. The manhole invert elevation is set equal to the pipe invert elevation.

Other Specifications section

Note that the Create manholes (if missing) at pipe ends entry is checked by default.

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete assigning pipes.

Note that if pipes are assigned using the Auto-name pipe ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed disabled since the just assigned pipes have already been named and created.

Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Assign Pipe Invert Elevations Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Assign Pipe Invert Elevations command allows the user to assign pipe invert elevations based on the defined invert computation methods. In addition, this command allows the user to view the corresponding pipe profile plot of the selected pipe profile path.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Pipe Invert Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Stormwater Pipes dropdown menu and
    select the Assign Pipe Invert Elevations command.
    Assign Pipe Invert Elevations Command
  2. The Assign Pipe Invert Elevations dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Pipe Invert Elevations Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Pipe Invert Elevations command and interact
with the above dialog box.

Define Pipe Profile

Selecting Profile Path

In the Define Pipe Profile panel, the table under the Define Profile Path section displays the pipes or routing reaches that make up the profile path. The user can select from a pipe/routing reach/manhole/junction at both ends of the path. The software will then automatically determine the connected pipes/routing reaches between them that make up the profile path.

Follow the steps below to manually select the pipes/routing reaches to be assigned for pipe invert elevation:

  1. Click the [Pick] button to select the pipe/routing reach/manhole/junction from the Map View that makes up the profile path.
    [Pick] Button
  2. The Assign Pipe Invert Elevations dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the most downstream and upstream pipe/routing reach/manhole/junction from the Map View.
  3. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected pipes/routing reaches will be shown in the Total Selected read-only field.
    Total Selected Read-only Field
  5. The selected profile path will also get added under the Select profile path dropdown combo box.

Profile Path Table

After selecting pipe/routing reach/manhole/junction at both ends of the profile path, the table under the Define Profile Path section displays the list of all the user-selected pipes/routing reaches and their associated properties. The user can also select from the already saved profile paths from the Select profile path dropdown combo box.

Profile Path Table

The following options and properties are provided in the table viewable under the Define Profile Path section:

  • Lock/Unlock
    This table column contains a padlock icon that defines whether a row is locked or unlocked. Unlocking a row allows the software to compute new invert elevations for the pipe, as well as allow the user to manually edit the invert elevation entries. By default, the rows are unlocked.
  • Pipe/Reach ID
    This read-only table column lists the pipe or reach IDs for the selected pipe profile.
  • Upstream Invert Elevation
    This editable table column defines the pipe upstream invert elevation. If the row is locked, then this entry is displayed as a read-only field.
  • Downstream Invert Elevation
    This editable table column defines the downstream pipe invert elevation. If the row is locked, then this entry is displayed as a read-only field.
  • Maximum Ground Cover
    This read-only table column defines the computed maximum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.
  • Minimum Ground Cover
    This read-only table column defines the computed minimum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.
  • Element Length
    This read-only table column defines the pipe element length.
  • Element Slope
    This read-only table column defines the computed pipe element slope.

Notes:

  • Clicking the [Clear] button will clear the current pipe profile path from the Define Profile Path section. Additionally, the populated data in the table will be emptied.
  • Clicking the [Delete] button displays a confirmation dialog box. This dialog box allows the users to delete the selected pipe profile path.
    Delete Pipe Profile Path Dialog Box

Saving Profile Path

The user can save the currently selected profile path for the user-selected profile path elements. Clicking the [Save Profile Path] button displays the Save Pipe Profile Path dialog box that allows the user to name and save the current pipe profile path.

Save Pipe Profile Path Dialog Box

Note that within the current scenario, the name of the pipe profile paths that are to be saved must be unique. Therefore, if the user applies the same pipe profile path name as an existing path, the software will
confirm whether to overwrite the existing pipe profile path.

Overwrite Existing Pipe Profile Path

Extract Elevation Data

This section is used to define the elevation data source to be used for assigning the pipe invert elevations. Depending on the selected elevation data source type, the contents of this section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

Extract Elevation Data Section

The following options are available in the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN Surface

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Extract Elevation Data section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Extract Elevation Data section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Extract Elevation Data section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Pipe Invert Elevation Computation Options

This section allows the user to specify the general options used for assigning the pipe invert elevations.

Pipe Invert Elevation Computation Options Section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Allow manhole invert to lower to meet pipe invert requirements
    This checkbox option allows the user to lower the manhole invert elevations to meet computed pipe invert requirements.
  • Apply defined elevation changes to adjacent upstream pipes
    This checkbox option allows the user to adjust all upstream pipe elevations entering a manhole along the defined pipe profile path.
    Note that when this checkbox option is left unchecked, only the elevations of the upstream pipes along the defined pipe profile path are modified.
  • Manhole sump depth
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the sump depth required at a manhole.

Multiple Upstream Pipes - Invert Computation Method (Flowing into Manhole)

This section allows the user to specify the computational method used to assign the pipe invert elevations for the inflowing pipes that meet at a manhole.

Multiple Upstream Pipes - Invert Computation Method (Flowing into Manhole) Section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Do not change pipe invert elevations
    This radio button option is used to prevent changes to the pipe invert elevations.
  • Match pipe invert elevations
    This radio button option causes the pipe invert elevations to match each other.
  • Match pipe crown elevations
    This radio button option causes the pipe crown elevations to match each other.
  • Invert elevation drop across manhole from inlet pipe to outlet pipe
    This radio button entry field defines the drop in invert elevation from the inlet pipes to the outlet pipe.

Pipe Profile Checks

This section allows the user to define what checks should be used for the defined pipe profile path.

Pipe Profile Checks Section

For those pipes that violate the defined checks, the corresponding table cells under the Define Profile Path section will be displayed in red, as shown below.

Pipes That Violate the Defined Checks

The following options are available in the Pipe Profile Checks section:

  • Maximum allowable ground cover above pipe
    This checkbox entry field defines the maximum allowable ground cover along the length of the pipe. If the computed maximum ground cover is larger than the defined maximum allowable ground cover, then the Maximum Ground Cover table column will be displayed in red. By default, the maximum allowable ground cover above the pipe is 12 ft.
  • Minimum allowable ground cover above pipe
    This checkbox entry field defines the minimum allowable ground cover along the length of the pipe. If the computed minimum ground cover is less than the defined minimum allowable ground cover, then the Minimum Ground Cover table column will be displayed in red. By default, the minimum allowable ground cover above the pipe is 3 ft.
  • Maximum and minimum allowable pipe slopes
    This checkbox option defines the maximum and minimum allowable pipe slopes from a design perspective. Clicking the [Define] button will display the Allowable Pipe Slopes dialog box.
    Allowable Pipe Slopes Dialog Box
    This dialog box allows the user to define the recommended maximum and minimum pipe slope based on pipe diameters and the defined maximum and minimum flow velocities during the storm peak. If the computed pipe slope is outside the defined allowable pipe slopes, then the Element Slope data column is displayed in red.

Downstream Pipe - Invert Computation Method (Flowing out of Manhole)

This section allows the user to compute pipe invert elevations for the downstream pipe flowing out of the current manhole.

Downstream Pipe - Invert Computation Method (Flowing out of Manhole) Section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Do not change pipe invert elevation
    This radio button option prevents the change of downstream pipe invert elevation.
  • Invert depth from elevation surface
    This radio button option causes the software to set the pipe invert elevations to a specific depth below the terrain elevation surface.
  • Invert depth above manhole invert (in addition to manhole sump depth)
    This radio button option causes the software to set the pipe invert elevations to a specific height above the bottom of the manhole inverts, or above the manhole sump depth (if defined).
  • Pipe slope from most upstream manhole, starting pipe invert depth at upstream end
    This radio button option causes the software to compute the pipe invert elevations starting from the most upstream manhole and then moving downstream.
  • Pipe slope from most downstream manhole, starting pipe invert depth at downstream end
    This radio button option causes the software to compute the pipe invert elevations starting from the most downstream manhole and then moving upstream.

View Pipe Profile

The View Pipe Profile panel allows the user to view the pipes, manholes, and ground surfaces along the defined pipe profile path.

View Pipe Profile Panel

Computing and Assigning Invert Elevations

After defining all the required data, click the [Compute] button to compute new pipe invert elevations for unlocked pipes.

Once the computation is done, click the [Assign] button to assign the defined pipe invert elevations for the unlocked pipe.

Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Assigning Invert Elevations

In GeoSTORM software, the user can assign invert elevations to project elements, such as routing reach and roadway segments based on the selected terrain surface. Following are the types of commands that can be used to assign invert elevations to the project elements:

  • Assign Routing Reach Invert Elevations
  • Assign Roadway Segment Invert Elevations

In this article, we will use the Assign Roadway Segment Invert Elevations command to describe how to assign roadway segment invert elevations in GeoSTORM software.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Roadway Segment Invert Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Gutter/Ditch/Inlets dropdown menu and select the Assign Roadway Segment Invert Elevations command.
    Assign Roadway Segment Invert Elevations
  2. The Assign Roadway Invert Elevations dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Assign Roadway Invert Elevations Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Roadway Invert Elevations command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Segments

The Select Roadway Segments section allows the user to select single or multiple roadway segment(s) for which elevations are to be assigned. This section includes a data grid table that lists all the roadway segment(s) contained within the current scenario of the project, as shown below.

Select Roadway Segments Section

The user can select the roadway segment(s) using any of the following methods to assign elevations:

  • Check the checkboxes corresponding to each roadway segment in the Select Roadway Segments
  • Click the [Pick] button, the Assign Roadway Invert Elevations dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the roadway segment(s) from the Map View. After selecting the roadway segment(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign Roadway Invert Elevations dialog box will be redisplayed.
  • Alternatively, press and hold down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the roadway segment(s) directly from the Map View. After the selection is done, open the Assign Roadway Invert Elevations dialog box, and the selected roadway segment(s) will be shown as selected/checked within the Select Roadway Segments

After selecting the roadway segment(s), the total number of selected roadway segment(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Total selected Read-only Field

In addition, the data contained in a data grid table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the right-click context menu commands, such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Right-click Context Menu Commands

Assigning Invert Elevation

This section allows the user to assign an invert elevation to the roadway segment(s) using a terrain model. In addition, the user can define the elevation offset to raise or lower the roadway segment by the specified amount using the Apply elevation offset checkbox option. On selecting this checkbox option, the entry field next to it becomes available to enter an elevation offset value. A negative offset value will lower the roadway segment by the specified amount.

Assigning Invert Elevation Section

Note: Define this section before assigning roadway segments so that the invert elevation can be assigned.

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the terrain elevation source type selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN Surface

CAD Drawing

If the user selects CAD Drawing as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Invert Elevation section changes as shown below.

CAD Drawing

The following options are displayed when CAD Drawing is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • CAD drawing layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the CAD drawing layer available in the project.
  • Drawing layers
    Clicking the [Define] button adjacent to the Drawing layers entry displays the CAD Drawing Layers dialog box, which allows the user to define the properties of the drawing layers.
    CAD Drawing Layers Dialog Box

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Invert Elevation section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

GIS Contour

If the user selects GIS Contours as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Invert Elevation section changes, as shown below.

GIS Contours

The following options are displayed when GIS Contours is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • GIS polyline layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polyline layer type.
  • Elevation attribute
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute type.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Invert Elevation section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Terrain Surface

If the user selects Terrain Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Invert Elevation section changes, as shown below.

Terrain Surface

The following option is displayed when Terrain Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Terrain surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the terrain surface layer type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Invert Elevation section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer

    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.

  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Assigning Roadway Segment Invert Elevations

After defining all the required options, click the [Assign] button and the software will compute and display the invert elevation for the selected roadway segment(s).

Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Renumber Interconnected Pipes Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Renumber Interconnected Pipes command allows the user to automatically renumber pipes and connected manholes along a defined pipe path.

Follow the steps below to use the Renumber Interconnected Pipes command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Renumber Interconnected Pipes command from the Stormwater Pipes dropdown menu.
    Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-1.png
  2. The Renumber Interconnected Pipes dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-2.png

The following sections describe how to use the Renumber Interconnected Pipes command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Pipes

The Select Pipes panel allows the user to select pipes that define the pipe path.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) Pipes

The Select Multiple (Interconnected) Pipes section is used to sequentially number pipes and manholes along the selected pipe path that has pipes connected end-to-end with each other. Click the [Pick] button to manually select pipes from the Map View. The Renumber Interconnected Pipes dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the downstream most and upstream most pipes from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected pipes will be shown in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-3.png

Alternatively, if pipes are pre-selected on the Map View, opening the Renumber Interconnected Pipes dialog box will show those pipes selected in the corresponding table section. The selected pipes can be further unselected by unchecking the checkboxes corresponding to them.

Note that the user can pre-select multiple pipes from the Map View by pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the pipes.

Manual Editing

This section contains a table that displays the selected pipes, manholes, and their associated data. The values in the New Pipe ID and New Manhole ID columns provide a preview of the renumbered pipes and manholes defined in the Pipe Renumbering and Manhole Renumbering panels.

Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-4.png

The data contained in the table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF commands of the right-click context menu.

Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-5.png

Pipe Renumbering

The Pipe Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber pipes based on pipe length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the contents of this panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) and the renumbering of pipes cannot be performed.

Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-6.png

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Pipe ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the pipe ID.
  • Pipe ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the pipe ID.
  • Pipe ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the pipe ID defined in the panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the pipe IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    • Downstream
    • Upstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber pipes using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Pipe ID digits: This entry field allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for pipe ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the pipe ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
  • Next available pipe ID: This entry field defines the next pipe ID number to be used.
  • Pipe ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering pipes. The default value is 1.

Use Pipe Length

The Use pipe length subsection is used to renumber pipes based on their length along the defined pipe path. By default, the Use pipe length radio button option is selected when the Pipe Renumbering panel is checked.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Downstream pipe ID: This entry provides a pipe ID that will be used as the downstream most pipe number. Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream pipe ID entry will change into the Upstream pipe ID, as shown below.
    Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-7.png
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of pipe length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in renumbering pipes. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered pipes in the New Pipe ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-8.png

Manhole Renumbering

The Pipe Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber manholes based on pipe length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the contents of this panel will be disabled (i.e. grayed out) and the renumbering of manholes cannot be performed.

Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-9.png

The following options are provided in this data panel:

  • Manhole ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the manhole ID defined in this panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the manhole IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    • Upstream
    • Downstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber manholes using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Manhole ID digits: This entry allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for manhole ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the manhole ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
  • Next available manhole ID: This entry field defines the next manhole ID number to be used.
  • Manhole ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering manholes. The default value is 1.

Use Pipe Length

The Use pipe length subsection is used to renumber manholes based on their length along the defined pipe path. By default, the Use pipe length radio button option is selected when the Manhole Renumbering panel is checked.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Downstream manhole ID: This entry provides a manhole ID that will be used as the downstream most manhole number. Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream manhole ID entry will change into the Upstream manhole ID, as shown below.
    Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-10.png
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of pipe length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in renumbering manholes. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered manholes in the New Manhole ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-11.png

When all the required data have been defined in the Renumber Interconnected Pipes dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the user-defined changes to the pipes and connected manholes along a defined pipe path. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Note that when the user clicks the [Preview] button and clicks the [Close] button without applying the changes, the following confirmational dialog box will be displayed.

Renumber-Interconnected-Pipes-Command-Image-12.png
Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Georeferencing Pipes

The process of georeferencing a pipe to the Map View can be a trial and error process—especially when the exact location of the original pipe is not known. The Georeference Pipes command of GeoSTORM software allows the user to manually georeference each of the pipes to the background base map displayed on the Map View.

Note that a CRS should be assigned before running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the below informational dialog box.

CRS Not Assigned to GST Model Dialog Box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

Follow the steps below to use the Georeference Pipes command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on Stormwater Pipes dropdown menu and select the Georeference Pipes command.
    Georeference Pipes command
  2. The Georeference Pipes dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Pipes dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing pipe and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Pipe to Georeference

The Select Pipe to Georeference section allows the user to interactively select the pipe to georeference.

Follow the steps below to select the pipe to be georeferenced:

  1. Select the pipe from the Pipe ID dropdown combo box that lists all the pipes contained within the project.
    Pipe ID dropdown combo box
  2. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the pipe from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Pipes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the pipe from the Map View.
  3. Upon selecting the pipe, the Georeference Pipes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected pipe will be highlighted on the Map View.
    Notes:
    • The user can select only one pipe at a time.
    • The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.
    • If the model contains a single pipe, then it will be automatically displayed as selected in the Pipe ID dropdown combo box.

Once the pipe has been selected, the user can select among the following georeferencing options:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snapping Pipe to an Alignment Polyline

If an existing alignment polyline for the pipe exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option can be used to snap the pipe to the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Polyline radio button option to enable this section.
  2. Click the [Pick] button next to the Select alignment polyline read-only field.
    [Pick] button
  3. The Georeference Pipes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the alignment polyline, the dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.
  5. After selecting the alignment polyline, click the [Snap] button. The software will then snap the selected pipe to the alignment polyline.
    [Snap] button

Sliding Pipe Along Alignment Polyline

If a pipe has been snapped to an alignment polyline on the Map View but is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option can be used to slide the pipe along the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option to enable this section.
    Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option
  2. Click the [Pick] button next to the Select alignment polyline element read-only field.
    Pick Button - Select alignment polyline element
  3. The Georeference Pipes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select an alignment polyline from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the alignment polyline, the following Snap Entity dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Yes] button to snap the entity on the selected polyline or click the [No] button to abort the selection.
    Snap Entity
  5. Once the alignment polyline is selected, click the [Slide] button from the redisplayed Georeference Pipes dialog box.
    [Slide] button
  6. The Georeference Pipes dialog box temporarily disappears, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the pipe and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline.
  7. Click and drag the pipe on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  8. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Pipes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the pipe will be placed at the new location.
  9. The user can also check the Recompute adjacent node element elevations checkbox option to recompute the elevation of the adjacent node type elements while georeferencing the pipe. By default, this checkbox is checked.

    Note that if the endpoints of the pipe do not overlay the same continuous alignment polyline, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Cannot Slide Pipe Dialog Box

Drawing Pipe on Map View

The Draw on Map View georeferencing option allows the user to draw an alignment polyline on the Map View and automatically snap the selected pipe to the drawn polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button.
    Draw Button - Draw on Map View
  2. The Georeference Pipes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw an alignment polyline on the Map View.
  3. Once the alignment polyline is drawn on the Map View, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Pipes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the pipe will then automatically snap to the drawn alignment polyline.
    Notes:
    • The user can turn on the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using a curvilinear segment. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about element digitizing on the Map View.
    • The user can turn on the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the pipe to fit within the alignment polyline.

Assigning Pipe Invert Elevation

The user can check the Assign Pipe Invert Elevation checkbox option to assign an invert elevation to the georeferenced pipe using a terrain model. The options under this section must be defined before georeferencing pipes so that the invert elevation can be assigned.

For assigning invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN Surface
Assign Pipe Invert Elevation


Depending upon the elevation data source type selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information. The user can define an invert depth using the Pipe invert depth entry field to raise or lower the invert of the pipe by the specified amount. A negative invert depth value lowers the pipe by the specified amount.

Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Recompute Pipe Properties Command

In GeoSTORM, the Recompute Pipe Properties command allows the user to recompute pipe properties, such as pipe lengths, pipe slopes, and maximum and minimum pipe cover based upon connected manholes.

Follow the steps below to use the Recompute Pipe Properties command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Recompute Pipe Properties command from the Stormwater Pipes dropdown menu.
    Stormwater Pipes Dropdown Menu
  2. The Recompute Pipe Properties dialog box will be displayed as shown below.
    Recompute Pipe Properties Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Recompute Pipe Properties command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Pipes

The Select Pipes section includes a data grid table that lists all the pipes contained within the current scenario along with their pipe lengths, slopes, and maximum and minimum pipe covers. This section allows the user to select single or multiple pipes defined in the project for computing pipe parameters.

The user can select or deselect any pipe by checking and unchecking the checkbox corresponding to each pipe. If a pipe is already selected on the Map View before running this command, the same pipe will be shown selected within the table. The user can also use the checkbox contained within the column header to select or deselect all the pipes.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select pipes from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Recompute Pipe Properties dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the pipes on the Map View. After selecting the pipes, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected pipes will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Selecting Pipes

Note that the user can select multiple pipes from the Map View before running the Recompute Pipe Properties command by pressing the [Ctrl] key.

Pipe Properties

This section is used to define the elevation data source and other parameters to be used for recomputing pipe properties.

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the terrain elevation source type selected, different options are provided to specify additional detail and elevation data information.

Pipe Properties

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN surface

CAD Drawing

If the user selects CAD Drawing as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Pipe Properties section changes as shown below.

CAD Drawing

The following options are displayed when CAD Drawing is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • CAD drawing layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the CAD drawing layer available in the project.
  • Drawing layers
    Clicking the [Define] button adjacent to the Drawing layers entry displays the CAD Drawing Layers dialog box allowing the user to define the properties of the drawing layers.
    CAD Drawing Layers

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Pipe Properties section changes as shown below.

Elevation Grid

The following option is displayed when the Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

GIS Contours

If the user selects GIS Contours as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Pipe Properties section changes as shown below.

GIS Contours

The following options are displayed when GIS Contours is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • GIS polyline layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polyline layer type.
  • Elevation attribute
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute type.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Pipe Properties section changes as shown below.

LandXML Data

The following options are displayed when the LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Terrain Surface

If the user selects Terrain Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Pipe Properties section changes as shown below.

Terrain Surface

The following option is displayed when the Terrain Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Pipe Properties section changes as shown below.

TIN Surface

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

After selecting the terrain elevation source, the user can check the checkbox of the following properties to be recomputed for the selected pipes.

  • Pipe length
    This checkbox option is used to compute pipe length.
  • Pipe slope
    This checkbox option is used to compute pipe slope based upon the pipe invert elevations.
  • Maximum pipe cover
    This checkbox option is used to compute the maximum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.
  • Minimum pipe cover
    This checkbox option is used to compute the minimum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.

Computing Pipe Properties

Once the data have been defined in the Recompute Pipe Properties dialog box, click the [Compute] button. The software will then recompute the pipe properties for the selected pipes.

Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Pipe Table Edit Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Pipe Table Edit command allows the user to view and edit all the parameters of the pipes in a single editable data grid. The user can also view the corresponding output results from this data grid.

Follow the steps below to use the Pipe Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Stormwater Pipes dropdown menu and select the Pipe Table Edit command.
    Pipe Table Edit command
  2. The Pipe Table Edit dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Pipe Table Edit dialog box

Selecting Storm Results

In the Select Storm Results section, the Storm result to display dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storm frequency whose result is to be displayed.

Select Storm Results section

Note: The Select Storm Results section is only available when either the Dekalb Rational Method, Modified Rational or Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this section is unavailable. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engine.

Pipe Parameters Table

In the Pipe Parameters section, the following panels are available:

  • Pipe Data
  • Results Data

Pipe Data

This panel displays editable data grid columns listing all the pipe parameters defined in the current scenario.

Pipe Data panel

The following pipe parameters are provided in the data grid column entries:

  • Pipe ID
    This editable entry lists all pipe IDs defined in the current scenario.
  • Pipe Diameter
    This dropdown combo box lists the internal diameter of the pipe. The user can change the internal diameter for any pipe from the corresponding dropdown combo box.
  • Pipe Length
    This editable entry lists the length of the pipe. The user can manually edit the pipe length directly from the entry or by clicking the corresponding […] button and measuring the pipe length from the Map View.
  • Inlet Invert Elevation
    This editable entry lists the pipe invert elevation on the upstream end.
  • Outlet Invert Elevation
    This editable entry lists the pipe invert elevation on the downstream end.
  • Manning’s Roughness
    This editable entry lists the Manning’s roughness of the pipe. Clicking the […] button displays the Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness dialog box, which allows the user to select the Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a pipe.
    Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness
  • Entrance Loss Coefficient
    This editable entry lists the head loss coefficient at the inlet of the pipe associated with energy losses as the flow enters the pipe from a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking the […] button displays the Entrance Loss Coefficients for Pipes dialog box, which allows the user to select the entrance loss coefficient to be assigned to a pipe.
    Entrance Loss Coefficients for Pipes
  • Exit/Bend Loss Coefficient
    This editable entry lists the head loss coefficient at the outlet of the pipe associated with energy losses as the flow leaves the pipe and enters a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking the […] button displays the Exit Loss Coefficients for Pipes dialog box, which allows the user to select the exit loss coefficient to be assigned to a pipe.
    Exit Loss Coefficients for Pipes
  • Average Loss Coefficient
    This editable entry lists the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses along the length of the pipe.
  • Pipe Slope (H:V)
    This read-only entry lists the slope of the pipe.

Results Data

The data grid columns in this panel list corresponding output results for pipes contained in the current scenario after the analysis is successfully computed.

Results Data panel

The following pipe parameters are provided in the data grid column entries:

  • Pipe ID
    This editable entry lists all pipe IDs defined in the current scenario.
  • Peak Flow Rate
    This read-only entry lists the peak flow rate in the pipe during the storm event.
  • Design Flow Capacity
    This read-only entry lists the flow rate capacity of the pipe for gravity flow conditions (i.e., non-pressurized).
  • Maximum Velocity
    This read-only entry lists the maximum flow velocity in the pipe during the storm event.
  • Max/Design Flow Ratio
    This read-only entry lists the ratio of the Peak flow rate to the Design flow capacity values.
  • Max/Total Depth Ratio
    This read-only entry lists the ratio of pipe flow depth to the pipe diameter.
  • Maximum Pipe Cover
    This read-only entry lists the computed maximum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.
  • Minimum Pipe Cover
    This read-only entry lists the computed minimum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe length.

Sorting the Pipe Table

The data in the Pipe Parameters table can be sorted by multiple columns. Users can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up or Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Pipe Parameters table - Up and Down arrows

Follow the steps below to sort the data by using multiple columns:

  1. Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  2. Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  3. Repeat step 2 to sort the data for any additional column.

For example, first, select the Pipe ID column and click the Up arrow to sort the data in ascending order. Then, while holding down the [Shift] key, select the Pipe Length column and click the Down arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Multiple Column Sorting

Copying and Exporting Pipe Table

The data in the Pipe Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the right-click context menu commands such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Right-click context menu commands

After editing the required pipe parameters, click the [Close] button to close the Pipe Table Edit dialog box.

Storm Sewer Network › Pipes

Merge Pipes Command

This article describes how the Merge Pipes command of GeoSTORM software allows the user to merge two or more connected pipes into a single pipe. Notes:

  • When merging pipes, the attributes of the selected pipe with the largest diameter will be applied to all the merged pipes.
  • When merging pipes, all interior nodes (i.e., manholes, junction boxes, catch basins, and routing junctions) connecting adjacent link elements will be deleted.

Follow the steps below to merge two or more connected pipes:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Stormwater Pipes dropdown menu and select the Merge Pipes command. Merge Pipes command
  2. The Merge Pipes dialog box will be displayed. Merge Pipes dialog box
  3. From the Select Pipes section, check the corresponding checkboxes of the pipes that need to be merged. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to manually select pipes from the Map View. [Pick] button Note: To select/deselect all pipes at once, check/uncheck the Pipe checkbox.
  4. The number of selected pipes will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field. Total selected read-only field
  5. After selecting the pipes, click the [Apply] button and the software will merge all the selected pipes. [Apply] button
  6. If the user has selected pipes that are not connected along a single alignment, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [Apply] button. Cannot Merge Pipes informational dialog box
Storm Sewer Network › Cyclic Loop Networks

Cyclic Loop Network

In EPA SWMM, a cyclic loop network refers to a connected series of channels or pipes within the drainage system where the flow can travel in a continuous loop, i.e., starting and ending at the same point. Since the flow does not typically circulate in a continuous loop without a driving force, such as a pump, it can cause computational instability in the model, further leading to conflicts in flow calculations.

A cyclic network loop error typically arises in a complex drainage system or network having interconnected nodes and conduits. Theoretically, in such a network, water could flow endlessly in a circular pattern without reaching an outlet. Consequently, determining the flow direction and solving the equations governing the flow becomes difficult for the software, impacting the accuracy of the SWMM simulation.

Factors Causing the Formation of Cyclic Loop Network

A cyclic loop network in a complex drainage system can form due to several factors, such as:

  • Incorrect Node Connections
    If interconnected nodes, such as routing junctions or terminal outfalls, are not connected as designed, paths that link back to an earlier point in the network may result, forming a loop.
  • Design Errors
    Misplacing or duplicating pipes and routing junctions in the model design can result in unintended loops.
  • Improper Flow Direction
    If pipes are oriented incorrectly and lead back to a previous node, a cyclic loop can be created. Hence, accurate flow direction must be maintained throughout the drainage system.
  • Lack of Outlets
    In a drainage network without proper outfalls or discharge points, water may circulate through the system indefinitely, resulting in a cyclic loop network.

Steps to Fix Cyclic Loop Network Errors in EPA SWMM

The following steps can be taken to fix a cyclic loop network error in EPA SWMM:

  1. Identifying Loop
    Review the error message or computed results generated by the software to identify the part of the drainage network demonstrating cyclic loops.
  1. Checking Node Connections
    Ensure that the interconnected nodes are correctly connected to pipes or channels, contributing to the flow in a clear direction towards a downstream node.
  1. Eliminating Unnecessary Connections
    Simplify the drainage network by removing redundant or unnecessary connections that form cyclic loops.
  1. Converting to Series Flow
    Convert branch connections into series flow paths rather than parallel paths if they are displaying a cyclic loop error.
  1. Using Outlet Nodes
    Use overflow conditions or outlet nodes to guide the flow in one direction and prevent cyclic scenarios.
  1. Rerunning the Model
    After making the necessary adjustments, run the model again to check if the cyclic loop error has been resolved.

How to Fix a Cyclic Loop Network Error

In GeoSTORM, cyclic loop network errors can be resolved by selecting a suitable flow routing method. The following flow routing methods are supported by the software:

  • Hydrodynamic
  • Steady State Peak Flow
  • Kinematic Wave

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the flow routing methods supported by GeoSTORM.

Steady State Peak Flow and Kinematic Wave routing methods only support dendritic (or tree-like) routing networks. Consequently, the software displays an error when performing stormwater analysis in a cyclic loop network.

Compute Analysis - Cyclic Loop Error

In such situations, the Hydrodynamic routing method must be specified. This routing method offers a more comprehensive and accurate simulation of flow conditions in a complex drainage network.

Follow the steps below to select the Hydrodynamic routing method in GeoSTORM:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Scenario Manager command.
    Scenario Manager Command
  2. The Scenario Manager dialog box will be displayed.
    Scenario Manager Dialog Box
  3. From the Flow routing method dropdown combo box, select the Hydrodynamic routing method.
    Flow Routing Method Dropdown Combo Box
  4. Now, from the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Compute Analysis command to perform stormwater analysis.
  5. The software will successfully run the analysis.
    Compute Analysis - Successful Computation

Note that the Flow routing method dropdown combo box will be displayed as disabled when the Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine.

Hydrology Analysis Engine - Rational Method

Therefore, in the case of the Rational Method, the user needs to simplify the network by removing or modifying the node connections forming a cyclic loop. Alternatively, the user can eliminate the cyclic loop network by reversing the direction of one of its links (i.e., switching the inlet and outlet nodes of the link).

Storm Sewer Network › Underground Pipe Galleries

Defining Underground Pipe Gallery

The Underground Pipe Gallery panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box allows the user to define the underground pipe gallery specifications for the storage area. This article describes how to interact with the Underground Pipe Gallery panel. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Follow the steps below to define the specifications for the underground pipe gallery:

  1. In the Storage Area Data dialog box, select Underground Pipe Gallery from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Underground Pipe Gallery Data panel option
    Note: The Underground Pipe Gallery data panel entry is enabled only when the user selects the Underground Pipe Gallery option in the Storage area volume dropdown combo box of the General Specifications panel. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
    Storage area volume dropdown combo box
  1. The corresponding panel with options for defining the underground pipe gallery will be displayed.
    Underground Pipe Gallery Data panel

The following subpanels are available in the Underground Pipe Gallery data panel:

  • Pipe Details
  • Pipe Gallery Design
  • Summary

Pipe Details

In the Pipe Details subpanel, the Underground Pipe Details section allows the user to define the underground pipe parameters for the selected storage area.

The following entries are available:

  • Select perforated pipe type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of perforated pipe. The following types of perforated pipes are available:
    1. Arched Flat Bottom
    2. Arched Round Bottom
    3. Circular
    Select perforated pipe type dropdown combo box
  • Pipe barrel length
    This entry field defines the length of individual pipe barrels.
  • Pipe diameter
    This entry field defines the diameter of the pipe to be used in the pipe runs. Note that this field is enabled only for the Circular pipe type.
  • Select arched pipe size
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the size of the arched pipe. Note that this dropdown combo box is enabled only for the Arched Round Bottom pipe type.
    Select arched pipe size dropdown combo box
  • Arched pipe height
    This entry field defines the height of the arched pipe to be used in the pipe runs. Note that this field is enabled only for the Arched Flat Bottom pipe type. Otherwise, this field is disabled (i.e., grayed out) for the Circular pipe type and becomes read-only for the Arched Round Bottom pipe type.
    Arched pipe height
  • Arched pipe width
    This entry field defines the width of the arched pipe to be used in the pipe runs. Note that this field is enabled only for the Arched Flat Bottom pipe type. Otherwise, this field is disabled (i.e., grayed out) for the Circular pipe type and becomes read-only for the Arched Round Bottom pipe type.

Pipe Gallery Design

In the Pipe Gallery Design subpanel, the Pipe Gallery Specifications and Layout section allows the user to define the specifications and layout of the pipe gallery system.

Pipe Gallery Design subpanel

The following tab panels are available in the Pipe Gallery Design subpanel:

  • Pipe Gallery Design
  • Pipe Gallery Layout

Pipe Gallery Design

In the Pipe Gallery Design tab panel, the Define Pipe Gallery Layout Specifications section allows the user to define the parameters for the pipe gallery layout.

The following entries are available:

  • Terrain surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the terrain elevation surface available in the project.
  • Include header pipe
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to specify how the header pipe is connected to the parallel pipe runs. The following options are available:
    1. None
    2. On One End
    3. On Both Ends
    Include header pipe dropdown combo box
  • Space between pipe runs
    This entry field defines the gap between pipe runs so that stone fill can be inserted.
  • Storage area excavation wall to pipe runs
    This entry field defines the buffer distance provided from the storage area boundary to the pipe runs. Note that pipes can only be placed inside this buffer region.
  • Outside edge space to pipe runs
    This entry field defines the extra space that is placed on the pipe run outside the edge perimeter for stone fill.
  • Outside end space to pipe runs
    This entry field defines the extra space that is placed on the pipe run outside the end perimeter for stone fill.
  • Stone cover
    This entry field defines the stone cover to be placed over the pipe runs.
  • Stone base
    This entry field defines the stone base to be placed under the pipe runs.
  • Stone base invert elevation
    This entry field defines the invert elevation of the stone base.
  • Stone void space
    This spin control entry field defines the stone void space, represented as a percentage. By default, the software uses a value of 40. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 10 to 90.

Once all required data have been defined, click the [Generate] button. The software generates the pipe gallery layout and immediately takes the user to the Pipe Gallery Layout tab panel.

Note: The [Generate] button is enabled only when all required data have been defined in the Pipe Gallery Design tab panel. Otherwise, this button will be disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Pipe Gallery Layout

The Pipe Gallery Layout tab panel displays a preview of the pipe gallery created on the Map View. Initially, the preview shows the current Map View extents, but the user can zoom and pan this view using the mouse cursor.

Pipe Gallery Layout tab panel

The following entries are available:

  • Project base map provider
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the project base map from several high-quality base maps.
  • Use grayscale base map
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the base map to grayscale instead of color.

Editing Pipe Gallery Layout

Clicking the [Edit Layout] button temporarily disappears the Storage Area Data dialog box and displays the Edit Layout dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to adjust the pipe gallery layout more precisely. In this dialog box, the user can define the pipe gallery boundary and manually add or remove pipes. After making the necessary changes, click the [OK] button to save the layout. The Storage Area Data dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Pipe Gallery Layout preview tab will be updated with the changes made. To abort the process, click the [Cancel] button.

Edit Layout dialog box

The Edit Layout dialog box provides the following toolbar commands for editing the pipe gallery layout:

unknown node

In addition, the user can zoom and pan the pipe gallery layout grid in the Map View. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the other tools available in this dialog box.

Summary

The Summary subpanel provides a volume summary for the pipe gallery system, including the depth-area-volume plot and corresponding data in a tabular format.

Summary subpanel

The following tab panels are available in the Summary subpanel:

  • Volume Summary
  • Depth-Area Volume Plot
  • Data Table

Volume Summary

In the Volume Summary tab panel, the Pipe Gallery Volume Summary section displays the volume summary for the pipe gallery system. Note that this section is populated only when the user has generated the pipe gallery layout in the Pipe Gallery Design subpanel.

The following entries are available:

  • Total number of pipe barrels
    This read-only field displays the total pipe barrels placed in the pipe gallery system.
  • System footprint area (including buffer)
    This read-only field displays the footprint area of the pipe gallery system, which is equal to the area of the buffer polygon.
  • Total excavation volume (including buffer & cover)
    This read-only field displays the volume of the earthwork to be excavated for the pipe gallery system, including exterior buffer and ground cover.
  • Total ground cover volume
    This read-only field displays the volume of excavation required for providing the ground cover to the pipe gallery system.
  • Total pipe gallery volume (without stone fill)
    This read-only field displays the total storage volume of the pipe gallery.
  • Total stone fill required (includes void space)
    This read-only field displays the storage volume of the stone fill (including void space).
  • Stone void volume
    This read-only field displays the storage volume provided by the voids of the stone fill.
  • Total gallery storage volume (pipe & stone void space)
    This read-only field displays the total storage volume defined by the pipe gallery system. This volume includes the storage volume of the pipe gallery and the stone fill voids.

Clicking the [Calc] button computes the volume summary for the pipe gallery system. Note that the [Calc] button is enabled only when changes are made in the pipe gallery layout using the Edit Layout dialog box. Otherwise, this button is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Clicking the [Pipe Gallery Report] button displays the Pipe Gallery Report dialog box, which allows the user to generate a report of the pipe gallery system in Microsoft Word or PDF format. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Pipe Gallery Report dialog box.

Pipe Gallery Report dialog box

Depth-Area-Volume Plot

In the Depth-Area-Volume Plot tab panel, the Pipe Gallery Depth-Area-Volume Plot section displays the depth-area-volume plot of the pipe gallery system based on the computed volume summary from the Volume Summary tab panel.

Depth-Area-Volume Plot tab panel

Data Table

In the Data Table tab panel, the Pipe Gallery Depth-Area-Volume Data Table section displays the depth vs. area and volume data in a tabular format, based on the computed volume summary from the Volume Summary tab panel.

Data Table tab panel

The following read-only columns are available in the Pipe Gallery Depth-Area-Volume Data Table section:

  • Depth
    This read-only column lists the cumulative depth value of the pipe gallery system.
  • Void Space Area
    This read-only column lists the cumulative value of the void space area of the pipe gallery system at the corresponding depth.
  • Void Space Volume
    This read-only column lists the cumulative value of the void space volume of the pipe gallery system at the corresponding depth.
Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Segments

Draw and Assign Roadway Segments Command

In GeoSTORM software, roadway segments (i.e., roadway gutter, ditch, or storm drain inlet) can be defined by either drawing or assigning polylines on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Roadway Segments
  • Assign Roadway Segments

Draw Roadway Segments Command

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Roadway Segments command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Gutter/Ditch/Inlets dropdown menu and select the Draw Roadway Segments command.Draw Roadway Segments Command
  2. The Draw Roadway Segments dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Roadway Segments Dialog Box

Drawing Roadway Segment Polylines

The Draw Roadway Segment Polylines section allows the user to draw single or multiple polylines on the Map View as roadway segments.

Follow the steps below to draw roadway segments:

  1. Click the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Click the [Draw] Button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw a roadway segment on the Map View in the upstream to the downstream direction.
    Note: From the Roadway Segment Specifications subsection of the Roadway Naming panel, if:
    • Roadway segment ID naming option is selected, then the user can draw only one roadway segment polyline on the Map View.
    • Auto-name roadway segment ID naming option is selected, then the user can continuously draw roadway segment polylines one after the other on the Map View.
  3. After drawing roadway segment polyline(s), the Draw Roadway Segments dialog box will be redisplayed, and the roadway segment polyline(s) will be drawn on the Map View.

Notes:

  • If the “Draw curvilinear polylines” checkbox option is checked, then it allows the user to draw curvilinear polyline segments for the roadway segments.
  • If the “Discard accidentally digitized roadway less than” checkbox is checked, then the software discards accidentally digitized roadway segments that are shorter than the defined length. The user can define the length of the roadway segment in the entry field adjacent to this checkbox option.
  • The [Reverse Direction] button reverses the flow direction of the roadway segment polyline drawn.

Naming Specifications

This section allows the user to define the naming specifications for each drawn roadway segment along with the associated junctions and manholes.

Naming Specifications Section

Roadway Naming

Roadway Segment Specifications

The Roadway Segment Specifications subsection under the Roadway Naming panel allows the user to specify the roadway segment ID for each drawn roadway segment. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to define naming specifications for roadway segments:

  1. If a roadway segment is drawn while keeping the Roadway segment ID radio button option selected, the user can manually enter the roadway segment ID in the corresponding field, as shown below.
    Roadway Segment ID Radio Button Option
  2. If a roadway segment is drawn while keeping the Auto-name roadway segment ID radio button option selected, then it automatically names every newly drawn roadway segment as per the user’s predefined naming formats, as shown below.
    Auto-name Roadway Segment ID Radio Button Option

The following naming formats are available in the Auto-name roadway segment ID radio button option:

  • Roadway segment ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the roadway segment ID.
  • Roadway segment ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the roadway segment ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the roadway segment ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new roadway segments are created.
  • Next available roadway segment ID: This option defines the next roadway segment ID number to be used.
  • Roadway segment ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering roadway segments. The default value is 1.
  • Roadway segment ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the roadway segment ID.
  • Roadway segment ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the roadway segment naming specifications defined above.

Junction Naming

Auto-Name Junction ID

The Auto-Name Junction ID subsection under the Junction Naming panel allows the user to specify the IDs for each routing junction that are created automatically while drawing roadway segments. The user can assign these IDs automatically using some predefined formats, as shown below.

Auto-Name Junction ID Subsection

The following naming formats are available in the Auto-Name Junction ID subsection:

  • Routing junction ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the routing junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new routing junctions are created.
  • Next available routing junction ID: This option defines the next routing junction ID number to be used.
  • Routing junction ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering routing junctions. The default value is 1.
  • Routing junction ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing junction naming specifications defined above.

Manhole Naming

Auto-Name Manhole ID

The Auto-Name Manhole ID subsection under the Manhole Naming panel allows the user to specify the IDs for manholes associated with roadway segments. The user can assign these IDs automatically using some predefined formats, as shown below.

Auto-Name Manhole ID Subsection

The following naming formats are available in the Auto-Name Manhole ID subsection:

  • Manhole ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the manhole ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the manhole ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new manholes are created.
  • Next available manhole ID: This option defines the next manhole ID number to be used.
  • Manhole ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering manholes. The default value is 1.
  • Manhole ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the manhole naming specifications defined above.

Assigning Invert Elevations

This section allows the user to assign an invert elevation to the roadway segments using a terrain model.

Note that this subsection is common to both the Draw Roadway Segments and Assign Roadway Segments dialog boxes.

Assigning Invert Elevations Section

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the type of terrain elevation source selected, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN Surface
Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.
LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.
TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Other Specifications

This section allows the user to define the following physical properties for the drawn roadway segments:

Other Specifications Section
  • Roadway width
    This entry field defines the distance from the curb to the high point of the roadway segment (i.e. crown) including gutter width.
  • Curb height
    This entry field defines the height of the curb with respect to the roadway cross slope.
  • Roadway cross slope (V:H)
    This entry field defines the roadway cross slope.
  • Roadway & gutter roughness
    This entry field allows the user to define Manning’s roughness for the drawn/assigned roadway segments. Clicking the […] lookup button displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to select a Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a roadway segment.
    Manning’s Roughness Lookup Dialog Box
  • Roadway gutter routing
    This dropdown combo box specifies if one or both sides of the roadway gutter should be considered in the reach routing. The following options are provided:
    • One Side: Select this option if the street section extends only to the street crown.
    • Both Sides: Select this option if the same street section shape exists on the opposite side of the street crown.

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete drawing roadway segments. Note that if roadway segments are drawn using the Auto-name roadway segment ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed disabled since the just drawn roadway segments have already been named and created.

Assign Roadway Segments Command

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Roadway Segments command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Gutter/Ditch/Inlets dropdown menu and select the Assign Roadway Segments command.
    Assign Roadway Segments Command
  2. The Assign Roadway Segments dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Roadway Segments Dialog Box

Selecting Roadway Segment Polylines

The Select Roadway Segment Polylines section allows the user to manually assign single or multiple polylines on the Map View as roadway segments.

Follow the steps below to assign polylines as roadway segments:

  1. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Clicking the [Pick] Button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to click near the downstream end of the already drawn roadway segment polyline on the Map View to select it.
    Note: From the Roadway Segment Specifications section, if:
    • Roadway segment ID naming option is selected, then the user can select only one roadway segment polyline on the Map View.
    • Auto-name roadway segment ID naming option is selected, then the user can select roadway segment polylines one after the other from the Map View.
  3. After selecting polyline(s), the Assign Roadway Segments dialog box will be redisplayed and the roadway segment polyline(s) will be selected on the Map View.
  4. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Notes:

  • If the “Discard accidentally digitized roadway less than” checkbox is checked, then the software discards accidentally digitized roadway segments that are shorter than the defined length. The user can define the length of the roadway segment in the entry field adjacent to this checkbox option.
  • The [Reverse Direction] button reverses the flow direction of the roadway segment polyline assigned.

Roadway Segment Specifications

This section is similar to the Roadway Segment Specifications section explained for the Draw Roadway Segments dialog box.

Assigning Invert Elevations

This section is similar to the Assign Invert Elevations section explained for the Draw Roadway Segments dialog box.

Other Specifications

This section is similar to the Other Specifications section explained for the Draw Roadway Segments command.

This section contains an additional “Create routing junctions (if missing) at routing roadway ends” checkbox option. This checkbox option allows the software to create a routing junction at the routing roadway ends if there is no node already defined within the connection snap distance. The routing junction invert elevation is set equal to the roadway segment invert elevation.

Create Routing Junctions (if missing) at Routing Roadway Ends Checkbox Option

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete the process of assigning roadway segments. Note that if roadway segments are assigned using the Auto-name roadway segment ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed disabled since the just assigned roadway segments have already been named and created.

Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Segments

Automated Draw Roadway Segments Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Automated Draw Roadway Segments command allows the user to automatically compute roadway segment alignment between two points using an elevation terrain surface.

Follow the steps below to use the Automated Draw Roadway Segments command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Roadway Gutter/Ditch/Inlets dropdown menu and select the Automated Draw Roadway Segments command.
    Automated Draw Roadway Segments Command
  2. The Automated Draw Roadway Segments dialog box will be displayed.
    Automated Draw Roadway Segments Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Automated Draw Roadway Segments command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Segment Starting Point

The Select Roadway Segment Starting Point section is used to select a starting point on the Map View for drawing the roadway segment.

To select a starting point, follow the steps below:

  1. Click on the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Select a Roadway Segment Starting Point
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to select a point on the Map View. Select the starting point to draw a roadway segment.
  3. After selecting the starting point, the user is immediately returned to the Automated Draw Roadway Segments dialog box. The Start point read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Selected.
    Start Point Read-only Field

Roadway Segment Draw Direction

This section is used to define the direction of the roadway segment to be drawn based on the selected starting point.

Roadway Segment Draw Direction

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Downstream flow direction
    This radio button option is used to define the flow direction of the roadway segment downstream from the starting point.
  • Upstream flow direction
    This radio button option is used to define the flow direction of the roadway segment upstream from the starting point.

Roadway Segment Specifications

This section is used to specify a roadway segment ID for each roadway segment drawn. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign roadway segment IDs:

  1. If the starting point for a roadway segment is selected while keeping the Roadway segment ID radio button option enabled, the user can manually enter the roadway segment ID in the corresponding field, as shown below.
    Roadway Segment ID
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name roadway segment ID radio button option to automatically name newly drawn roadway segments as per predefined naming formats.
    Auto-name Roadway Segment ID
    The different naming formats present in the Auto-name roadway segment ID option are as follows:
    • Roadway segment ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the roadway segment ID.
    • Roadway segment ID digits: This entry field allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for the roadway segment ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the roadway segment ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
    • Next available roadway segment ID: This entry field defines the next roadway segment ID number to be used.
    • Roadway segment ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering roadway segments. The default value is 1.
    • Roadway segment ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the roadway segment ID.
    • Roadway segment ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the roadway segment ID defined in this section.

General Options

This section is used to define the general options for drawing roadway segments.

General Options

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Terrain surface
    The dropdown combo box lists the terrain surfaces associated with the project which are used to define the roadway segment. By default, the current scenario’s terrain surface is selected. If there is no terrain surface defined for the selected scenario, then this entry is blank.
  • Roadway segment maximum length
    This optional checkbox option is used to define the maximum length for the roadway segment polyline that is to be drawn. Click the [Pick] button to draw a polyline representing the maximum reach length. The Automated Draw Roadway Segments dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to draw an approximate roadway segment on the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The drawn polyline will be removed, and the Automated Draw Roadway Segments dialog box will be redisplayed with the measured distance, as shown below.
    Roadway Segment Maximum Length
    Notes:
    1. If this checkbox option is left blank, the polyline will extend to the limits of the underlying flow direction grid that the software computes using the selected elevation grid.
    2. The [Pick] button will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) until the user selects a starting point for the roadway segment.

Computing Flow Direction

When all the required data have been defined in the Automated Draw Roadway Segments dialog box, click the [Compute] button to compute the flow direction grid corresponding to the selected terrain surface. During the computation process, the [Compute] button will change into the [Cancel] button, which allows the user to abort the command if needed. After computing the flow direction grid, the software will internally assign the created polyline as a roadway segment on the Map View.

Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Segments

Recompute Roadway Segment Properties Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Recompute Roadway Segment Properties command allows the user to recompute roadway segment properties based on the connected routing junctions and catch basin inlets.

Follow the steps below to use the Recompute Roadway Segment Properties command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Roadway Gutter/Ditch/Inlets dropdown menu and select the Recompute Roadway Segment Properties command.
    Recompute Roadway Segment Properties Command
  2. The Recompute Roadway Segment Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    Recompute Roadway Segment Properties Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Recompute Roadway Segment Properties command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Segments

The Select Roadway Segments section allows the user to select single or multiple roadway segments for which properties are to be recomputed. This section includes a table that lists all the roadway segments contained within the current scenario of the project, as shown below.

Select Roadway Segments Section

The user can select roadway segments using any of the following methods for recomputing properties:

  1. By pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the roadway segments directly from the Map View. Immediately after selecting the roadway segments, open the Recompute Roadway Segment Properties dialog box, and the selected roadway segments will be shown as selected/checked within the Select Roadway Segments section.
  2. By checking the checkboxes corresponding to each roadway segment in the Select Roadway Segments section.
  3. By clicking the [Pick] button, the Recompute Roadway Segment Properties dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the roadway segments from the Map View. After selecting roadway segments, pressing the [Enter] key or right-clicking and choosing Done from the displayed context menu redisplays the Recompute Roadway Segment Properties dialog box.

After selecting roadway segments, the total number of selected roadway segments will be displayed in the Total Selected read-only field, as shown below.

Total Selected Read-only Field

Sorting the Roadway Segments Table

The data in the Select Roadway Segments table can be sorted by multiple columns. The user can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up or Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Sorting the Roadway Segments Table

Follow the steps below to sort the data by using multiple columns:

  1. Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  2. Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  3. Repeat step 2 to sort the data of any additional column.

For example, first, select the Length column and click the Down arrow to sort the data in descending order. Then, while holding the [Shift] key, select the Downstream Invert Elevation column and click the Up arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Example of Sorting the Roadway Segments Table

Roadway Segment Properties

This section is used to define the elevation data source and other parameters to be used to recompute the properties for the selected roadway segments.

Roadway Segment Properties Section

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the terrain elevation source type selected, the content of the Roadway Segment Properties section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN Surface

CAD Drawing

If the user selects CAD Drawing as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Segment Properties section changes, as shown below.

CAD Drawing

The following options are displayed when CAD Drawing is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • CAD drawing layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the CAD drawing layer available in the project.
  • Drawing layers
    Click the [Define] button adjacent to the Drawing layers entry to display the CAD Drawing Layers dialog box, allowing the user to define the properties of the drawing layers, as shown below.
    CAD Drawing Layers Dialog Box

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Segment Properties section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

GIS Contours

If the user selects GIS Contours as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Segment Properties section changes, as shown below.

GIS Contours

The following options are displayed when GIS Contours is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • GIS polyline layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polyline layer type.
  • Elevation attribute
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute type.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Segment Properties section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Terrain Surface

If the user selects Terrain Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Segment Properties section changes, as shown below.

Terrain Surface

The following option is displayed when the Terrain Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Terrain surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the terrain surface layer type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Segment Properties section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

After selecting the terrain elevation resource, the user can proceed with the following roadway segment properties to be recomputed for the selected roadway segments.

  • Roadway segment length
    This checkbox option is used to recompute the roadway segment length.
  • Upstream and downstream invert elevation
    This checkbox option is used to recompute the invert elevations of roadway segments on the upstream (inlet) and downstream (outlet) ends.
  • Entrance loss coefficient
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the roadway segment inlet as flow enters the roadway segment from a node (i.e., routing junction). Alternatively, clicking the […] lookup button displays the Entrance Loss Coefficients For Pipes lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose an entrance loss coefficient to be assigned to the selected roadway segments.
    Entrance Loss Coefficients For Pipes Lookup Dialog Box
    Note that in an open channel cross section where the discharge is already channelized, an entrance loss coefficient of 0.0 should be used (i.e., no head loss). For complete head loss, such as a storage area flow entering a roadway segment, a coefficient of 1 should be entered.
  • Exit loss coefficient
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the roadway segment outlet as the flow leaves the roadway segment and enters a node (i.e., routing junction). Alternatively, clicking the […] lookup button displays the Exit Loss Coefficient For Pipes lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose an exit loss coefficient to be assigned to the selected roadway segments.
    Exit Loss Coefficient For Pipes Lookup Dialog Box
    Note that for no head loss, such as roadway segment flow entering another roadway segment, a coefficient of 0 should be entered. For complete head loss, such as roadway segment flow entering a storage area, a coefficient of 1 should be used.

Computing Roadway Segment Properties

Once data have been defined in the Recompute Roadway Segment Properties dialog box, click the [Compute] button and the software will recompute the properties of the selected roadway segments.

Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Segments

Georeferencing Roadway Segments

The process of georeferencing a roadway segment to the Map View can be a trial-and-error process—especially when the exact location of the original roadway segment is not known. In this scenario, the Georeference Roadway Segments command allows the user to manually georeference each of the roadway segments to the background base map displayed in the Map View.

Note that a CRS should be assigned before running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the informational dialog box that appears below.

CSR Not Assigned to GST Model Dialog Box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

Follow the steps below to use the Georeference Roadway Segments command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Gutter/Ditch/Inlets dropdown menu and select the Georeference Roadway Segments command.
    Georeference Roadway Segments command
  2. The Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing roadway segment and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Segment to Georeference

The Select Roadway Segment to Georeference section allows the user to select the roadway segment that is to be georeferenced.

Follow the steps below to select the roadway segment to be georeferenced:

  1. Select the roadway segment from the Roadway segment ID dropdown combo box that lists all the roadway segments contained within the project.
    Roadway segment ID dropdown combo box
  2. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the roadway segment from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the roadway segment from the Map View.
  3. Upon selecting the roadway segment, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected roadway segment will be highlighted on the Map View. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

    Note: If the model contains a single roadway segment, then it will be selected automatically in the Roadway segment ID dropdown combo box.

After selecting a roadway segment, the user can select one of the following options to georeference roadway segments:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snapping Roadway Segment to an Alignment Polyline

If an existing alignment polyline for the roadway segment exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option can be used to snap the selected roadway segment to the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Polyline radio button option to enable this section.
    Snap to Alignment Polyline
  2. Click the [Pick] button next to Select alignment polyline read-only field.
    Pick Button - Select alignment polyline
  3. The Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline from the Map View.
  4. Upon selecting the alignment polyline, the Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment polyline read-only field will change from Not Selected to Selected. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.
  5. Click the [Snap] button to snap the selected roadway segment to the alignment polyline.
    Snap Button

Sliding Roadway Segment Along Alignment Polyline

If a roadway segment has been snapped to an alignment polyline but is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option can be used to slide the roadway segment along the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option to enable this section.
  2. Click the [Pick] button next to the Select alignment polyline element read-only field.
    Pick Button - Select alignment polyline element
  3. The Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select an alignment polyline from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the alignment polyline, the following Snap Entity dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Yes] button to select the polyline or click the [No] button to abort the selection and redo the entire process.
    Snap Entity
  5. Once the alignment polyline is selected, click the [Slide] button from the redisplayed Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box.
    Slide Button
  6. The Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box temporarily disappears, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the roadway segment and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline.
  7. Click and drag the roadway segment on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  8. When finished, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box will be redisplayed, and the roadway segment will be georeferenced at the new location.
  9. The user can also check the Recompute adjacent node element elevations checkbox option to recompute the elevation of the adjacent node type elements while georeferencing the roadway segment. By default, this checkbox is checked.

    Note that if the end points of the roadway segment do not overlay the same continuous alignment polyline, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed.Cannot Slide Roadway Segment Dialog Box

Drawing Roadway Segment on Map View

The Draw on Map View georeferencing option allows the user to draw an alignment polyline on the Map View and automatically snap the selected roadway segment to the drawn polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button.
    Draw Button - Draw on Map View
  2. The Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw an alignment polyline on the Map View.
  3. Draw the alignment polyline on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Roadway Segments dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected roadway segment will then automatically snap to the drawn alignment polyline.

    Notes:
    • The user can check the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using a curvilinear segment. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about element digitizing on the Map View.
    • The user can check the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the roadway segment to fit within the alignment polyline.

Assigning Roadway Segment Invert Elevation

The user can check the Assign Roadway Segment Invert Elevation checkbox option to assign an invert elevation to the roadway segment using a terrain model. The user should define the data for this section before georeferencing the roadway segment so that the invert elevation can be assigned.

Assign Roadway Segment Invert Elevation

To assign an invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • CAD drawing
  • Elevation grids
  • GIS contours
  • LandXML data
  • Terrain surfaces
  • TIN surfaces

Depending upon the elevation data source type selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information. The user can define an invert depth using the Roadway Segment invert depth entry field to raise or lower the invert of the roadway segment by the specified amount. A negative invert depth value lowers the roadway segment by the specified amount.

Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Segments

Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments command allows the user to automatically renumber roadway segments and the connected routing junctions and catch basin inlets along a defined flow path.

Follow the steps below to use the Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Roadway Gutter/Ditch/Inlets dropdown menu and then select the Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments command.
    Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments command
  2. The Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Segments

The Select Roadway Segments panel allows the user to select roadway segments that define the pipe path.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) Roadway Segments

The Select Multiple (Interconnected) Roadway Segments section is used to sequentially number roadway segments and routing junctions along the selected path that has roadway segments connected end-to-end with each other.

Click the [Pick] button to manually select roadway segments from the Map View. The Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the downstream most and upstream most roadway segments from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected roadway segments will be shown in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) Roadway Segments

Alternatively, if roadway segments are pre-selected on the Map View, opening the Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments dialog box will show those roadway segments selected in the corresponding table section. The selected roadway segments can be further unselected by unchecking the checkboxes corresponding to them.

Note that the user can pre-select multiple roadway segments from the Map View by pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the roadway segments.

Manual Editing

This section contains a table that displays the selected roadway segments, routing junctions, and their associated data. The values in the New Roadway Segment ID and New Routing Junction ID columns provide a preview of the renumbered roadway segments and routing junctions defined in the Roadway Segment Renumbering and Routing Junction Renumbering panels.

Manual Editing

The data contained in the table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF commands of the right-click context menu.

Copying or Exporting Table

Roadway Segment Renumbering

The Roadway Segment Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber roadway segments based on roadway segment length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) and the renumbering of roadway segments cannot be performed.

Roadway Segment Renumbering

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Roadway segment ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the roadway segment ID.
  • Roadway segment ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the roadway segment ID.
  • Roadway segment ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the roadway segment ID defined in this panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the roadway segment IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    1. Upstream
    2. Downstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber roadway segments using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Roadway segment ID digits: This entry field allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for roadway segment For example, using 3 digits causes the roadway segment ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
  • Next available roadway segment ID: This entry field defines the next roadway segment ID number to be used.
  • Roadway segment ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering roadway segments. The default value is 1.

Use Roadway Segment Length

The Use roadway segment length subsection is used to renumber roadway segments based on their length along the defined pipe path. By default, the Use roadway segment length radio button option is selected when the Roadway Segment Renumbering panel is checked.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Upstream roadway segment ID: This entry provides a roadway segment ID that will be used as the upstream most roadway segment number.

    Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream roadway segment ID entry will change into the Upstream roadway segment ID, as shown below.

    Numbering Direction - Roadway Segment
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of roadway segment length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in renumbering roadway By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered roadway segments in the New Roadway Segment ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

New Roadway Segment ID

Routing Junction Renumbering

The Routing Junction Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber routing junctions based on roadway segment length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) and the renumbering of routing junctions cannot be performed.

Routing Junction Renumbering

The following options are provided in this data panel:

  • Routing junction ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing Junction ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing junction ID defined in this panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the routing junction IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    1. Upstream
    2. Downstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber routing junctions using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Routing junction ID digits: This entry allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for the routing junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
  • Next available routing junction ID: This entry field defines the next routing junction ID number to be used.
  • Routing junction ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering routing junctions. The default value is 1.

Use Roadway Segment Length

The Use Roadway Segment Length subsection is used to renumber routing junctions based on roadway segment length along the defined pipe path. By default, the Use roadway segment length radio button option is selected when the Routing Junction Renumbering panel is checked.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Upstream routing junction ID: This entry provides a routing junction ID that will be used as the upstream most routing junction number.

    Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream routing junction ID entry will change into the Upstream routing junction ID, as shown below.

    Numbering direction - Routing Junction
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of roadway segment length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in renumbering routing junctions. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered routing junctions in the New Routing Junction ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

New Routing Junction ID

When all the required data have been defined in the Renumber Interconnected Roadway Segments dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the user-defined changes to the roadway segments and connected routing junctions along a defined flow path. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Note that when the user clicks the [Preview] button and clicks the [Close] button without applying the changes, the following Renumber Entities confirmational dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.

Renumber Entities confirmational dialog box
Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Segments

Merge Roadway Segments Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Merge Roadway Segments command allows the user to merge two or more roadway segments into a single roadway segment. The roadway segments must be adjoining each other, end to end, along a single alignment.

Follow the steps below to use the Merge Roadway Segments command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on Roadway Gutter/Ditch/Inlets dropdown menu and select the Merge Roadway Segments command.Input Ribbon Menu
  2. The Merge Roadway Segments dialog box will be displayed.Merge Roadway Segments
  3. From the Select Roadway Segments section, check the checkboxes corresponding to the roadway segments to be merged. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to manually select roadway segments from the Map View.[Pick] button


    Note: To select/deselect all roadway segments at once, check/uncheck the Roadway Segment checkbox.

  4. The number of selected roadway segments will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.Total selected read-only field
  5. The selected roadway segments will also be highlighted on the Map View. To abort the Map View selection process, press the [Esc] key or right-click and select Cancel from the displayed context menu.
  6. After selecting the roadway segments, click the [Apply] button and the software will merge all selected roadway segments.[Apply] button


    Note that if the selected roadway segments that are to be merged are not connected along a single alignment, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed.

    Informational dialog box
Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Crossings

Draw and Assign Roadway Crossings Command (GeoSTORM)

In GeoSTORM software, the roadway crossings (i.e., culverts and roadway overflows) can be defined by either drawing or assigning polylines on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Roadway Crossings
  • Assign Roadway Crossings

After adding roadway crossings to a stormwater project, the user can use the Roadway Crossing Data command to define additional roadway crossing data. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Roadway Crossing Data command.

Draw Roadway Crossings Command

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Roadway Crossings command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu and select the Draw Roadway Crossings command.
    Draw Roadway Crossings Command
  2. The Draw Roadway Crossings dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Roadway Crossings Dialog Box

Drawing Roadway Crossings Polylines

The Draw Roadway Crossing Polylines section allows the user to draw single or multiple polylines on the Map View as roadway crossings.

Follow the steps below to draw roadway crossings:

  1. Click the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Clicking the [Draw] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw a roadway crossing polyline on the Map View in the upstream to the downstream direction.

    Note: From the Roadway Crossing Specifications section of the Roadway Crossing Naming panel, if:

    • Roadway crossing ID option is selected, then the user can draw only one roadway crossing polyline on the Map View.
    • Auto-name roadway crossing ID option is selected, then the user can draw multiple roadway crossing polylines on the Map View one after another until completed.
  3. After drawing the roadway crossing polyline(s), the Draw Roadway Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed, and the roadway crossing polyline(s) will be drawn on the Map View.
  4. Click the [Reverse Direction] button to reverse the direction of the roadway crossing polyline drawn.

Naming Specifications

This section is used to define the naming specifications for each drawn roadway crossing along with the associated junctions.

Naming Specifications Section

Roadway Crossing Naming

Roadway Crossing Specifications

The Roadway Crossing Specifications subsection under the Roadway Crossing Naming panel allows the user to specify the roadway crossing ID for each drawn roadway crossing. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to define naming specifications for roadway crossings:

  1. If a roadway crossing was drawn while the Roadway crossing ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the roadway crossing ID in the corresponding field, as shown below.
    Roadway Crossing ID Radio Button Option
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name roadway crossing ID radio button option in order to automatically name every newly drawn roadway crossing as per the user’s predefined naming formats, as shown below.
    Auto-name Roadway Crossing ID Radio Button Option

    The different roadway crossing naming formats present in the Auto-name roadway crossing ID radio button option are as follows:

    • Roadway crossing ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the roadway crossing ID.
    • Roadway crossing ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the roadway crossing ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the roadway crossing ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new roadway crossings are created.
    • Next available roadway crossing ID: This option defines the next roadway crossing ID number to be used.
    • Roadway crossing ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering roadway crossings. The default value is 1.
    • Roadway crossing ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the roadway crossing ID.
    • Roadway crossing ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the roadway crossing naming specifications defined above.

Junction Naming

Auto-Name Junction ID

The Auto-Name Junction ID subsection under the Junction Naming panel allows the user to specify the IDs for each routing junction that are created automatically while drawing roadway crossings. The user can assign these IDs automatically using some predefined formats, as shown below.

Auto-Name Junction ID Subsection

The different junction naming formats present in the Auto-name junction ID radio button option are as follows:

  • Routing junction ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the routing junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new routing junctions are created.
  • Next available routing junction ID: This option defines the next routing junction ID number to be used.
  • Routing junction ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering routing junctions. The default value is 1.
  • Routing junction ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing junction naming specifications defined above.

Assigning Invert Elevations

This section allows the user to assign an invert elevation to the roadway crossings using a terrain model. In addition, the user can define the invert depth using the Crossing culvert invert depth entry field to raise or lower the invert of the roadway crossing culvert by the specified amount.

Assigning Invert Elevations Section

Note: Define this section before drawing roadway crossings so that the invert elevation can be assigned.

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the type of terrain elevation source selected, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces
Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.
LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Other Specifications

This section allows the user to define the physical properties for the drawn roadway crossings.

Other Specifications Section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Crossing culvert diameter
    This entry field defines the diameter for the drawn roadway crossing culvert.
  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness for the drawn roadway crossing. Clicking the […] browse button displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to select a Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a roadway crossing.
    Manning’s Roughness Lookup Dialog Box

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete drawing roadway crossings. Note that if roadway crossings are drawn using the Auto-name roadway crossing ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed disabled since the just drawn roadway crossings have already been named and created.

Assign Roadway Crossings Command

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Roadway Crossings command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu and select the Assign Roadway Crossings command.
    Assign Roadway Crossings Command
  2. The Assign Roadway Crossings dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Roadway Crossings Dialog Box

Selecting Roadway Crossing Polylines

The Select Roadway Crossing Polylines section allows the user to manually assign single or multiple polylines on the Map View as roadway crossings.

Follow the steps below to assign polylines as roadway crossings:

  1. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Clicking the [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to click near the downstream end of the already drawn roadway crossing polyline on the Map View to select it.

    Note: From the Roadway Crossing Specifications section, if:

    • Roadway crossing ID option is selected, then the user can select only one roadway crossing polyline on the Map View.
    • Auto-name roadway crossing ID option is selected, then the user can select multiple roadway crossing polylines on the Map View one after another until completed.
  3. After selecting polyline(s), the Assign Roadway Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed, and the roadway crossing polyline(s) will be selected on the Map View.
  4. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
  5. Click the [Reverse Direction] button to reverse the direction of the roadway crossing polyline assigned.

Roadway Crossing Specifications

This section is similar to the Roadway Crossing Specifications subsection explained in the Draw Roadway Crossings command.

Assigning Invert Elevations

This section is similar to the Assigning Invert Elevations section explained in the Draw Roadway Crossings command.

Other Specifications

This section is similar to the Other Specifications section explained in the Draw Roadway Crossings command. It contains an additional “Create routing junctions (if missing) at crossing ends” checkbox option. This checkbox option allows the software to create a routing junction at the roadway crossing ends if there is no node already defined within the connection snap distance. The routing junction invert elevation is set equal to the roadway crossing invert elevation.

Note that the Create routing junctions (if missing) at crossing ends entry is checked by default.

Create Routing Junctions (if missing) at Crossing Ends Entry

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete assigning roadway crossings. Note that if roadway crossings are assigned using the Auto-name roadway crossing ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed disabled since the just assigned roadway crossings have already been named and created.

Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Crossings

Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties command allows the user to recompute roadway crossing properties such as culvert barrel length, and upstream and downstream invert elevations based upon connected routing junctions and catch basin inlets.

Follow the steps below to use the Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on Roadway Culverts dropdown menu and select the Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties command.
    Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties command
  2. The Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties dialog box will be displayed as shown below.
    Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Crossings

The Select Roadway Crossings section allows the user to select roadway crossings for which properties such as culvert barrel length, and upstream and downstream invert elevations are to be recomputed. This section includes a table that lists all the roadway crossings contained within the current scenario of the project, as shown below.

Select Roadway Crossings section

The user can select roadway crossings using any of the following methods for recomputing properties:

  1. By pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the roadway crossings directly from the Map View. Immediately after selecting the roadway crossings, open the Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties dialog box, and the selected roadway crossings will be shown as selected/checked within the Select Roadway Crossings section.

  2. By checking the checkboxes corresponding to each roadway crossing in the Select Roadway Crossings section.

  3. By clicking the [Pick] button, the Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the roadway crossings from the Map View. After selecting roadway crossings, pressing the [Enter] key or right-clicking and choosing Done from the displayed context menu redisplays the Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties dialog box.

After selecting roadway crossings, the total number of selected roadway crossings will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Total selected read-only field

Roadway Crossing Properties

This section is used to define the elevation data source and other parameters to be used to recompute properties for the selected roadway crossings.

Roadway Crossing Properties section

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the terrain elevation source type selected, the content of the Roadway Crossing Properties section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN Surface

CAD Drawing

If the user selects CAD Drawing as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Crossing Properties section changes, as shown below.

Terrain elevation source - CAD Drawing

The following options are displayed when CAD Drawing is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • CAD drawing layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the CAD drawing layer available in the project.
  • Drawing layers
    Clicking the [Define] button adjacent to the Drawing layers entry displays the CAD Drawing Layers dialog box, allowing the user to define the properties of the drawing layers.
    CAD Drawing Layers dialog box

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Crossing Properties section changes, as shown below.

Terrain elevation source - Elevation Grid

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

GIS Contour

If the user selects GIS Contours as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Crossing Properties section changes, as shown below.

Terrain elevation source - GIS Contours

The following options are displayed when GIS Contours is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • GIS polyline layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polyline layer type.
  • Elevation attribute
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute type.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Crossing Properties section changes, as shown below.

Terrain elevation source - LandXML Data

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Terrain Surface

If the user selects Terrain Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Crossing Properties section changes, as shown below.

Terrain elevation source - Terrain Surface

The following option is displayed when Terrain Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Roadway Crossing Properties section changes, as shown below.

Terrain elevation source - TIN Surface

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

After selecting the terrain elevation source, the user can select or define the following options to recompute roadway crossings properties:

  • Culvert barrel length
    This checkbox option is used to recompute the length of the culvert barrel.
  • Upstream and downstream invert elevations
    This checkbox option is used to recompute the culvert invert elevations at the upstream (inlet) and downstream (outlet) ends.
  • Manning’s roughness
    This checkbox entry field is used to define the culvert Manning’s roughness. The user can manually enter the Manning’s roughness value in the entry field next to this checkbox option. Alternatively, clicking the [...] browse button displays a Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a roadway crossing.
    Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box
  • Entrance loss coefficient
    This checkbox entry field is used to define the head loss coefficient at the pipe inlet as the flow enters into the pipe from a node (i.e., manhole, junction, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). The user can manually enter the culvert entrance loss coefficients in the entry field next to this checkbox option. Alternatively, clicking the [...] browse button displays the Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose an entrance loss coefficient to be assigned to a roadway crossing.
    Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box
  • Exit loss coefficient
    This checkbox entry field is used to define the head loss coefficient at the pipe outlet as the flow leaves the pipe and enters into a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). The user can manually enter the culvert exit loss coefficients in the entry field next to this option. Alternatively, clicking the [...] browse button displays the Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose an exit loss coefficient to be assigned to a roadway crossing.
    Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box

Computing Roadway Crossing Properties

Once data have been defined in the Recompute Roadway Crossing Properties dialog box, click the [Compute] button and the software will recompute the properties of the selected roadway crossings.

Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Crossings

Georeferencing Roadway Crossings (GeoSTORM)

When the GeoSTORM software imports a model, it automatically places the roadway crossings on the Map View. However, if the original model was not spatially georeferenced, the roadway crossings will not align with the loaded background base map. So, it is preferable to have the roadway crossings georeferenced to the background base map. In this scenario, the Georeference Roadway Crossings command of the GeoSTORM software can be used to manually georeference each of the roadway crossings to the background base map displayed on the Map View. Note that a CRS should be assigned prior to running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the informational dialog box, as shown below.

CRS Not Assigned to GST Model Dialog Box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project. Follow the steps below to georeference an existing roadway crossing:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Roadway Culverts dropdown menu and then select the Georeference Roadway Crossings command. Georeference Roadway Crossings command
  2. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will be displayed, as shown below. Georeference Roadway Crossings Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing roadway crossing and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Crossing to Georeference

Follow the steps below to select the roadway crossing to be georeferenced:

  1. Select the roadway crossing from the Roadway crossing ID dropdown combo box that lists all the roadway crossings contained within the project. Roadway Crossing ID
  2. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the roadway crossing from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the roadway crossing from the Map View.
  3. After selecting the roadway crossing, the user will be immediately returned to the dialog box, and the selected roadway crossing will be highlighted on the Map View. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Once the roadway crossing has been selected, the user can choose between the following options to georeference the roadway crossing:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snapping Roadway Crossing to an Alignment Polyline

If an existing alignment polyline for the roadway crossing exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option can be used to snap the roadway crossing to the alignment polyline. Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Polyline radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button next to the Select alignment polyline read-only field. Pick Button - Snap to Alignment Polyline
  3. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline.
  4. After selecting the alignment polyline, the Georeference Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment polyline read-only field will change from Not Selected to Selected. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
  5. Click the [Snap] button to snap the selected roadway crossing to the alignment polyline. Snap Button

Sliding Roadway Crossing Along Alignment Polyline

In cases where the snapped roadway crossing is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option allows the user to manually slide the roadway crossing along the alignment polyline. Follow the steps below to use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button to select the alignment polyline from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline from the Map View. Pick Button - Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  3. After selecting the alignment polyline, the following informational dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Yes] button to select the polyline or abort the selection by clicking the [No] button. Snap Entity
  4. Once the alignment polyline is selected, click the [Slide] button from the redisplayed Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box. Slide Button
  5. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the roadway crossing and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline.
  6. Click and drag the roadway crossing on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  7. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed, and the roadway crossing will be georeferenced at the new location.
  8. The user can also check the Recompute adjacent node element elevations checkbox option to recompute the elevation of the adjacent node type elements while georeferencing the roadway crossing.

Note: For more precision, the user can use the Snap to Alignment Polyline option first and then use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option.

Drawing Roadway Crossing on Map View

The Draw on Map View georeferencing option allows the user to draw an alignment polyline and automatically snap the selected roadway crossing to the drawn polyline. Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button. Draw on Map View
  2. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the alignment polyline on the Map View.
  3. Draw the alignment polyline on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed, and the roadway crossing will automatically snap to the drawn alignment polyline.

Notes:

  • The user can turn on the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the roadway crossing to fit within the alignment polyline.
  • The Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option can be checked to draw curvilinear polyline segments.

Assigning Roadway Crossing Invert Elevation

The user can check the Assign Roadway Crossing Invert Elevation checkbox option to assign an invert elevation to the roadway crossing using a terrain model. Define this section before georeferencing the roadway crossing so that the invert elevation can be assigned. To assign an invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • CAD drawing
  • Elevation grids
  • GIS contours
  • LandXML data
  • Terrain surfaces
  • TIN surfaces

Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information. The user can define an invert depth using the Roadway Crossing invert depth entry field to raise or lower the invert of the roadway crossing by the specified amount. A negative invert elevation value lowers the roadway crossing by the specified amount.

Assign Roadway Crossing Invert Elevation
Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Crossings

Roadway Crossing Table Edit Command

The GeoSTORM software allows the user to model roadway crossings consisting of single or multiple bridge openings and culverts. Roadway crossings can also be drawn directly inside 2D flow areas to model 2D bridges. The user can view and edit all parameters related to these roadway crossings in one editable data grid table using the Roadway Crossing Table Edit command.

Follow the steps below to use the Roadway Crossing Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu and select the Roadway Crossing Table Edit command.
    Roadway Crossing Table Edit Command
  2. The Roadway Crossing Table Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Roadway Crossing Table Edit Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Roadway Crossing Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storm Results

In the Select Storm Results section, the Storm result to display dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storm frequency whose result is to be displayed.

Select Storm Results Section

Note that the Select Storm Results section is only available when either the Modified Rational, Rational Method, or Dekalb Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this section is unavailable. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about hydrology analysis engines supported by GeoSTORM.

Roadway Crossing - Culvert Parameters

The following panels are available in the Roadway Crossing - Culvert Parameters section:

  • Roadway Crossing Data
  • Result Data

Roadway Crossing Data

This panel contains editable data grid columns listing roadway crossing parameters present in the current scenario.

Roadway Crossing Data Panel

The following roadway crossing parameters are provided in the data grid columns:

  • Roadway Crossing ID:
    This editable column defines all roadway crossing IDs contained in the current scenario. Note that this editable column is also shared with the Result Data panel.
  • Culvert Set ID:
    This editable column lists the set of culverts defined for the corresponding roadway crossings. Note that the culvert set IDs must be unique for the defined roadway crossings.
  • Culvert Shape
    This column having a dropdown combo box allows the user to select a culvert shape. The following culvert shapes are available:
    • Box
    • Circular
    • Ellipse
    • Arch
    • Pipe Arch
      Culvert Shape Dropdown Combo Box
  • Culvert Diameter or Height:
    This editable column defines the diameter of a circular culvert or the height of other types of culverts.
  • Culvert Width or Span:
    This editable column defines the width or span of the culvert.
  • Culvert Length:
    This editable column defines the length of the culvert.
  • Inlet Invert Elevation:
    This editable column defines the culvert invert elevations on the upstream (inlet) ends. Clicking the [...] button available in the editable columns allows the user to pick the culvert inlet invert elevation from the Map View.
  • Outlet Invert Elevation:
    This editable column defines the culvert invert elevations on the downstream (outlet) ends. Clicking the [...] button available in the editable columns allows the user to pick the culvert outlet invert elevation from the Map View.
  • Manning’s Roughness:
    This editable column defines Manning’s roughness. Clicking the [...] button at the column header displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, as shown below.
    Manning’s Roughness Lookup Dialog Box

Result Data

The data grid columns in this panel list correspond to output results for roadway crossings present in the current scenario.

Result Data Panel

The following roadway crossing result parameters are provided in the data grid columns:

  • Culvert Slope:
    This read-only column displays the culvert slope.
  • Peak Flow Rate:
    This read-only column displays the peak flow rate at the corresponding culvert set during the storm event.
  • Maximum Velocity:
    This read-only column displays the maximum flow velocity at the corresponding culvert set during the storm event.
  • Headwater/Culvert Depth:
    This read-only column displays the ratio of headwater depth to culvert height for the corresponding culvert set, expressed as “HW/D”, where “HW” is the total depth of water (measured from the invert of a culvert), and “D” is the interior height of the culvert barrel.

Sorting the Roadway Crossing - Culvert Table

The data in the Roadway Crossing - Culvert Parameters table can be sorted by multiple columns. The user can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up and Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Sorting the Roadway Crossing - Culvert Table

Follow the steps below to sort the data using multiple columns:

  1. Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  2. Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  3. Repeat step 2 to sort the data of any additional column.

For example, first, select the Culvert Length column and click the Up arrow to sort the data in ascending order. Then, while holding the [Shift] key, select the Inlet Invert Elevation column and click the Down arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Example Showing Sorting of Roadway Crossing - Culvert Table

Copying and Exporting Roadway Crossing - Culvert Parameters

The data in the Roadway Crossing - Culvert Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the right-click context menu commands such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Copying and Exporting Roadway Crossing - Culvert Parameters

After editing the required roadway crossing parameters, click the [Close] button to close the Roadway Crossing Table Edit dialog box.

Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Roadway Crossings

Roadway Crossing Data Command

In GeoSTORM, the Roadway Crossing Data command allows the user to define roadway crossing data and display output results. This includes data of any associated culverts and weirs.

Follow the steps below to use the Roadway Crossing Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Culverts dropdown menu and select the Roadway Crossing Data command.
    Roadway Crossing Data command
  2. The Roadway Crossing Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Roadway Crossing Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Roadway Crossing Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Crossing

This section allows the user to select the roadway crossing to define the roadway crossing data. The user can create a new roadway crossing, copy existing roadway crossing data to a new roadway crossing, and delete a roadway crossing. In addition, the user can navigate between roadway crossings and enter a description detailing the defined roadway crossing.

Select Roadway Crossing section

The following entries are provided in this section:

Crossing ID

This dropdown combo box lists all the roadway crossings that are defined in the model. The user can select the desired roadway crossing from the dropdown combo box.

Click the pencil icon to edit the roadway crossing ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next roadway crossings using the up and down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the roadway crossing from the Map View.

Note that the up and down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the model contains only a single roadway crossing.

Description

This text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected roadway crossing.

New

The [New] button allows the user to create a new roadway crossing.

On clicking this button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the roadway crossing on the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key, or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.

While drawing a roadway crossing, the user can press the [Esc] key to abort the creation of a new roadway crossing and return the dialog box to its previous state.

The dialog box will be redisplayed with a default unique crossing ID displayed in the Crossing ID entry field.

Copy

The [Copy] button allows the user to copy existing roadway crossing data and any other associated data to a new roadway crossing. When this command is executed, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated roadway crossing. The cursor is then placed into the Crossing ID. The user can go with the default name or enter a different valid and unique ID before moving on to add any other data.

Delete

The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current roadway crossing data from the model. Clicking the [Delete] button causes the following confirmational dialog box to be displayed.

Delete Roadway Crossing confirmational dialog box

Click the [Yes] button to delete the selected roadway crossing data. Click the [No] button to abort the deletion process.

Less/More

The [<Less] and [More>] buttons at the Select Roadway Crossing header allow the user to hide and display the right side of the dialog box containing the Computed Results plot for roadway crossings. This allows the dialog box to be smaller in size when the user does not want to see the plot view.

Roadway Crossing Data Command Img

Roadway Crossing Specifications

This section allows the user to select the various roadway crossing specifications. The user can click on the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown selector to choose the various data panels that define the roadway crossing data.

Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown selector

General Specifications Panel

The General Specifications data panel allows the user to define the basic parameters for the selected roadway crossing.

General Specifications data panel

The following sections are available in this data panel:

Roadway Crossing Definition

This section of the General Specifications data panel defines the nodes to which the roadway crossing is connected.

Roadway Crossing Definition section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • From (inlet node)
    This read-only field defines the node ID on the inlet end of the roadway crossing. Clicking the […] button allows the user to select the node from the Map View.
  • To (outlet node)
    This read-only field defines the node ID on the outlet end of the roadway crossing. Clicking the […] button allows the users to select the node from the Map View.

Clicking the [Swap] button allows the user to switch the inlet and outlet nodes, effectively reversing the direction of the roadway crossing.

Roadway (Weir) Overflow Specifications

This section of the General Specifications data panel defines the input data for the roadway to act as an overflow spillway.

Roadway (Weir) Overflow Specifications section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Roadway (weir) minimum elevation
    This entry defines the roadway crest elevation. Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select the roadway (weir) minimum elevation from the Map View.
  • Roadway (weir) length
    This entry defines the length of the roadway that will act as a spillway (weir). Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to measure the roadway length from the Map View.
  • Roadway (weir) width (in flow direction)
    This entry defines the width of the roadway (in the direction of flow) that will act as a spillway (weir). Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to measure the roadway width from the Map View.
  • Roadway (weir) discharge coefficient
    This entry defines the weir discharge coefficient for the roadway (weir) structure.
  • Roadway surface type
    This dropdown combo box defines the type of roadway surface that will act as a spillway (weir). The following options are provided in this dropdown combo box:
    1. Gravel Surface
    2. Paved Surface

Computational Results

This section of the General Specifications data panel displays results from the stormwater computations for the selected roadway crossing.

Computational Results section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Headwater elevation
    This read-only field displays the elevation of the water at the upstream side of the roadway crossing.
  • Roadway peak overflow
    This read-only field displays the peak flow rate that occurred as roadway overflow during the storm event.

The following parameters are provided in the read-only table:

  • Culvert Set ID
    This table column displays the current set of culverts.
  • Number of Culvert Barrels
    This table column displays the number of barrels available for the corresponding culvert set ID.
  • Peak Flow Rate
    This table column displays the peak flow rate for the corresponding culvert set during the storm event.
  • Maximum Velocity
    This table column displays the maximum flow velocity for the corresponding culvert set during the storm event.
  • Headwater/Culvert Height
    This table column displays the ratio of headwater depth to culvert height for the corresponding culvert set, expressed as a ratio (HW/D), where HW is the total depth of water (measured from the invert of a culvert), and D is the interior height of the culvert barrel.

Culvert Specifications Panel

The Culvert Specifications data panel allows the user to define culverts at the roadway crossing.

Culvert Specifications data panel

The following sections are available in this data panel:

Culvert Definition

This section of the Culvert Specifications data panel defines general information about the culvert set being defined.

Culvert Definition section

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Culvert set ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the currently defined culvert sets for the current roadway crossing. Clicking the pencil icon adjacent to the Culvert set ID changes the read-only field into an editable field. The user then can edit the culvert set ID. The software checks that the defined culvert set ID is unique for the current roadway crossing. If not, a warning dialog box is displayed, and the user is then returned to the Culvert set ID field to change the ID. This dropdown combo box also displays a [New Culvert Set] button as the topmost entry in the dropdown combo box list.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new culvert set.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy existing culvert set data to a new culvert set. When this command is executed, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated culvert set.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current culvert set data from the model.
  • Culvert shape
    This dropdown combo box lists the available culvert shapes that are supported. The following culvert shapes are available in the dropdown combo box.
    1. Box
    2. Circular
    3. Ellipse
    4. Arch
    5. Pipe Arch
  • Backflow flap gate
    This checkbox option allows the user to enable a flap gate that prevents backflow (or flow reversal) for the culvert.
  • Culvert type
    This dropdown combo box lists the available culvert types that are supported based on the culvert shape previously selected.
  • Culvert entrance
    This dropdown combo box lists the available culvert entrances that are supported based on the culvert shape previously selected.
  • Number of barrels
    This integer spin-control defines the number of identical culvert barrels that are defined. The default value for this entry field is 1.

Culvert Dimensions

The following entries are provided in this section of the Culvert Specifications data panel.

Culvert Dimensions section
  • Diameter or height
    This entry defines the diameter of a circular culvert or the height of other culvert shape types.
  • Width or span
    This entry defines the width or span of the culvert shape types. This entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) for the following culvert shape types:
    1. Circular
    2. Pipe Arch
  • Culvert length
    This entry defines the length of the culvert being modeled. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the culvert length from the Map View. Clicking the [Recalc] button allows the software to recalculate the digitized length of the current culvert. Similarly, the [Recalc All] button allows the software to recalculate the digitized length of all culverts in the network.
  • Inlet invert elevation
    This entry defines the culvert invert elevations on the upstream (inlet) ends. The user can click the [...] button to select the culvert inlet invert elevation from the Map View. Clicking the [Match Invert] button causes the culvert invert elevation to be set equal to the connecting node invert elevation.
  • Outlet invert elevation
    This entry defines the culvert invert elevations on the downstream (outlet) ends. The user can click the [...] button to select the culvert outlet invert elevation from the Map View. Clicking the [Match Invert] button causes the culvert invert elevation to be set equal to the connecting node invert elevation.
  • Culvert slope (H:V)
    This read-only field defines the culvert slope. In addition, this read-only field can be used to set the slope of the culvert. Click on the pencil icon adjacent to the Culvert slope (H:V) field. This will change the read-only field into an editable field. The user can now enter the desired culvert slope and click on the [Apply changes] button. The software will then adjust the unlocked culvert end invert elevation to meet the requested slope. Note that to set the slope of the culvert, the user should first select the end of the culvert invert elevation that is to be locked. The following entries are provided in the dropdown combo box adjacent to the Culvert slope (H:V) read-only field:
    1. Lock Downstream Invert
    2. Lock Upstream Invert

Culvert Coefficients

This section of the Culvert Specifications data panel defines the coefficients used to define the material properties and other properties for the defined culvert.

Culvert Coefficients section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry defines the pipe roughness. Clicking the [...] button displays a Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box
  • Entrance loss coefficient
    This entry defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the pipe inlet as the flow enters the pipe from a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking the [...] button displays a Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup table dialog box, as shown below.
    Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup table dialog box
  • Exit loss coefficient
    This entry defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the pipe outlet as the flow leaves the pipe and enters a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking the [...] button displays a Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup table dialog box, as shown below.
    Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup table dialog box
Roadway & Inlet Modeling › Catch Basin Inlets

Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit command displays the roadway catch basin inlet parameters for each roadway segment in an editable data grid table. The user can also view the corresponding output results from this table. When a row is chosen in the table, the associated roadway segment is highlighted on the Map View. In addition, the user can select a roadway segment from the Map View, and the corresponding row will be highlighted in the table.

Follow the steps below to use the Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Gutter/Ditch/Inlets dropdown menu and then select the Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit command.
    Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit Command
  2. The Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storm Results

In the Select Storm Results section, the Storm result to display dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storm frequency whose result is to be displayed.

Select Storm Results Section

Note that the Select Storm Results section is only available when either the Modified Rational or Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this section is unavailable.

Catch Basin Parameters

The Catch Basin Parameters section displays editable data grid columns listing all the roadway catch basin inlet parameters contained in the current scenario.

Note that the user can expand or collapse the computed result parameters using the [More] or [Less] button. By default, the dialog box is displayed in a collapsed state since there might not be any results computed yet.

[More] or [Less] Button - Catch Basin Parameters

The following roadway catch basin inlet parameters are provided in the data grid columns:

  • Roadway Segment ID
    This editable column lists all roadway segment IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Roadway Element Shape
    This column having a dropdown combo box allows the user to select a type of roadway element shape. The following roadway element shapes are available:
    1. Roadway & Gutter
    2. Trapezoidal Ditch
      Roadway Element Shape Dialog Box
  • Length
    This editable column lists the lengths of the roadway segments. The user can edit the length of a roadway segment directly from the entry field or click the […] button to measure the roadway segment length from the Map View.
  • Upstream Invert Elevation
    This editable column lists the roadway segment invert elevations on the upstream ends.
  • Downstream Invert Elevation
    This editable column lists the roadway segment invert elevations on the downstream ends.
  • Peak Flow Rate
    This read-only column lists the peak flow rate at the corresponding roadway segment during the storm event.
  • Peak Flow Intercepted
    This read-only column lists the flow rate that was captured (i.e., intercepted) by the catch basin during the peak of the storm event.
  • Peak Flow Bypassing
    This read-only column lists the flow rate that bypassed the catch basin during the peak of the storm event.
  • Catch Basin Efficiency
    This read-only column lists the efficiency of the catch basin during the peak of the storm event. If this value is 100%, then the entire peak flow is captured by the catch basin.
  • Gutter Spread
    This read-only column lists the maximum spread in the roadway gutter just upstream of the catch basin during the peak of the storm event.
  • Gutter/Flow Depth
    This read-only column lists the maximum roadway gutter depth during the peak of the storm event.

Copying And Exporting Catch Basin Parameters

The data in the Catch Basin Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the right-click context menu commands such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Copying And Exporting Catch Basin Parameters

After editing the required roadway catch basin inlet parameters, click the [Close] button to close the Roadway Catch Basin Inlet Table Edit dialog box.

Roadway & Inlet Modeling › TOC Widths

Compute TOC Widths Command

The EPA SWMM platform requires users to define the TOC equivalent width for subbasins in order to calculate the rectangular runoff plane dimensions. The calculated values are used in the Kinematic Wave Time of Concentration (TOC) computations for sheet flow and shallow concentrated flow.

In GeoSTORM software, the Compute TOC Widths command allows the user to compute the EPA SWMM TOC equivalent width (W) for subbasins by computing the contributing drainage areas on both sides of the longest flow path bisecting the subbasin.

The software will use the computed longest flow path to determine the length of the subbasin channel (L) along with the two separate contributing drainage areas–A1 and A2, as shown below.

Subbasin Flow Length diagram

The Subbasin TOC Width (W) is calculated using the following equation:

Subbasin TOC Width equation

Where:

Sk = Skew factor (0≤Sk≤1) = (A2-A1)/(A1+A2)

A1 = Area on one side of the subbasin channel

A2 = Area on the opposite side of the subbasin channel

L = Length of the subbasin channel

Follow these steps to use the Compute TOC Widths command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Compute TOC Widths command.
    Watershed ribbon menu
  2. The Compute TOC Widths dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute TOC Widths dialog box
  3. From the Select Subbasins section, check the checkboxes corresponding to the subbasins. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to manually select subbasins from the Map View.
    [Pick] button
    Note: To select/deselect all subbasins at once, check/uncheck the Subbasin checkbox.
  4. The number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.
    Total selected read-only field
  5. After selecting the subbasins, click the [Compute] button, and the software will then compute the TOC equivalent widths for the selected subbasins.
    [Compute] button
  6. The TOC equivalent widths computed for the subbasins will be displayed in the TOC Equivalent Width editable column.
    TOC Equivalent Width column
    Note that if the longest flow paths have not been computed for selected subbasins, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute TOC Widths informational dialog box

The computed TOC widths for the corresponding subbasins will also be populated in the TOC equivalent width entry of the Subbasin Data dialog box. To learn more about the Subbasin Data dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Junctions

Routing Junction Table Edit Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Routing Junction Table Edit command allows the user to view and edit all the parameters of the routing junctions in a single editable data grid. The user can also view the corresponding output results from this data grid.

Follow the steps below to use the Routing Junction Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Junctions dropdown menu and select the Routing Junction Table Edit command. Routing Junction Table Edit Command
  2. The Routing Junction Table Edit dialog box will be displayed, as shown below. Routing Junction Table Edit Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Routing Junction Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storm Results

In the Select Storm Results section, the Storm result to display dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storm frequency whose result is to be displayed.

Select Storm Results Section

Note: The Select Storm Results section is only available when either the Dekalb Rational Method, Modified Rational or Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this section is unavailable. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engine.

Routing Junction Parameters

In the Routing Junction Parameters section, the following panels are available:

  • Junction Data
  • Results Data

Junction Data

This panel displays editable data grid columns listing all the routing junction parameters contained in the current scenario.

Junction Data Panel

The following routing junction parameters are provided in the data grid column entries:

  • Routing Junction ID
    This editable entry lists all routing junction IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Elevation
    This editable entry lists the routing junction invert elevation. The user can manually edit the routing junction invert elevation directly from the entry or by clicking the corresponding [...] button and measuring the routing junction invert elevation from the Map View.
  • Initial WSEL
    This editable entry lists the water surface elevation (WSEL) of the routing junction at the start of the simulation.

Results Data

The data grid columns in this panel list corresponding output results for routing junctions contained in the current scenario after the analysis is successfully computed.

Results Data Panel

The following routing junction parameters are provided in the data grid column entries:

  • Routing Junction ID
    This editable entry lists all routing junction IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Peak Flow Rate
    This read-only entry lists the computed peak flow rate at the routing junction during the storm event.
  • Maximum WSEL
    This read-only entry lists the computed maximum water surface elevation (WSEL) at the routing junction during the storm event.
  • Maximum Depth
    This read-only entry lists the computed maximum water depth at the routing junction during the storm event.

Sorting the Routing Junction Table

The data in the Routing Junction Parameters table can be sorted by multiple columns. Users can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up or Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Sorting the Routing Junction Table

Follow the steps below to sort the data by using multiple columns:

  1. Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  2. Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  3. Repeat step 2 to sort the data for any additional column.

For example, first, select the Routing Junction ID column and click the Up arrow to sort the data in ascending order. Then, while holding down the [Shift] key, select the Elevation column and click the Down arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Example Displaying Multi-column Sorting

Copying and Exporting Routing Junction Table

The data in the Routing Junction Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using right-click context menu commands such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Copying and Exporting Routing Junction Table

After editing the required routing junction parameters, click the [Close] button to close the Routing Junction Table Edit dialog box.

Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Junctions

Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions command allows the user to automatically renumber routing reaches and connected routing junctions along a defined pipe path. Follow the steps below to use the Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Routing Junctions dropdown menu and select the Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions command. Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions Command
  2. The Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions dialog box will be displayed, as shown below. Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Routing Reaches

The Select Routing Reaches panel allows the user to select routing reaches that define the pipe path.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) Routing Reaches

The Select Multiple (Interconnected) Routing Reaches section is used to sequentially number routing reaches and routing junctions along the selected pipe path that has routing reaches connected end-to-end with each other. Click the [Pick] button to manually select routing reaches from the Map View. The Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the downstream most and upstream most routing reaches from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected routing reaches will be shown in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Total Selected Read-only Field

Alternatively, if routing reaches are pre-selected on the Map View, opening the Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions dialog box will show those routing reaches selected in the corresponding table section. The selected routing reaches can be further unselected by unchecking the checkboxes corresponding to them. Note that the user can pre-select multiple routing reaches from the Map View by pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the routing reaches.

Manual Editing

This section contains a table that displays the selected routing reaches, routing junctions, and their associated data. The values in the New Routing Reach ID and New Routing Junction ID columns provide a preview of the renumbered routing reaches and routing junctions defined in the Routing Reach Renumbering and Routing Junction Renumbering panels.

Manual Editing

The data contained in the table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF commands of the right-click context menu.

Copying and Exporting Manual Editing Table

Routing Reach Renumbering

The Routing Reach Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber routing reaches based on routing reach length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled (i.e. grayed out) and the renumbering of routing reaches cannot be performed.

Routing Reach Renumbering

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Routing reach ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the routing reach ID.
  • Routing reach ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the routing reach ID.
  • Routing reach ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing reach ID defined in the panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the routing reach IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    1. Downstream
    2. Upstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber routing reaches using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection. The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Routing reach ID digits: This entry field allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for the routing reach ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing reach ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
  • Next available routing reach ID: This entry field defines the next routing reach ID number to be used.
  • Routing reach ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering routing reaches. The default value is 1.

Use Routing Reach Length

The Use routing reach length subsection is used to renumber routing reaches based on their length along the defined pipe path. By default, the Use routing reach length radio button option is selected when the Routing Reach Renumbering panel is checked. The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Upstream routing reach ID: This entry provides a routing reach ID that will be used as the upstream most routing reach number. Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream routing reach ID entry will change into the Upstream routing reach ID, as shown below. Numbering Direction - Routing Reach Renumbering
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of routing reach length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in renumbering routing reaches. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered routing reaches in the New Routing Reach ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

New Routing Reach ID

Routing Junction Renumbering

The Routing Junction Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber routing junctions based on routing reach length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) and the renumbering of routing junctions cannot be performed.

Routing Junction Renumbering

The following options are provided in this data panel:

  • Routing junction ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing junction ID defined in this panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the routing junction IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    1. Downstream
    2. Upstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber routing junctions using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection. The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Routing junction ID digits: This entry allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for the routing junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
  • Next available routing junction ID: This entry field defines the next routing junction ID number to be used.
  • Routing junction ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering routing junctions. The default value is 1.

Use Routing Reach Length

The Use routing reach length subsection is used to renumber routing junctions based on their length along the defined pipe path. By default, the Use routing reach length radio button option is selected when the Routing Junction Renumbering panel is checked. The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Upstream routing reach ID: This entry provides a routing junction ID that will be used as the upstream most routing junction number. Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream routing junction ID entry will change into the Upstream routing junction ID, as shown below. Numbering Direction - Routing Junction Renumbering
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of routing reach length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in renumbering routing junctions. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered routing junctions in the New Routing Junction ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

New Routing Junction ID

When all the required data have been defined in the Renumber Interconnected Routing Junctions dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the user-defined changes to the routing reaches and connected routing junctions along a defined pipe path. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box. Note that when the user clicks the [Preview] button and then clicks the [Close] button without applying the changes, the following Renumber Entities confirmational dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.

Renumber Entities Confirmational Dialog Box
Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Junctions

Assign Routing Junction Elevations Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Assign Routing Junction Elevations command allows the user to assign elevations to the selected routing junction(s). This command uses the elevation terrain surface to compute the elevation of an individual routing junction(s) with respect to the terrain surface available in the project.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Routing Junction Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Junctions dropdown menu and select the Assign Routing Junction Elevations command.
    the Assign Routing Junction Elevations command
  2. The Assign Routing Junction Elevations dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Assign-Routing-Junction-Elevations-Command-Img-2.png

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Routing Junction Elevations command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Routing Junctions

The Select Routing Junctions section allows the user to select single or multiple routing junction(s) for which elevations are to be assigned. This section includes a table that lists all the routing junction (s) contained within the current scenario of the project, as shown below.

Assign-Routing-Junction-Elevations-Command-Img-3.png

The user can select the routing junction(s) using any of the following methods for assigning elevations:

  • Check the checkboxes corresponding to each routing junction in the Select Routing Junctions section.

  • Click the [Pick] button, the Assign Routing Junction Elevations dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the routing junction(s) from the Map View. After selecting the routing junction(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign Routing Junction Elevations dialog box will be redisplayed.

  • Alternatively, press and hold down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the routing junction(s) directly from the Map View. After the selection is done, open the Assign Routing Junction Elevations dialog box, and the selected routing junction(s) will be shown as selected/checked within the Select Routing Junctions section.

After selecting the routing junction(s), the total number of selected routing junction(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Assign-Routing-Junction-Elevations-Command-Img-4.png

Assign Elevation

This section allows the user to assign elevations to the routing junction(s) using a terrain model.

Assign-Routing-Junction-Elevations-Command-Img-5.png

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the terrain elevation source type selected, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN surface

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes, as shown below.

Assign-Routing-Junction-Elevations-Command-Img-6.png

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes, as shown below.

Assign-Routing-Junction-Elevations-Command-Img-7.png

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes, as shown below.

Assign-Routing-Junction-Elevations-Command-Img-8.png

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Assigning Routing Junction Elevations

Once the data have been defined in the Assign Routing Junction Elevations dialog box, click the [Assign] button and the software will assign elevations to the selected routing junction(s).

Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Junctions

Routing Junction Data Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Routing Junction Data command allows the user to define routing junction data and display its associated output results.

This article describes how to use the Routing Junction Data command. Follow the steps below to use the Routing Junction Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Junctions dropdown menu and select the Routing Junction Data command.
    Routing Junction Data command
  2. The Routing Junction Data dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Routing Junction Data dialog box

    Note: From the Scenario Manager dialog box, selecting Rational Method as the hydrology analysis engine hides the plot view. This is because, for the Rational Method, there is no concept of time and hence no concept of routing flows as the analysis assumes steady-state peak flows at all nodes.

The following sections describe how to use the Routing Junction Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Routing Junction

The Select Routing Junction section allows the user to create or delete a new routing junction or copy data from an existing routing junction to a new routing junction. In addition, the user can navigate between routing junctions and enter a description detailing the defined routing junction.

Select Routing Junction section

The following entries are provided in this section:

Junction ID

This dropdown combo box lists all the routing junctions that are defined in the current scenario. The user can select the required routing junction from the dropdown combo box.

Click the pencil icon to edit the junction ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next routing junctions using the up and down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the routing junction from the Map View. Note that the up and down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the model contains only a single routing junction.

Description

This text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected junction ID.

New

The [New] button allows the user to create a new routing junction on the Map View.

On clicking this button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to place a routing junction on the Map View. After placing the routing junction, the dialog box will be redisplayed with a default unique junction ID displayed in the Junction ID entry field.

The user can press the [Esc] key to abort the creation of a new routing junction on the Map View and return the dialog box to its previous state. Note that the ID of the newly created routing junction must be unique. Otherwise, an informational dialog box is displayed as shown below. Click the [OK] button and the user is then returned to the Junction ID entry field to change the ID.

Cannot Update Junction informational dialog box

Copy

The [Copy] button allows the user to copy existing routing junction data to a new routing junction. On clicking the [Copy] button, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated routing junction. The user can use the default name or enter a different valid and unique ID before moving on to add any other data.

Delete

The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current routing junction data from the model. On clicking the [Delete] button, the following confirmational dialog box is displayed.

Delete Junction confirmational dialog box

Click the [Yes] button to delete the selected routing junction. Click the [No] button to abort the deletion process.

Less/More

The [<Less] and [More>] buttons at the Select Routing Junction section header allow the user to collapse or expand the Computed Results section.

Routing Junction Specifications

The dropdown combo box at the Routing Junction Specifications section header contains the following data panel entries, which allow the user to define routing junction data:

  • General Specification
  • Additional Inflows
    Routing Junction Specifications section header

General Specifications

The General Specification panel allows the user to define general parameters for the selected routing junction.

General Specification panel

Routing Junction Definition

The Routing Junction Definition subsection allows the user to specify principal input parameters for a routing junction.

Routing Junction Definition subsection

The following entries are provided in this subsection:

  • Invert elevation
    This entry field defines the invert elevation of the selected routing junction. Clicking the […] button allows the user to select the junction invert elevation from the Map View.
  • Initial water surface elevation
    This entry field defines the water surface elevation of the routing junction at the start of the simulation.
  • Ponded area
    This entry field defines the storage area occupied by the ponded water on the top of the junction after flooding occurs.

Computational Results

The Computational Results subsection displays intermediate information about the routing junction, as well as results from the stormwater computations.

Computational Results subsection

The following results are provided in this subsection:

  • Peak flow rate
    This read-only field displays the peak flow rate that occurred at the routing junction during the storm event.
  • Maximum WSEL
    This read-only field displays the maximum water surface elevation that occurs at the routing junction during the storm event.
  • Maximum depth
    This read-only field displays the maximum water depth that occurs at the routing junction during the storm event.

Additional Inflows

The Additional Inflows panel allows the user to specify any external inflows at the routing junction. These inflows can consist of both a constant and a time-varying component. The additional inflows are applied directly to the routing junction and can be used for flow routing in the absence of any runoff computations (e.g., in a study area where no subbasins are defined). In river or stream modeling, user-defined inflows can be used to define the baseflow.

Additional Inflows panel

Baseline Inflows

The following entries are provided in this subsection:

  • Baseline inflow
    This entry field allows the user to define a constant baseline inflow. If this field is left blank, then no baseline inflow is assumed.
  • Baseline pattern (optional)
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select an optional time pattern defined in the current scenario whose factors adjust the baseline inflow. If this dropdown list is left blank, then the baseline inflow will not be adjusted.
    Baseline pattern dropdown combo box
    Clicking the [Define] button displays the Time Patterns Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a specific pattern to be applied to the defined Baseline Inflow. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Time Patterns Data dialog box.

Time Series Inflows

The following entries are provided in this subsection:

  • Time series scale factor
    This entry field allows the user to define a multiplier to adjust the values of the inflow time series. If this entry field is left blank, then the scale factor defaults to a value of 1.0000
  • Time series inflow
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the time series defined in the current scenario. If None is selected, no time series inflow will be assigned to the routing junction.
    Time series inflow dropdown combo box
    Clicking the [Define] button displays the Time Series Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a specific time series inflow data set to be used. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Time Series Data dialog box.
Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Junctions

Georeferencing Routing Junctions

When defining a routing reach, the user might use multiple cross sections or reach geometries. In this situation, several routing reaches are connected with routing junctions to represent the extent of the routing reach to which the defined reach geometry should be applied. If a routing junction is not located at the correct location on the routing reach, the user can use the Georeference Routing Junctions command to automatically map/georeference that routing junction to a required location.

Note that a CRS should be assigned prior to running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the informational dialog box that appears below.

CRS Not Assigned to GST Model informational dialog box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing routing junction:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Routing Junctions dropdown menu and select the Georeference Routing Junctions command.
    Georeference Routing Junctions command
  2. The Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing routing junction and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Routing Junction to Georeference

The Select Routing Junction to Georeference section allows the user to interactively select the routing junction to georeference.

Follow the steps below to select the routing junction to be georeferenced:

  1. Select the routing junction from the Routing junction ID dropdown combo box that lists all the routing junctions contained within the current scenario.
    Routing Junction ID
  2. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the routing junction from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the routing junction from the Map View.
  3. Upon selecting the routing junction, the user will be immediately returned to the Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box, and the selected routing junction will be highlighted on the Map View.
  4. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Once the routing junction has been selected, the user can choose among the following georeferencing options:

  • Snap to Alignment Point
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snapping Routing Junction to an Alignment Point

If an existing alignment point for the routing junction exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Point georeferencing option can be used to snap the routing junction to the alignment point.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Point option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Point radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button next to the Select alignment point read-only field.
    Pick Button
  3. The Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment point.
  4. Select the alignment point on the Map View. Note that the user can select only one alignment point at a time for georeferencing.
  5. The Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment point read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
  6. After selecting the alignment point, click the [Snap] button to snap the selected routing junction to the alignment point.
    Snap Button

Sliding Routing Junction Along Alignment Polyline

If a routing junction has been snapped to an alignment point on the Map View but is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option can be used to manually slide the routing junction along the routing reach alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Slide along Alignment Polyline option:

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button to select the routing reach alignment polyline from the Map View.
    [Pick] button
  3. The Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the routing reach alignment polyline from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the routing reach alignment polyline, the following informational dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Yes] button to select the polyline or abort the selection by clicking the [No] button.
    Snap Entity
  5. Once the routing reach alignment polyline is selected, the Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment polyline element read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. Then, click the [Slide] button.
    [Slide] button
  6. The Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the routing junction and drag it along the underlying routing reach alignment polyline.
  7. Click and drag the routing junction on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  8. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the routing junction will be georeferenced at the new location.

Note: For more precision, the user can use the Snap to Alignment Point option first and then use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option.

Drawing Routing Junction on Map View

The Draw on Map View option allows the user to draw an alignment point and automatically snap the selected routing junction to the drawn point.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button.
    [Draw] button
  2. The Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the alignment point on the Map View.
  3. Draw the alignment point on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Routing Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the routing junction will automatically snap to the drawn alignment point.

Assigning Routing Junction Elevation

The user can check the Assign Elevation checkbox option to assign an elevation to the routing junction using a terrain model. Define this section before georeferencing a routing junction so that the elevation can be assigned.

Assign Elevation section

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the selected terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN Surface

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.
Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Junctions

Draw and Assign Routing Junctions Command

Junctions are key elements in a stormwater network model, representing points where rivers, streams, and stormwater pipes merge. These elements, which include nodes, manholes, and confluences, can receive multiple inflows but direct the combined flow through a single outflow.

In GeoSTORM software, routing junctions can be defined by either drawing or assigning nodes on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Routing Junctions
  • Assign Routing Junctions

Drawing/Assigning Routing Junctions

The Draw/Assign Routing Junctions command allows the user to manually draw/assign single or multiple nodes on the Map View as routing junctions one after another until completed.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Routing Junctions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Routing Junctions dropdown menu and choose the Draw/Assign Routing Junctions command.
    Routing Junctions dropdown menu
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed.
    • Draw Routing Junctions:
      Draw Routing Junctions dialog box
    • Assign Routing Junctions:
      Assign Routing Junctions dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw/Assign Routing Junctions command and interact with the above dialog boxes.

Drawing Routing Junctions

The Draw Routing Junction Nodes section of the Draw Routing Junctions dialog box is used to draw single or multiple nodes on the Map View as routing junctions.

To draw routing junctions, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Draw Routing Junction Nodes section, click the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Draw Routing Junction Nodes section
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw routing junction nodes on the Map View. Click on the Map View to draw the routing junction nodes.
    Note: From the Routing Junction Specifications section, if:
    • Routing junction ID naming option is selected, then the user can draw only one routing junction node on the Map View.
    • Auto-name routing junction ID naming option is selected, then the user can draw multiple routing junction nodes one after the other on the Map View.
  3. After drawing routing junction nodes, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Draw Routing Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Routing junction nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Routing junction nodes read-only field

Notes:

  • To draw the node more accurately, use the mouse roller wheel to zoom into a specific location.
  • The Snap Mode option can be enabled to cause the drawn routing junction to snap to the nearest stormwater element. Refer to this article in our knowledge base for more information.

Assigning Routing Junctions

The Select Routing Junction Nodes section of the Assign Routing Junctions dialog box can be used to manually assign single or multiple nodes on the Map View as routing junctions.

To assign routing junction nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Select Routing Junction Nodes section, click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to select previously drawn nodes from the Map View to assign them as routing junctions. Click on nodes to select them.
    Note: From the Routing Junction Specifications section, if:
    • Routing junction ID naming option is selected, then the user can select only one node from the Map View.
    • Auto-name routing junction ID naming option is selected, then the user can select multiple nodes one after the other from the Map View.
  3. After selecting nodes, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Assign Routing Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Routing junction nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
    Routing junction nodes read-only field

Routing Junction Specifications

The Routing Junction Specifications section is common to both the Draw Routing Junctions and Assign Routing Junctions dialog boxes and is used to specify the routing junction ID for each drawn/assigned routing junction. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign IDs to the routing junctions:

  1. If a routing junction was drawn/assigned while the Routing junction ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the routing junction ID in the corresponding field, as shown below.
    Routing junction ID radio button option
  2. Alternately, the user can enable the Auto-name routing junction ID radio button option in order to automatically name every newly drawn/assigned routing junction as per the user’s predefined naming formats, as shown below.
    Draw Routing Junction dialog box
    The different routing junction naming formats present in the Auto-name routing junction ID option are as follows:
    • Routing junction ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the routing junction ID.
    • Routing junction ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the routing junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available routing junction ID: This entry defines the next routing junction ID number to be used.
    • Routing junction ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering routing junctions. The default value is 1.
    • Routing junction ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the routing junction ID.
    • Routing junction ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the routing junction naming specifications defined above.

Assign Routing Junction Elevation

The Assign Elevation section is common to both the Draw Routing Junctions and Assign Routing Junctions dialog boxes and allows the user to assign elevation to the routing junctions using a terrain model. The parameters in this section should be defined before drawing/assigning routing junctions so that elevations can be assigned.

Assign Elevations section

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the selected terrain elevation source, the options of the Assign Elevation section change to select the corresponding terrain type already available in the project.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN Surface

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Elevation section changes as shown below.

Assign Elevations section

The following option is displayed when the Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Elevation section changes as shown below.

LandXML Data terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Tin Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Elevation section changes as shown below.

TIN Surface terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete drawing/assigning routing junctions. Note that if routing junctions are drawn/assigned using the Auto-name routing junction ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed as disabled since the just drawn/assigned routing junctions have already been named and created.

Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Reaches

Routing Reach Data Command

Routing reaches define the elements (i.e., pipes, streams, channels, etc.) that route flow through the stormwater network model. In GeoSTORM, the Routing Reach Data command allows users to add new routing reaches and edit routing reach data in a stormwater project.

Follow the steps below to use the Routing Reach Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Routing Reach Data command. Alternatively, the user can double-click on the routing reach polyline from the Map View.
    Routing Reach Data command
  2. The Routing Reach Data dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Routing Reach Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Routing Reach Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Routing Reach

The Select Routing Reach section allows the user to create or delete a new routing reach, or copy an existing routing reach to a new routing reach. In addition, the user can navigate between routing reaches and enter a description for each routing reach.

Select Routing Reach section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Reach ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the routing reaches defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., pencil icon) to edit the routing reach ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next routing reach using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the routing reach from the Map View. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains a single routing reach.
  • Description
    This optional field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected routing reach.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new routing reach on the Map View. The ID of every newly created routing reach must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy an existing routing reach along with its associated data to a new routing reach. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied routing reach.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected routing reach from the current scenario. Note that when deleting a routing reach, any associated irregular cross section geometry (transect) will also be deleted.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Routing Reach section header allow the user to expand or collapse the Computed Results section.

Routing Reach Specifications

The dropdown combo box at the Routing Reach Specifications section header contains the following data panel entries, which allow the user to define routing reach data:

  • General Specifications
  • Cross Section Specifications
    Routing Reach Specifications dropdown combo box

General Specifications

The General Specifications panel allows the user to define the basic parameters for the routing reach.

General Specifications panel

Routing Reach Definition

This section allows the user to define the general parameters for the selected routing reach.

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Cross section shape
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the cross section shape to be used for the routing reach. The following cross section shapes are available:
    1. Irregular (HEC-RAS Style) channel
    2. Rectangular Channel
    3. Trapezoidal Channel (default)
    4. Triangular Channel
      Cross section shape dropdown combo box
  • Length
    This entry field defines the length of the routing reach being modeled. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the routing reach length from the Map View. Clicking the [Recalc] button allows the software to recalculate the digitized length of the current routing reach. Similarly, clicking the [Recalc All] button allows the software to recalculate the digitized length of all routing reaches contained in the current scenario.
  • Inlet invert elevation
    This entry field defines the routing reach invert elevation on the upstream (inlet) end. The user can click the [...] button to select the routing reach inlet invert elevation from the Map View. Clicking the Down arrow button causes the routing reach invert elevation to be set equal to the connecting node invert elevation.
  • Outlet invert elevation
    This entry field defines the routing reach invert elevation on the downstream (outlet) end. The user can click the [...] button to select the routing reach outlet invert elevation from the Map View. Clicking on the [Down] arrow button causes the routing reach invert elevation to be set equal to the connecting node invert elevation.
  • From (inlet node)
    This read-only field defines the node ID on the inlet end of the routing reach. The user can click the […] button to select the inlet node from the Map View. Clicking the [Swap] button allows the user to switch the inlet and outlet nodes, effectively reversing the direction of the routing reach.
  • To (outlet node)
    This read-only field defines the node ID on the outlet end of the routing reach. The user can click the […] button to select the outlet node from the Map View.
  • Routing reach slope (H:V)
    This entry field displays the slope of the routing reach. In addition, this entry field can be used to set the slope of the routing reach. The user can click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) adjacent to the Routing reach slope (H:V) field to change the read-only field into an editable field. The user can then enter the routing reach slope and click the [Accept changes] button. The software will then adjust the unlocked routing reach end invert elevation to meet the updated slope value.
    [Accept changes] button
    Note: To set the slope of the routing reach, the user should first select the end of the routing reach invert elevation that is to be locked. The following options are provided in the dropdown combo box adjacent to the Routing reach slope (H:V) entry field.
    1. Lock Downstream Invert
    2. Lock Upstream Invert

Routing Reach Coefficients

This section allows the user to define the entrance, exit, and average loss coefficients for the selected routing reach.

Routing Reach Coefficients section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Entrance loss coefficient
    This entry field defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the inlet of the routing reach as the flow enters the routing reach from a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, catch basin, routing junction, or storage area). Clicking the [...] button displays the Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the entrance loss coefficient to be assigned to a routing reach.
    Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box
  • Exit loss coefficient
    This entry field defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the outlet of the routing reach as the flow leaves the routing reach and enters a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, catch basin, routing junction, or storage area). Clicking the [...] button displays the Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the exit loss coefficient to be assigned to a routing reach.
    Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box
  • Average loss coefficient
    This entry field defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses along the length of the routing reach.

Defining Cross Section Specifications

In the Cross Section Specifications panel, the available sections change based upon the cross section shape selected in the Routing Reach Definition section of the General Specifications panel, as shown in the table below.

unknown nodeCross Section Specifications panel - Irregular Cross Section Definition section

Irregular Cross Section Definition

In the Cross Section Specifications panel, the Irregular Cross Section Definition section allows the user to define the irregular cross section geometry and the associated data for the selected routing reach.

The following subpanels are provided:

  • Geometry Data
  • Geometry Plot
  • Simplify Geometry
Geometry Data

This subpanel defines the station-elevation data, left and right overbank stations, and Manning’s roughness coefficients for the irregular cross section.

The following parameters are provided in this subpanel:

  • Horizontal Station
    This editable table column lists the horizontal stationing of the ground points that define the irregular cross section.
  • Ground Elevation
    This editable table column lists the elevations of the ground points that define the irregular cross section.
  • Left bank station
    This entry field defines the left bank station for the irregular cross section. Clicking the […] button allows the user to select the left bank station from the cross section line on the Map View.
  • Right bank station
    This entry field defines the right bank station for the irregular cross section. Clicking the […] button allows the user to select the right bank station from the cross section line on the Map View.
  • Left overbank roughness
    This entry field defines the left overbank Manning’s roughness. Clicking the […] button displays a Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a cross section.
    Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box
  • Channel roughness
    This entry field defines the channel Manning’s roughness. Clicking the […] button displays a Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose a Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a cross section.
  • Right overbank roughness
    This entry field defines the right overbank Manning’s roughness. Clicking the […] button displays a Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose a Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a cross section.
Geometry Plot

This subpanel displays the profile plot of the irregular cross section geometry.

Geometry Plot subpanel
Simplify Geometry

This subpanel allows the user to reduce the number of ground points used to define the irregular cross section geometry.

Simplify Geometry subpanel
Geometry Point Reduction

This subsection allows the user to automatically filter out unnecessary ground points for the cross section geometry.

The following parameters are provided in this subsection:

  • Current number of geometry points
    This read-only field displays the total number of ground points defined for the current cross section.
  • Reduce number of geometry points to
    This entry field defines the number of ground points by which to reduce the cross section. By default, the software uses a value of 1490. However, the user can enter different values if needed.
  • Select region to reduce
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to specify exactly at which location of the cross section the ground point reduction should be applied. The following options are provided:
    1. Both Overbanks
    2. Channel Only
    3. Entire Cross Section
    4. Left Overbank Only
    5. Right Overbank Only
      • Select region to reduce dropdown combo box
  • Apply reduction to
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the cross sections for which the ground point reduction should be applied. The following options are provided:
    1. All Cross Sections
    2. Current Cross Section
      • Apply reduction to dropdown combo box
Perform Geometry Point Reduction

This subsection displays the progress associated with reduction of geometry points with the help of a progress bar. Clicking the [Apply] button will apply the reduced geometry points to the specified cross section.

Rectangular Channel Definition

The Rectangular Channel Definition section allows the user to define the rectangular channel parameters for the selected routing reach.

Rectangular Channel Definition section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Rectangular channel height
    This entry field defines the height (or depth) of the rectangular channel. The flow that overtops this height is lost as overflow from the system.
  • Channel bottom width
    This entry field defines the bottom width of the rectangular channel.
  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry field defines the rectangular channel roughness. Clicking the [...] button displays a Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a cross section.
    Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box

Trapezoidal Channel Definition

The Trapezoidal Channel Definition section allows the user to define the trapezoidal channel parameters for the selected routing reach.

Trapezoidal Channel Definition section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Trapezoidal channel height
    This entry field defines the height (or depth) of the trapezoidal channel. Flow that overtops this height is lost as overflow from the system.
  • Trapezoidal side slope (V:H)
    This entry field defines the side slope of the trapezoidal channel. The side slope is dimensionless and entered as the units of horizontal distance per unit of vertical distance.
  • Trapezoidal bottom width
    This entry field defines the bottom width of the trapezoidal channel.
  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry field defines the trapezoidal channel roughness. Clicking the [...] button displays a Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose a Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a cross section.
    Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box

Triangular Channel Definition

The Triangular Channel Definition section allows the user to define the triangular channel parameters for the selected routing reach.

Triangular Channel Definition section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Triangular channel height
    This entry field defines the height (or depth) of the triangular channel. The flow that overtops this height is lost as overflow from the system.
  • Triangular side slope (V:H)
    This entry field defines the side slope of the triangular channel. The side slope is dimensionless and entered as the units of horizontal distance per unit of vertical distance.
  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry field is used to define the triangular channel roughness. Clicking the [...] button displays a Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a cross section.
    Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box

Computational Results

After successfully computing the analysis, this section provides a summary of the stormwater computational results for the selected routing reach.

Computational Results section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Peak flow rate
    This read-only field displays the peak flow rate in the routing reach during the storm event.
  • Maximum flow velocity
    This read-only field displays the maximum flow velocity in the routing reach during the storm event.
  • Design flow capacity
    This read-only field displays the flow rate capacity of the routing reach.
  • Max/design flow ratio
    This read-only field displays the ratio of the Peak flow rate to the Design flow capacity values. A value of 100% means that the routing reach is overflowing.
  • Max/total depth ratio
    This read-only field displays the ratio of routing reach flow depth to routing reach total depth. A value of 100% means that the routing reach is overflowing.
  • Maximum flow depth
    This read-only field displays the maximum flow depth in the routing reach during the storm event.
Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Reaches

Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches command allows the user to automatically renumber routing reaches and connected routing junctions along a defined pipe path.

Follow the steps below to use the Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches command. Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches Command
  2. The Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches dialog box will be displayed, as shown below. Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Routing Reaches

The Select Routing Reaches panel allows the user to select routing reaches that define the pipe path.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) Routing Reaches

This section is used to sequentially number routing reaches and routing junctions along the selected pipe path that has routing reaches connected end-to-end with each other.

Click the [Pick] button to manually select routing reaches from the Map View. The Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the downstream most and upstream most routing reaches from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected routing reaches will be shown in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Total Selected Read-only Field

Alternatively, if routing reaches are pre-selected on the Map View, opening the Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches dialog box will show those routing reaches selected in the corresponding table section. The selected routing reaches can be unselected by unchecking the checkboxes corresponding to them.

Note that the user can pre-select multiple routing reaches from the Map View by pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the routing reaches.

Manual Editing

This section contains a table that displays the selected routing reaches, routing junctions, and associated data. The values in the New Routing Reach ID and New Routing Junction ID columns provide a preview of the renumbered routing reaches and routing junctions defined in the Routing Reach Renumbering and Routing Junction Renumbering panels.

Manual Editing

The data contained in the table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF commands of the right-click context menu.

Copying and Exporting Table Data

Routing Reach Renumbering

The Routing Reach Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber routing reaches based on routing reach length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled (i.e. grayed out) and the renumbering of routing reaches cannot be performed.

Routing Reach Renumbering

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Routing reach ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the routing reach ID.
  • Routing reach ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the routing reach ID.
  • Routing reach ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing reach ID defined in the panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the routing reach IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    1. Downstream
    2. Upstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber routing reaches using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Routing reach ID digits: This entry field allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for routing reach ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing reach ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
  • Next available routing reach ID: This entry field defines the next routing reach ID number to be used.
  • Routing reach ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering routing reaches. The default value is 1.

Use Routing Reach Length

The Use routing reach length subsection is used to renumber routing reaches based on their length along the defined pipe path. By default, the Use routing reach length radio button option is selected when the Routing Reach Renumbering panel is checked.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Upstream routing reach ID: This entry provides a routing reach ID that will be used as the upstream most routing reach number.

    Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream routing reach ID entry will change into the Upstream routing reach ID, as shown below. Numbering Direction - Routing Reach Renumbering
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of routing reach length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in renumbering routing reaches. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered routing reaches in the New Routing Reach ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

New Routing Reach ID

Routing Junction Renumbering

The Routing Junction Renumbering panel allows the user to renumber routing junctions based on routing reach length or sequentially. By default, the checkbox on this panel is checked. If unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) and the renumbering of routing junctions cannot be performed.

Routing Junction Renumbering

The following options are provided in this data panel:

  • Routing junction ID prefix: This optional checkbox entry allows a prefix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID suffix: This optional checkbox entry allows a suffix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing junction ID defined in this panel.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow direction in which the routing junction IDs can be renumbered. The following options are available:
    1. Downstream
    2. Upstream

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection allows the user to renumber routing junctions using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable this subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Routing junction ID digits: This entry allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for the routing junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, and 003.
  • Next available routing junction ID: This entry field defines the next routing junction ID number to be used.
  • Routing junction ID increment: This entry field defines the increment to use when numbering routing junctions. The default value is 1.

Use Routing Reach Length

The Use routing reach length subsection is used to renumber routing junctions based on their length along the defined pipe path. By default, the Use routing reach length radio button option is selected when the Routing Junction Renumbering panel is checked.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Upstream routing reach ID: This entry provides a routing junction ID that will be used as the upstream most routing junction number.

    Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream routing junction ID entry will change into the Upstream routing junction ID, as shown below.

    Numbering Direction - Routing Junction Renumbering
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of routing reach length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in renumbering routing junctions. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

After defining all the required data in this panel, click the [Preview] button to preview the IDs of the renumbered routing junctions in the New Routing Junction ID column of the Manual Editing table, as shown below.

New Routing Junction ID

When all the required data have been defined in the Renumber Interconnected Routing Reaches dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the user-defined changes to the routing reaches and connected routing junctions along a defined pipe path. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Note that when the user clicks the [Preview] button and then clicks the [Close] button without applying the changes, the following Renumber Entities confirmational dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.

Renumber Entities Confirmational Dialog Box
Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Reaches

Import Routing Reach Alignment Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Import Routing Reach Alignment command allows the user to import any external geometry data necessary to construct routing reach alignment. Follow the steps below to use the Import Routing Reach Alignment command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Import Routing Reach Alignment command. Import Routing Reach Alignment command
  2. The Import Routing Reach Alignment dialog box will be displayed, as shown below. Import Routing Reach Alignment dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Import Routing Reach Alignment command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reach File

The Select Reach File section allows the user to select the routing reach point file to be imported. The file needs to be in an ASCII text file format, with either commas, tabs, or spaces delimiting the data fields contained within each row of the file. The first row within the file that contains 3 floating point numbers is used to start the import routing reach process. Whenever a blank line is encountered within the data file, or the direction between three adjacent points changes too much, the software interprets this as the start of a new routing reach. The following survey file formats are supported:

  • EN (Easting, Northing)
  • ENZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • ENZD (Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • LLZ (Lat-Long, Elevation)
  • LLZD (Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • NE (Northing, Easting)
  • NEZ (Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • NEZD (Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PEN (Point, Easting, Northing)
  • PENZ (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • PEND (Point, Easting, Northing, Description)
  • PENZD (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • PLLZD (Point, Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • PNE (Point, Northing, Easting)
  • PNEZ (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • PNED (Point, Northing, Easting, Description)
  • PNEZD (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PNT (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)
  • PTS (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)

The software will attempt to determine the file format based upon the file extension. However, the user can change the file format to be used after the file is selected. For reference, Easting = X coordinate and Northing = Y coordinate.

Point File Preview

This section shows the first 100 lines contained within the survey point file. It allows the user to see the contents of the survey point file and allows the user to change the file format to be used for importing based upon previewing the contents. After changing the file format, the column headings change in the Point File Preview section.

Point File Preview section

Reach Naming Specifications

This section allows the user to define the naming specifications to be used for the imported routing reaches.

Reach Naming Specifications section

The different routing reach naming formats present in this section are as follows:

  1. Routing reach ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the routing reach ID.
  2. Routing reach ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the routing reach ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing reach ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new routing reaches are created.
  3. Next available routing reach ID: This option defines the next routing reach ID number to be used.
  4. Routing reach ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering routing reach. The default value is 1.
  5. Routing reach ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the routing reach ID.
  6. Routing reach ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing reach naming specifications defined above.

Assign Reach Slope & Downstream Invert Elevation

This section allows the user to assign the slope and invert elevation to the routing reach using a terrain model.

Assign Reach Slope & Downstream Invert Elevation section

Note: Define this section before importing routing reaches so that the slope and invert elevations can be assigned.

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the type of terrain elevation source selected, the contents of the Assign Reach Slope & Downstream Invert Elevations section changes to specify additional elevation data information. The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN Surface

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Reach Slope & Downstream Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid terrain elevation source

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Reach Slope & Downstream Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Routing Reach Slope & Downstream Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Importing Routing Reach Alignment

Once data have been defined in the Import Routing Reach Alignment dialog box, click the [OK] button and the software will import the external geometry data to construct the routing reach alignment.

Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Reaches

Draw and Assign Routing Reaches Command

A reach is a section of a stream or river along which similar hydrologic conditions exist, such as discharge, depth, area, and slope. In GeoSTORM software, routing reaches can be defined by either drawing or assigning polylines on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Routing Reaches
  • Assign Routing Reaches

Draw Routing Reaches Command

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Routing Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Draw Routing Reaches command.
    Draw Routing Reaches command
  2. The Draw Routing Reaches dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Routing Reaches dialog box

Drawing Routing Reach Polylines

The Draw Routing Reach Polylines section allows the user to draw single or multiple polylines on the Map View as routing reaches.

Follow the steps below to draw routing reaches:

  1. Click the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Draw Routing Reach Polylines section - [Draw] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw a reach polyline on the Map View in the upstream to the downstream direction.

    Note: From the Routing Reach Specifications subsection of the Reach Naming panel, if:

    • Routing reach ID naming option is selected, then the user can draw only one routing reach polyline on the Map View.
    • Auto-name routing reach ID naming option is selected, then the user can continuously draw routing reach polylines one after the other on the Map View.
  3. After drawing routing reach polyline(s), the Draw Routing Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed, and the routing reach polyline(s) will be drawn on the Map View.

Notes:

  • If the “Draw curvilinear polylines” checkbox is checked, then it allows the user to draw curvilinear polyline segments for the routing reaches.
  • If the “Discard accidentally digitized reach less than” checkbox is checked, then the software discards accidentally digitized routing reaches that are shorter than the defined length. The user can define the length of the routing reach in the entry field adjacent to this checkbox option.
  • The [Reverse Direction] button reverses the flow direction of the routing reach polyline drawn.

Naming Specifications

This section allows the user to define the naming specifications for each drawn routing reach along with the associated junctions and manholes.

Naming Specifications section

Reach Naming

Routing Reach Specifications

The Routing Reach Specifications subsection under the Reach Naming panel allows the user to specify the routing reach ID for each drawn routing reach. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to define naming specifications for routing reaches:

  1. If a routing reach is drawn while keeping the Routing reach ID radio button option selected, the user can manually enter the routing reach ID in the corresponding field, as shown below.
    Routing reach ID radio button option
  2. If a routing reach is drawn while keeping the Auto-name routing reach ID radio button option selected, then it automatically names every newly drawn routing reach as per the user’s predefined naming formats, as shown below.
    Auto-name routing reach ID radio button option

The following naming formats are available in the Auto-name routing reach ID radio button option:

  • Routing reach ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the routing reach ID.
  • Routing reach ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the routing reach ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing reach ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new routing reaches are created.
  • Next available routing reach ID: This option defines the next routing reach ID number to be used.
  • Routing reach ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering routing reaches. The default value is 1.
  • Routing reach ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the routing reach ID.
  • Routing reach ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing reach naming specifications defined above.

Junction Naming

Auto-Name Junction ID

The Auto-Name Junction ID subsection under the Junction Naming panel allows the user to specify the IDs for each routing junction that are created automatically while drawing routing reaches. The user can assign these IDs automatically using some predefined formats, as shown below.

Auto-Name Junction ID subsection of the Junction Naming panel

The following naming formats are available in the Auto-Name Junction ID subsection:

  • Routing junction ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the routing junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the routing junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new routing junctions are created.
  • Next available routing junction ID: This option defines the next routing junction ID number to be used.
  • Routing junction ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering routing junctions. The default value is 1.
  • Routing junction ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the routing junction ID.
  • Routing junction ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the routing junction naming specifications defined above.

Manhole Naming

Auto-Name Manhole ID

The Auto-Name Manhole ID subsection under the Manhole Naming panel allows the user to specify the IDs for manholes associated with routing reaches. The user can assign these IDs automatically using some predefined formats, as shown below.

Auto-Name Manhole ID subsection of the Manhole Naming panel

The following naming formats are available in the Auto-Name Manhole ID subsection:

  • Manhole ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the manhole ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the manhole ID to be of the format 001, 002, 003, and so on as new manholes are created.
  • Next available manhole ID: This option defines the next manhole ID number to be used.
  • Manhole ID increment: This option defines the increment to use when numbering manholes. The default value is 1.
  • Manhole ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the manhole ID.
  • Manhole ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the manhole naming specifications defined above.

Assigning Invert Elevation

This section allows the user to assign an invert elevation to the routing reaches using a terrain model.

Note: This section is common to both the Draw Routing Reaches and Assign Routing Reaches dialog boxes.

Assigning Invert Elevation section - Elevation Grid terrain elevation source

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the type of terrain elevation source selected, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN Surface
Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

Assigning Invert Elevation section - Elevation Grid terrain elevation source

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.
LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.
TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Invert Elevations section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Other Specifications

This section allows the user to define the following physical properties for the drawn routing reaches:

Draw Routing Reaches - Other Specifications section
  • Cross section shape: This dropdown combo box is used to specify the cross section shape to be used with the routing reach. The following entries are provided:
    1. Irregular (HEC-RAS Style) Channel
    2. Rectangular Channel
    3. Trapezoidal Channel
    4. Triangular Channel

    Note: All the options under the Other Specifications section will not be displayed if Irregular (HEC-RAS Style) Channel is selected as the cross section shape.

  • Channel height: This entry field defines the height (or depth) of the selected channel shape. Flow that overtops this height is lost as overflow from the system. This entry field is disabled for the Irregular (HEC-RAS Style) Channel cross section shape.
  • Channel bottom width: This entry field defines the bottom width of the selected channel shape. This entry field is disabled for the following cross section shapes:
    1. Triangular Channel
    2. Irregular (HEC-RAS Style) Channel
  • Channel side slope (V:H): This entry field defines the side slope of the channel sides. This entry field is disabled for the following cross section shapes:
    1. Rectangular Channel
    2. Irregular (HEC-RAS Style) Channel
  • Manning’s roughness: This entry field defines the Manning’s roughness. Clicking the […] lookup button displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to select a Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a routing reach.
    Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete drawing routing reaches. Note that if routing reaches are drawn using the Auto-name routing reach ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed disabled since the just drawn routing reaches have already been named and created.

Assign Routing Reaches Command

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Routing Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Assign Routing Reaches command.
    Assign Routing Reaches command
  2. The Assign Routing Reaches dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Routing Reaches dialog box

Selecting Routing Reach Polylines

The Select Routing Reach Polylines section allows the user to manually assign single or multiple polylines on the Map View as routing reaches.

Follow the steps below to assign polylines as routing reaches:

  1. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Select Routing Reach Polylines section - [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to click near the downstream end of the already drawn routing reach polyline on the Map View to select it.

    Note: From the Routing Reach Specifications section, if:

    • Routing reach ID naming option is selected, then the user can select only one routing reach polyline from the Map View.
    • Auto-name routing reach ID naming option is selected, then the user can select routing reach polylines one after the other from the Map View.
  3. After selecting polyline(s), the Assign Routing Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed and the routing reach polyline(s) will be selected on the Map View.

Notes:

  • If the “Discard accidentally digitized reach less than” checkbox is checked, then the software discards accidentally digitized routing reaches that are shorter than the defined length. The user can define the length of the routing reach in the entry field adjacent to this checkbox option.
  • The [Reverse Direction] button reverses the flow direction of the routing reach polyline assigned.

Routing Reach Specifications

This section is similar to the Routing Reach Specifications subsection explained above for the Draw Routing Reaches dialog box.

Assigning Invert Elevation

This section is similar to the Assign Invert Elevation section explained above for the Draw Routing Reaches dialog box.

Other Specifications

This section is similar to the Other Specifications section explained for the Draw Routing Reaches command. This section contains an additional “Create junctions (if missing) at reach ends” checkbox option. This checkbox option allows the software to create a junction at the routing reach ends if there is no node already defined within the connection snap distance. The junction invert elevation is set equal to the routing reach invert elevation.

Assign Routing Reaches - Other Specifications section

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete the process of assigning routing reaches. Note that if routing reaches are assigned using the Auto-name routing reach ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed disabled since the just assigned routing reaches have already been named and created.

Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Reaches

Routing Reach Table Edit Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Routing Reach Table Edit command allows the user to view and edit all the parameters of the routing reaches in one editable data grid. The user can also view the corresponding output results from this data grid.

Follow the steps below to use the Routing Reach Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Routing Reach Table Edit command.
    Routing Reach Table Edit Command
  2. The Routing Reach Table Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Routing Reach Table Edit Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Routing Reach Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storm Results

In the Select Storm Results section, the Storm result to display dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storm frequency whose result is to be displayed.

Select Storm Results Section

Note that the Select Storm Results section is only available when either the Modified Rational, Rational Method, or DeKalb Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this section is unavailable.

Routing Reach Parameters

The following panels are available in the Routing Reach Parameters section:

  • Reach Data
  • Results Data

Reach Data

This panel contains editable table columns that list routing reach parameters present in the current scenario.

Reach Data panel

The following routing reach parameters are provided in the table column entries:

  • Routing Reach ID
    This editable column lists all routing reach IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Cross Section Shape
    This column—with a dropdown combo box—allows the user to define the cross section shape. The following cross section shapes are available:
    • Irregular (HEC-RAS Style) Channel
    • Rectangular Channel
    • Trapezoidal Channel
    • Triangular Channel
  • Length
    This editable column lists the length of the routing reaches.
  • Inlet Invert Elevation
    This editable column lists the routing reach invert elevations on the upstream (inlet) ends.
  • Outlet Invert Elevation
    This editable column lists the routing reach invert elevations on the downstream (outlet) ends.
  • Channel Manning’s Roughness
    This editable data grid column lists the Manning’s roughness of the channel. Clicking the […] button at the Manning’s Roughness column header displays the Manning’s Roughness dialog box, which allows the user to select the Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to the channel.
    Manning’s Roughness Dialog Box
  • Routing Reach Slope
    This read-only column lists the routing reach slope.

Results Data

This panel lists corresponding output results for routing reaches present in the current scenario.

Results Data Panel
  • Routing Reach ID
    This editable column lists all routing reach IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Peak Flow Rate
    This read-only column lists the peak flow rate at the corresponding routing reach during the storm event.
  • Maximum Velocity
    This read-only column lists the maximum flow velocity at the corresponding routing reach during the storm event.
  • Max/Design Flow Ratio
    This read-only column lists the ratio of peak flow to design flow capacity values. A value of 1.0 means that the pipe is at the design flow capacity (100% of capacity). A value greater than 1.0 means that the pipe is flowing at greater than the design flow capacity.

Sorting Routing Reach Parameters Table

The data in the Routing Reach Parameters table can be sorted by multiple columns. The user can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up or Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Sorting Routing Reach Parameters Table

Follow the steps below to sort the data using multiple columns:

  1. Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  2. Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  3. Repeat step 2 to sort the data of any additional column.

For example, first, select the Length column and click the Down arrow to sort the data in descending order. Then, while holding the [Shift] key, select the Inlet Invert Elevation column and click the Up arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Sorting Routing Reach Parameters Table Example

Copying and Exporting Routing Reach Parameters

The data in the Routing Reach Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the right-click context menu commands such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Copying and Exporting Routing Reach Parameters

After editing the required routing reach parameters, click the [Close] button to close the Routing Reach Table Edit dialog box.

Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Reaches

Merge Routing Reaches Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Merge Routing Reaches command allows the user to merge two or more connected routing reaches into a single routing reach. This can be useful when working with complex shapes that have several individual elements that need to be merged into a single entity.

This article describes how to use the Merge Routing Reaches command in GeoSTORM software.

Follow the steps below to use the Merge Routing Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Merge Routing Reaches command.
    Merge Routing Reaches Command
  2. The Merge Routing Reaches dialog box will be displayed as shown below.
    Merge Routing Reaches Dialog Box
  3. The Select Routing Reaches section lists all the available routing reaches of the current scenario. From this section, check the checkboxes corresponding to the routing reaches you want to merge.
    Select Routing Reaches Section
    The user can also use the checkbox contained within the column header to select/deselect all the routing reaches.

  4. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the desired routing reaches from the Map View. Once finished, press [Enter] or right-click and select Done from the context menu to complete the selection. The number of selected routing reaches will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.
    Pick Button - Merge Routing Reaches
    Note that to abort the Map View selection process, press the [Esc] key or right-click and select Cancel from the displayed context menu.

  5. After selecting the routing reaches, click the [Apply] button and the software will then merge all the selected routing reaches.
    Apply Button - Merge Routing Reaches
  6. If the user has selected routing reaches that are not connected along a single alignment, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [Apply] button.
    Cannot Merge Routing Reaches Dialog Box
Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Reaches

Recompute Routing Reach Properties Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Recompute Routing Reach Properties command allows the user to recompute routing reach properties such as lengths and slopes based upon connected junctions.

Follow the steps below to use the Recompute Routing Reach Properties command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Recompute Routing Reach Properties command.
    Routing Reaches dropdown menu
  2. The Recompute Routing Reach Properties dialog box will be displayed as shown below.
    Recompute Routing Reach Properties dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Recompute Routing Reach Properties command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Routing Reaches

The Select Routing Reaches section allows the user to select routing reaches for which properties such as length and slope are to be recomputed. This section includes a table that lists all the routing reaches contained within the current scenario of the project along with their lengths and slopes.

Select Routing Reaches section

The user can select routing reaches using any of the following methods for recomputing properties:

  • By pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the routing reaches directly from the Map View. Immediately after selecting the routing reaches, open the Recompute Reach Properties dialog box, and the selected routing reaches will be shown as selected/checked within the Select Routing Reaches section.

  • By checking the checkboxes corresponding to each routing reach in the Select Routing Reaches section.

  • By clicking the [Pick] button, the Recompute Routing Reach Properties dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the routing reaches from the Map View. After selecting routing reaches, pressing the [Enter] key or right-clicking and choosing Done from the displayed context menu redisplays the Recompute Routing Reach Properties dialog box.

After selecting routing reaches, the total number of selected routing reaches will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field as shown below.

Total selected read-only field

Routing Reach Properties

This section is used to define the elevation data source and other parameters to be used for recomputing the properties (Length and Slope) for the selected routing reaches.

Routing Reach Properties section

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the terrain elevation source type selected, the content of the Routing Reach Properties section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN surface

CAD Drawing

If the user selects CAD Drawing as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Routing Reach Properties section changes as shown below.

CAD Drawing Terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the CAD Drawing is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • CAD drawing layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the CAD drawing layer available in the project.
  • Drawing layers
    Clicking the [Define] button adjacent to the Drawing layers entry displays the CAD Drawing Layers dialog box, allowing the user to define the properties of the drawing layers.
    CAD Drawing Layers

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Routing Reach Properties section changes as shown below.

Routing Reach Properties section

The following option is displayed when the Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

GIS Contour

If the user selects GIS Contours as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Routing Reach Properties section changes as shown below.

GIS Contours Terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the GIS Contours is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • GIS polyline layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polyline layer type.
  • Elevation attribute
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute type.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Routing Reach Properties section changes as shown below.

LandXML Data Terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Terrain Surface

If the user selects Terrain Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Routing Reach Properties section changes as shown below.

Terrain Surface terrain elevation source

The following option is displayed when the Terrain Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Routing Reach Properties section changes as shown below.

TIN Surface terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

After selecting the terrain elevation source, the user can check the checkbox of the following properties to be recomputed for the selected routing reaches.

  • Reach length
    This checkbox option is used to recompute the length of the selected routing reaches.
  • Reach slope
    This checkbox option is used to recompute the slope of the selected routing reaches.

Computing Routing Reach Properties

Once data have been defined in the Recompute Routing Reach Properties dialog box, click the [Compute] button and the software will recompute the properties of the selected routing reaches.

Routing Junctions & Reaches › Routing Reaches

Georeferencing Routing Reaches

When the GeoSTORM software imports a model, it automatically places the routing reaches on the Map View. However, if the original model was not spatially georeferenced, the routing reaches will not align with any loaded background base map. While the software can operate without any issues in this situation, it is preferable to have the routing reaches georeferenced to the background base map. Therefore, it might become necessary to georeference the imported routing reaches.

The process of manually georeferencing a routing reach to the Map View can be a trial and error process—especially when the exact location of the original routing reach is not known. The Georeference Routing Reaches command of the GeoSTORM software can be used to georeference each of the routing reaches to the background base map displayed on the Map View.

Note that a CRS should be assigned prior to running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the below informational dialog box.

CRS Not Assigned to GST Model informational dialog box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing routing reach:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Georeference Routing Reaches command.
    Routing Reaches dropdown menu
  2. The Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing routing reach and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Routing Reach to Georeference

The Select Routing Reach to Georeference section allows the user to interactively select the routing reach to georeference.

Follow the steps below to select the routing reach to be georeferenced:

  1. Select the routing reach from the Routing reach ID dropdown combo box that lists all the routing reaches contained within the project.
    Select Routing Reach to Georeference section
  2. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the routing reach from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next.
  3. Upon selecting the routing reach, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box, and the selected routing reach will be highlighted on the Map View.
    Notes:
    • The user can select only one routing reach at a time.
    • The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Once the routing reach has been selected, the user can choose among the following georeferencing options:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snapping Routing Reach to an Alignment Polyline

If an existing alignment polyline for the routing reach exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option can be used to snap the routing reach to the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Polyline radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button next to the Select alignment polyline read-only field.
    [Pick] button
  3. The Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline.
  4. After selecting the alignment polyline, the Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment polyline read-only field will change from Not Selected to Selected. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
  5. After selecting the alignment polyline, click the [Snap] button to snap the selected routing reach to the alignment polyline.
    [Snap] button

Sliding Routing Reach Along Alignment Polyline

In cases where the snapped routing reach is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option allows the user to manually slide the routing reach along the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button to select the alignment polyline from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline from the Map View.
    Slide Along Alignment Polyline section
  3. After selecting the alignment polyline, the following informational dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Yes] button to select the polyline or abort the selection by clicking the [No] button.
    Snap Entity informational dialog box
  4. Once the alignment polyline is selected, click the [Slide] button from the redisplayed Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box.
    [Slide] button
  5. The Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the routing reach and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline.
  6. Click and drag the routing reach on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  7. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed, and the routing reach will be georeferenced at the new location.
  8. The user can also check the Recompute adjacent node element elevations checkbox option to recompute the elevation of the adjacent node type elements while georeferencing the routing reach.

Note: For more precision, the user can use the Snap to Alignment Polyline option first and then use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option.

Drawing Routing Reach on Map View

The Draw on Map View georeferencing option allows the user to draw an alignment polyline and automatically snap the selected routing reach to the drawn polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button.
    [Draw] button
  2. The Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the alignment polyline on the Map View.
  3. Draw the alignment polyline on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Routing Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed, and the routing reach will automatically snap to the drawn alignment polyline.
    Notes:
    • The user can turn on the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the routing reach to fit within the alignment polyline.
    • The Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option can be checked to draw curvilinear polyline segments.

Assigning Routing Reach Invert Elevation

The user can check the Assign Routing Reach Invert Elevation checkbox option to assign an invert elevation to the routing reach using a terrain model. Define this section before georeferencing a routing reach so that the invert elevation can be assigned.

To assign an invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information. The user can define an invert depth using the Routing Reach invert depth entry field to raise or lower the invert of routing reach by the specified amount. A negative invert depth value lowers the routing reach by the specified amount.

Assign Routing Reach Invert Elevation
Routing Junctions & Reaches › Flow Routing Methods

Flow Routing Methods

In GeoSTORM, flow routing within a conduit link (channel or pipe) is governed by conservation of mass and momentum equations for gradually varied, unsteady flow (i.e., the Saint Venant flow equations). The software lets the user choose how detailed the flow calculations should be. The user can pick from the following flow routing methods:

  • Hydrodynamic
  • Kinematic Wave
  • Steady State Peak Flow

Each of these flow routing methods employs Manning’s equation to relate the flow rate to the flow depth and bed (or friction) slope.

Manning’s Equation

Where:

Q = flow rate

n = Manning’s roughness coefficient

A = cross-sectional area (having flow depth)

R = hydraulic radius

S = channel slope

For Steady State Peak Flow and Kinematic Wave routing methods, the channel slope (S) is interpreted as the conduit slope. In the case of Hydrodynamic routing, the channel slope (S) is interpreted as the friction slope.

However, for the user-defined Force Main conduits that are under pressurized flow, the user can either use the Hazen-Williams or Darcy-Weisbach equation.

Follow the steps below to select a flow routing method in GeoSTORM:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Scenario Manager command.
    Scenario Manager Command
  2. The Scenario Manager dialog box will be displayed.
    Scenario Manager Dialog Box
  3. Now, from the Flow routing method dropdown combo box, select the flow routing method to be used for routing the flow through the stormwater network.
    Flow Routing Method Dropdown Combo Box
  4. Note that the Flow routing method dropdown combo box will be displayed as disabled when the Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine.
    Hydrology Analysis Engine - Rational Method
    The following sections explain the flow routing methods supported by GeoSTORM.

Hydrodynamic

The Hydrodynamic routing method allows the user to solve the complete one-dimensional Saint Venant flow equations and get the most theoretically accurate results. These equations consist of the continuity and momentum equations for conduits and the volume continuity equation at nodes.

This flow routing method makes it possible to represent pressurized flow when a closed conduit becomes full, such that flows can exceed the full normal flow value. Flooding occurs when the water depth at a node exceeds the maximum available depth, and the excess flow is either lost from the system or can pond atop the node and re-enter the drainage system.

The Hydrodynamic routing method can account for channel storage, backwater, entrance/exit losses, flow reversal, and pressurized flow. Since it couples together the solution for both water levels at nodes and flow in conduits, it can be applied to any general network layout, even those containing multiple downstream diversions and cyclic loops.

This flow routing method is preferred for systems subjected to significant backwater effects due to downstream flow restrictions and flow regulation via weirs and orifices. This generality comes at the price of having to use much smaller time steps, i.e., about thirty seconds or less (the software can automatically reduce the user-defined maximum time step as needed to maintain numerical stability).

Kinematic Wave

The Kinematic Wave routing method can solve the continuity equation along with a simplified form of the momentum equation in each conduit. The momentum equation assumes that the slope of the water surface equals the slope of the conduit.

The maximum flow that can be conveyed through a conduit is the full normal flow value. Any flow in excess of this entering the inlet node is either lost from the system or can pond atop the inlet node and be re-introduced into the conduit as capacity becomes available.

Kinematic Wave routing method allows flow and area to vary both spatially and temporally within a conduit. This can result in attenuated and delayed outflow hydrographs as inflow is routed through the channel.

However, the Kinematic Wave routing method cannot account for backwater effects, entrance/exit losses, flow reversal, or pressurized flow. Also, this flow routing method is restricted to dendritic network layouts. It can usually maintain numerical stability with moderately large time steps, i.e., about 1 to 5 minutes. If the limitations mentioned above are not expected to be significant, then this flow routing method can be an accurate and efficient alternative, especially for long-term simulations.

Steady State Peak Flow

The Steady State Peak Flow routing method represents the simplest type of routing possible (actually no routing) by assuming that within each computational time step flow is uniform and steady. Therefore, it simply translated inflow hydrographs at the upstream end of the conduit to the downstream end, with no delay or change in shape. This flow routing method uses the normal flow equation to relate flow rate to flow area (or depth).

The Steady State Peak Flow routing method cannot account for channel storage, backwater effects, entrance/exit losses, flow reversal, or pressurized flow. Also, this flow routing method can only be used with dendritic conveyance networks, where each node has only a single outflow link (unless the node is a flow divider, requiring two outflow links). This flow routing method is insensitive to the defined time step and is only suitable for preliminary analysis using long-term continuous simulations.

Notes:

  • The Steady State Peak Flow and Kinematic Wave routing methods are not applicable to drainage systems forming a cyclic loop network (i.e., a directed flow path along a set of links that starts and ends at the same node). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about cyclic loop networks.
    In such situations where cyclic loops exist in the drainage system, the Hydrodynamic routing method must be specified.
  • While using the Steady State Peak Flow or Kinematic Wave routing methods, the user must ensure that the conduit link (channel, pipe, or culvert) has a positive slope. In case of an adverse slope (i.e., negative slope), the Hydrodynamic routing method must be specified. Otherwise, the software will display an error while computing the analysis.
Terminal Outfalls › Terminal Outfall

Setting Outfall Boundary Condition

In GeoSTORM, an outfall (or terminal outfall) is a terminal node in the stormwater drainage system that defines the downstream boundary condition of the modeled network.

While an outfall acts as a physical structure that releases flow into a large receiving body, such as a river, lake, or ocean, its primary role in the model is to set the boundary condition at the downstream end of the system. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about terminal outfalls.

Since an outfall defines the downstream boundary of the network, correctly describing boundary conditions is essential for obtaining reliable simulation results. An improperly defined boundary condition may lead to inaccurate hydraulic grade line (HGL) calculations, backwater effects, or flow routing errors.

Why Outfall Boundary Conditions Matter

The downstream boundary is a core model input that can highly impact computed water surface elevations near the outlet. The selected boundary condition tells the model how the downstream system behaves during the simulation.

This is important because the same drainage network can produce different results depending on whether the flow is:

  • leaving freely
  • entering a downstream channel
  • discharging into a fixed water level, or
  • responding to a time-varying tailwater condition

For example, a freely discharging pipe will generally allow flow to leave the system with minimal downstream restriction. In contrast, a pipe discharging into a river, pond, lake, or tidal water body may experience tailwater that can slow the flow, create backwater, or cause surcharge to extend upstream into the pipe network.

For this reason, the boundary condition should be selected based on the actual downstream hydraulic condition being represented.

unknown node

Types of Outfall Boundary Conditions

In GeoSTORM, the boundary conditions at the terminal outfall can be described by any one of the following conditions:

Setting Outfall Boundary Condition img 1

Critical Depth

When Critical Depth is selected as the outfall boundary condition, the software will compute the boundary stage as the minimum of critical depth and normal depth. The user can select this boundary condition when the outfall discharges freely into the air, such as a culvert discharging above ground or into a steep drop.

Normal Depth

When Normal Depth is selected as the outfall boundary condition, the software will compute the boundary stage at the outfall node based on the normal depth of flow in the connecting conduit. The user can select this boundary condition when the downstream behaves like a long, uniform channel.

Fixed Water Surface Elevation (WSEL)

When Fixed WSEL is selected as the outfall boundary condition, the specified elevation remains constant throughout the simulation. The user can select this boundary condition when a constant downstream water level is known (e.g., discharging into a pond, lake, or controlled pool).

Tidal Boundary

When Tidal Boundary is selected as the outfall boundary condition, the software will require a data table of tidal elevation versus hour of the day. The user can select this boundary condition when the outfall is subject to tidal fluctuations.

Time Series

When Time Series is selected as the outfall boundary condition, the software will require a user-defined stage (water surface elevation) time series covering the full simulation duration. The user can select this boundary condition when downstream water levels vary with time, such as when discharging into a river or reservoir.

In GeoSTORM, the Terminal Outfall Data dialog box allows the user to select and apply these outfall boundary conditions using the Outfall type dropdown combo box entry.

Outfall Boundary Conditions

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Terminal Outfall Data command.

Choosing the Right Outfall Boundary Condition

GeoSTORM allows the outfall boundary condition to be defined using one of the available outfall types. The correct option is dependent on how the downstream receiving system behaves during the simulation.

unknown node

unknown node

Common Errors While Setting the Outfall Boundary Condition

When defining outfall boundaries, the user needs to avoid these common mistakes:

  • Entering depths instead of elevations
    For Tidal Boundary or Time Series outfall types, data must represent absolute water surface elevations used by the model, not depths relative to the invert. Entering depth values instead of elevation values in the data grids can lead to incorrect results.
  • Not covering the full simulation duration with tailwater data
    Data gaps can result in incorrect or constant water level assumptions. Ensure that the time series or tidal table covers the entire simulation duration, including the necessary start and end periods.
  • Using Critical Depth for backwater conditions
    When backwater conditions exist downstream, using the Critical Depth outfall type may underestimate tailwater impacts and give unrealistic results.
  • Entering negative depths at terminal outfalls
    Negative depth values are invalid at terminal outfalls and using them for computation can result in errors.
unknown node

Conclusion

The outfall boundary condition defines how the modeled drainage network interacts with the downstream receiving system. Selecting the right boundary type, using the correct elevation reference, and reviewing results near the outfall helps ensure that the model produces realistic water surface elevations, backwater effects, and surcharge behavior.

Terminal Outfalls › Terminal Outfall

Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations command allows the user to assign elevations to the selected terminal outfall(s). This command computes the elevation of an individual terminal outfall(s) based on the project’s terrain surface.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Terminal Outfalls dropdown menu and select the Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations command.
    Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations Command
  2. The Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Outfalls

The Select Outfalls section allows the user to select one or multiple terminal outfall(s) for elevation assignment. This section includes a table listing all terminal outfall(s) in the current project scenario, as shown below.

Select Outfalls Section

The user can select the terminal outfall(s) using any of the following methods for assigning elevations:

  • Check the checkboxes corresponding to each terminal outfall in the Select Outfalls
  • Click the [Pick] button, the Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the terminal outfall(s) from the Map View. After selecting the terminal outfall(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations dialog box will be redisplayed.
  • Alternatively, press and hold down the [Ctrl] key while selecting the terminal outfall(s) directly from the Map View. When finished, open the Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations dialog box, and the selected terminal outfall(s) will be shown as selected/checked within the Select Outfalls

After selecting the terminal outfall(s), the total number of selected terminal outfall(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Total selected Read-only Field

Assign Elevation

This section allows the user to assign elevations to the terminal outfall(s) using a terrain model.

Assign Elevation Section

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the terrain elevation source type selected, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes to specify additional elevation data information.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN surface

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid

The following option is displayed when Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data

The following options are displayed when LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the contents of the Assign Elevation section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface

The following options are displayed when TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Assigning Terminal Outfall Elevations

Once the data have been defined in the Assign Terminal Outfall Elevations dialog box, click the [Assign] button and the software will assign elevations to the selected terminal outfall(s).

Terminal Outfalls › Terminal Outfall

Terminal Outfall

A terminal outfall is a point of a stormwater drainage system where collected stormwater or wastewater is released into a larger body of water, such as a river, lake, or ocean. In hydrology, outfalls are terminal nodes of the drainage system used to define final downstream boundaries under dynamic wave flow routing. For other types of flow routing, the terminal outfall behaves as a junction. Only a single link can be connected to a terminal outfall node.

Terminal Outfall

Image Source: https://www.shapeourwater.org/graphics/

The boundary conditions at the terminal outfall can be described by any one of the following stage relationships:

  • Critical or normal flow depth in the connecting conduit
  • Fixed stage elevation
  • Tidal stage described in a table of tidal elevation versus hour of the day
  • User-defined time series of water surface elevation versus time

The primary input parameters for the terminal outfall include:

  • Invert elevation
  • Boundary condition type and stage description
  • The presence of a flap gate to prevent backflow through the outfall
  • Downstream link slope for connecting elements, such as pipes, culverts, etc.

Terminal Outfall Design Considerations

The following considerations should be followed while designing terminal outfalls in the drainage system:

  • Tailwater elevation
    The tailwater depth or elevation in the storm drain outfall must be considered carefully. For most design applications, the tailwater will either be above the crown of the outlet or located between the crown and the critical depth of the outlet. The tailwater may also occur between the critical depth and the invert of the outlet.
  • Orientation of outlet structure
    The orientation of the terminal outfall is another important design consideration. Where feasible, the outlet of the storm drain should be positioned in the outfall channel so that it is pointed in a downstream direction. This will reduce turbulence and the potential for excessive erosion.
  • Hydrological and hydraulic design
    Designing a terminal outfall requires careful consideration of the following hydrological and hydraulic factors:
    1. Flow Capacity: The system must accommodate peak flow rates expected during heavy rainfall or storm events.
    2. Backflow Prevention: To prevent water from backing up into the drainage system during high tide or flood conditions, terminal outfalls may include flap gates or other backflow prevention devices.

Defining Terminal Outfall in Stormwater Projects

The GeoSTORM software allows the user to incorporate and define terminal outfalls into a stormwater project. The user can draw or assign terminal outfalls by either drawing or assigning nodes on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Terminal Outfalls
  • Assign Terminal Outfalls

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to incorporate terminal outfalls into the stormwater project.

After adding terminal outfalls to the stormwater project, the Terminal Outfall Data command can be used to define and manage additional data and view the corresponding output results. During stormwater computations, the following parameters can be derived for terminal outfall:

  • The peak flow rate that occurred at the terminal outfall
  • Date and time when the peak flow rate occurred at the terminal outfall
  • The maximum water surface elevation (WSEL) that occurred at the terminal outfall
  • The maximum water depth that occurred at the terminal outfall
  • The total accumulated discharge volume that has occurred at the terminal outfall

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define terminal outfall data using the Terminal Outfall Data command.

Terminal Outfalls › Terminal Outfall

Terminal Outfall Data Command

An outfall is the point where wastewater or stormwater is discharged from a drainage system, sewer system, or treatment plant into a larger body of water such as a sea, lake, river, or ocean. It is typically the endpoint of a network of pipes or conduits that collect and transport the water or wastewater from various sources (such as industries, homes, or storm drains) to this final point of release into the environment. In hydrology, outfalls are terminal nodes of the drainage system used to define the final discharge point under dynamic wave flow routing. For other flow routing methods such as a kinematic wave, the terminal outfall behaves as a junction. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about terminal outfall.

In GeoSTORM software, terminal outfalls can be drawn or assigned using Draw Terminal Outfalls and Assign Terminal Outfalls commands. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to incorporate terminal outfalls into the stormwater project.

After adding terminal outfalls, the user can use the Terminal Outfall Data command to define additional data and view the corresponding output results.

Follow the steps below to use the Terminal Outfall Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Terminal Outfalls dropdown menu and select the Terminal Outfall Data command.
    Terminal Outfall Data command
  2. The Terminal Outfall Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Terminal Outfall Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Terminal Outfall Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Outfall

The Select Outfall section allows the user to select the terminal outfall for defining the terminal outfall data. The user can create a new terminal outfall, copy existing terminal outfall data to a new terminal outfall, and delete a terminal outfall. In addition, the user can navigate between terminal outfalls and enter a description detailing the defined terminal outfall.

Select Outfall section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Outfall ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the terminal outfalls defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the terminal outfall ID. The Up and Down arrow buttons allow the user to switch between the next adjacent downstream and upstream terminal outfalls. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains only one terminal outfall. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the terminal outfall from the Map View.
  • Description
    This optional text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected terminal outfall.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new terminal outfall on the Map View. Note that the ID of every newly created terminal outfall must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the selected terminal outfall on the Map View along with its associated data.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected terminal outfall from the current scenario.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Outfall header allow the user to hide and display the right side of the dialog box containing the Computed Results plot for terminal outfalls. This allows the dialog box to be smaller in size when the user does not want to see the plot view. Note that from the Scenario Manager dialog box, selecting Rational Method as the hydrology analysis engine hides the plot view. This is because, for the Rational Method, there is no concept of time and hence no concept of routing flows as the analysis assumes steady-state peak flows at all nodes.

Outfall Specifications

This section allows the user to define general options for the selected terminal outfall.

Terminal Outfall Definition

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Outfall type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the type of outfall boundary condition.
    Outfall type dropdown combo box
    The following outfall boundary condition types are available:
    1. Critical Depth - The outfall water surface elevation is set to the minimum elevation between the critical flow depth and the normal flow depth in the connecting conduit.
    2. Fixed WSEL - The outfall water surface elevation is defined as a fixed elevation.
    3. Normal Depth - The outfall water surface elevation is defined based on the normal flow depth in the connecting conduit.
    4. Tidal Boundary - The outfall water surface elevation is defined in a table of tide elevation versus time.
    5. Time Series - The outfall water surface elevation is defined from a time series of elevation.

    Note: Based upon the selected outfall boundary condition type, the content of the Terminal Outfall Definition section will be changed.

  • Backflow flap gate
    This checkbox option allows the user to define whether a flap gate will be enabled to prevent backflow (or flow reversal) at the terminal outfall. By default, this checkbox option will be disabled (i.e., grayed out).This entry field defines the invert elevation of the terminal outfall.
  • Invert elevation
    This entry field defines the invert elevation of the terminal outfall.

  • Downstream link slope (H:V)
    This read-only entry field displays the slope for connecting links that constitute one of the following elements:
    1. Pipes
    2. Routing Reach
    3. Roadway Segment
    4. Roadway Crossing (i.e., Culvert)
  • Fixed water surface elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the water surface elevation at the terminal outfall. Note that this entry field is only available when Fixed WSEL is selected as the outfall type.
    Fixed water surface elevation

Tidal Boundary Definition

This tabbed panel allows the user to define the tidal boundary data for the terminal outfall, which describes how the tidal elevation at the terminal outfall changes over time. Selecting this panel displays a data table with Time from Midnight and Tidal Elevation columns. The Time from Midnight column defines the elapsed time from 12:00 AM midnight. The Tidal Elevation column defines the tidal elevation at each specified time. Note that this tabbed panel is only available when Tidal Boundary is selected as the outfall type.

Tidal Boundary Definition panel

Tidal WSEL Plot

The Plot tabbed panel displays a graphical plot corresponding to the data defined in the Tidal Boundary Definition tabbed panel.

Tidal WSEL Plot panel

Time Series Definition

This tabbed panel allows the user to define the time series data for the terminal outfall, which describes how the water surface elevation at the terminal outfall changes over time. Selecting this panel displays a data table with Time from Midnight and Water Surface Elevation columns. The Time from Midnight column defines the elapsed time from 12:00 AM midnight. The Water Surface Elevation column defines the water surface elevation at each specified time. Note that this tabbed panel is only available when Time Series is selected as the outfall type.

Time Series Definition panel

Time Series WSEL Plot

The Plot tabbed panel displays a graphical plot corresponding to the data defined in the Time Series Definition tabbed panel.

Time Series WSEL Plot panel

Computational Results

This section provides a summary of stormwater computational results for the selected terminal outfall.

Computational Results section

The following results are provided in this section:

  • Peak flow rate
    This read-only field displays the peak flow rate that occurred at the terminal outfall during the storm event.
  • Maximum WSEL
    This read-only field displays the maximum water surface elevation that occurred at the terminal outfall during the storm event.
  • Maximum water depth
    This read-only field displays the maximum water depth that occurred at the terminal outfall during the storm event.
  • Stored water volume
    This read-only field displays the total stored water volume that occurred at the terminal outfall during the storm event.
Terminal Outfalls › Terminal Outfall

Terminal Outfall Table Edit Command

An outfall is the point where a waste stream is discharged into a body of water. It can also be the outlet of a river, drain, or sewer that flows to the sea, lake, or ocean. In GeoSTORM software, the Terminal Outfall Table Edit command allows the user to view and edit all the parameters of the terminal outfalls in one editable data grid. The user can also view the corresponding output results from this data grid.

Follow the steps below to use the Terminal Outfall Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Terminal Outfalls dropdown menu and select the Terminal Outfall Table Edit command.
    Terminal Outfall Table Edit Command
  2. The Terminal Outfall Table Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Terminal Outfall Table Edit Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Terminal Outfall Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storm Results

In the Select Storm Results section, the Storm result to display dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storm frequency whose result is to be displayed.

Select Storm Results Section

Note that the Select Storm Results section is only available when either the Modified Rational, Rational Method, or DeKalb Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this section is unavailable. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about hydrology analysis engines supported by GeoSTORM.

Terminal Outfall Parameters

The following panels are available in the Terminal Outfall Parameters section:

  • Outfall Data
  • Results Data

Outfall Data

This panel contains editable data grid columns listing terminal outfall parameters present in the current scenario.

Outfall Data Panel

The following terminal outfall data parameters are provided in the data grid column entries:

  • Terminal Outfall ID
    This editable column lists all terminal outfall IDs contained in the current scenario. Note that this editable column will also be available in the Results Data panel.
  • Outfall Type
    This column having a dropdown combo box allows the user to define the boundary condition for the terminal outfall defined. The following outfall types are available:
    1. Critical Depth
    2. Fixed WSEL
    3. Normal Depth
    4. Tidal Boundary
    5. Time Series
      Outfall Types
  • Invert Elevation
    This editable column lists the terminal outfall invert elevations. The user can click the […] button to manually select the terminal outfall invert elevation from the Map View.
  • Downstream Link Slope
    This read-only column lists the slope for connecting links that contain one of the following elements:
    1. Pipes
    2. Routing reach
    3. Roadway segment
    4. Roadway crossing (i.e, Culvert)

Results Data

The data grid columns in this panel list corresponding output results for terminal outfalls present in the current scenario.

Results Data Panel
  • Peak Flow Rate
    This read-only column lists the peak flow rate at the corresponding terminal outfall during the storm event.
  • Stored Water Volume
    This read-only column lists the computed stored water volume that occurred at the corresponding terminal outfall during the storm event.

Sorting the Terminal Outfall Table

The data in the Terminal Outfall Parameters table can be sorted by multiple columns. The user can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up or Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Sorting the Terminal Outfall Table

Follow the steps below to sort the data by using multiple columns:

  1. Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  2. Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  3. Repeat step 2 to sort the data of any additional column.

For example, first, select the Invert Elevation column and click the Up arrow to sort the data in ascending order. Then, while holding the [Shift] key, select the Downstream Link Slope column and click the Down arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Example of Multi-column Sorting

Copying and Exporting Terminal Outfall Parameters

The data in the Terminal Outfall Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the right-click context menu commands, such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Copying and Exporting Terminal Outfall Parameters

After editing the required terminal outfall parameters, click the [Close] button to close the Terminal Outfall Table Edit dialog box.

Terminal Outfalls › Terminal Outfall

Draw and Assign Terminal Outfalls Command

An outfall is the point where wastewater or stormwater is discharged from a drainage system, sewer system, or treatment plant into a larger body of water such as a sea, lake, river, or ocean. It is typically the endpoint of a network of pipes or conduits that collect and transport the water or wastewater from various sources (such as industries, homes, or storm drains) to a final point of release into the environment. In hydrology, outfalls are terminal nodes of the drainage system used to define the final discharge point under dynamic wave flow routing. For other flow routing methods such as a kinematic wave, the terminal outfall behaves as a junction. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about terminal outfall.

In GeoSTORM software, terminal outfalls can be defined by either drawing or assigning nodes on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Terminal Outfalls
  • Assign Terminal Outfalls

Drawing/Assigning Terminal Outfalls

The Draw/Assign Terminal Outfalls command allows the user to manually draw/assign single or multiple nodes on the Map View as terminal outfalls one after another until completed.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Terminal Outfalls command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Terminal Outfalls dropdown menu and choose the Draw/Assign Terminal Outfalls command.
    Draw and Assign Terminal Outfalls Command
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed.
    • Draw Terminal Outfalls:
      Draw Terminal Outfalls dialog box
    • Assign Terminal Outfalls:
      Assign Terminal Outfalls dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw/Assign Terminal Outfalls command and interact with the above dialog boxes.

Drawing Terminal Outfalls

In the Draw Terminal Outfalls dialog box, the Draw Outfall Nodes section is used to draw single or multiple nodes on the Map View as terminal outfalls.

To draw terminal outfalls, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Draw Outfall Nodes section, click the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Draw Outfalls Nodes section
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw terminal outfall nodes on the Map View. Click on the Map View to draw the terminal outfall nodes.

    Note: From the Outfall Specifications section, if:

    • Outfall ID naming option is selected, then the user can draw only one terminal outfall node on the Map View.
    • Auto-name outfall ID naming option is selected, then the user can draw multiple terminal outfall nodes one after the other on the Map View.
  3. After drawing terminal outfall nodes, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Draw Terminal Outfalls dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Outfall nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Outfall nodes read-only field

Notes:

  • To draw the node more accurately, use the mouse roller wheel to zoom into a specific location.
  • The Snap Mode option can be enabled to cause the drawn outfall to snap to the nearest stormwater element. Refer to this article in our knowledge base for more information.

Assigning Terminal Outfalls

In the Assign Terminal Outfalls dialog box, the Select Outfall Nodes section can be used to manually assign single or multiple nodes on the Map View as terminal outfalls.

To assign terminal outfall nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Select Outfall Nodes section, click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to select previously drawn nodes from the Map View to assign them as terminal outfalls. Click on nodes to select them.

    Note: From the Outfall Specifications section, if:

    • Outfall ID naming option is selected, then the user can select only one node from the Map View.
    • Auto-name outfall ID naming option is selected, then the user can select multiple nodes one after the other from the Map View.
  3. After selecting nodes, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Assign Terminal Outfalls dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Outfall nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
    Outfall nodes read-only field

Terminal Outfall Specifications

The Outfall Specifications section is common to both the Draw Terminal Outfalls and Assign Terminal Outfalls dialog boxes and is used to specify the outfall ID for each drawn/assigned terminal outfall. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign IDs to the terminal outfalls:

  1. If a terminal outfall was drawn/assigned while the Outfall ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the terminal outfall ID in the corresponding field, as shown below.
    Outfall ID radio button option
  2. Alternately, the user can enable the Auto-name outfall ID radio button option to automatically name every newly drawn/assigned terminal outfall as per the user’s predefined naming formats, as shown below.
    Auto-name outfall ID radio button option
    The different terminal outfall naming formats present in the Auto-name outfall ID option are as follows:
    • Outfall ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the terminal outfall ID.
    • Outfall ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the terminal outfall ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the terminal outfall ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available outfall ID: This entry defines the next terminal outfall ID number to be used.
    • Outfall ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering the terminal outfall. The default value is 1.
    • Outfall ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the terminal outfall ID.
    • Outfall ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the terminal outfall naming specifications defined above.

Assign Terminal Outfall Elevation

The Assign Elevation section allows the user to assign invert elevation to the terminal outfalls using a terrain model. If the checkbox at the header of this section is unchecked, then the content of this section will be disabled, and invert elevation cannot be assigned.

Assign Elevation section

Note: Define this section before completing drawing/assigning of terminal outfalls so that invert elevation can be assigned.

Terrain Elevation Source

Depending upon the selected terrain elevation source, the options of the Assign Elevation section change to select the corresponding terrain type already available in the project.

The Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN Surface

Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Elevation section changes as shown below.

Elevation Grid terrain elevation source

The following option is displayed when the Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.

LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Elevation section changes as shown below.

LandXML Data terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Tin Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Assign Elevation section changes as shown below.

TIN Surface terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

After defining all the required data, click the [Apply] button to complete drawing/assigning terminal outfalls. Note that if terminal outfalls are drawn/assigned using the Auto-name outfall ID option, then the [Apply] button will be displayed disabled since the just drawn/assigned terminal outfalls have already been named and created.

Terminal Outfalls › Terminal Outfall

Georeferencing Terminal Outfalls

A terminal outfall is the discharge point of a waste stream into a body of water. It is the outlet of a pipe where it discharges into the sea, a lake or ocean. While importing a model, the GeoSTORM software automatically places the terminal outfalls on the Map View. However, if the original model is not spatially georeferenced, the terminal outfalls will not be located at the correct location on a pipe.

Therefore, it might become necessary to georeference the terminal outfalls. The Georeference Terminal Outfalls command of the GeoSTORM software can be used to automatically map outfalls to the desired location.

Note that a CRS should be assigned prior to running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the below informational dialog box.

CRS Not Assigned to GST Model informational dialog box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

Follow the steps below to use the Georeference Terminal Outfalls command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on Terminal Outfalls dropdown menu and select Georeference Terminal Outfalls command.
    Terminal Outfalls dropdown menu
  2. The Georeference Terminal Outfalls dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Terminal Outfalls dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference a terminal outfall to a desired location.

Selecting Outfall to Georeference

The Select Outfall to Georeference section allows the user to select the outfall to georeference.

Follow the steps below to select the terminal outfall to be georeferenced:

  1. Select the outfall from the Outfall ID dropdown combo box listing all the outfalls contained within the model.
    Select Outfall to Georeference
  2. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the outfall from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Terminal Outfalls dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select an outfall from the Map View.
  3. Upon selecting an outfall, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box, and the selected outfall is highlighted on the Map View.
    Notes:
    • The user can select only one outfall at a time.

    • The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Once the outfall has been selected, the user can choose between the following options to georeference the outfall:

  • Snap to Alignment Point
  • Draw on Map View

Snapping Outfall to an Alignment Point

If an existing alignment point for the outfall exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Point georeferencing option can be used to snap the outfall to the alignment point.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Point georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Point radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button next to the Select alignment point read-only field.
    [Pick] button
  3. The Georeference Terminal Outfalls dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment point from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the alignment point, the Georeference Terminal Outfalls dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment point read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. Click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.
  5. After selecting the alignment point, click the [Snap] button to snap the selected outfall to the alignment point.
    [Snap] button

Drawing Outfall Node on Map View

The Draw on Map View georeferencing option allows the user to draw an outfall node on the Map View to which the selected outfall is to be georeferenced.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option. Then, click on the [Draw] button to draw the outfall node on the Map View.
    [Draw] button
  2. The Georeference Terminal Outfalls dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the outfall node on the Map View.
  3. After drawing the outfall node on the Map View, either press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Terminal Outfalls dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected outfall will be georeferenced to the drawn node.

Assigning Outfall Elevation

The user can check the Assign Elevation checkbox option to assign an elevation to the georeferenced outfall using elevation data. The user should define the data for this section before georeferencing outfalls.

Assign Elevation section

For assigning elevation data, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

It does not support the following surface types:

  • CAD drawings
  • GIS contours

The user can define outfall invert elevation using the Outfall invert elevation entry field to raise or lower the invert of the terminal outfall by the specified amount. A negative invert elevation value lowers the terminal outfall by the specified amount.

Storage Areas & Detention › Storage Area Drawing & Data

Storage Area Data Command (GeoSTORM)

In GeoSTORM, the Storage Area Data command allows the user to define storage area data and view the corresponding output results associated with the storage areas.

Follow the steps below to define the data associated with the storage areas using the Storage Area Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Storage Areas dropdown menu and select the Storage Area Data command. Alternatively, the user can double-click on the storage area from the Map View.
    Storage Area Data command
  2. The Storage Area Data dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Storage Area Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to define data in the Storage Area Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storage Area

The Select Storage Area section allows the user to:

  • Create new storage areas.
  • Copy data from an existing storage area to a new storage area.
  • Delete existing storage areas.
  • Navigate between the existing storage areas, etc.
Select Storage Area section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Storage area ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the storage areas defined in the current scenario of the project. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the storage area ID. The user can navigate between the available storage areas using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the storage area from the Map View.

Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario of the project contains only one storage area.

  • Description
    This optional textbox field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected storage area.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new storage area on the Map View. Every newly created storage area is automatically assigned a unique ID, which is editable.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the selected storage area on the Map View along with its associated data. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied storage area.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected storage area from the current scenario.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Storage Area section header allow the user to expand or collapse the Computed Results plot section.

Note that the [< Less] and [More >] buttons are not available when the Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. This is because, for the Rational Method, there is no concept of time and hence no concept of routing flows as the analysis assumes steady-state peak flows at all nodes.

Storage Area Specifications

The Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box contains several data panel entries that allow the user to define storage area data. The following data panel entries are listed in the dropdown combo box:

  • General Specifications
  • Additional Inflows
  • Discharge Rating Curve
  • Pump Outflow
  • Riser Outflow Pipe
  • Riser Outflow Structure
  • Storage Area Culvert
  • Storage Area Seepage
  • Storage Area Spillways
  • Storage Area Volume
  • Underground Pipe Gallery
  • Underground Storage Chamber
Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box contains

General Specifications

This panel allows the user to define general parameters and view the stormwater computational results for the selected storage area.

General Specifications panel

General Specifications

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Downstream connection
    This entry field defines the downstream connection element that the selected storage area drains to such as the manhole, routing junction, and storage area. The read-only field next to this entry displays the element ID of the downstream connection. The user can click the [Pick] button to select the downstream connection element from the Map View. Clicking the [Clear] button allows the user to remove the selected downstream connection.
  • Auxiliary connection
    This optional entry field defines the downstream auxiliary connection element that the selected storage area drains to such as the manhole, routing junction, and storage area. The read-only field next to this entry displays the element ID of the auxiliary connection. The user can click the [Pick] button to select the downstream element from the Map View. Clicking the [Clear] button allows the user to remove the auxiliary connection.

Note that all storage areas have a main (or primary) discharge to a downstream element. Flow through outlets, spillways, and other structures leave the storage area and enter downstream channels. However, some storage areas also have a separate auxiliary (or secondary) discharge locations in addition to the main discharge location. This auxiliary discharge connection does not flow into the same channel as the main discharge. Instead, it may be an emergency spillway that enters a secondary channel that eventually enters the main downstream channel. The auxiliary discharge could also be a withdrawal for urban consumptive use or an irrigation canal.

  • Initial water surface elev
    This entry field defines the water surface elevation of the storage area at the start of the analysis. The user can click the [Match Invert] button to retrieve the minimum elevation from the Storage -Area/Storage-Volume curve data.
  • Invert elevation
    This entry field defines the invert elevation of the storage area. The user can click the […] button to select the invert elevation from the Map View.
  • Storage area volume
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of volume data that is to be defined for the storage area. The following storage area volume types are available:
    1. Cylindrical Chamber
    2. Depth vs Area
    3. Elevation vs Area
    4. Rectangular Chamber
    5. Underground Pipe Gallery
    6. Underground Storage Chamber
    Routing reference method dropdown combo box
  • Seepage loss
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of seepage data that is to be defined for the storage area. The following seepage loss types are available:
    1. None
    2. Green Ampt

Additional Inflows

This panel allows the user to specify the time history of direct external inflows entering the storage area being defined. These inflows are represented by both a constant and a time-varying component. The additional inflows are added directly to the storage area and can be used for flow routing in the absence of any runoff computations (as in a study area where no subbasins are defined). In river or stream modeling, user-defined inflows can be used to define the baseflow.

Additional Inflows panel

Baseline Inflows

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Baseline inflow
    This entry field allows the user to define a constant baseline inflow. If this field is left blank, then no baseline inflow is assumed.
  • Baseline pattern (optional)
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an optional time pattern defined in the current scenario whose factors adjust the baseline inflow. If this dropdown list is left blank, then the baseline inflow will not be adjusted.
    Baseline pattern dropdown combo box
    Clicking the [Define] button displays the Time Patterns Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a specific pattern to be applied to the defined Baseline Inflow. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Time Patterns Data dialog box.

Time Series Inflows

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Time series scale factor
    This entry field allows the user to define a multiplier to adjust the values of the inflow time series.
  • Time series inflow
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the time series inflow defined in the current scenario. If None is selected, no time series inflow will be assigned to the storage area.
    Time series inflow dropdown combo box
    Clicking the [Define] button displays the Time Series Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a specific time series inflow data set to be used. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Time Series Data dialog box.

Discharge Rating Curve

This panel allows the user to define the complete relationship relating to how storage area discharges flow to the downstream node such as a manhole, routing junction, or another storage area.

Discharge Rating Curve panel

Discharge Rating Curve Routing

Auxiliary Connection

The Auxiliary connection checkbox option allows the software to connect the storage area to the auxiliary connection element rather than to the downstream connection element (i.e., manhole, routing junction, or storage area). The read-only field next to this checkbox option displays the element ID of the auxiliary connection. Note that this checkbox option is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if there is no auxiliary connection element defined for the selected storage area. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

Routing Reference Method

The Routing reference method dropdown combo box allows the user to define how the software is to route water from the storage area to the next downstream element such as a manhole, routing junction, or another storage area. The following routing reference methods are available:

  • None
  • Head Differential
  • Water Surface Depth
  • Water Surface Elevation
Routing reference method dropdown combo box
Rating Curve Data

This subpanel displays a data grid that defines the rating curve parameters corresponding to the method selected in the Routing reference method dropdown combo box.

The following columns are provided in this data grid:

  • Water Surface Depth
    This column defines the water surface depth that is used to construct the discharge rating curve. Note that this column header name changes based upon the routing reference method selected, as shown in the below table.

    Routing Reference Method

    Column 1

    Column 2

    Head Differential

    Head Differential

    Flow Rate

    Water Surface Depth

    Water Surface Depth

    Flow Rate

    Water Surface Elevation

    Water Surface Elevation

    Flow Rate


  • Flow Rate
    This column references the flow rate that is used to construct the discharge rating curve.
Rating Curve Plot

This subpanel displays a graphical plot corresponding to the data defined in the Rating Curve Data subpanel.

Rating Curve Plot subpanel

Pump Outflow

This panel allows the user to define the pump outflow parameters for the storage area. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Pump Outflow panel.

Pump Outflow panel

Riser Outflow Pipe

This panel allows the user to define the general parameters for the pipe that directly discharges the flow captured by the vertical riser structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Riser Outflow Pipe panel.

Riser Outflow Pipe panel

Riser Outflow Structure

This panel allows the user to define the following parameters: the dimensions of the riser outflow structure and horizontal orifices associated with it, and weirs embedded into the structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Riser Outflow Structure panel.

Riser Outflow Structure panel

Storage Area Culvert

This panel allows the user to define the culvert that directly discharges from the storage area to the downstream element such as a manhole, routing junction, or another storage area without going through a vertical riser structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Culvert panel.

Storage Area Culvert panel

Storage Area Seepage

This panel allows the user to define the seepage parameters for the storage area. Note that this panel is enabled only when Green Ampt is selected in the Seepage loss dropdown combo box of the General Specifications panel. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Storage Area Seepage panel

Seepage Definition

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Suction head
    This entry field defines the average value of soil capillary suction along the wetting front. Clicking the […] button displays the Soil Characteristics lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the suction head value to be assigned to a storage area.
    Soil Characteristics lookup dialog box
  • Hydraulic conductivity
    This entry field defines hydraulic conductivity of the underlying soil. Clicking the […] button displays the Soil Characteristics lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the hydraulic conductivity value to be assigned to a storage area.
    Soil Characteristics lookup dialog box
  • Initial deficit
    This entry field defines the initial deficit of the underlying soil.

Storage Area Spillways

This panel allows the user to define a spillway that directly discharges from the storage area to the downstream element such as a manhole, routing junction, or another storage area without going through a vertical riser structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Spillways panel.

Storage Area Spillways panel

Storage Area Volume

This panel allows the user to define the volume data for the selected storage area. Note that this panel changes based upon the selected storage area volume types in the Storage area volume dropdown combo box of the General Specifications panel. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Volume panel.

Storage Area Volume panel

Underground Pipe Gallery

This panel allows the user to define the underground pipe gallery. Note that this panel is enabled only when Underground Pipe Gallery is selected in the Storage area volume dropdown combo box of the General Specifications panel. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Underground Pipe Gallery panel.

Underground Pipe Gallery panel

Underground Storage Chamber

This panel allows the user to define the underground storage chamber. Note that this panel is enabled only when Underground Storage Chamber is selected in the Storage area volume dropdown combo box of the General Specifications panel. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Underground Storage Chamber panel.

Underground Storage Chamber panel

Computational Results

After successfully computing the analysis, this section provides a summary of the stormwater computational results for the selected storage area.

Computational Results section

The following results are provided in this section:

  • Peak inflow
    This read-only field displays the peak flow rate that entered the storage area during the storm event.
  • Peak outflow
    This read-only field displays the peak flow rate that leaves the storage area during the storm event.
  • Maximum water surface elevation
    This read-only field displays the maximum water surface elevation at the storage area during the storm event.
  • Maximum water surface depth
    This read-only field displays the maximum water surface depth at the storage area during the storm event.
  • Maximum storage volume
    This read-only field displays the maximum storage volume at the storage area during the storm event.
  • Total seepage volume
    This read-only field displays the total water that has seeped out of the storage area during the entire storm event.
Storage Areas & Detention › Storage Area Drawing & Data

Defining Storage Area Volume

The Storage Area Volume panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box allows the user to define the volume data for the storage area. This article describes how to interact with the Storage Area Volume panel. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Follow the steps below to define the specifications for the storage area volume:

  1. In the Storage Area Data dialog box, select Storage Area Volume from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Storage Area Volume from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box
  2. The corresponding panel with options for defining the storage area volume will be displayed.
    Storage Area Volume panel

The content of the Storage Area Volume panel changes based upon the type of storage area volume selected as shown below.

  • Cylindrical Chamber
  • Depth vs Area
  • Elevation vs Area
  • Rectangular Chamber
  • Underground Pipe Gallery
  • Underground Storage Chamber
    Storage Area Volume dropdown combo box

Note: The Storage Area Volume panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) for the following storage area volume types:

  • Underground Pipe Gallery
  • Underground Storage Chamber

The following sections show the change in the Storage Area Volume panel based on the storage area volume type selected:

Cylindrical Chamber

If Cylindrical Chamber is selected as the storage area volume type, the content of the Storage Area Volume panel changes, as shown below.

Cylindrical Chamber storage area volume type

The Storage Area Volume - Cylindrical Chamber Definition section allows the user to define the cylindrical chamber parameters for the selected storage area.

The following entries are provided:

  • Crest elevation
    This entry field defines the crest elevation of the storage chamber.
  • Invert elevation
    This read-only field displays the invert elevation of the selected storage area.
  • Chamber depth
    This read-only field displays the storage chamber depth by subtracting the Invert elevation value from the Crest elevation value.
  • Chamber diameter
    This entry field defines the diameter of the storage chamber. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to measure the diameter of the storage chamber from the Map View.
  • Chamber volume
    This read-only field displays the computed storage volume of the defined chamber.

Depth vs Area

If Depth vs Area is selected as the storage area volume type, the content of the Storage Area Volume panel changes, as shown below.

Storage Area Volume panel - Depth vs Area

In the Storage Area Volume panel, the following tabs are available:

  • Storage Area Data
  • Storage Area Curve Plot

Storage Area Data

The Storage Area Data tab contains a table where users can enter depth and area values, while elevation and volume are read-only columns that are automatically calculated. The Storage area scale factor entry allows the user to adjust the size of the detention pond storage. When the [Apply] button is clicked, the entered scale factor is multiplied by each entry in the Area column.

The table includes the following columns:

  • Elevation
    This read-only column displays the elevation corresponding to the entered area value.
  • Depth
    This column defines the depth corresponding to an area value.
  • Area
    This column defines the area corresponding to an elevation value.
  • Volume
    This read-only column displays the cumulative volume of the storage area. It is computed using the provided depth and area values.

Storage Area Curve Plot

The Storage Area Curve Plot tab displays a graphical representation of the storage area curve based on the data entered in the Storage Area Data tab.

Storage Area Curve Plot tab

Elevation vs Area

If Elevation vs Area is selected as the storage area volume type, the content of the Storage Area Volume panel changes, as shown below.

Storage Area Volume panel - Elevation vs Area

In the Storage Area Volume panel, the following tabs are available:

  • Storage Area Data
  • Storage Area Curve Plot

Storage Area Data

The Storage Area Data tab contains a table where users can enter elevation and area values, while depth and volume are read-only columns that are automatically calculated. The Storage area scale factor entry allows the user to adjust the size of the detention pond storage. When the [Apply] button is clicked, the entered scale factor is multiplied by each entry in the Area column.

The table includes the following columns:

  • Depth
    This read-only column displays the depth corresponding to the entered area value.
  • Elevation
    This column defines the elevation corresponding to an area value.
  • Area
    This column defines the area corresponding to an elevation value.
  • Volume
    This read-only column displays the cumulative volume of the storage area. It is computed using the provided elevation and area values.

Storage Area Curve Plot

The Storage Area Curve Plot tab displays a graphical representation of the storage area curve based on the data entered in the Storage Area Data tab.

Storage Area Curve Plot tab

Rectangular Chamber

If Rectangular Chamber is selected as the storage area volume type, the content of the Storage Area Volume panel changes, as shown below.

Rectangular Chamber storage area volume type

The Storage Area Volume - Rectangular Chamber Definition section allows the user to define the rectangular chamber parameters for the selected storage area.

The following entries are provided:

  • Crest elevation
    This entry field defines the crest elevation of the storage chamber.
  • Invert elevation
    This read-only field displays the invert elevation of the selected storage area.
  • Chamber depth
    This read-only field displays the storage chamber depth by subtracting the Invert elevation value from the Crest elevation value.
  • Chamber length
    This entry field defines the horizontal length of the storage chamber. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to measure the length of the storage chamber from the Map View.
  • Chamber width
    This entry field defines the horizontal width of the storage chamber. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to measure the width of the storage chamber from the Map View.
  • Chamber volume
    This read-only field displays the computed storage volume of the defined chamber.
Storage Areas & Detention › Storage Area Drawing & Data

Storage Area Table Edit Command

The upstream and downstream boundaries of a river reach can be connected to a reservoir, lake, or other types of large water bodies. These water bodies are called storage areas. In GeoSTORM, the user can view and edit all the parameters of these storage areas in one editable data grid using the Storage Area Table Edit command. The user can also view the corresponding output results from this data grid.

Follow the steps below to use the Storage Area Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Storage Areas dropdown menu and select the Storage Area Table Edit command.
    Storage Area Table Edit command
  2. The Storage Area Table Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Storage Area Table Edit dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Storage Area Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storm Results

In the Select Storm Results section, the Storm result to display dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storm frequency whose result is to be displayed.

Select Storm Results section

Note that the Select Storm Results section is available when either the Modified Rational, Rational Method, or DeKalb Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Otherwise, this section is unavailable. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engines supported by GeoSTORM.

Storage Area Parameters

The following panels are available in the Storage Area Parameters section:

  • Storage Area Data
  • Results Data

Storage Area Data

This panel contains editable data grid columns listing storage area parameters present in the current scenario.

Storage Area Data panel

The following storage area data parameters are provided in the data grid columns:

  • Storage Area ID
    This editable column lists all storage area IDs contained in the current scenario. Note that this editable column will also be available in the Results Data panel.
  • Invert Elevation
    This editable column lists the storage area invert elevations. The user can click the […] button to select the storage area invert elevation from the Map View.
  • Initial WSEL
    This editable column lists the water surface elevation of the storage areas at the start of the simulation.

Results Data

The data grid columns in this panel list corresponding output results for storage areas present in the current scenario.

Results Data panel

The following storage area result parameters are provided in the data grid columns:

  • Peak Inflow
    This read-only column lists the peak flow rate that entered the storage area during the storm event.
  • Peak Outflow
    This read-only column lists the peak flow rate that leaves the storage area during the storm event.
  • Peak Storage Volume
    This read-only column lists the peak storage volume that occurred at the storage area during the storm event.
  • Peak WSEL
    This read-only column lists the peak water surface elevation that occurred at the storage area during the storm event.
  • Peak Depth
    This read-only column lists the peak water depth that occurred at the storage area during the storm event.
  • Total Seepage Volume
    This read-only column lists the volume of the water that has seeped out of the storage area during the entire storm event.

Sorting the Storage Area Table

The data in the Storage Area Parameters table can be sorted by multiple columns. The user can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up and Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Sorting the Storage Area Table

Follow the steps below to sort the data using multiple columns:

  • Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  • Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  • Repeat step 2 to sort the data of any additional column.

For example, first, select the Peak Inflow column and click the Up arrow to sort the data in ascending order. Then, while holding the [Shift] key, select the Peak WSEL column and click the Down arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Example of Sorting the Storage Area Table

Copying and Exporting Storage Area Parameters

The data in the Storage Area Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the right-click context menu commands, such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Copying and Exporting Storage Area Parameters

After editing the required storage area parameters, click the [Close] button to close the Storage Area Table Edit dialog box.

Storage Areas & Detention › Outflow Control Structures

Understanding Outflow Control Structures

An outflow control structure is a hydraulic device that throttles the rate at which water leaves a manhole, storage chamber, or other drainage element into the downstream pipe network. By holding water back in upstream storage and metering the discharge, these structures protect downstream pipes from being overwhelmed during a storm and help meet release-rate limits set by local stormwater regulations. They are a routine part of detention systems, infiltration basins, combined sewer overflow (CSO) controls, and post-development release-rate control.

This article explains how outflow control structures work, how to define them in the software, and the most common errors to watch for when setting them up.

Why Outflow Controls Matter

The job of an outflow control is to convert short, intense storm inflows into longer, lower-rate outflows. Without that throttling, post-development discharges from a developed site would normally exceed the capacity of the downstream pipe network and the receiving channel. Outflow controls allow the user to size detention storage appropriately and ensure that a design meets agency release-rate limits for the design storm frequencies.

Common reasons to model an outflow control structure include:

  • Meeting an allowable peak discharge limit for a developed site (for example, "post-development peak shall not exceed pre-development peak for the 2-year, 10-year, and 100-year storms").
  • Sizing a detention or retention basin to a specific stage-discharge relationship.
  • Throttling a CSO regulator so that combined sewer overflows occur only above a defined threshold.
  • Protecting an undersized downstream pipe from surcharging during larger storms.

Types of Outflow Control Structures

GeoSTORM supports two types of outflow control structures:

  • Orifice Control
  • Vortex Control

Orifice Control

An orifice control regulates flow from a manhole into the downstream pipe network. In GeoSTORM, it is represented as a flat plate with a circular or rectangular opening. As the water surface in the upstream manhole rises, the head over the orifice increases, and the flow through it follows the standard orifice equation. The orifice can also include a flap gate to prevent reverse flow when downstream water surface elevations are higher.

Orifice controls are simple, inexpensive, and easy to maintain, which is why they are by far the most common throttling device in detention systems. They behave predictably over the full range of operating heads and are well-suited to slowing peak flows and protecting downstream infrastructure.

Understanding Outflow Control Structures Img 1

Vortex Control

A vortex control regulates flow using the hydraulic principle of vortex formation rather than a simple opening. Inside the device, swirling water forms an air-cored vortex at higher heads, which limits the discharge for a relatively wide range of upstream water surface elevations. In GeoSTORM, the vortex control is defined by a head-discharge rating curve that lists the discharge at each water surface elevation. Similar to the orifice, a flap gate can be added to prevent reverse flow when downstream water surface elevations are higher.

Vortex controls are especially useful in stormwater detention systems because they keep peak discharges low while allowing larger openings that minimize the risk of clogging from leaves, sediment, and debris that often plagues small orifices.

Understanding Outflow Control Structures Img 2unknown node

Defining Outflow Control Structures in GeoSTORM

In GeoSTORM, the user can define outflow control structures using the Outflow Control panel from the Manhole Data dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Manhole Data command.

Understanding Outflow Control Structures Img 3

Common Errors When Defining Outflow Control Structures

The following errors may be encountered when setting up orifice and vortex outflow controls in GeoSTORM.

Orifice Control Errors

  • Incorrect placement: Defining the orifice at the wrong elevation (for example, placing it too high above the base of the manhole) can cause the structure to release flow too late or not at all.
  • Wrong dimensions: Entering incorrect diameter or area values causes the discharge rate to be overestimated or underestimated for every water surface elevation.
  • Missing flap gate: Forgetting to add a flap gate in backflow-prone areas can result in reverse flows when downstream water surface elevations rise above the upstream side.
  • Unit mismatch: Mixing metric and imperial units when entering size parameters leads to unrealistic discharge results.

Vortex Control Errors

  • Incomplete head-discharge curve: If the rating curve does not cover the full range of expected water surface elevations, the software may produce errors or extrapolate into unrealistic outflow behavior.
  • Non-monotonic data: Entering a head-discharge curve where flow decreases at higher heads (instead of remaining constant or increasing) can cause model instability.
  • Improper scaling: Using very small or very large flow values without proper calibration may exaggerate throttling effects or show no vortex formation at all.
unknown node

Conclusion

Outflow control structures determine how stored runoff is released from a stormwater facility. Accurate modeling depends on more than selecting a structure type; the opening dimensions, elevations, coefficients, storage relationship, and downstream conditions must all be consistent with the design. A careful review of these inputs helps the software produce routed hydrographs and ponding results that better reflect the real system.

Storage Areas & Detention › Outflow Control Structures

Defining Storage Area Spillways

The Storage Area Spillways panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box allows the user to define a spillway that directly discharges from the storage area to the downstream element of the project without going through a vertical riser structure. This article describes how to interact with the Storage Area Spillways panel. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Follow the steps below to define specifications for storage area spillways:

  1. In the Storage Area Data dialog box, select Storage Area Spillways from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Storage Area Spillways entry of the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box
  2. The corresponding panel with the options for defining storage area spillways will be displayed.
    Storage Area Spillways panel

Spillway Definitions

This section provides a data grid that allows the user to define the type and flow direction of the spillway.

Spillway Definitions section

The following column entries are provided in this data grid:

  • Spillway Type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of spillway to be used. The following entries are provided in the dropdown combo box:
    1. None
    2. Roadway
    3. Standard – Rectangular
    4. Standard – Trapezoidal
    5. Standard – V-Notch
      Spillway Type dropdown combo box
  • Flow Direction
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flow of the spillway being routed. The following entries are provided in this dropdown combo box:
    1. Auxiliary
    2. Main

Standard Spillway Specifications

This section allows the user to define specifications for a standard spillway.

Note that this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out) when Roadway is selected as the spillway type in the Spillway Definitions section.

Standard Spillway Specifications section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Spillway crest elevation
    This entry field defines the spillway crest elevation. Clicking the […] button allows the user to measure the elevation of the spillway crest from the Map View.
  • Spillway length
    This entry field defines the bottom width of a rectangular and trapezoidal spillway. Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to measure the length of the spillway from the Map View. Note that this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out) when Standard – V-Notch is selected as the spillway type in the Spillway Definitions section.
  • Spillway side slope (H:V)
    This entry field defines the side slope of the sides of a trapezoidal and V-notch spillway. Note that this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out) when Standard – Rectangular is selected as the spillway type in the Spillway Definitions section.
  • Spillway discharge coefficient
    This entry field defines the weir discharge coefficient for the spillway structure. Clicking the […] button displays the Weir Coefficients lookup dialog box, allowing the user to select the weir discharge coefficient that can be assigned.
    Weir Coefficients lookup dialog box

Roadway Spillway Specifications

This section allows the user to define input data for the roadway to act as a spillway.

Note that this section is enabled only when Roadway is selected as the spillway type in the Spillway Definitions section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Roadway Spillway Specifications section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Roadway centerline elevation
    This entry field defines the roadway crest elevation. Clicking the […] button allows the user to measure the elevation of the roadway centerline from the Map View.
  • Roadway length
    This entry field defines the length of the roadway that will act as a spillway. Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to measure the roadway length from the Map View.
  • Roadway width (in flow direction)
    This entry field defines the width of the roadway (in the direction of flow) that will act as a spillway. Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to measure the roadway width from the Map View.
  • Roadway discharge coefficient
    This entry field defines the weir discharge coefficient for the roadway structure that will act as a spillway.
  • Roadway surface type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of roadway surface that will act as a spillway. The following roadway surface types are provided:
    1. Gravel Surface
    2. Paved Surface
Storage Areas & Detention › Outflow Control Structures

Defining Riser Outflow Pipe

The Riser Outflow Pipe panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box allows the user to define general parameters for the pipe that directly discharges flow captured by the vertical riser structure. This article describes how to interact with the Riser Outflow Pipe panel. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Riser Outflow Pipe Structure

Follow the steps below to define the specifications for the riser outflow pipe:

  1. In the Storage Area Data dialog box, select Riser Outflow Pipe from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box. Riser Outflow Pipe option of Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box
  2. The corresponding panel with options for defining the riser outflow pipe will be displayed. Riser Outflow Pipe data panel

Pipe Definition

This section allows the user to define the general parameters for the selected pipe.

Pipe Definition section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Pipe shape This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of pipe shape. The following pipe shapes are available:
    1. Arch
    2. Box
    3. Circular (default)
    4. Ellipse
    5. Pipe Arch Pipe shape dropdown combo box
  • Backflow flap gate This checkbox option specifies whether a flap gate will be enabled to prevent backflow (or flow reversal) for the pipe. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
  • Pipe type This dropdown combo box lists the available pipe types that are supported. Note that the options in the dropdown combo box will change based on the selected pipe shape.
  • Pipe entrance This dropdown combo box lists the available pipe entrance types that are supported. Note that the options in the dropdown combo box will change based on the selected pipe shape.
  • Number barrels This spin-control entry defines the number of identical pipe barrels that are defined. By default, the software uses a value of 1. However, the user can enter a value ranging from 1 to 10.

Pipe Dimensions

This section allows the user to define the dimensions and other parameters of the pipe.

Pipe Dimensions section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Diameter or height This entry field defines the diameter of a circular pipe or the height of a box pipe shape.
  • Width or span This entry field defines the width (or span) of a box pipe shape. Note that this entry field is enabled only when Box is selected as the pipe shape under the Pipe Definition section. Otherwise, this entry field is disabled (i.e. grayed out).
  • Pipe length This entry field defines the length of the pipe being modeled. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the pipe length from the Map View.
  • Inlet invert elevation This entry field defines the pipe invert elevations on the upstream (inlet) end. The user can click the […] button to select the pipe inlet invert elevation from the Map View. Clicking the [Down] arrow button causes the pipe invert elevation to be set equal to the storage area invert elevation.
  • Outlet invert elevation This entry field defines the pipe invert elevations at the downstream (outlet) end. The user can click the […] button to select the pipe outlet invert elevation from the Map View. Clicking the [Down] arrow button causes the pipe invert elevation to be set equal to the storage area invert elevation.
  • Pipe slope (H:V) This entry field displays the slope of the pipe. In addition, this field can be used to set the slope of the pipe. The user can click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) adjacent to the Pipe slope (H:V) field to change the read-only field into an editable field. The user can then enter the pipe slope and click on the [Accept changes] button. The software will then adjust the unlocked pipe end invert elevation to meet the updated slope value. [Accept changes] button

Note: To set the slope of the pipe, the user should first select the end of the pipe invert elevation that is to be locked.

The following options are provided in the dropdown combo box adjacent to the Pipe slope (H:V) entry field:

    1. Lock Downstream Invert
    2. Lock Upstream Invert

Pipe Coefficients

This section allows the user to define Manning’s roughness, entrance loss and exit loss coefficients for the selected pipe.

Pipe Coefficients section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Manning’s roughness This entry field defines the roughness of the pipe. Clicking the [...] button displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a pipe. Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box
  • Entrance loss coefficient This entry field defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the inlet of the pipe as the flow enters the pipe from a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking the [...] button displays the Pipe Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the entrance loss coefficient to be assigned to a pipe. Pipe Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box
  • Exit loss coefficient This entry field defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the outlet of the pipe as the flow leaves the pipe and enters a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking the [...] button displays the Pipe Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the exit loss coefficient to be assigned to a pipe. Pipe Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box
Storage Areas & Detention › Outflow Control Structures

Defining Storage Area Culvert

The Storage Area Culvert panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box allows the user to define general parameters for the culvert that directly discharges from the storage area to the downstream element (i.e., manhole, routing junction, storage area, etc.) without going through a vertical riser structure. This article describes how to interact with the Storage Area Culvert panel. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Follow the steps below to define the specifications for the storage area culvert:

  1. In the Storage Area Data dialog box, select Storage Area Culvert from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Storage Area Culvert option of the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box
  2. The corresponding panel with options for defining the culvert will be displayed.
    Storage Area Culvert data panel

Culvert Definition

This section allows the user to define the general parameters for the selected culvert.

Culvert Definition section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Culvert shape
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of culvert shape. The following culvert shapes are available:
    1. Arch
    2. Box
    3. Circular
    4. Ellipse
    5. Pipe Arch
      Culvert shape dropdown combo box
  • Backflow flap gate
    This checkbox option specifies whether a flap gate will be enabled to prevent backflow (or flow reversal) for the culvert. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
  • Culvert type
    This dropdown combo box lists the available culvert types that are supported. Note that the options in the dropdown combo box will change based on the selected culvert shape.
  • Culvert entrance
    This dropdown combo box lists the available culvert entrance types that are supported. Note that the options in the dropdown combo box will change based on the selected culvert shape.
  • Number barrels
    This spin-control entry defines the number of identical culvert barrels that are defined. By default, the software uses a value of 1. However, the user can enter a value ranging from 1 to 10.
  • Discharge to downstream auxiliary connection
    This checkbox option allows the software to connect the culvert to the auxiliary connection element rather than to the downstream connection element (i.e., manhole, routing junction, or storage area). The read-only field next to this checkbox option displays the element ID of the auxiliary connection. Note that this checkbox option is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if there is no auxiliary connection element defined for the selected storage area. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

Culvert Dimensions

This section allows the user to define the dimensions and other parameters of the culvert.

Culvert Dimensions section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Diameter or height
    This entry field defines the diameter of a circular culvert or the height of a box culvert.
  • Width or span
    This entry field defines the width (or span) of a box culvert. Note that this entry field is only available when Box is selected as the culvert shape in the Culvert Definition section. Otherwise, this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Culvert length
    This entry field defines the length of the culvert being modeled. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the culvert length from the Map View.
  • Inlet invert elevation
    This entry field defines the culvert invert elevations on the upstream (inlet) end. The user can click the […] button to select the culvert inlet invert elevation from the Map View. Clicking the [Down] arrow button causes the culvert invert elevation to be set equal to the storage area invert elevation.
  • Outlet invert elevation
    This entry field defines the culvert invert elevations at the downstream (outlet) end. The user can click the […] button to select the culvert outlet invert elevation from the Map View. Clicking the [Down] arrow button causes the culvert invert elevation to be set equal to the storage area invert elevation.
  • Culvert slope (H:V)
    This entry field displays the slope of the culvert. In addition, this field can be used to set the slope of the culvert. The user can click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) adjacent to the Culvert slope (H:V) field to change the read-only field into an editable field. The user can then enter the culvert slope and click on the [Accept changes] button. The software will then adjust the unlocked culvert end invert elevation to meet the updated slope value.
    Culvert slope (H:V) entry - [Accept changes] button
    Note: To set the slope of the culvert, the user should first select the end of the culvert invert elevation that is to be locked. The following options are provided in the dropdown combo box adjacent to the Culvert slope (H:V) entry field:
    1. Lock Downstream Invert
    2. Lock Upstream Invert

Culvert Coefficients

This section allows the user to define Manning’s roughness, entrance loss and exit loss coefficients for the selected culvert.

Culvert Coefficients section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry field defines the roughness of the pipe being used as a culvert. Clicking the [...] button displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose a Manning’s roughness coefficient to be assigned to a culvert.
    Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box
  • Entrance loss coefficient
    This entry field defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the inlet of the pipe as the flow enters the pipe from a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking the [...] button displays the Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the entrance loss coefficient to be assigned to a culvert.
    Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box
  • Exit loss coefficient
    This entry field defines the head loss coefficient associated with energy losses at the outlet of the pipe as the flow leaves the pipe and enters a node (i.e., manhole, junction box, routing junction, catch basin, or storage area). Clicking the [...] button displays the Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box, which allows the user to choose the exit loss coefficient to be assigned to a culvert.
    Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box
Storage Areas & Detention › Outflow Control Structures

Defining Pump Outflow

Stormwater pumps are used in situations where gravity drainage is either impossible or impractical. Stormwater pumping is expensive to operate and maintain and poses several potential problems that must be addressed. Therefore, stormwater pumping should only be considered when no other practicable alternatives are available. Alternatives to stormwater pumps include siphons, recharge basins, deep and long storm drain systems, and tunnels.

The following situations require the use of stormwater pumps:

  • To lift stormwater to a higher elevation when the discharge point for the local collection system lies below the regional conveyance.
  • To lift stormwater to a higher elevation when terrain or man-made obstacles do not permit gravity flow to the discharge point. For example, a roadway underpass at a railroad crossing.

This article describes how to use the Pump Outflow panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box to define the pump outflow parameters for the storage area. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Follow the steps below to use the Pump Outflow panel:

  1. In the Storage Area Data dialog box, select Pump Outflow from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Pump Outflow option from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box
  2. The Pump Outflow panel will be displayed, as shown below.
    Pump Outflow panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Pump Outflow panel.

Pump Definitions

The Pump Definitions section contains a data grid that lists all the defined pumps along with their flow direction, initial status, and pump mode defined for the selected storage area. Click the [New] button to create a new pump entry in the data grid. Click the [Delete] button to delete the selected pump entry from the data grid. Note that the ID of every newly created pump ID must be unique.

Pump Definitions Section

The following column entries are provided in this data grid:

  • Defined Pump
    This read-only column lists all pumps defined for the selected storage area.
  • Flow Direction
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that lists the flow direction in which the downstream connection element (i.e., manhole, routing junction, storage area, etc.) receives the pump outflow. The following flow direction options are provided:
    1. None
    2. Auxiliary
    3. Main
  • Initial Status
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that lists the initial status of the pumps at the start of the analysis. The following initial status options are provided:
    1. On
    2. Off
  • Pump Mode
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that lists the pump modes. The following pump mode options are provided:
    1. Design Mode
    2. Pump Curve

Pump Specifications

This section allows the user to define the data for the selected pump listed in the data grid.

Pump Definitions section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

Pump ID

This entry field displays the pump ID corresponding to the selected row in the Pump Definitions data grid. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the pump ID.

Pump mode

This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the pump mode to be used in the analysis for the selected pump.

Pump Specifications

The following pump modes are provided:

  • Design Mode
    The pump acts as a transfer pump and does not require a pump curve. This mode is used for preliminary analysis, where the pump’s flow rate equals the inflow rate to the storage area, regardless of the head difference between the storage area and outlet node.
  • Pump Curve
    The pump operates according to a pump curve specifying the relationship between the pump's flow rate and conditions at its inlet and outlet nodes. A pump curve is required to be defined by clicking the [Define] button adjacent to the Pump curve dropdown combo box.

Pump curve

This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the pump curve defined in the current scenario.

Pump curve dropdown combo box

Note that this dropdown combo box is disabled (i.e., grayed out) when Design Mode is selected as the pump mode.

Clicking the [Define] button displays the Pump Curve Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new pump curve. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Pump Curve Data dialog box.

Pump Curve Data Dialog Box

Pump initial status

This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the initial pump status at the start of the analysis for the current pump. The following initial status options are provided:

  • On - The pump is assumed running at the start of the analysis.
  • Off - The pump is assumed not running at the start of the analysis.

Pump start at water depth

This entry field allows the user to define the water depth at which the pump should turn on and start pumping.

Pump stop at water depth

This entry field allows the user to define the water depth at which the pump should turn off and stop pumping.

Storage Areas & Detention › Outflow Control Structures

Defining Riser Outflow Structure

In GeoSTORM software, the Riser Outflow Structure panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box allows the user to define the following parameters: the dimensions of the riser outflow structure and horizontal orifices associated with it, and weirs embedded into the structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Typical Riser Structure

Follow the steps below to define specifications for the riser outflow structure:

  1. In the Storage Area Data dialog box, select Riser Outflow Structure from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Riser Outflow Structure entry of the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box
  2. The corresponding panel with the options for defining the riser outflow structure will be displayed.
    Riser Outflow Structure data panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Riser Outflow Structure panel.

Riser Outflow Structure Dimensions

This section is used to define the general dimensions for the defined riser structure. Note that only one riser structure can be defined for a storage area element.

Riser Outflow Structure Dimensions section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Vertical riser type
    This dropdown combo box lists the supported vertical riser structures that are:
    1. Box
    2. Circular
      Vertical riser type dropdown combo box
  • Riser crest elevation
    This entry field defines the vertical riser structure crest elevation. Click the [...] button adjacent to this entry field to measure the vertical riser structure crest elevation from the Map View.
  • Riser diameter or width
    This entry field defines the diameter of a circular or the box width of a vertical riser structure. Click the [...] button adjacent to this entry field to measure the vertical riser diameter or width from the Map View.
  • Riser length
    This entry field defines the box length of a vertical riser structure. Click the [...] button adjacent to this entry field to measure the vertical riser length from the Map View. Note that this entry field is enabled when Box is selected as the vertical riser type. Otherwise, this entry field is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Riser overflow weir coefficient
    This entry field defines the overflow weir discharge coefficient for the weir crest at the top of the vertical riser structure. Click the […] button adjacent to this entry field and the Weir Coefficients lookup dialog box will be displayed that allows the user to select the weir coefficient to be assigned.
    Weir Coefficients lookup dialog box

Riser Orifice Specifications

This section provides a data grid that is used to define the specifications of the horizontal orifices embedded in the defined vertical riser structure.

Riser Orifice Specifications

The following column entries are provided in this data grid:

  • Orifice Shape
    This data grid column contains a dropdown combo box that lists the supported horizontal orifices.
    1. Circular
    2. Rectangular
  • Orifice Invert Elevation
    This data grid column defines the orifice invert elevation.
  • Orifice Width or Diameter
    This data grid column defines the width of a rectangular orifice or the diameter of a circular orifice.
  • Orifice Height
    This data grid column defines the height of a rectangular orifice.
  • Orifice Coefficient
    This data grid column defines the orifice discharge coefficient for the horizontal orifice embedded into the vertical riser structure. Click the […] button adjacent to this entry and the Orifice Discharge Coefficients lookup dialog box will be displayed that allows the user to select the orifice discharge coefficient to be assigned.
    Orifice Discharge Coefficients lookup dialog box

Riser Weir Specifications

This section provides a data grid that is used to define the specifications of the weirs embedded in the defined vertical riser structure.

Riser Weir Specifications

The following column entries are provided in this data grid:

  • Weir Shape
    This data grid column contains a dropdown combo box that lists the supported weir shapes that are:
    1. Rectangular
    2. Trapezoidal
    3. V-Notch
  • Weir Invert Elevation
    This data grid column defines the weir invert elevation.
  • Weir Bottom Width
    This data grid column defines the bottom width of a rectangular and trapezoidal weir. Note that this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) when V-Notch is selected as the weir shape.
  • Weir Side Slope (H:V)
    This data grid column defines the side slope of the sides of a trapezoidal and V-notch weir. Note that this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) when Rectangular is selected as the weir shape.
  • Weir Coefficient
    This data grid column defines the weir discharge coefficient for the weir structure embedded into the vertical riser structure. Click the […] button adjacent to the entry field and the Weir Coefficients lookup dialog box will be displayed that allows the user to select the weir discharge coefficient to be assigned.
    Weir Coefficients lookup dialog box
Storage Areas & Detention › Outflow Control Structures

Pump Curve Data Command

A pump curve represents a graphical representation of the relationship between a pump's flow rate and conditions at the inlet and outlet nodes. The pump curve allows the user to analyze the performance of pumps in water management systems, helping optimize the design and operation of water systems for various applications, such as irrigation, water supply, or flood control.

The Pump Curve Data command of GeoSTORM allows the user to define the pump curves used for storage areas. Using this command, the pump curve data can be defined for the storage area locations where water is stored, and pumps are necessary to manage the movement of stored water.

Follow the steps below to use the Pump Curve Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on Storage Areas dropdown menu and select the Pump Curve Data command.
    Pump Curve Data command
  2. The Pump Curve Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Pump Curve Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Pump Curve Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Pump Curve

The Select Pump Curve section allows the user to select the pump curve for purposes of defining the pump curve data. The user can create a new pump curve, copy existing pump curve data to a new pump curve, and delete a pump curve. In addition, the user can navigate between pump curves and enter a description detailing the defined pump curve.

Select Pump Curve section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Pump curve ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the pump curves defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the pump curve ID. The Up and Down arrow buttons allow the user to switch between downstream and upstream pump curves. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains only one pump curve.
  • Description
    This optional text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the current pump curve.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new pump curve on the Map View. Note that the ID of every newly created pump curve must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the current pump curve along with its associated data.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current pump curve from the current scenario.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Pump Curve section header allow the user to hide and display the right side of the dialog box containing the Pump Curve Plot. This allows the dialog box to be smaller when the user does not want to see the plot view.

Pump Curve Specifications

This section allows the user to define specifications for the selected pump curve. From the Pump curve type dropdown combo box, the user can select the type of pump curve being defined. The following pump curve types are available in the dropdown combo box:

Pump curve type dropdown combo box
  • Head Differential vs Flow (Type 3) (default)
  • Depth vs Flow (Type 4)

Head Differential vs Flow (Type 3)

This pump curve type is used to define the pump curve’s flow vs head difference data. A Head Differential vs Flow pump curve defines the pump characteristic curve at a nominal impeller speed to relate flow rate and delivered head. Selecting this pump curve type displays a data table with Head Difference and Flow columns. The Head Difference column allows the user to enter the head difference between the pump inlet elevation at the storage area and the pump outlet elevation at the discharge node. The Flow column allows the user to enter the flow rate. Once the curve data is defined, the corresponding graphical plot of the pump performance curve will be displayed in the Pump Curve Plot section as shown below.

Head Differential vs Flow (Type 3) pump curve type

Depth vs Flow (Type 4)

This pump curve type is used to enter the pump curve’s flow vs inlet node depth data. A Depth vs Flow pump curve defines the pump characteristic curve for a variable speed pump where flow varies continuously with inlet node water depth. Selecting this pump curve type displays a data table with Depth and Flow columns. The Depth column allows the user to enter the depth of water above the pump inlet elevation at the storage area. The Flow column allows the user to enter the flow rate. Once the curve data is defined, the corresponding graphical plot of the pump performance curve will be displayed in the Pump Curve Plot section as shown below.

Depth vs Flow (Type 4) pump curve type

Right-clicking within the data table displays context menu commands that allow users to cut, copy, and paste the data of the selected cells, as well as delete rows from the table. In addition, the user can copy the table data to the Windows clipboard or export it to Microsoft Excel or as a PDF format using these context menu commands.

Pump Curve Specifications Table right click context menu commands

Similarly, right-clicking within the Pump Curve Plot displays context menu commands such as zoom, pan, copy, save as image, etc. for the graphical plot.

Pump Curve Plot right click context menu commands
Storage Areas & Detention › Underground Storage Chambers

Defining Underground Storage Chambers

Underground storage chamber systems are one of the most common ways to provide on-site stormwater detention or retention when surface space is limited. CivilGEO software allows the user to specify a manufactured chamber product, lay out a complete chamber field within an excavation footprint, and automatically compute the resulting storage volume.

This article describes underground storage chambers and how to interact with the Underground Storage Chamber panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base for more information about the Storage Area Data dialog box.

What Is an Underground Storage Chamber?

An underground storage chamber system is a subsurface stormwater storage system made up of a series of high-density polyethylene or polypropylene arch-shaped chambers installed within an open-graded stone bed. These systems are sometimes referred to as chamber fields, plastic chamber systems, or arch chamber systems.

Stormwater runoff is directed into the chamber system through inlets, pipes, and header rows. As runoff enters the system, water fills the open space inside the chambers and also occupies the void spaces between the surrounding stone. Together, the chamber volume and the stone void volume provide the total available stormwater storage capacity.

Once the system begins to fill, the stored stormwater can either infiltrate into the surrounding soil, slowly discharge through a controlled outlet, or use a combination of both methods, depending on the site design and local drainage requirements.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 1

Underground storage chambers are commonly installed beneath parking lots, driveways, athletic fields, landscaped areas, and other usable surface spaces. This allows the land above the system to remain functional while providing the required stormwater detention, retention, or infiltration capacity below ground.

These systems are typically designed to manage the increase in runoff caused by site development. They are commonly sized to control the difference between pre-development and post-development runoff for a selected design storm, or to meet local low-impact development (LID), detention, retention, or infiltration requirements.

Typical Underground Storage Chamber System Components

  • Chambers: Manufactured arch units that provide most of the open storage volume.
  • Stone embedment (base, sides, and cover): Open-graded angular stone surrounding the chambers. The void space within this stone contributes additional storage.
  • End caps and headers: Closed-end pieces and manifold pipes that distribute flow across chamber rows.
  • Geotextile and impermeable liners: Separate the stone from native soil and, in retention systems, trap and contain water until it exfiltrates.
  • Inlet, outlet, and overflow structures: Manage flow throughout the system, including controlled discharge for detention designs.
unknown node

Defining Specifications for Underground Storage Chambers

Follow the steps below to define the specifications for the underground storage chambers:

  1. In the Storage Area Data dialog box, select Underground Storage Chamber from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box.
    unknown node
unknown node
  1. The corresponding panel with options for defining the underground storage chamber will be displayed.
    unknown node

The following subpanels are available in the Underground Storage Chamber data panel:

  • Chamber Details
  • Chamber System Design
  • Summary

Chamber Details

In the Chamber Details subpanel, the Underground Storage Chamber Details section displays the information about the selected storage chamber manufacturer and associated model.

The following parameters are available:

  • Storage chamber manufacturer
    This read-only field displays the selected storage chamber manufacturer name.
  • Storage chamber model
    This read-only field displays the selected storage chamber model. Clicking the [Select] button temporarily removes the Storage Area Data dialog box and displays the Select Underground Storage Chamber lookup dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to select the storage chamber model. After selecting the storage chamber model, the Storage Area Data dialog box will be redisplayed. The selected storage chamber model will be displayed in the Chamber Details subpanel. Refer to the Select Underground Storage Chamber section (explained below) to learn more about this dialog box.
  • Storage chamber model Image
    The image available in this section displays the preview of the selected storage chamber model.
  • Description Box
    The description box displays the selected storage chamber model specifications provided by the manufacturer. The following specifications are displayed:
    1. Manufacturer’s name
    2. Storage chamber model
    3. Chamber height
    4. Chamber width
    5. Chamber length
    6. Chamber volume

Select Underground Storage Chamber

The following panels are available in the Select Underground Storage Chamber dialog box:

  • All Storage Chambers
  • Recently Selected
  • Favorites
    unknown node

All Storage Chambers

In the All Storage Chambers panel, the Underground Storage Chamber Selection section allows the user to select the storage chamber manufacturer and associated model to be used for the selected storage area.

The following parameters are available:

  • Storage chamber manufacturer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storage chamber manufacturer. The software supports the following storage chamber manufacturers:
    1. ADS StormTech
    2. Cultec
    3. NDS StormChamber
    4. Prinsco
    5. Triton

Clicking the […] button displays the Select Storage Chamber Manufacturer lookup dialog box that allows the user to select additional storage chamber manufacturers. The selected storage chamber manufacturers will then be listed in the Storage chamber manufacturer dropdown combo box.
unknown node

  • Storage chamber model
    This read-only field displays the currently selected storage chamber model. Note that only one storage chamber model can be selected at a time.
  • Search Box
    The search box allows the user to quickly find a specific underground storage chamber model from the available list. The user can click the [Clear] button to remove any text entered in the search field.
    unknown node

Recently Selected

In the Recently Selected panel, the software lists the most recently used storage chamber models for each manufacturer.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 8unknown node

Favorites

In the Favorites panel, the user can quickly access frequently used storage chamber models. This panel displays storage chamber models that have been marked as favorites. To add a storage chamber model to the Favorites panel, select the model from the All Storage Chambers panel and click the Star icon.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 9

Once the storage chamber model has been selected, click the [OK] button. The selected storage chamber model, along with associated information such as manufacturer name, model name, dimensions, and image, will be displayed in the Chamber Details subpanel.

unknown node

Chamber System Design

In the Chamber System Design subpanel, the Chamber System Specifications and Layout section allows the user to define the specifications and layout of the storage chamber system.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 10

The following tab panels are available in the Chamber System Design subpanel:

  • Chamber System Design
  • Chamber System Layout

Chamber System Design

In the Chamber System Design tab panel, the Define Chamber System Layout Specifications section allows the user to define the parameters for the chamber system layout.

The following parameters are available:

  • Terrain surface
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the terrain elevation surface available in the project.
  • Space between chamber rows
    This entry field defines the gap between storage chamber rows so that the stone fill can be inserted.
  • Storage area excavation wall to chambers
    This entry field defines the buffer distance provided from the storage area boundary. Note that the storage chambers can only be placed inside this buffer region.
    unknown node
  • Chamber row header distance (optional)
    This entry field defines the width of the header manifold, which will be provided to each chamber row.
    unknown node
  • Stone cover
    This entry field defines the stone cover to be placed above the storage chamber crown.
Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 13unknown node
  • Stone base
    This entry field defines the stone base to be placed under the storage chamber.
  • Stone base invert elevation
    This entry field defines the invert elevation of the stone base.
  • Stone void space
    This spin control entry field defines the stone void space, represented as a percentage. By default, the software uses a value of 40. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 10 to 90.

Once all required data have been defined, click the [Generate] button. The software generates the storage chamber system layout and immediately takes the user to the Chamber System Layout tab panel. Additionally, the software updates the storage area with the maximum number of storage chambers, which makes it possible to maximize storage volume.

unknown node

Chamber System Layout

The Chamber System Layout tab panel displays a preview of the storage area created on the Map View. Initially, the preview shows the current Map View extents, but the user can zoom and pan this view using the mouse cursor.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 14

The following parameters are available:

  • Project base map provider
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the project base map from several high-quality base maps.
  • Use grayscale base map
    This checkbox option allows the user to change the base map to grayscale instead of color.

Editing the Storage Chamber Layout

Clicking the [Edit Layout] button temporarily removes the Storage Area Data dialog box and displays the Edit Layout dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to adjust the layout of the storage chamber more precisely. In this dialog box, the user can define the storage area boundary and manually add or remove storage chambers. After making the necessary changes, click the [OK] button to save the layout. The Storage Area Data dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Chamber System Layout preview tab will be updated with the changes made. To abort the process, click the [Cancel] button.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 15

The Edit Layout dialog box provides the following toolbar commands for editing the storage chamber system layout:

unknown node

In addition, the user can zoom and pan the storage chamber layout grid in Map View. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the other tools available in this dialog box.

unknown node

Summary

The Summary subpanel provides a volume summary for the storage chamber system, including the depth-area-volume plot and corresponding data in a tabular format.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 26

The following tab panels are available in the Summary subpanel:

  • Volume Summary
  • Depth-Area Volume Plot
  • Data Table

Volume Summary

In the Volume Summary tab panel, the Storage Chamber System Volume Summary section displays the volume summary for the storage chamber system. Note that this section is populated only when the user has generated the storage chamber system layout from the Chamber System Design subpanel.

The following parameters are available:

  • Total storage chambers
    This read-only field displays the total storage chambers included in the storage chamber system.
  • System footprint area (including buffer)
    This read-only field displays the footprint area of the storage chamber system, which is equal to the area of the buffer polygon.
    unknown node
  • Total excavation volume (including buffer & cover)
    This read-only field displays the volume of the earthwork to be excavated for the storage chamber system, including exterior buffer and ground cover.
  • Total ground cover volume
    This read-only field displays the volume of excavation required to provide ground cover to the storage chamber system.
  • Total storage chamber volume (without stone fill)
    This read-only field displays the total storage volume of the storage chambers.
  • Total stone fill required (includes void space)
    This read-only field displays the storage volume of the stone fill (including void space).
  • Stone void volume
    This read-only field displays the storage volume provided by the voids of the stone fill.
  • Total system storage volume (chambers & stone void space)
    This read-only field displays the total storage volume defined by the storage chamber system. This volume includes the storage volume of the storage chambers and the stone fill voids.

Clicking the [Calc] button computes the volume summary for the storage chamber system. Note that the [Calc] button is enabled only when changes are made in the chamber system layout using the Edit Layout dialog box. Otherwise, this button is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Clicking the [Chamber Report] button displays the Underground Storage Chamber Report dialog box, which allows the user to generate a report of the storage chamber system in Microsoft Word or PDF format. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Underground Storage Chamber Report dialog box.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 28

Depth-Area-Volume Plot

In the Depth-Area-Volume Plot tab panel, the Storage Chamber System Depth-Area-Volume Plot section displays the depth-area-volume plot of the storage chamber system based on the computed volume summary from the Volume Summary tab panel.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 29

Data Table

In the Data Table tab panel, the Storage Chamber System Depth-Area-Volume Data Table section displays the depth vs. area and volume data in a tabular format based on the computed volume summary from the Volume Summary tab panel.

Defining Underground Storage Chambers Img 30

The following read-only columns are available in the Storage Chamber System Depth-Area-Volume Data Table section:

  • Depth
    This read-only column displays the cumulative depth value of the storage chamber system.
  • Void Space Area
    This read-only column displays the cumulative value of the void space area of the storage chamber system at the corresponding depth.
  • Void Space Volume
    This read-only column displays the cumulative value of the void space volume of the storage chamber system at the corresponding depth.

Practical Design Tips

  • Mind the cover: Most chamber manufacturers specify a minimum and maximum cover depth based on traffic loading. Confirm that the design satisfies the applicable load case before finalizing the stone cover value.
  • Match the void ratio to the stone gradation: The default 40% void space is typical for AASHTO #3 or #57 angular stone. Make sure to confirm with the geotechnical specification on your project, as some designs require a different value.
  • Plan for inspection ports and isolator rows: Many municipalities require inspection ports and at least one isolator row for sediment capture. These are typically detailed outside this dialog box, but should be accommodated in the boundary footprint.
  • Set the invert before placing chambers: The Stone base invert elevation drives the system's vertical position relative to the terrain surface. Establish the controlling invert (often the outlet pipe invert) before generating the layout.
  • Use the Edit Layout tools sparingly: The auto-generated layout is usually close to optimal. Use manual edits to handle utility conflicts, easements, or locally required offsets, then re-run [Calc] to refresh the volume summary.
  • Document with the chamber report: Generate the Underground Storage Chamber Report as part of the project deliverables. It gives reviewers a clean record of chamber selection, layout, and computed storage volume.
unknown node

Conclusion

Underground storage chamber systems provide an efficient way to manage stormwater where surface space is limited. By combining the storage volume inside the chambers with the void space in the surrounding stone, these systems can deliver reliable detention, retention, or infiltration capacity while keeping the land above available for other uses. When properly selected, laid out, and checked against site conditions, these systems can be a practical and effective part of modern stormwater design.

Storage Areas & Detention › Seepage and Infiltration Loss

Storage Unit Seepage and Infiltration Loss

Storage units are commonly used to temporarily store stormwater and reduce downstream flooding. When modeling the stormwater system, it is important to account for seepage and infiltration losses from the storage units, especially if the base or sides are in contact with permeable soil.

Seepage and infiltration losses refer to the volume of water that exits a storage unit and infiltrates into the surrounding soil through the basin floor or sides. Accurately modeling these losses is critical for detention ponds, lakes, reservoirs, infiltration trenches, and other storage units with permeable boundaries.

This article describes how GeoSTORM calculates seepage (or infiltration loss) within storage units.

Defining Infiltration Loss Parameters

In GeoSTORM, the user can define the infiltration loss parameters using the Storage Area Seepage data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Storage Area Data dialog box.

the Storage Area Seepage data panel - Storage Area Data dialog box

The following parameters are provided in the Storage Area Seepage data panel:

  • Suction head
    This entry field defines the average value of soil capillary suction along the wetting front. This parameter reflects the capillary action and attraction of soil pores for water. A higher value indicates that the soil can draw water into the ground more strongly as the soil becomes wet.
  • Hydraulic conductivity
    This entry field defines the hydraulic conductivity of the underlying soil. This is the base infiltration rate of the soil, which represents how quickly water can move downward through fully wetted soil.
  • Initial deficit
    This entry field defines the initial deficit of the underlying soil. This parameter represents the degree to which the soil is unsaturated at the start. A soil with a higher initial deficit can initially accept water more readily until the pores begin to fill.

Infiltration Loss Calculation

Infiltration loss is calculated based on the relationship between water depth and surface area defined by the storage curve. This method estimates both bottom and side infiltration losses without requiring manual input for the shape or perimeter of the storage unit.

The following points describe how the software calculates infiltration loss:

  • Storage Curves and Area-Depth Data
    The storage curve defines how the surface area changes with depth using depth-area pairs. The depth-area data can be specified in the Storage Area Volume data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base for more information on how to define depth-area data to be used in infiltration loss calculation.
    Storage Area Volume data panel - Storage Area Data dialog box
  • Bottom and Side Contact Areas
    Infiltration occurs through the bottom and submerged side surfaces of the storage unit. GeoSTORM does not require a direct input for side slope, perimeter, or shape. Instead, the software estimates the side contact area from how the cross-sectional area changes with depth.
    1. Bottom Area: The surface area at a given depth represents the base over which infiltration can occur.
    2. Side Area (Inferred): As water depth increases, the software estimates the side contact area by analyzing how surface area changes with depth. If the area increases a lot with a slight increase in depth, it means the storage unit gets wider quickly, leading to more side contact. On the other hand, if the area does not change much with depth, it means the storage unit has more vertical sides or a narrow shape.
  • Internal Computation of Side Areas
    GeoSTORM automatically calculates side contact areas based on the area-depth relationship. By comparing surface areas at successive depths, it approximates the wetted perimeter. This perimeter is multiplied by a depth increment to estimate side areas. Summing up these side areas from the bottom to the top of the water level results in the total wetted contact area for infiltration.
  • No Need to Manually Define Shape or Perimeter
    The user does not need to enter the storage unit’s perimeter or side slopes manually. Instead, the software automatically defines the shape based on the area-depth pairs. For example:
    1. If the surface area increases linearly with depth, it suggests consistent side slopes.
    2. If the surface area remains nearly constant, it indicates steep or vertical sidewalls.
  • Impact on Infiltration Calculation
    Once the software calculates the total wetted contact area (including the bottom and estimated side area), it applies the defined suction head, hydraulic conductivity, and initial moisture deficit to compute the infiltration loss rate.

    Note: If either the suction head or initial deficit is set to zero, the software assumes a constant infiltration rate equal to the hydraulic conductivity, regardless of water depth.
Cross Sections & Channels › Cross Section Drawing

Automated Draw Cross Sections Command (GeoSTORM)

In GeoSTORM software, the Automated Draw Cross Sections command allows the user to automatically generate cross sections along a routing reach.

Follow the steps below to use the Automated Draw Cross Sections command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Automated Draw Cross Sections command.
    Automated Draw Cross Sections Command
  2. The Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed.
    Automated Draw Cross Sections Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Automated Draw Cross Sections command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reach Polyline

The Select Reach Polyline section is used to select the reach polyline(s) on the Map View that will be used to automatically draw cross sections.

Select Reach Polyline Section

To select reach polyline(s), click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar of the Map View instructing the user to select the reach polyline(s).

After selecting the reach polylines, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected reach polyline(s) will be shown in the Reach Polyline read-only field.

Reach Polyline Read-only Field

Note that if reach polylines are preselected on the Map View, the same number of selected polylines will be displayed in the Reach Polyline read-only field.

Automated Draw Specifications

General Settings

The General Settings panel is used to define the general settings for the cross sections to be created.

General Settings Panel

The following subsections are available in this panel:

Cross Section River Stationing

This subsection is used to control the numbering of the cross section river reach stations. The cross section river reach stations need to be unique per river reach and their value must increase as they move up the river reach.

The following option is provided in this sub-section:

  • Numbering Direction: This dropdown combo box defines the direction in which the cross section IDs should increase. The following options are provided:
    1. Downstream
    2. Upstream
Use Reach Distance

This subpanel is used to number the cross sections by using the river chainage along the river reach. The following options are provided:

  • Distance Units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of the reach length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal Precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision to be used in determining the cross section IDs. By default, this checkbox is disabled (i.e., grayed out). If enabled, then the user can enter any value ranging from 0 to 6.

Cross Section Placement

This subsection is used to define the placement of cross sections along the selected river reach polylines.

Cross Section Placement Subsection

The following options are available in this section:

  • Approximate (max) cross section spacing: This entry field allows the user to define the maximum distance between cross sections when placing them. The software will attempt to uniformly space the cross sections along each reach, up to this approximate (max) spacing. This prevents the last cross sections created along a reach from being spaced too close together. By default, the software uses a value of 500 feet (when working in US units) or 150 meters (when working in metric SI units). Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the approximate (max) cross section spacing from the Map View.
  • Cross section width: This entry field allows the user to define the cross section width to be used when extracting cross section geometry from the terrain data. However, the defined cross section width is a starting point. Additional criteria are provided to control how much data is to be extracted when the user extracts the ground geometry from the terrain. By default, the software uses a value of 500 feet (when working in US units) or 150 meters (when working in metric SI units). Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the cross section width from the Map View.
  • Offset from downstream reach end: This entry field is used to define the distance from a downstream reach end where cross sections should be located. This prevents a cross section from being placed directly at a river reach. By default, the software uses a value of 500 feet (when working in US units) or 150 meters (when working in metric SI units). Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the offset from the river reach end from the Map View.

    Note that if the Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Offset from downstream reach end entry field will be changed to Offset from upstream reach end.

    Offset from downstream reach end entry field

Extraction Data

This panel is used to define the data extraction specifications based on the options selected for the cross sections.

Extraction Data Panel

The following subsections are available in this panel:

Extract Elevation Data

This subsection defines the source for terrain elevation used to extract cross section geometry. Depending upon the terrain elevation source selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Extract Elevation Data Subsection

The following options are available in the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN Surface
CAD Drawing

If the user selects CAD Drawing as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data section changes, as shown below.

CAD Drawing

The following options are displayed when CAD Drawing is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • CAD drawing layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the CAD drawing layer available in the project.
  • Drawing layers: Clicking the [Define] button adjacent to the Drawing layers entry displays the CAD Drawing Layers dialog box allowing the user to define the properties of the drawing layers, as shown below.
    CAD Drawing Layers Dialog Box
Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data section changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid

The following option is displayed when the Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.
GIS Contours

If the user selects GIS Contours as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data section changes, as shown below.

GIS Contours

The following options are displayed when GIS Contours is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • GIS polyline layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polyline layer type.
  • Elevation attribute: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute type.
LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data section changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data

The following options are displayed when the LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.
Terrain Surface

If the user selects Terrain Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data section changes, as shown below.

Terrain Surface

The following option is displayed when the Terrain Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Terrain surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the terrain surface layer type.
TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data section changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Note: Unchecking the Extract Elevation Data checkbox option disables (i.e., grays out) all the options under the Extraction Data panel.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

The user needs to check the Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control checkbox to enable the content of this subsection. This subsection allows the user to control the amount of cross section geometry to extract for the drawn/assigned cross section polyline. This ensures that an adequately deep enough cross section is created on both sides of the river reach. The software will try to compute the cross-section geometry data up to the specified depth and within the maximum width defined in this subsection.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control Subsection

If the selected polyline does not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the constructed cross section further outward. Similarly, if the selected polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the constructed cross section.

Alignment Settings

This panel is primarily used to perform automated cross section creation along sinuous (meandering) river reaches and is not used for other conditions. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). To enable, check the Generalize Cross Section Alignment checkbox option.

Alignment Settings Panel

Generalize Cross Section Alignment

This subsection allows the user to control the river reach and cross section alignment smoothing and generalization. If this checkbox option is checked, the following options will be enabled:

  • River valley alignment polyline control pt spacing
    This entry field allows the user to enter the distance for smoothing river reach. Clicking the […] button allows the user to measure the distance between spline control points from the Map View for smoothing river reach.
  • Draw generalized river valley alignment polyline
    This checkbox option is used to draw the computed generalized river reach alignment polyline.
  • Orthogonal channel alignment between banks
    This checkbox option is used to make the cross section orthogonal between the channel bank stations and generalized in the floodplain. Note that the bank station definition is required to perform an orthogonal channel alignment between bank stations.

Roughness

This panel allows the user to adjust the Manning’s roughness values for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas during the construction of cross sections.

Roughness Panel

During the construction of cross sections, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. Clicking the […] lookup buttons adjacent to these Manning’s roughness entry fields displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box that allows the user to select Manning’s roughness coefficients, as shown below.

Manning’s Roughness Lookup Dialog Box

Generating Cross Section

When all the options have been properly defined in the Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box, click the [Generate] button. The software will automatically generate the cross sections along a river reach.

Cross Sections & Channels › Cross Section Drawing

Draw and Assign Cross Sections Command (GeoSTORM)

Cross sections are located at intervals along a stream to characterize the flow-carrying capability of the stream and the adjacent floodplain. The cross sections should extend across the entire floodplain, should be perpendicular to the anticipated flow lines, and must not intersect with each other. Sometimes it is necessary to layout cross sections in a curved or dog-leg alignment to meet these requirements.

In GeoSTORM, cross sections can be defined by either drawing or assigning polylines on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Cross Sections
  • Assign Cross Sections

Drawing/Assigning Cross Sections

The Draw/Assign Cross Sections command allows the user to manually draw or assign polylines on the Map View as cross sections.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Cross Sections command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Draw Cross Sections or Assign Cross Sections command.Draw/Assign Cross Sections command
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed:
    • Draw Cross Sections:
      Draw Cross Sections dialog box
    • Assign Cross Sections:
      Assign Cross Sections dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw Cross Sections and Assign Cross Sections commands and interact with the above dialog boxes.

Drawing Cross Sections

In the Draw Cross Sections dialog box, the Draw Cross Section Polylines section allows the user to draw single or multiple polylines on the Map View as cross sections.

Follow the steps below to draw cross sections:

  1. Click the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. If the Draw curvilinear polyline checkbox option is checked, then the curvilinear polyline segments can be drawn on the Map View.
    [Draw] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw cross section polyline(s).
  3. After drawing cross section polyline(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Draw Cross Section dialog will be redisplayed, and the polyline(s) will be drawn as cross section(s) on the Map View.

Assigning Cross Sections

In the Assign Cross Sections dialog box, the Select Cross Section Polylines section allows the user to manually assign single or multiple polylines on the Map View as cross sections.

Follow the steps below to assign cross sections:

  1. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to select single or multiple polylines.
  3. After selecting the polyline(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Assign Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected polylines will be assigned as cross sections on the Map View. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Other Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw Cross Sections and Assign Cross Sections dialog boxes. The following panels are available in this section:

  • Extraction Data
  • Other Data
  • Roughness
Other Specifications section

Extraction Data

This panel allows the user to define the data extraction specifications for the selected cross sections.

Extraction Data panel

Note: The Extract Elevation Data checkbox option needs to be checked to enable the content of the Extract Elevation Data and Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control subsections.

Extract Elevation Data

This subsection defines the Terrain elevation source used to extract cross section geometry. Depending upon the terrain elevation source selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box

The following options are available in the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN Surface
CAD Drawing

If the user selects CAD Drawing as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

CAD Drawing as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when CAD Drawing is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • CAD drawing layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the CAD drawing layer available in the project.
  • Drawing layers: Clicking the [Define] button adjacent to the Drawing layers entry displays the CAD Drawing Layers dialog box, allowing the user to define the properties of the drawing layers, as shown below.
    the CAD Drawing Layers dialog box
Elevation Grid

If the user selects Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

Elevation Grid as the terrain elevation source

The following option is displayed when the Elevation Grid is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Elevation grid layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation grid layer available in the project.
GIS Contours

If the user selects GIS Contours as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

GIS Contours as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when GIS Contours is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • GIS polyline layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polyline layer type.
  • Elevation attribute: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute type.
LandXML Data

If the user selects LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

LandXML Data as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the LandXML Data is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.
Terrain Surface

If the user selects Terrain Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

Terrain Surface as the terrain elevation source

The following option is displayed when the Terrain Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • Terrain surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the terrain surface layer type.
TIN Surface

If the user selects TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source, the content of the Extract Elevation Data subsection changes, as shown below.

TIN Surface as the terrain elevation source

The following options are displayed when the TIN Surface is selected as the terrain elevation source:

  • TIN surface layer: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface layer type.
  • TIN surface: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TIN surface type.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This subsection allows the user to control the amount of cross section geometry to extract for the assigned/drawn cross section polyline. This assures that an adequately deep enough cross section is created on both sides of the river reach. The software will try to compute the cross-section geometry data up to the specified depth and within the maximum width defined in this subsection.

If the selected polyline does not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the constructed cross section further outward. Similarly, if the selected polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the constructed cross section.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control subsection

Other Data

This panel allows the user to assign bank stations for the cross sections using channel width, channel depth, or bank polylines/polygons. The Assign Bank Stations checkbox needs to be checked to enable the content of the Other Data panel.

Other Data panel

Assign Bank Stations

This subsection is used to construct channel bank locations based upon the selected option.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Define by channel width
    This radio button option is used to assign the bank stations using a defined channel width. The software first identifies the thalweg location on the cross section, then extends outward from the thalweg symmetrically until the desired channel width is achieved. Clicking the […] button allows the user to measure the channel width from the Map View.
  • Define by channel depth
    This radio button option is used to assign the bank stations using an assumed normal flow depth and a maximum channel width search distance. The software first identifies the thalweg location on the cross section, then extends outward from the thalweg until the desired channel depth is reached while staying within the specified maximum channel width. Clicking the […] button allows the user to measure the maximum channel width from the Map View.
  • Define by bank polylines/polygons
    This radio button option is used to assign the bank stations using selected polylines or polygons. Using the corresponding [Pick] buttons, the user can interactively select individual polylines or polygons on the Map View to be associated as bank stations. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process. The software will first identify the thalweg location on the cross section, then extend outward from the thalweg until it reaches a previously selected bank polyline or polygon edge.

Roughness

During the extraction of the cross section geometry, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. However, the user can adjust these values in the Manning’s Roughness subsection of this panel.

Roughness panel

Note that clicking the […] lookup button displays the Manning’s Roughness dialog box. This dialog box provides a reference to Manning’s roughness coefficients for some commonly used surface materials.

Manning’s Roughness dialog box
Cross Sections & Channels › Cross Section Editing & Import

Import Cross Section Geometry Command (GeoSTORM)

In GeoSTORM, the Import Cross Section Geometry command is used to import surveyed cross section geometry from a wide variety of file formats. The software will automatically determine where the next cross section starts within the selected file based upon either blank lines contained within the file or a sudden change in direction from one geometry point to the next.

Follow the steps below to use the Import Cross Section Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Import Cross Section Geometry command.
    Import Cross Section Geometry command
  2. The Import Cross Section Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Import Cross Section Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Import Cross Section Geometry command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Section File

The Select Cross Section File section allows the user to select the survey point cross section file. The file must be in ASCII text format, with either commas, tabs, or spaces delimiting the data fields within each row of the file.

Select Cross Section File section

The first row within the file that contains 3 floating point numbers is used to start the import cross section process. Whenever a blank line is encountered within the data file or the direction between three adjacent points changes too much, the software interprets this as the start of a new cross section.

The Point file format dropdown combo box is used to select the file format into which the survey points data will be imported. The following survey point file formats are supported:

  • ENZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • ENZD (Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • LLZ (Lat-Long, Elevation)
  • LLZD (Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • NEZ (Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • NEZD (Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PENZ (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • PENZD (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • PLLZD (Point, Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • PNEZ (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • PNEZD (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PNT (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)
  • PTS (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)
Point file format dropdown combo box

The software will attempt to determine the file format based on the file extension. However, the user can change the file format to be used after the file is selected.

For reference, Easting = X coordinate and Northing = Y coordinate.

Note: The cross section points must overlay only one river reach for this command to operate. In addition, cross sections should not already exist for the river reach that is being used to construct cross sections from the imported points.

Point File Preview

This section shows the first 100 lines contained within the survey point file. It allows the user to view the contents of the survey point file and to change the file format to be used for importing based on a preview of the contents. After changing the file format, the column headings in the Point File Preview section are updated accordingly. For example, changing the file format from ENZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation) to PENZD (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description) displays the additional column header(s) in the table as shown below.

Point File Preview section

Elevation Data Adjustment

This section allows the user to adjust the survey point data elevation values if the elevation data are in a different unit system or needs to have a datum adjustment.

Elevation Data Adjustment section

The user can select one of the following options to modify the elevation values:

  • No change
    This is the default option. This radio button option will not make any changes to the elevation values.
  • Convert feet to meters
    This radio button option converts the elevation values from feet to meters. After selecting this option, click the [Apply] button. The software will then update the converted values in the Elevation column of the Point File Preview table.
    Elevation Data Adjustment section
  • Datum adjustment
    This radio button option allows the user to add a constant value to the existing elevation values. After selecting this option, the entry field adjacent to this option is enabled, allowing the user to enter the constant value. After entering the value, click the [Apply] button. The software will then update the values in the Elevation column of the Point File Preview table. The new elevation values are the sum of the original value and a constant value provided by the user.
    Datum adjustment radio button option

Cross Section Naming Specifications

This section is used to specify the cross section ID for each of the constructed cross sections.

Cross Section Naming Specifications section

The following naming formats are available in this section:

  • Use corresponding reach numerical ID portion: This option extracts the numerical ID from the corresponding reach ID and applies it to the cross section ID. Selecting this option will disable (i.e., grayed out) the following options:
    1. Cross section ID digits
    2. Next available cross section ID
    3. Cross section ID increment
  • Cross section ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the cross section ID.
  • Cross section ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the cross section ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the cross section ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available cross section ID: This option identifies the next cross section ID number to be used.
  • Cross section ID increment: This option identifies the increment to use when numbering cross sections. The default value is 1.
  • Cross section ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the cross section ID.
  • Cross section ID preview: This read-only field provides a preview of the cross section naming specifications defined above.

Assign Bank Stations

This section is used to construct channel bank locations based upon an assumed normal flow depth and a maximum channel width search distance. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on a cross section by assuming the lowest elevation is the thalweg. It will then move outward from the thalweg until the requested channel depth is reached within the maximum channel width specified. Note: The contents of the Assign Bank Stations section will only be enabled if the checkbox at this section header is checked.

Assign Bank Stations section

Assignment of Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the construction of the cross sections, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. In addition, the cross section flow lengths are automatically determined.

Once all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then construct cross sections based upon the imported geometry data.

Cross Sections & Channels › Hydraulic Jump

Hydraulic Jump

A hydraulic jump is a phenomenon in open channel flow where high-velocity (supercritical) water transitions abruptly into slower-moving (subcritical) flow. This results in a sudden rise in water surface elevation and forms turbulent waves, dissipating energy.

Hydraulic Jump


Understanding Open Channel Flow Regimes

In open channel hydraulics, flow conditions are typically categorized based on the Froude number (Fr). The Froude number is a dimensionless number that represents the ratio of inertial forces to gravitational forces in a fluid flow.

Froude number

Where:

V = Flow velocity

g = Acceleration due to gravity

y = Hydraulic depth

The flow conditions are classified as:

  • Supercritical (>1): Fast and shallow
  • Subcritical (>1): Slow and deep
  • Critical (=1): Transition point between flow states

Types of Hydraulic Jumps

Based on the Froude number, hydraulic jumps are classified into the following types:

  • Undular jump
  • Weak jump
  • Oscillating jump
  • Steady jump
  • Strong jump
unknown node

Undular Hydraulic Jump

Undular hydraulic jumps are characterized by the presence of smooth, oscillatory waves propagating downstream. The rise in water surface elevation during undular jumps occurs gradually.

Weak Hydraulic Jump

Weak hydraulic jumps are characterized by a lesser increase in water surface elevation and reduced turbulence in the flow downstream. It represents a milder form of the steady hydraulic jump.

Oscillating Hydraulic Jump

Oscillating hydraulic jumps are characterized by regular fluctuations in water surface elevation and flow characteristics, alternating between supercritical and subcritical flows in a cyclic manner.

Steady Hydraulic Jump

Steady hydraulic jumps are characterized by an abrupt increase in water surface elevation, turbulent waves, and substantial energy dissipation. It is a prevalent and well-recognized type of hydraulic jump.

Strong Hydraulic Jump

Strong hydraulic jumps are characterized by a higher increase in the water surface elevation and a more turbulent flow downstream compared to steady hydraulic jumps.

Engineering Implications of Hydraulic Jump

While a hydraulic jump is a flow phenomenon, its effects can be utilized in civil engineering design and stormwater management:

  • Energy Dissipation: Hydraulic jumps are mainly used to dissipate excess energy from high-velocity flows. They reduce flow velocity, prevent soil erosion, and protect hydraulic structures, such as spillways, weirs, and energy dissipators.
  • Flood Management: Hydraulic jumps play a crucial role in regulating the flow of water in rivers, channels, and flood control structures. By dissipating energy and reducing flow velocities, they help prevent excessive erosion and minimize the risk of flooding downstream.
  • Fish Passage Design: Hydraulic jumps are considered when designing fish passages and fishways, allowing fish to navigate barriers such as dams and river obstructions. The energy dissipation caused by them provides favorable flow conditions, enabling fish to pass safely without experiencing major stress or injury.

Hydraulic Jump in GeoSTORM

In GeoSTORM, the user can visualize hydraulic jumps that occur within a pipe in stormwater drainage systems. If a hydraulic jump occurs, the user can view it in the software using the Profile Plot command.

Hydraulic Jump in GeoSTORM

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Profile Plot command.

Hydrology & Precipitation › Rain Gages

Rain Gage Data Command (GeoSTORM)

Rain gages supply rainfall data for one or more subbasins in the study area. The rainfall data can either be user-defined or described in an external file. Rain gages are part of the project and can be shared by multiple basins or meteorologic models.

The user can define the rain gage time series data using the Rain Gage Data command. The defined rain gage time series data can later be used for each subbasin in the stormwater analysis.

Follow the steps below to use the Rain Gage Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Rain Gage Data command.
    Rain Gage Data Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Rain Gage Data dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Rain Gage Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Rain Gage Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Rain Gages

The Select Rain Gage section allows the user to select the rain gage for which rain gage data will be defined. In this section, the user can create, delete, or copy existing rain gage data to a new rain gage. In addition, the user can navigate between rain gages and enter a description for each rain gage.

Select Rain Gage section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Rain gage ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the rain gages that are defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., pencil icon) to edit the rain gage ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next rain gage using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains a single rain gage.
  • Description
    This optional text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected rain gage.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new rain gage on the Map View. The ID of every newly created rain gage must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy an existing rain gage along with its associated data to a new rain gage. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied rain gage.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected rain gage from the current scenario.

Rain Gage Specifications

Rain Gage Specifications section

Rain Gage Location

This section allows the user to provide a precise description of the rain gage’s location. The location is specified for each gage in latitude and longitude. The latitude and longitude can be entered in decimal degrees in the Latitude and Longitude fields, respectively. Upon entering the latitude and longitude, the software will provide the location's physical address in the Location read-only field. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the location from the Map View. The software will then display the physical address, longitude, and latitude values for the selected location in the respective fields. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Rain Gage Location section

DSS Data

This section allows the user to select a DSS data file to define the rain gage time series data. Select the radio button on the DSS Data section to enable the content of this section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Note that the DSS Data section is not available when EPA SWMM is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engines.

DSS Data section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • DSS file
    This entry denotes the file directory path to the DSS data file. Clicking on the [Select] button allows the user to select the directory path and data path using the DSS Data File & Path dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the DSS Data File & Path dialog box.
  • DSS path
    This entry denotes the data path within the DSS data file, which contains the rain gage data.

External Data File

This section allows the user to select an external data file to define the rain gage data. The Data file entry denotes the directory path and name of the external data file. Click the [Select] button to select the directory path and name of the external data file. Select the radio button on the External Data File section to enable the contents of this section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Note that the External Data File section is only available when EPA SWMM is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engine.

External Data File section

Time Series Data

This section allows the user to manually enter time series data for the selected element. Select the radio button on the Time-Series Data section to enable the contents of this section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Time Series Data section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Rainfall type
    This dropdown combo box is used to define the type of data that is to be entered. The following options are available:
    1. Cumulative (default)
    2. Incremental
    3. Intensity
    Rainfall type dropdown combo box


    Note that the Rainfall type dropdown combo box is only available when EPA SWMM is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engines.

  • Time increment
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the time increment that defines the time series data. The following table shows the options available in this dropdown combo box:

    Minutes

    Hours

    Days

    1 minute

    1 hour

    1 day

    2 minutes

    2 hours


    3 minutes

    3 hours


    4 minutes

    4 hours


    5 minutes

    6 hours


    6 minutes

    8 hours


    10 minutes

    12 hours


    15 minutes



    20 minutes



    30 minutes



  • Time window
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the type of time window data that is to be entered. The following options are available.
    1. From Control Data
    2. User-Defined (default)
  • Select control
    This dropdown combo box is used to define the control data set to use. This dropdown combo box is only enabled when From Control Data is selected as a time window. Otherwise, this dropdown combo box is disabled. If only one control data set is defined, then the software will automatically select that control data set. When a control data set is selected, the software will automatically populate the following fields:
    1. Start date & Start time
    2. End date & End time
  • Start date/Start time/End date/End time
    These fields define the time period for the element data. When From Control Data is selected as a time window, these fields become read-only fields, and the software will automatically fill-in the starting and ending dates and times. When User-Defined is selected as a time window, these fields allow manual entry of dates and times.
  • Time Series Table
    The Time column values automatically fill-in, based upon the selected Time Increment and Start/End dates & times. The user can manually enter data values into the Precipitation column fields.

Rainfall Time Series Plot

The section displays the Precipitation (in) vs Time plot of the selected rain gage data. If no time series data are available for the specified time window, the graph will not show any data.

Rainfall Time Series Plot section
Hydrology & Precipitation › Storm Data

Storm Data Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Storm Data command allows the user to define the precipitation/rainfall data based upon the selected hydrology method (or hydrology analysis engine). The following hydrology methods are supported in GeoSTORM:

  • Dekalb Rational Method
  • EPA SWMM
  • Modified Rational
  • Rational Method
  • SCS TR-20/TR-55

To choose the required hydrology method, select the Scenario Manager command from the Input ribbon menu. The Scenario Manager dialog box will be displayed.

Scenario Manager dialog box

Select the required hydrology method from the Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box.

Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box

After selecting the required hydrology method, follow the steps below to define precipitation data using the Storm Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Storm Data command.
    Storm Data command
  2. The Storm Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Storm Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Storm Data dialog box.

Selecting Storm

The Select Storm section of the dialog box allows the user to select the storm for which storm data will be defined. This section is common for all the hydrology methods. In this section, the user can create, delete, and copy existing storm data to a new storm. In addition, the user can navigate between storms and enter a description for each storm.

Select Storm section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Storm ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the storms defined in the current scenario of the project. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the storm ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next storms using the Up and Down arrow buttons.
  • Description
    This optional field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected storm.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new storm. The ID of every newly created storm must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy the currently selected storm along with its associated data to a new storm. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied storm.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the currently selected storm from the current scenario.

Defining Storm Data for Selected Hydrology Method

The content of the Storm Specifications section automatically updates based on the hydrology method selected for the current scenario of the project. The following sections describe how to define storm data for different hydrology methods.

EPA SWMM Hydrology Method

Selecting EPA SWMM as the hydrology method changes the content of the Storm Specifications section, as shown below.

Storm Specifications section - EPA SWMM hydrology method

General Specifications

In this subsection, the Precipitation type dropdown combo box entry contains the following precipitation types:

  • Rainfall Distribution
  • Rain Gage
    Precipitation type dropdown combo box

Note: Changing precipitation type changes the sections and their corresponding content.

Precipitation Type - Rainfall Distribution

The Rainfall Distribution precipitation type is a region-based temporal rainfall distribution of different areas. When Rainfall Distribution is selected as the precipitation type, the content of the Storm Specifications section changes, as shown below. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how the rainfall distribution data is defined for the storm data.

Precipitation Type - Rainfall Distribution

Precipitation Type - Rain Gage

The Rain Gage precipitation type is designed to work with time series recording and single-value recording precipitation gages. When Rain Gage is selected as the precipitation type, the content of the Storm Specifications section changes, as shown below.

Precipitation Type - Rain Gage
Rain Gage Assignment

The following input parameters are available in this subsection:

  • All subbasins same rain gage
    This radio button dropdown combo box option allows the user to assign the same rain gage ID to all the subbasins present within the model.
  • Individual subbasin rain gage
    This radio button allows the user to specifically assign the rain gage ID for all the individual subbasins present within the model.

Modified Rational Hydrology Method

Selecting Modified Rational as the hydrology method changes the contents of the Storm Specifications section, as shown below.

Storm Specifications section - Modified Rational hydrology method

Modified Rational General Specifications

Modified Rational General Specifications section

This subsection contains the following options:

  • IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type
    This dropdown combo box entry defines how the IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data are defined.
    IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box
    The following dropdown entries are provided:

    IDF Type

    Description

    IDF Data Table

    Rainfall intensity data (I, inches, or mm) are defined by a table of storm durations (D, in minutes) versus return periods (F, in years). This is the most commonly used option.

    BDE Coefficients Table

    Rainfall intensity data (inches or mm) are defined by a table of B-D-E coefficients versus return periods (in years) using the FWHA intensity equation.

    Polynomial Coefficients Table

    Rainfall intensity data (inches or mm) are defined by a table of third-degree polynomial coefficients A, B, C, and D versus return periods (in years).

  • IDF interpolation method
    This dropdown combo box entry defines the IDF interpolation method to be used by the software to interpolate between IDF intensity values and determine the storm intensity of any intermediate duration. Note that this dropdown combo box entry will only be enabled if IDF Data Table is selected from the IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box.IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box - IDF Data Table


    The following dropdown entries are provided:

    • Curve Fit: Selecting this method will cause the software to use a curve fit interpolation approach between the IDF intensity values to determine the storm intensity of any intermediate duration.
    • Linear Interpolation: Selecting this method will cause the software to use a linear interpolation approach between the IDF intensity values and determine the storm intensity of any intermediate duration.
  • Rainfall intensity computation method
    This dropdown combo box entry defines the computation method to be used for determining the rainfall intensity, which will be further used to determine the peak flow.
    Rainfall intensity computation method dropdown combo box
    The following dropdown entries are provided:
    • Storm Duration: Selecting this method will cause the software to use the value defined in the Storm Duration entry to determine the rainfall intensity.
    • TOC: Selecting this method will cause the software to use the time of concentration of each subbasin to determine rainfall intensity.
  • Ascending limb scale factor
    This entry stretches (or shortens) the ascending limb of the computed triangular Rational Method and Modified Rational hydrograph.
  • Receding limb scale factor
    This entry stretches (or shortens) the receding limb of the computed Rational Method triangular hydrograph.
  • Storm duration
    This entry field specifies the Modified Rational storm duration. This value is required and is generally at least two times the maximum time of concentration (TOC) determined for the contributing subbasins.

Precipitation Frequency Estimate Retrieval

This subsection allows the user to define the storm data retrieval location. Note that this subsection is enabled only if the user has selected the IDF Data Table in the IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box entry. Otherwise, the contents of this subsection will be displayed as disabled.

Precipitation Frequency Estimate Retrieval subsection

This subsection contains the following options:

  • Centered on current view extents
    This radio button option enables the software to pick the center of the current view extent of the Map View.
  • Centered on subbasins
    This radio button option enables the software to calculate and pick the center of the current subbasins present on the Map View.
  • Site location
    Selecting this radio button option enables the [Pick] button. Further clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select the location on the Map View for which precipitation data are to be retrieved. After selecting the site location, the Latitude and Longitude are automatically filled in the corresponding entry fields, as shown below. Clicking the [Clear] button clears the selected site location.
    Site location Selecting radio button option
    Note: The coordinate values entered have the same coordinate reference system (CRS) as the project.
  • Precipitation data source
    This dropdown combo box lists the precipitation data sources that are available for the selected location.

Storm Frequency Data

This subsection allows the user to define storm frequency data. The following panels are available in this subsection:

Analyze Storms

This panel allows the user to define storm frequencies that should be analyzed for the current scenario.

Storm-Data-Command-Image-17.png

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Storm Frequency
    In the Select Storms to Analyze subsection, the data table contains different storm frequency dropdown entries that are analyzed. When the user selects a specific storm frequency, then the same storm frequency will not be available for other dropdown entries. In that way, the user only sees those storm frequencies that have not yet been selected.For example, if the user selects “1 Year” and “2 Year” as storm frequencies, they will not be available for all other remaining dropdown entries.
    Storm Frequency Data Table
  • Retrieve IDF Data
    If a cloud data source (i.e., Canada, Germany, NOAA Atlas 14, NRCC PFDS, etc.) is selected in the Precipitation data source dropdown entry, then clicking on the [Retrieve IDF Data] button will retrieve and populate the IDF data into the IDF Data panel.
    [Retrieve IDF Data] button
    In addition, the corresponding IDF curves in the IDF Precipitation Plot panel will be displayed.
    IDF Precipitation Plot panel
    Notes:
    The [Retrieve IDF Data] button is only enabled if:
    • The user has selected the IDF Data Table in the IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box entry.
    • The User-Defined option is not selected in the Precipitation data source entry.
  • Import IDF Data
    Clicking the [Import IDF Data] button displays the Import IDF Data dialog box, which allows the user to import IDF data from an external ASCII text file in different formats (e.g., *.idf, *.txt, *.hci, *.csv, and *.asc). The user can select the file to be imported and click the [Open] button to import IDF data.
    [Import IDF Data] button
  • Export IDF Data
    Clicking the [Export IDF Data] button displays the Export IDF Data dialog box, which allows the user to export the data locally for use on subsequent projects. The user can add the file name and click on the [Save] button to export IDF data.
    Export IDF Data dialog box
  • Storm Frequencies
    Clicking the [Storm Frequencies] button displays the Storm Frequencies dialog box.
    Storm Frequencies dialog box
    The user can manage custom storm frequencies using this dialog box. Clicking the [Add] button adds a custom storm frequency entry at the bottom of the Storm Frequency column. The added custom frequency entry will be displayed as a dropdown combo box entry in the data table under the Select Storms to Analyze subsection.
    Storm Frequency column
    Note: The user needs to check the checkbox(s) corresponding to the storm frequencies under the Utilize? column to display them as a dropdown combo box entry in the data table under the Select Storms to Analyze subsection.

    Click the [Delete] button to remove the selected storm frequency. Note that the user can only delete the custom storm frequencies.

IDF Precipitation Plot

This panel allows the user to plot the IDF curves for the defined/retrieved rainfall intensity data.

IDF Precipitation Plot panel
IDF Data

This panel allows the user to store the retrieved (or user-defined) rainfall intensity data in a data grid.

IDF Data panel

Note: This panel is only displayed if the user has selected the IDF Data Table in the IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box entry. Otherwise, this panel is hidden.

BDE Coeff Data

This panel allows the user to store the user-defined B-D-E coefficients in a data grid for computing the rainfall intensity data using the FHWA intensity equation.

BDE Coeff Data panel

Note: This panel is only displayed if the user has selected the BDE Coefficients Table in the IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box entry. Otherwise, this panel is hidden.

Poly Coeff Data

This panel allows the user to store the user-defined third-order polynomial coefficients in a data grid for computing the rainfall intensity data using the polynomial equation.

Poly Coeff Data table

Note: This panel is only displayed if the user has selected the Polynomial Coefficients Table in the IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box entry. Otherwise, this panel is hidden.

Storm Frequency Factor

This panel allows the user to store the storm frequency factor (sometimes called a frequency coefficient, frequency correction factor, or climate change factor) data. This data provides an optional calculation adjustment multiplier to increase the runoff coefficient C of the subbasins.

Storm Frequency Factor panel

Less frequent, higher-intensity storms require the use of higher runoff coefficients because infiltration and other losses have a proportionally smaller effect on runoff. Therefore, the adjustment for major storms when using the Modified Rational, Rational Method can be made by multiplying the runoff coefficient by the frequency factor.

Report Results

This panel allows the user to select the storm for which the results are to be displayed at the application level. The user can select the specific storm whose results are to be displayed using the Report results for storm dropdown combo box under the Select Storm to Report Results subsection.

Report results for storm dropdown combo box

Note: The Report results for storm dropdown combo box list only those entries that are displayed as a dropdown combo box entry in the data table under the Analyze Storms panel.

Rational Hydrology Method

Selecting Rational Method as the hydrology method changes the contents of the Storm Specifications section, as shown below.

Storm Specifications section - Rational Method hydrology method

Note: The Storm Data dialog box for the Rational Method hydrology method is nearly identical to the dialog box displayed for the Modified Rational hydrology method, except for the Storm duration entry, which is unavailable here.

SCS TR-20/TR-55 Hydrology Method

Selecting SCS TR-20/TR-55 as the hydrology method changes the contents of the Storm Specifications section, as shown below.

Storm Specifications section - SCS TR-20/TR-55 hydrology method

General Specifications

In this subsection, the Precipitation type dropdown combo box entry contains the following precipitation types:

  • None
  • HMR52 Storm
  • Rainfall Distribution
  • SCS Storm
    Precipitation type dropdown combo box

Note: Changing precipitation type changes the sections and their corresponding content.

Precipitation Type - None

When None is selected from the Precipitation type dropdown combo box entry, the entire content below this entry will become unavailable.

Storm-Data-Command-Image-34.png

Precipitation Type - HMR52 Storm

The HMR52 Storm precipitation type is used to compute the probable maximum precipitation (PMP) for a watershed. Concentric ellipses are used to construct the storm spatial pattern, where each ellipse represents an isohyet of precipitation depth. The storm is located over the watershed by specifying the center of the pattern and the angle of the major axis of the ellipses. Total precipitation depth is computed using a specified storm area and area-duration curves.

The total precipitation depth is converted to a temporal pattern based on the selected placement of the peak intensity within the storm duration. The HMR52 storm precipitation type includes several parameters to describe the location, orientation, and temporal distribution of the storm.

Precipitation Type - HMR52 Storm
HMR52 PMP Storm Specifications

This subsection allows the user to define the HMR52 PMP storm specifications data.

HMR52 PMP Storm Specifications subsection

The following options are available in this subsection:

  • Centered on current view extents
    This radio button option enables the software to pick the center of the current view extent of the Map View.
  • Centered on subbasins
    This radio button option enables the software to calculate and pick the center of the current subbasins present on the Map View.
  • Storm Center
    Selecting this radio button option enables the [Pick] button. Further clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select the storm center on the Map View. The Latitude and Longitude of the selected location get automatically filled after the selection of the storm center. The entered coordinate value will have the same coordinate reference system (CRS) as the project. Clicking the [Clear] button clears the selected storm location.
  • Storm preferred orientation & Storm actual orientation
    The preferred and actual storm orientation angles are measured in degrees, increasing clockwise from North. Clicking the [Retrieve] button retrieves the storm preferred orientation for the selected location, as shown below.
    Storm preferred orientation & Storm actual orientation
    Clicking the [View] button displays the HMR52 Storm Preferred Orientation dialog box to view the storm preferred orientation data, as shown below.
    HMR52 Storm Preferred Orientation dialog box
  • Peak Intensity
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to select the 6-hour peak intensity for the HMR52 storm. This peak intensity parameter specifies the period within the 72-hour storm when the precipitation will be the greatest. The 6 hours of peak intensity can be set to begin as early as hour 24 of the storm or as late as hour 60 of the storm. The depth of rain falling during the period of peak intensity is subdivided into 1-hour increments using the 1-hour to 6-hour depth ratio parameter.
  • 1-hour to 6-hour depth ratio
    This entry field displays the ratio of the 1-hour to 6-hour depth during the 6-hour peak intensity period. The depth of rain falling during the period of peak intensity is subdivided into 1-hour increments using this parameter.
  • Probable maximum storm area
    This field specifies the total storm area.
HMR51 Depth-Area-Duration PMP Estimates

The table under this subsection allows the user to enter the precipitation depths from the HMR51 PMP (Probable Maximum Precipitation) data corresponding to different storm sizes and storm durations.

HMR51 Depth-Area-Duration PMP Estimates subsection

Clicking the [Retrieve HMR51 PMP Data] button enables the software to interpolate the values for the HMR51 Depth-Area-Duration PMP Estimates table, as shown below.

HMR51 Depth-Area-Duration PMP Estimates table

Clicking the [View HMR51 PMP Data] button displays the HMR51 PMP Data dialog box that displays the graphical plots of the HMR51 PMP rainfall data, as shown below.

HMR51 PMP Data dialog box

Precipitation Type - Rainfall Distribution

When Rainfall Distribution is selected as the precipitation type, the contents of the Storm Specifications section changes, as shown below.

Storm Specifications section - EPA SWMM hydrology method

Note: This data panel is identical to the Rainfall Distribution data panel displayed for the EPA SWMM hydrology method.

Precipitation Type - SCS Storm

Drainage planning in the United States is often performed using hypothetical storms developed by the Soil Conservation Service (SCS), now known as the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS). These storms were developed by the SCS as averages of rainfall patterns; they are represented in a dimensionless form. The SCS designed this storm method for a small drainage area. This precipitation type is designed to estimate both peak flow rate and runoff volume from precipitation of a "critical" duration.

Precipitation Type - SCS Storm
Precipitation Frequency Estimate Retrieval

This subsection allows the user to select the location for which the storm data is to be retrieved.

Precipitation Frequency Estimate Retrieval subsection

Note: This subsection is nearly identical to the Precipitation Frequency Estimate Retrieval subsection for the Modified Rational hydrology method. However, the above section displayed for the SCS Storm precipitation type contains the following additional entries:

  • Storm recurrence interval
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select a storm recurrence interval.
  • Storm duration
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to define the duration of the storm.
  • Retrieve Data
    This button allows the user to retrieve the rainfall data for the selected precipitation data source. The [Retrieve Data] button is enabled when the user selects a site location. Otherwise, this button is displayed as disabled.
SCS Precipitation Data

This subsection allows the user to define the SCS precipitation data.

SCS Precipitation Data subsection

The following options are available in this subsection:

  • SCS storm distribution
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the SCS storm distribution. The following options are available within this dropdown combo box:
    • Area-Dependent
    • Type I
    • Type IA
    • Type II
    • Type III
      • SCS storm distribution
  • Rainfall Depth
    This entry field allows the user to define the rainfall depth from NOAA Atlas 14. Clicking the […] button displays the NOAA rainfall data web page for the current map location.

Note: This button is disabled for precipitation data sources other than NOAA Atlas 14.

DeKalb Rational Hydrology Method

Selecting Dekalb Rational as the hydrology method changes the contents of the Storm Specifications section, as shown below.

Storm Specifications section - Rational Method hydrology method

Note: The contents under the Storm Specifications section for the DeKalb Rational hydrology method is identical to the Rational Method hydrology method.

Hydrology & Precipitation › Rainfall Lookup

Lookup Rainfall Command (GeoSTORM)

In GeoSTORM, the Lookup Rainfall command retrieves rainfall (depth or intensity) data for any location within Austria, Canada, Germany, and the United States.

Follow the steps below to use the Lookup Rainfall command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Lookup Rainfall command.
    Lookup Rainfall command
  2. The Lookup Rainfall dialog box will be displayed.
    Lookup Rainfall dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Lookup Rainfall dialog box.

Location Selection

This section allows the user to select the location from which the rainfall data are to be retrieved.

Location Selection section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Centered on current view extents
    If this radio button option is selected, the software will pick the central location of the region displayed in the current Map View extents to retrieve rainfall data.
  • Centered on subbasins
    If this radio button option is selected, the software will pick the central location of the subbasin model defined in the current scenario. If no subbasins are defined, this option will be disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Select location
    This radio button option allows the user to pick the desired location from the Map View interactively by using the [Pick] button. The address of the selected location will be displayed in the read-only field next to this option. The latitude and longitude values for the selected location will be displayed in the Latitude & longitude fields. The user can click the [Clear] button to clear the defined location and redo the entire process.
    Select location radio button option

Note that if the user selects either the Centered on current view extents or the Centered on subbasins options, the software will display the information of the selected location after successfully retrieving the rainfall data.

Perform Rainfall Lookup

Once the project location for which the rainfall data are to be retrieved is selected, the user can select the precipitation data type and precipitation data sources available for the selected project location.

Perform Rainfall Lookup section

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Precipitation data type
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the precipitation data types to be used for retrieving rainfall data. The following entries are available:
    • Rainfall Depth
    • Rainfall Intensity
      Precipitation data type dropdown combo box entry

Note that the section header name changes based on the precipitation data type selected by the user.

Change in the section header name based on the precipitation data type
  • Precipitation data source
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the precipitation data sources available for the selected location.
    Precipitation data source dropdown combo box entry

    The following precipitation data sources are available:

    • Austria – Bundesministerium Wasserwirtschaft eHYD Data Service
    • Canada – Environment Canada & Ontario Ministry of Transportation
    • Canada – Ontario Ministry of Transportation
    • Germany – Deutscher Wetterdienst – Klima und Umwelt
    • USA – ISWS (Illinois) Bulletin 75 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NOAA Atlas 14 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NOAA Atlas 2 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NRCC (Northeast Regional Climate Center) PFDS
    • USA – SUDAS (Iowa) Bulletin 71 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server

    Note that the specific precipitation data source entry will be displayed based on the selected project location.

Retrieving Rainfall Data

Once the precipitation data source is selected, click the [Retrieve] button to retrieve the rainfall data for the selected location.

Retrieving Rainfall Data

Note that the coverage area shown below is current as of April 2023. However, this coverage area will continue to increase as more states are processed.

Rainfall Data - Coverage Area - April 2023

If the selected location is not within the coverage area available, the software will display the following informational dialog box.

Lookup Rainfall informational dialog box

After successfully retrieving the rainfall data, the software populates the data in the table provided under the Frequency (Years) subsection. This table displays the rainfall depth/intensity values for various storm durations for 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000-year storm events.

Rainfall depth/intensity values under the under the Frequency (Years) subsection

In addition, the user can right-click anywhere in the data table to display a context menu with commands for copying rainfall data to the Windows clipboard or exporting the data in different file formats.

Copying and exporting the rainfall data
Hydrology & Precipitation › Time Patterns / Time Series

Time Series Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Time Series command allows the user to define time series data for nodal inflow defined at manholes and junctions.

Follow the steps below to define time series data using the Time Series command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Time Series command.
    Time Series Command
  2. The Time Series Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Time Series Data Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to define time series data and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Time Series

This section allows the user to select the time series for which data will be defined. Users can create, delete, and copy existing time series data to a new time series. In addition, the user can navigate between different time series and enter a description for each time series.

Select Time Series Section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Time series ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the time series defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the time series ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next time series using the Up and Down arrow buttons.
  • Description
    This optional field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected time series.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new time series. The ID of every newly created time series must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy the currently selected time series along with its associated data to a new time series. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied time series.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the currently selected time series from the current scenario.

Time Series Specifications

This section allows the user to define the time series data by either selecting an external data file from the External Data File subsection or manually entering the data under the Time Series Data subsection.

Time Series Specifications Section

External Data File

This subsection allows the user to select an external data file to define the time series data. The user can click the [Select] button and browse the folder containing the time series data file. The path of the selected file will be displayed in the Data file entry field.

Note that this subsection is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the radio button in the Time Series Data subsection header is selected.

External Data File Subsection

Time Series Data

This subsection allows the user to manually enter the data to define a new time series.

Note that this subsection is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the radio button in the External Data File subsection header is selected.

Time Series Data Subsection

The following parameters are provided in this subsection:

  • Time increment
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the time increment that is used to define the time series data. The following options are available:

    In minutes

    1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 15, 20, 30

    In hours

    1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12

    In days

    1

  • Time window
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the type of time window data that is to be entered. The following options are available:
    • From Control Data
    • User Defined
  • Select control

    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the control data set defined using the Analysis Specifications command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Analysis Specifications command.

    If only one control data set is defined, then the software will automatically select the control data set. When a control data set is selected, the software will automatically populate the following fields:

    • Start date & Start time
    • End date & End time

Note that this dropdown combo box is only enabled when the From Control Data option is selected in the Time window dropdown combo box entry. Otherwise, this option is disabled.

  • Start date/Start time/End date/End time

    These fields define the time period for the time series data. From the Time window dropdown combo box entry, if:

    • From Control Data option is selected, then these fields become read-only. The software will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates and times. Note that the starting and ending dates and times will be populated based on the entries defined in the Simulation Time Window section of the Analysis Specifications dialog box.
    • User Defined option is selected, then these fields allow manual entry of dates and times.
  • Time Series Table
    The software automatically fills in the Time column values in the data table based upon the selected Time increment and Start/End dates & times. The user can manually enter the values into the Flow table column.

Time Series Plot

This section contains a graphical plot that displays the Time vs Flow plot for the defined time series data.

Time Series Plot
Hydrology & Precipitation › Time Patterns / Time Series

Time Patterns Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Time Patterns command allows the user to define time pattern data for nodal inflow defined at manholes and junctions.

Follow the steps below to define time pattern data using the Time Patterns command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Time Patterns command.
    Time Patterns Command
  2. The Time Patterns Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Time Patterns Data Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to define time patterns data and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Time Pattern

The Select Time Pattern section allows the user to select the time pattern for which time pattern data will be defined. In this section, the user can create, delete, and copy existing time pattern data to a new time pattern. In addition, the user can navigate between time patterns and enter a description for each time pattern.

Select Time Pattern Section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Time pattern ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the time patterns defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the time pattern ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next time patterns using the Up and Down arrow buttons.
  • Description
    This optional field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected time pattern.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new time pattern. The ID of every newly created time pattern must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy the currently selected time pattern along with its associated data to a new time pattern. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied time pattern.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the currently selected time pattern from the current scenario.

Time Pattern Specifications

This section allows the user to define the time pattern data and view a time pattern summary for the defined time pattern.

Time Pattern Specifications Section

Time Pattern Data

This subsection allows the user to define the time pattern data of the dry weather flow (typically sanitary flow) based on the defined time pattern type and unit multiplier value. The user can select a time pattern type from the Time pattern type dropdown combo box. The following entries are available:

Time Pattern Type Dropdown Combo Box
  • Daily: One multiplier for each day of the week.
  • Hourly: One multiplier for each hour from 12 midnight to 11 PM.
  • Monthly: One multiplier for each month of the year.
  • Weekend: Hourly multipliers for weekend days.

This subsection contains a table whose first column changes to time, days of the week, and months of the year based on the selected time pattern type. The second table column allows the user to enter the unit multiplier values corresponding to the fields of the first table column.

Time Pattern Data Table

Time Pattern Summary

This subsection displays the summarized data defined for the current time pattern.

Time Pattern Summary Subsection

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Minimum unit multiplier
    This read-only field displays the minimum unit multiplier value defined for the current time pattern.
  • Maximum unit multiplier
    This read-only field displays the maximum unit multiplier value defined for the current time pattern.
  • Unit multiplier total
    This read-only field displays the total of all the unit multipliers for the current time pattern.
  • Unit multiplier average
    This read-only field displays the average of all the unit multipliers for the current time pattern. Generally, this average value should be near 1.

Importing Time Pattern Data

The [Import Pattern] button is used to import the time pattern data from an external text file.

[Import Pattern] Button

Click the [Import Pattern] button and the Import Time Pattern dialog box will be displayed. Select the text file and click the [Open] button to import the time pattern data.

Import Time Pattern Dialog Box

Exporting Time Pattern Data

The [Export Pattern] button is used to export the time pattern data to an external text file.

[Export Pattern] Button

Click the [Export Pattern] button and the Export Time Pattern dialog box will be displayed. Browse to the directory location, enter the file name, and click the [Save] button to export the time pattern data.

Export Time Pattern Dialog Box

Time Pattern Plot

This section contains a graphical plot that displays the time pattern type versus the unit multiplier plot for the defined time pattern data. If the Unit Multiplier values are set to zero for the selected time pattern type, the plot will be displayed blank.

Time Pattern Plot
Hydrology & Precipitation › Computations (Hydrology)

Determining BDE Coefficients

When designing a stormwater drainage system, one of the first questions an engineer must answer is How much rain are we designing for? The answer comes from rainfall intensity — the rate at which rain falls during a storm event of a given duration and return period. BDE coefficients are one of the most widely used ways to express that relationship in a compact, computer-friendly form.

BDE coefficients are the three parameters (B, D, and E) used in the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) rainfall intensity equation. These coefficients are empirically derived from regional rainfall data and are typically provided for specific storm return periods, such as the 2-year, 10-year, 25-year, or 100-year storm event. When combined with the storm duration or time of concentration, the coefficients allow the software to compute the corresponding rainfall intensity.

BDE coefficients are important because rainfall intensity directly affects peak flow calculations in rational-based hydrology methods, such as the Rational, Modified Rational, and DeKalb Rational methods. The accuracy of pipe sizing, inlet capacity checks, and detention basin design depends directly on the rainfall intensity used in the calculations. Using the right BDE coefficients for the project’s region and design storm is a small step that has a big impact on the integrity of the final stormwater design.

In GeoSTORM, BDE coefficients are one of three available IDF data types for computing rainfall intensity. The other two are the IDF Data Table (used when working directly from published IDF curves) and the Polynomial Coefficient Table (used when working from polynomial-based rainfall relationships). These data types ensure compatibility with a wide range of local drainage criteria and rainfall data sources. To learn more about these data types, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

unknown node

FHWA Rainfall Intensity Equation

BDE coefficients are defined by the following mathematical relationship between rainfall intensity, storm duration, and return period. The equation is typically fit to Intensity-Duration-Frequency (IDF) curves for a specific region:

Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) intensity equation

Where:

I = Rainfall intensity

Tc = Storm duration or time of concentration

b, d, e = Regional coefficients

Once the BDE coefficients are defined, the software uses the rainfall intensity equation to generate the full rainfall intensity–duration relationship needed for hydrologic computations, ensuring accurate estimates of peak flow rates throughout the drainage network.

For example, the table below shows BDE coefficients published by the City of Houston, Texas. Notice how the BDE values change for each storm return period. The same equation form is used, but each return period has its own coefficient set, allowing the equation to represent different design storms such as the 2-year, 10-year, 25-year, and 100-year events.

unknown node

Source: https://houstonrecovers.org/wp-content/uploads/2018/06/IDM-CH-9-Show-changes.pdf

Procedure for Computing Rainfall Intensity Using BDE Coefficients

Follow the steps below to calculate rainfall intensity using the FHWA intensity equation:

  1. easeIdentifying BDE Coefficients
    Obtain BDE coefficients corresponding to the required storm event and project location from a local stormwater design manual or municipal ordinance. Each municipality may define different coefficients based on regional rainfall characteristics, so always use the values that have jurisdiction over the project site.
  2. Applying FHWA Intensity Equation
    Use the following FHWA intensity equation to compute rainfall intensity based on the time of concentration and the corresponding BDE coefficients:
    Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) intensity equation
  3. Computing Rainfall Intensity
    Substitute the time of concentration and BDE coefficients into the equation to compute the rainfall intensity. For example, for a 2-year storm event in the City of Houston, Texas, with the following coefficients:
    b = 75.01; d = 16.2; e = 0.8315; Tc = 20 minutesSubstitute these values into the FHWA intensity equation:
    After performing the computation, the resulting rainfall intensity for a 2-year storm event with a 20-minute time of concentration is approximately 3.80 inches per hour.

unknown node

After performing the computation, the resulting rainfall intensity for a 2-year storm event with a 20-minute time of concentration is approximately 3.80 inches per hour.

unknown node


Using BDE Coefficients in Rational-Based Hydrology Methods

In GeoSTORM, all rational-based hydrology methods (Rational method, Modified Rational method, and DeKalb Rational) use the following equation for computing peak flow rate:

Rational Equation

Where:

Q = Peak flow rate

C = Runoff coefficient

I = Rainfall intensity

A = Drainage area

The difference between the rational-based hydrology methods is in how rainfall intensity (I) is determined. The following sections explain how each method uses rainfall intensity:

Rational Method

In the Rational method, rainfall intensity is computed for a storm duration equal to the watershed’s time of concentration. This intensity value is then used directly in the equation to determine the peak flow rate. Because only one duration is evaluated, this method is simple and widely used for small urban drainage areas.

Modified Rational Method

In the Modified Rational method, the user specifies the storm duration to be analyzed. The rainfall intensity is then computed for this user-defined storm duration. This intensity value is then used directly in the equation to determine the peak flow rate. This method is well-suited for detention basin design or in situations where local design criteria require evaluation of a specific storm duration.

DeKalb Rational Method

The DeKalb Rational method uses the same rainfall intensity and peak flow computation as the standard Rational Method. However, instead of providing only a peak flow, it generates a full hydrograph using a dimensionless curve developed by DeKalb County, with the peak occurring at 5 times the TOC and a total storm duration of 10 times the TOC.

To learn more about these hydrology methods, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining BDE Coefficients in GeoSTORM

In GeoSTORM, the user can define BDE coefficients using the Storm Data command. Once defined, the software uses the FHWA intensity equation to compute rainfall intensity for any storm duration requested by the hydrology computation.

Follow the steps below to define BDE coefficients:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Storm Data command.
    Storm Data command
  2. The Storm Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Storm Data dialog box
    Note: BDE Coefficients are available only when either the Rational Method, Modified Rational, or DeKalb Rational is selected as the Hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box.
    Hydrology analysis engine dropdown combo box
  3. In the IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box, select the BDE Coefficients Table option.
    IDF (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) data type dropdown combo box
  4. In the Storm Frequency Data section, select the BDE Coeff Data tab. This tab provides a BDE Coefficients Data Table where the user can enter BDE coefficients for each storm event, as shown below.
    Storm Data - BDE Coeff Data tab
  5. After defining the BDE coefficients, the software automatically computes rainfall intensities based on the time of concentration and generates the corresponding IDF curve.
  6. To view the generated IDF curve, select the IDF Precipitation Plot tab in the Storm Frequency Data section, as shown below.
    Storm Data - IDF Precipitation Plot tab
unknown node

To learn more about the Storm Data command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Conclusion

BDE coefficients give the user a compact, equation-based methodology to represent regional rainfall intensity for every storm return period required by a project. Once the user obtains the published BDE values for the project location, the workflow in GeoSTORM is straightforward: open the Storm Data command, select BDE Coefficients Table as the IDF data type, enter the B, D, and E values for each storm event, and let the software handle the rest. From that point on, the software automatically computes rainfall intensities for the rational-based hydrology methods, generates a complete IDF curve for review, and applies those intensities to peak flow and hydrograph calculations across the entire drainage network.

The benefit is consistency, speed, and confidence: every pipe, inlet, and detention basin in the model uses the same agency-approved rainfall data, with no manual interpolation from a printed IDF chart and fewer chances for transcription errors as the model grows. By spending a few minutes up front entering the BDE values, the user can save hours during design iteration and produce a stormwater model that is easier to defend during review.

Infiltration & Soils › EPA SWMM Infiltration Methods

EPA SWMM Infiltration Methods

Infiltration is the process by which rainfall or surface water is absorbed into the soil through pervious surfaces within a subbasin. In stormwater modeling, accurately representing infiltration is critical because the volume of water that enters the soil directly affects how much becomes surface runoff. This runoff response, in turn, drives the peak flow rates, runoff volumes, and hydrograph shapes that engineers use to size pipes, design detention ponds, and evaluate flood risk.

Because infiltration has such a direct impact on runoff results, selecting the right infiltration method is an important modeling decision. Each method makes different assumptions about soil behavior, rainfall response, and moisture recovery, which affects how well it applies to a given land use, soil type, and storm event. Choosing an inappropriate method can lead to overestimated or underestimated runoff, resulting in drainage infrastructure that is either over-designed, under-designed, or not well aligned with field conditions.

In GeoSTORM, the following EPA SWMM infiltration methods are available:

  • Green Ampt
  • Horton
  • Modified Green Ampt
  • Modified Horton
  • SCS Curve Number

This article describes each EPA SWMM infiltration method available in GeoSTORM.

Selecting an Infiltration Method

Follow the steps below to select an infiltration method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Scenario Manager dropdown menu, and select the Scenario Manager command.
    Scenario Manager command
  2. The Scenario Manager dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Scenario Manager dialog box
  3. From the EPA SWMM infiltration method dropdown combo box, select the infiltration method.
    EPA SWMM infiltration method dropdown combo box
unknown node

Green Ampt Method

The Green Ampt method is a physically based infiltration method that represents the movement of water into soil using a simplified wetting-front concept. The method assumes that, as water infiltrates, a sharp wetting front advances downward through the soil. This wetting front separates a saturated or nearly saturated zone above from soil at its initial moisture content below. The rate at which water infiltrates depends on the capillary suction pulling water toward the dry soil, the hydraulic conductivity of the saturated zone, and the current depth of the wetting front. Under sustained rainfall or ponded conditions, the wetting front moves deeper into the soil, the hydraulic gradient gradually decreases, and the infiltration rate approaches the saturated hydraulic conductivity.

Because this method is based on Darcy’s Law and soil-water movement concepts, its parameters can be estimated from measurable soil properties, soil surveys, or published values for different soil texture classes. This makes it a strong choice when soil data is available or when a more physically meaningful infiltration method is preferred.

In GeoSTORM, the Green Ampt infiltration method utilizes the following parameters:

  • Soil capillary suction head
  • Soil hydraulic conductivity
  • Soil initial deficit

The following table summarizes the main pros and cons of the Green Ampt infiltration method:

unknown node

Horton Method

The Horton method is an empirical method for describing how a soil’s infiltration capacity changes during a rainfall event. Under sustained rainfall where the rainfall supply exceeds the soil’s ability to absorb water, the infiltration capacity decreases from an initial maximum rate toward a long-term minimum rate. At the beginning of a storm, the soil infiltrates water quickly. As the soil wets up, air becomes trapped, pores close, and the infiltration rate decreases exponentially until it reaches a long-term minimum. Horton captured this behavior with a simple exponential decay equation relating the current infiltration rate to the initial maximum rate, the final minimum rate, and a decay constant controlling how quickly the rate decreases.

Because the method is empirical, it is relatively simple to apply and is useful where detailed soil-property data are limited, but general infiltration behavior can be estimated from land use, soil type, or calibration data.

In GeoSTORM, the Horton infiltration method utilizes the following parameters:

  • Maximum infiltration rate
  • Minimum infiltration rate
  • Horton decay constant
  • Maximum infiltration volume
  • Saturated soil drying time

The following table summarizes the main pros and cons of the Horton infiltration method:

unknown node

Modified Green Ampt Method

The Modified Green-Ampt method refines the original Green-Ampt approach for storms that begin with a prolonged period of light rainfall before rainfall intensity exceeds the soil’s saturated hydraulic conductivity. In the original Green-Ampt method, the moisture deficit in the upper soil layer can be depleted too early during these low-intensity periods. The modified method preserves the moisture deficit in the shallow surface layer during the early portion of the storm, resulting in more realistic infiltration estimates when heavier rainfall occurs later.

This modification is especially useful for storm patterns where light rainfall continues for an extended period before the peak rainfall intensity arrives, such as many frontal storm events. In these cases, the modified method can allow more infiltration before runoff begins and may produce lower runoff volumes than the original Green-Ampt method. For short-duration, high-intensity storms where ponding begins almost immediately, the original and modified methods often produce similar results.

In GeoSTORM, the Modified Green Ampt infiltration method utilizes the following parameters:

  • Soil capillary suction head
  • Soil hydraulic conductivity
  • Soil initial deficit

The following table summarizes the main pros and cons of the Modified Green Ampt infiltration method:

unknown node

Modified Horton Method

The Modified Horton method addresses a limitation of the original Horton formulation. In the original Horton method, infiltration capacity decreases along a time-based decay curve during a rainfall event. This can reduce the available infiltration capacity even during periods when rainfall intensity is low, and the soil is not infiltrating water at the full potential Horton rate.

The modified version replaces elapsed time along the Horton curve with cumulative infiltration in excess of the minimum infiltration rate as the state variable. In practical terms, the infiltration curve advances based on how much water actually infiltrates above the minimum rate, rather than simply how much time has passed during rainfall. This provides a more realistic infiltration estimate during low-intensity rainfall and variable-intensity storm events.

Similar to the original Horton method, the Modified Horton method also accounts for soil drying and recovery between storm events through the saturated soil drying time parameter. This makes it useful for continuous simulations with multiple rainfall events, especially where storms include alternating periods of light rainfall, heavier rainfall, and dry intervals.

In GeoSTORM, the Modified Horton infiltration method utilizes the following parameters:

  • Maximum infiltration rate
  • Minimum infiltration rate
  • Horton decay constant
  • Maximum infiltration volume
  • Saturated soil drying time

The following table summarizes the main pros and cons of the Modified Horton infiltration method:

unknown node

SCS Curve Number Method

The SCS Curve Number method, now commonly referred to as the NRCS Curve Number method, was developed by the U.S. Soil Conservation Service and is documented in NRCS hydrology guidance such as TR-55 and TR-20. Rather than modeling the infiltration process directly, it estimates direct runoff from a storm event based on cumulative rainfall depth and a single lumped parameter: the Curve Number (CN). The CN represents the combined effect of land use, hydrologic soil group, cover conditions, imperviousness, and antecedent moisture conditions.

Within EPA SWMM, the Curve Number method is adapted for continuous rainfall-runoff simulation. The method assumes that a soil’s total infiltration capacity can be estimated from its tabulated Curve Number. During a rainfall event, this capacity is depleted as a function of cumulative rainfall and the remaining infiltration capacity. As the storm continues, the infiltration rate can approach zero, which is an important behavioral difference from methods such as Horton and Green-Ampt, which retain a minimum or physically based limiting infiltration rate.

Curve Numbers are commonly tabulated by land use or cover type and hydrologic soil group: A, B, C, or D. In GeoSTORM, composite Curve Numbers can be computed from land use/land cover data and hydrologic soil group data for each subbasin.

In GeoSTORM, the SCS Curve Number infiltration method utilizes the following parameters:

  • Curve number
  • Saturated soil drying time

The following table summarizes the main pros and cons of the SCS Curve Number infiltration method:

unknown nodeunknown node

Infiltration Method Quick Comparison

The following table provides a quick reference for comparing each infiltration method.

unknown node

Choosing the Right Infiltration Method

unknown node

In practice, no single infiltration method is universally best. The right choice depends on the project’s land use, available soil data, storm type, regulatory requirements, and the level of physical detail needed for the analysis. For many urban stormwater projects that follow NRCS design standards, the SCS Curve Number method is a common starting point because it is widely understood by reviewers and easy to document.

When in doubt, consider running the model with more than one infiltration method and comparing the results. In GeoSTORM, infiltration methods are selected through the Scenario Manager when EPA SWMM is used as the hydrology analysis engine. This allows separate scenarios to be configured with different infiltration methods so peak flows, runoff volumes, and system performance can be compared without rebuilding the model setup.

Conclusion

EPA SWMM infiltration methods help GeoSTORM estimate how rainfall is divided between soil infiltration and surface runoff. Green-Ampt and Modified Green-Ampt are best suited when reliable soil-property data are available, Horton and Modified Horton provide practical empirical options, and SCS Curve Number supports widely accepted NRCS-based rainfall-runoff workflows. For best results, choose the infiltration method early, use input parameters that match the selected method, and review the runoff response carefully before using the model results for design decisions.

Infiltration & Soils › EPA SWMM Infiltration Methods

Subbasin Data - Selecting EPA SWMM Infiltration Method

In GeoSTORM, the combination of different infiltration methods with the EPA SWMM hydrology method changes the contents of the General Specifications data panel of the Subbasin Data dialog box. Understanding this behavior helps the user correctly define subbasin parameters. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the EPA SWMM infiltration methods supported by GeoSTORM.

Follow the steps below to define subbasin data while selecting different infiltration methods along with the EPA SWMM hydrology method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Scenario Manager dropdown menu and select the Scenario Manager command.
    Scenario Manager command
    Alternatively, the user can click the Scenario Manager icon to open the Scenario Manager dialog box.
    Scenario Manager icon
  2. The Scenario Manager dialog box will be displayed.
    Scenario Manager dialog box
  3. Now, from the EPA SWMM infiltration method dropdown combo box, select an infiltration method.
    EPA SWMM infiltration method dropdown combo box

Note: The EPA SWMM infiltration method dropdown combo box will only be enabled when EPA SWMM is selected as the Hydrology analysis engine. Otherwise, this dropdown box will be displayed as disabled.

The following sections explain how the General Specifications data panel of the Subbasin Data dialog box changes based on the type of infiltration method selected for the EPA SWMM hydrology method.

Infiltration Method – Green Ampt

The following General Specifications data panel is displayed when the Green Ampt infiltration method is selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

Infiltration Method – Green Ampt

General Specifications

This section allows the user to define the general parameters of the defined subbasin.

General Specifications - Green Ampt

The following parameters are available in this section.

  • Drainage area
    This entry field defines the area of the selected subbasin. The user can click the […] button to measure the subbasin area from the Map View. Clicking the [Recalc] button will cause the software to recalculate the area of the digitized subbasin. Similarly, the [Recalc All] button will cause the software to recalculate the area of all the digitized subbasins.
  • Downstream connection
    This read-only entry field defines the downstream element that the selected subbasin drains to. The user can click the [...] button to select the subbasin downstream connection from the Map View.

The following elements can be selected:

    • Manhole
    • Routing Junction
    • Storage Area
    • Subbasin (only when using EPA SWMM hydrology)
    • Terminal Outfall

The user can click the [Clear] button to remove the downstream element connection.

  • Soil capillary suction head
    This entry field defines the average value of the soil capillary suction along the wetting front. Clicking the […] button will display the Soil Properties dialog box, as shown below.
    Soil Properties dialog box
  • Soil hydraulic conductivity
    This entry field defines the soil-saturated hydraulic conductivity. Clicking the […] button will display the Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity dialog box, as shown below.
    Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity dialog box
  • Soil initial deficit
    This entry field defines the difference between soil porosity and initial moisture content. For completely drained soil, this is the difference between the soil porosity and field capacity. Clicking the […] button will display the Soil Properties lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    Soil Properties lookup table dialog
  • TOC equivalent width
    This entry field defines the equivalent width used to calculate the rectangular runoff plane dimensions that are used in the kinematic wave Time of Concentration (TOC) computations for sheet flow and shallow concentrated flow.
    The user can click the [Calc] button to compute the TOC equivalent width for the current subbasin by computing the contributing drainage areas on both sides of the longest flow path bisecting the subbasin. Similarly, the user can click the [Calc All] button to compute the TOC equivalent width for all subbasins.
    Note: The user can compute this value automatically using the Compute TOC Widths command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.
  • TOC average slope
    This entry field defines the average slope of the runoff plane used in the kinematic wave Time of Concentration (TOC) computations for sheet flow and shallow concentrated flow.
    Note: The user can compute this value automatically using the Compute Slopes command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.
  • Internal routing
    This dropdown combo box defines how runoff from the impervious and pervious subareas contained within the subbasin is internally routed.
    The following internal routing options are provided:
    • Direct to Outlet
    • Impervious to Pervious
    • Pervious to Impervious
  • Internal runoff routed
    This spin control entry field defines the percentage of subarea runoff that flows from impervious to pervious (or pervious to impervious).
    Note: This entry becomes a read-only field and displays a value of 100% when the Direct to Outlet option is selected in the Internal routing dropdown combo box.

Impervious Subarea Parameters

This section allows the user to define the impervious area parameters of the defined subbasin.

Impervious Subarea Parameters

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Impervious surface area
    This spin control entry field defines the percentage of the subbasin area that is impervious (i.e., roadways, sidewalks, driveways, roofs, etc.).
  • No depression surface area
    This spin control entry field defines the percentage of the impervious surface area that has no depression storage.
  • Average depression depth
    This entry field defines the average depth of depression storage for the impervious portions of the subbasin (i.e., roadways, sidewalks, parking, roofs, etc.). Clicking the […] button will display the Average Depression Depth lookup table dialog box, as shown below.
    Average Depression Depth lookup table dialog box
  • Impervious area Manning's
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness coefficient for overland flow over the impervious portion of the subbasin (i.e., roadways, sidewalks, parking, roofs, etc.) for very shallow flow depths. Clicking the […] button will display the Overland Flow Roughness lookup table dialog box, as shown below.
    Overland Flow Roughness lookup table dialog box

Pervious Subarea Parameters

This section allows the user to define the pervious area parameters of the defined subbasin.

Pervious Subarea Parameters

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Average depression depth
    This entry field defines the average depth of depression storage for the pervious portions of the subbasin (i.e., grass, wooded, open space, etc.). Clicking the […] button will display the Average Depression Depth lookup table dialog box, as shown below.
    Average Depression Depth lookup table dialog box
  • Pervious area Manning’s
    This entry field defines Manning’s roughness coefficient for overland flow over the pervious portion of the subbasin (i.e., grass, wooded, open space, etc.) for very shallow flow depths (typically less than 1 inch). Clicking the […] button will display the Overland Flow Roughness lookup table dialog box, as shown below.
    Overland Flow Roughness lookup table dialog box

Computational Results

After successfully computing the analysis, this section provides a summary of the computational results for the defined subbasin.

Computational Results - Green Ampt

The following results are provided in this section:

  • Peak runoff rate
    This read-only field displays the peak runoff rate that occurred from the defined subbasin during the storm event. Another read-only field, adjacent to the Peak runoff rate read-only field, displays the date and time at which the peak runoff occurred from the defined subbasin during the storm event.
  • Total precipitation
    This read-only field displays the total precipitation that falls onto the defined subbasin during the storm event.
  • Total losses
    This read-only field displays the total losses (i.e., infiltration, depression, etc.) for the defined subbasin during the storm event.
  • Total runoff
    This read-only field displays the total runoff for the defined subbasin during the storm event.

Infiltration Method – Horton

The following General Specifications data panel is displayed when the Horton infiltration method is selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

Infiltration Method – Horton

General Specifications

This section allows the user to define the general parameters of the defined subbasin.

General Specifications - Horton

The following parameters are available in this section:

  • Drainage area
    This entry field is similar to the Drainage area entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • Downstream connection
    This entry field is similar to the Downstream connection entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • Maximum infiltration rate
    This entry field defines the maximum infiltration rate on the Horton curve. Clicking the […] button will display a Maximum Infiltration Rates lookup table dialog box, as shown below.
    Maximum Infiltration Rates lookup table dialog box
  • Minimum infiltration rate
    This entry field defines the minimum infiltration rate on the Horton curve, which is equal to the soil hydraulic conductivity. Clicking the […] button will display a Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity lookup table dialog box
  • Horton decay constant
    This entry field defines the infiltration rate decay constant for the Horton curve. Typical Horton decay constants range between 2 and 7.
  • Maximum infiltration volume
    This entry field defines the maximum infiltration volume. Clicking the […] button will display a Soil Properties lookup table dialog box.
    Soil Properties lookup table dialog box
  • Saturated soil drying time
    This entry field defines the number of days required for fully saturated soil to dry. Typical values range between 2 to 14 days, depending on soil type and climate-related factors.
  • TOC equivalent width
    This entry field is similar to the TOC equivalent width entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • TOC average slope
    This entry field is similar to the TOC average slope entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • Internal routing
    This entry field is similar to the Internal routing entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • Internal runoff routed
    This entry field is similar to the Internal runoff routed entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.

Impervious Subarea Parameters

This section is similar to the Impervious Subarea Parameters section available in the General Specifications data panel for the Green Ampt infiltration method. Refer to the Impervious Subarea Parameters section as explained above.

Pervious Subarea Parameters

This section is similar to the Pervious Subarea Parameters section available in the General Specifications data panel for the Green Ampt infiltration method. Refer to the Pervious Subarea Parameters section as explained above.

Computational Results

This section is similar to the Computational Results section available in the General Specifications data panel for the Green Ampt infiltration method. Refer to the Computational Results section as explained above.

Infiltration Method – Modified Green Ampt

The following General Specifications data panel is displayed when the Modified Green Ampt infiltration method is selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

Infiltration Method – Modified Green Ampt

Note: The contents of the General Specifications data panel for the Modified Green Ampt infiltration method are similar to those for the Green Ampt infiltration method. Refer to the General Specifications section of the Green Ampt infiltration method.

Infiltration Method – Modified Horton

The following General Specifications data panel is displayed when the Modified Horton infiltration method is selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

Infiltration Method – Modified Horton

Note: The contents of the General Specifications data panel for the Modified Horton infiltration method are similar to those for the Horton infiltration method. Refer to the General Specifications section of the Horton infiltration method.

Infiltration Method – SCS Curve Number

The following General Specifications data panel is displayed when the SCS Curve Number infiltration method is selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

Infiltration Method – SCS Curve Number

General Specifications

This section allows the user to define the general parameters of the defined subbasin.

General Specifications - SCS Curve Number

The following parameters are available in this section:

  • Drainage area
    This entry field is similar to the Drainage area entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • Downstream connection
    This entry field is similar to the Downstream connection entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • Curve number
    This entry field defines the curve number for the defined subbasin. Clicking the […] button will display a SCS Curve Number lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    SCS Curve Number lookup table dialog box
  • Saturated soil drying time
    This entry field is similar to the Saturated soil drying time entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Horton infiltration method.
  • TOC equivalent width
    This entry field is similar to the TOC equivalent width entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • TOC average slope
    This entry field is similar to the TOC average slope entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • Internal routing
    This entry field is similar to the Internal routing entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.
  • Internal runoff routed
    This entry field is similar to the Internal runoff routed entry field available in the General Specifications section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.

Impervious Subarea Parameters

This section is similar to the Impervious Subarea Parameters section in the General Specifications data panel for the Green Ampt infiltration method. Refer to the Impervious Subarea Parameters section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.

Pervious Subarea Parameters

This section allows the user to define the pervious area parameters of the defined subbasin.

This section is similar to the Pervious Subarea Parameters section displayed in the General Specifications data panel for the Green Ampt infiltration method. Refer to the Pervious Subarea Parameters section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.

Computational Results

After successfully computing the analysis, this section provides a summary of the computational results for the defined subbasin.

This section is similar to the Computational Results section in the General Specifications data panel for the Green Ampt infiltration method. Refer to the Computational Results section for the Green Ampt infiltration method.

Infiltration & Soils › EPA SWMM Structure Losses

EPA SWMM Structure Losses

In modern stormwater management systems, structural components such as manholes, junctions, conduits, and outlets are used to direct the flow. However, these structures often introduce energy losses that impact the system’s performance. These losses are collectively referred to as structural losses or, broadly, head losses.

GeoSTORM, which is based on EPA SWMM (Storm Water Management Model), incorporates detailed loss computations through defined coefficients applied at various structural components. Accurately computing and modeling these losses is essential for predicting flow depths, velocities, and potential surcharges.

This article outlines the structure losses and explains how they are calculated in EPA SWMM. Note that these losses are also available in GeoSTORM.

Types of Losses in EPA SWMM

EPA SWMM primarily considers two types of losses:

  • Major Losses
  • Minor Losses

Major Losses

Major losses refer to the energy loss resulting from friction between the fluid and the interior surface of the conduit (pipe, culvert, etc.) as the flow moves along its length. The following factors have an impact on the major losses:

  • Pipe length
  • Internal pipe friction
  • Flow velocity

Major losses in EPA SWMM are typically calculated using the following Darcy-Weisbach equation:

Darcy-Weisbach equation

Where:

  • hf = head loss due to friction
  • f = Darcy friction factor
  • L = pipe length
  • D = pipe diameter
  • v = flow velocity
  • g = gravitational acceleration

Minor Losses

Minor losses refer to the energy loss resulting from rapid changes in the magnitude or direction of the flow velocity. These losses can occur at bends, contractions, or enlargements in pipe geometry. Additionally, they are also associated with flows entering a pipe from a larger water body (entrance losses) or flows exiting a conduit to a larger water body (exit losses).

The following factors have an impact on the minor losses:

  • Entrance or exit of pipes
  • Junctions or manholes
  • Bends and elbows
  • Expansions and contractions of cross-sectional area

Minor losses in the EPA SWMM are typically calculated using the following Minor Loss equation:

Minor Loss equation

Where:

  • ΔHL= minor head loss
  • Km,i = loss coefficient
  • Ui = flow velocity
  • g = gravitational acceleration

Junction Head Losses

Among the primary structural components, minor losses often occur at junctions. Junction head losses refer to the loss of hydraulic head due to sudden changes in flow direction, velocity, or pipe size.

EPA SWMM considers the following minor losses to calculate the head loss at junctions:

  • Entrance losses: Result from flow entering a pipe abruptly, often from a manhole or inlet.
  • Exit losses: Result from flow exiting a pipe abruptly into another structure or open system, often through an outfall or outlet.
  • Average losses: Result from sudden changes in pipe diameter or cross-sectional area (expansion or contraction losses). These losses also include bend losses, which are often caused by sharp changes in flow direction within a pipe network.

Note that in EPA SWMM, the junction head losses are computed internally, with calculations dependent on defined loss coefficients. The user needs to manually assign the minor loss coefficient to calculate the total head loss. Once the user assigns a minor loss coefficient, the software computes the junction head loss using the following equation:

Head Loss Equation

Where:

  • hL = head loss at the junction
  • K = minor loss coefficient assigned to the junction
  • v = velocity of incoming/outgoing flow
  • g = gravitational acceleration

Handling Structure Losses in GeoSTORM

In GeoSTORM, the user can manually assign minor loss coefficients to compute the head loss. However, the computed head loss is not displayed to the users and is utilized by the software to compute other modeling parameters.

For example, the user can assign the minor loss coefficients in the Pipe Data dialog box to calculate the head loss and other pipe data results.

Minor Loss Coefficients in the Pipe Data Dialog Box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Pipe Data dialog box.

Comparison of Structure Loss Computations in GeoSTORM with Other Software

Other stormwater modeling software, such as StormCAD, use different methods and approaches to compute the structure losses. The following table compares structure loss computations in GeoSTORM (EPA SWMM-based) with StormCAD:

unknown node

When modeling junction energy losses, GeoSTORM offers a more robust and adaptable approach than other software, like StormCAD.

GeoSTORM uses SWMM’s dynamic wave solver to solve the full St. Venant equations, delivering physically consistent and hydraulically rigorous results. The user can directly set loss coefficients for junctions, bends, entrances, exits, and transitions, enabling precise calibration with given data. In addition, losses are only applied where necessary in GeoSTORM, ensuring the accuracy of the models.

StormCAD, by contrast, relies on the GVF Rational solver and standardized methods. While this is convenient for design-phase evaluations, it limits flexibility and user control compared to GeoSTORM.

Flow Paths › Flow Path Drawing & Computation

Draw and Assign Flow Paths Command (GeoSTORM)

GeoSTORM allows the user to draw or assign a polyline for each subbasin to function as the overland flow path for computing the SCS TR 55 Time of Concentration/Lag Time.

Lag Time and Time of Concentration (TOC) are two related but different concepts used in hydrology computations. Both represent the time required for runoff to travel from the hydraulically most distant point in the watershed to the outlet. This point has the longest travel time—not necessarily the longest physical distance—to the watershed outlet. It is a function of the topography, hydrologic soil type, and land use within the subbasin.

There are many different methods for computing Lag Time and Time of Concentration, but generally, these computations depend on the slope, subbasin characteristics and flow path.

The flow paths can be defined by either drawing or assigning the polyline using the following commands:

  • Draw Flow Paths
  • Assign Flow Paths

Draw Flow Paths Command

The Draw Flow Paths command allows the user to draw a polyline on the Map View to be used as a subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC/Lag Time.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Flow Paths command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Draw Flow Paths command.
    Draw Flow Paths Command
  2. The Draw Flow Paths dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Flow Paths Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

Drawing a Subbasin Flow Path Polyline

The Draw Subbasin Flow Path Polyline section allows the user to draw a polyline on the Map View as a flow path.

Follow the steps below to draw a flow path polyline:

  1. Click the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Draw Subbasin Flow Path Polyline Section
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to draw a flow path polyline on the Map View in the upstream to the downstream direction.
    Note that the software will check whether the drawn flow path polyline is contained within the corresponding subbasin polygon. If not, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Invalid Flow Path Informational Dialog Box
  3. After drawing the flow path polyline, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Draw Flow Paths dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Flow path polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Flow Path Polyline Read-only Field
    The software also determines which subbasin the flow path line corresponds to and displays the subbasin ID in the Corresponding subbasin ID read-only field.
    Corresponding Subbasin ID Read-only Field

Notes:

  • If the “Draw curvilinear polyline” checkbox is checked, then it allows the user to draw curvilinear polyline segments for the flow paths.
  • The [Reverse Direction] button reverses the assigned flow direction of the flow path polyline drawn.

Extracting Elevation Data

The Extract Elevation Data section allows the user to extract elevation from the defined terrain surface.

Extract Elevation Data Section

The Terrain surface dropdown combo box only lists elevation grids (i.e., DEMs) available in the project.

Note: Make certain to check the checkbox next to the Extract Elevation Data section header to enable the options within this section.

Creating SCS TOC Flow Segments

The Create SCS TOC Flow Segments section allows the user to subdivide the assigned flow path into flow segments.

Create SCS TOC Flow Segments Section

Notes:

  • If the Create SCS TOC Flow Segments checkbox option is unchecked, the options within this section (i.e., Create sheet flow segment and Create channel flow segment) will be disabled.
  • The Create SCS TOC Flow Segments section will only be available if the user selects SCS TR-55 TOC from the Subbasin – TOC/Lag Time Method dropdown combo box on the Options backstage page. Otherwise, if the user selects FAA TOC or SCS Watershed Lag TOC, this section will not be displayed and becomes unavailable from the dialog box.

The following subsections are available in this section:

  • Create sheet flow segment
  • Create channel flow segment

Create sheet flow segment

This subsection specifies that there is a sheet flow segment at the upstream end of the selected TOC flow path.

Create sheet flow segment Subsection

The following different ways of computing the sheet flow segment are provided within this subsection:

  • Fixed distance
    This entry allows the user to specify the length to use for the sheet flow segment. By default, the software uses a segment length of 20 ft (or 6 meters). The user can enter a different value or click the […] Measure button to measure sheet flow length from the Map View.
  • Use McCuen-Spiess equation, Manning’s n
    This entry allows the user to specify Manning’s n roughness value for the software to automatically compute the sheet flow length. The default value of this entry is 0.1500. Alternatively, click the adjacent […] button to measure Manning’s n roughness value from Manning’s Roughness table. This equation is used for post-construction conditions. The sheet flow length is computed using the following equation:
    McCuen-Spiess Equation

Where,

S = Upstream flow path slope, in ft/ft

n = Sheet flow Manning’s n roughness value

Create channel flow segment

This checkbox option specifies that there is a channel flow segment at the downstream end of the selected TOC flow.

Create Channel Flow Segment Checkbox Option

The following different ways of computing the channel flow segment are provided within this option:

  • Fixed distance
    This entry allows the user to specify the length to use for the channel flow segment. By default, the software uses a segment length of 100 ft (or 30 meters). The user can enter a different value or click the […] Measure button to measure channel flow length from the Map View.
  • Percentage of total length
    This spin control is used to compute the length of the channel flow segment, based upon a percentage of the total flow path length. This spin control ranges from 1 to 100%, with a default value of 50%.
  • Intersection with reach
    This option causes the software to compute the channel flow length when the flow path polyline intersects the reach polyline.

Once all the data has been defined in the Draw Flow Paths dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then create a corresponding subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC/Lag Time.

Assign Flow Paths Command

The Assign Flow Paths command allows the user to assign a polyline on the Map View as a subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC / Lag Time.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Flow Paths command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Assign Flow Paths command.
    Assign Flow Paths Command
  2. The Assign Flow Paths dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Flow Paths Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting a Subbasin Flow Path Polyline

The Select Subbasin Flow Path Polyline section allows the user to select and assign a polyline on the Map View as a flow path.

Follow the steps below to assign a flow path:

  1. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] Button - Assign Flow Paths Command
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to click near the downstream end of the already drawn flow path polyline on the Map View to select it.
    Note that the software will check whether the assigned flow path polyline is contained within the corresponding subbasin polygon. If not, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Invalid Flow Path Informational Dialog Box - Assign Flow Paths Command
  3. After selecting the flow path polyline, the Assign Flow Paths dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Flow path polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Flow Path Polyline Read-only Field - Assign Flow Paths Command
    The software also determines which subbasin the flow path line corresponds to and displays the subbasin ID in the Corresponding subbasin ID read-only field.
    Corresponding Subbasin ID Read-only Field - Assign Flow Paths Command

Note that the [Reverse Direction] button reverses the assigned flow direction of the flow path polyline selected.

Extracting Elevation Data

This section is similar to the Extract Elevation Data section as explained above for the Draw Flow Paths command.

Creating SCS TOC Flow Segments

This section is similar to the Create SCS TOC Flow Segments section as explained above for the Draw Flow Paths command.

Once all the data have been defined in the Assign Flow Paths dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the selected polyline as a corresponding subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC / Lag Time.

Computational Analysis › Analysis Specifications

Analysis Specifications Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Analysis Specifications command allows the user to define the simulation’s start and end times, as well as the computational time intervals. Each analysis specification defines a time window over which the simulation will be performed. This time window is specified using separate inputs for the start date, start time, end date, and end time. There are no restrictions on the length of the time window or the number of simulation time steps it can include. Additionally, the time interval defined in the analysis specification is used to display time-series results from the simulation.

Note: The Analysis Specifications command is disabled when Rational Method is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrology analysis engine.

Follow the steps below to use the Analysis Specifications command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Analysis Specifications command.
    Analysis Specifications command
  2. The Analysis Specifications dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Analysis Specifications dialog box

The following sections describe how to define analysis specifications and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Analysis Specifications

The Select Analysis Specifications section allows the user to select the analysis ID for which analysis specification data will be defined. In this section, the user can create, delete, and copy existing analysis specification data to a new analysis specification. In addition, the user can navigate between analysis specifications and enter a description for each analysis specification.

Select Analysis Specifications section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Analysis ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the analysis specifications defined in the current project. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the analysis specification ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next analysis specification using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current project contains a single analysis specification.
  • Description
    This optional text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the current analysis specification.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new analysis specification. The ID of every newly created analysis specification must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy the current analysis specification along with its associated data to a new analysis specification. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied analysis specification.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current analysis specification.

Simulation Time Window

The Simulation Time Window section defines when the simulation begins (start date and time) and ends (end date and time). Users can click the [Date] button to open a calendar date selector and select a specific date. Similarly, the user can click the [Time] button to open a 24-hour time selector for choosing a specific time. The Total time read-only field displays the total duration of the simulation.

Simulation Time Window section

Simulation Time Specifications

The Simulation Time Specifications section defines the computational time step to be used in the simulation.

Simulation Time Specifications section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Hydrology computational interval
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the time step used in computing runoff from the subbasins. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:
    • 1 Minute
    • 2 Minutes
    • 3 Minutes
    • 4 Minutes
    • 5 Minutes
    • 6 Minutes
    • 10 Minutes
    • 15 Minutes
    • 20 Minutes
    • 30 Minutes
  • Hydraulic routing computational interval
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the time step used in routing the flow through the conveyance network. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:
    • 1 Second
    • 2 Seconds
    • 5 Seconds
    • 10 Seconds
    • 15 Seconds
    • 20 Seconds
    • 30 Seconds
    • 1 Minute
    • 2 Minutes
    • 5 Minutes
  • Minimum variable time step
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the minimum allowable variable time step used in routing computations. The default value is 0.5 second. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:
    • 0.5 Second
    • 1 Second
    • 2 Seconds
    • 5 Seconds
    • 10 Seconds
    • 15 Seconds
    • 20 Seconds
    • 30 Seconds
    • 1 Minute
    • 2 Minutes
    • 3 Minutes
    • 4 Minutes
    • 5 Minutes
    • 6 Minutes
    • 10 Minutes
    • 15 Minutes
    • 20 Minutes
    • 30 Minutes
    • 60 Minutes

Note: The Minimum variable time step dropdown combo box is enabled only when Hydrodynamic is selected as the flow routing method in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

Reporting & Output › Excel Report

Excel Report Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Excel Report command allows the user to export the stormwater input data and associated output results to a Microsoft Excel file for the current scenario. If no analysis results have been computed, the software will export only the input data.

Once the report is exported, it can be saved as a template to be used in other engineering projects. In addition, the user can simply adopt a previous engineering report for use as a template by modifying the report to fit the current engineering study.

Follow the steps below to use the Excel Report command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Excel Report command.
    Excel Report command
  2. The Excel Report dialog box will be displayed.
    Excel Report dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Excel Report command and interact with the above dialog box.

Report Specifications

In the Report Specifications section, the user can customize the contents and settings for generating the report. The following panels are provided:

  • Report Contents
  • General Settings

Report Contents

Include Report Sections

The Include Report Sections section under the Report Contents panel includes a data grid that allows the user to define the entire contents to be included in the generated report. This is helpful when the user wants to compare different reports from various scenarios and elements.

Include Report Sections section under the Report Contents panel

The following parameters are provided in the data grid column entries:

  • Element Type
    This dropdown combo box entry lists all the elements that can be defined in the stormwater project:
    • Catch Basins
    • Ditches
    • Gutters
    • Manholes
    • Outfalls
    • Pipes
    • Roadway Crossing - Culverts
    • Roadway Crossing - Weirs
    • Roadways
    • Routing Junctions
    • Routing Reaches
    • Storage Areas
      Element Type dropdown combo box entry
  • Scenario
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the names of all scenarios that are available in the current project.
  • Sheet Name
    This read-only entry lists the names of individual sheets that will be created in the generated report (for Excel report). Click on the edit option (i.e., pencil icon) to edit the sheet name.
  • Order
    This entry allows the user to change the order in which the elements will appear in the generated report. By default, the elements are listed in the order they were originally defined. However, the user can use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the order of the elements.

General Settings

General Settings panel

Selecting Report Type

The Select Report Type section under the General Settings panel allows the user to define the format in which the report will be generated.

  • Excel report
    This checkbox option allows the user to generate the report in Microsoft Excel format (.xlsx). By default, this checkbox option is checked.
  • PDF report
    This checkbox option allows the user to generate the report in PDF format (.pdf). By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

Page Header and Footer

The Page Header and Footer section under the General Settings panel allows the user to add and customize headers and footers in the generated report pages. The user can also format the text and insert a page number, date, time, file path, file name, etc.

  • Header
    This checkbox option allows the user to include the header on every page of the generated report. The user can customize the header by inserting and formatting various types of content in the left, center, or right sections of the report pages. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
  • Footer

    This checkbox option allows the user to include the footer on every page of the generated report. The user can customize the footer by inserting and formatting various types of content in the left, center, or right sections of the report pages. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

In addition, the following buttons are provided for customizing the header and footer content:

header and footer customization buttons
  • Insert Page Number
    This button inserts the current page number.
  • Insert Number of Pages
    This button inserts the total number of pages.
  • Insert Date
    This button inserts the current date.
  • Insert Time
    This button inserts the current time.
  • Insert File Path
    This button inserts the file path.
  • Insert File Name
    This button inserts the name of the file.
  • Insert Sheet Name
    This button inserts the name of the current sheet (for Excel report).

Report Output Options

In the Report Output Options section, the user can define where to save the generated report, whether to overwrite an existing file and open the report automatically for viewing and editing.

Report Output Options section
  • Report file
    This entry allows the user to specify the file path and name where the generated report will be saved. The user can either use the default location or click the […] browse button to choose a different file path and name.
  • Overwrite existing file
    This checkbox option determines whether the existing content of the report file will be replaced with the new content. By default, this checkbox option is checked. If unchecked, the existing content of the report file will not be replaced, and the new content will be saved separately.
  • Open report file for viewing and editing
    This checkbox option allows the user to open the just generated report file for immediate viewing and editing. By default, this checkbox option is checked. If unchecked, the report file will not open automatically.

Generating Report

Once data have been defined in the Excel Report dialog box, click the [Generate] button and the software will generate the report at the specified location. The report will be generated either as a Microsoft Excel or PDF file.

Reporting & Output › Profile Plots

Profile Plot Command

In GeoSTORM software, the Profile Plot command allows the user to view the pipe profile plot, including pipe profile paths and connecting nodes (i.e., manholes, junctions, storage areas, and terminal outfalls). The user can also perform stormwater analysis using this command.

Follow the steps below to use the Profile Plot command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Profile Plot command.
    Profile Plot command
  2. The Profile Plot dialog box will be displayed.
    Profile Plot dialog box

The following sections describe the Profile Plot command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Plot Specifications

This panel of the dialog box contains different sections that define specifications for the pipe profile paths.

Selecting Pipe Profile Path

The table under the Define Profile Path section displays the pipes or routing reaches that make up the pipe profile path. The user can select from a pipe/routing reach/manhole/junction at both ends of the pipe profile path. The software will then automatically determine the connected pipes/routing reaches between them that make up the pipe profile path.

Follow the steps below to manually select the pipes/routing reaches to be defined as the pipe profile path:

  1. Click the [Pick] button to select the pipe/routing reach/manhole/junction from the Map View that make up the pipe profile path.
    Define Profile Path section - [Pick] button
  2. The Profile Plot dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the specific pipe/routing reach/manhole/junction from the Map View.
  3. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected pipes/routing reaches will be shown in the Total selected read-only field.
    Total selected read-only field
  5. The selected pipe profile path will also get added under the Select profile path dropdown combo box.

Pipe Profile Path Table

After selecting pipe/routing reach/manhole/junction at both ends of the pipe profile path, the table under the Define Profile Path section displays the list of all the user-selected pipes/routing reaches and their associated properties. The user can also select from the already saved pipe profile paths from the Select profile path dropdown combo box.

Pipe Profile Path Table

The following options and properties are provided in the table available under the Define Profile Path section:

  • Lock/Unlock
    This table column contains a padlock icon that defines whether a row is locked or unlocked. Unlocking a row allows the software to compute properties for the pipe/routing reach, as well as allows the user to manually edit the invert elevation entries. By default, the rows are unlocked.
  • Pipe/Reach ID
    This read-only table column lists the pipe or reach IDs for the selected pipe profile path.
  • Upstream Invert Elevation
    This editable table column defines the pipe/reach upstream invert elevation. If the row is locked, then this entry is displayed as a read-only field.
  • Downstream Invert Elevation
    This editable table column defines the pipe/reach downstream invert elevation. If the row is locked, then this entry is displayed as a read-only field.
  • Maximum Ground Cover
    This read-only table column defines the computed maximum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the length of the pipe/reach.
  • Minimum Ground Cover
    This read-only table column defines the computed minimum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the length of the pipe/reach.
  • Element Length
    This read-only table column defines the pipe/reach element length.
  • Element Slope
    This read-only table column defines the computed pipe/reach element slope.

Notes:

  • Clicking the [Clear] button will clear the current pipe profile path from the Define Profile Path Additionally, the populated data in the table will be emptied.
  • Clicking the [Delete] button displays a confirmational dialog box. This dialog box allows users to delete the selected pipe profile path.
    Delete Profile Path confirmational dialog box

Saving Pipe Profile Paths

The user can save the currently selected pipe profile path for the user-selected pipe profile path elements. Clicking the [Save Profile Path] button displays the Save Profile Path dialog box that allows the user to name and save the current pipe profile path.

Save Profile Path dialog box

Note that within the current scenario, the IDs of the pipe profile paths that are to be saved must be unique. Therefore, if the user defines the same pipe profile path ID as an existing path, the software will confirm whether to overwrite the existing pipe profile path.

Overwrite Existing Pipe Profile Path confirmational dialog box

Profile Computation Options

This section allows the user to select the elevation source from which to extract the elevation data for determining the pipe profile path.

Profile Computation Options section

If the Profile Computation Options checkbox is unchecked, the options contained within this section will be disabled (i.e., grayed out). The following two panels are available in this section:

  • Primary Elevation Data
  • Secondary Elevation Data

The Primary Elevation Data and Secondary Elevation Data panels are used to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the elevation data. Depending on the selected elevation data source type, the content of these panels changes to include the additional elevation data information.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software forms a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source are unavailable, the software will use elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source to define both the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

Profile Design Checks

This section allows the user to define the design checks to be utilized in reviewing the pipe profile path.

Profile Design Checks section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Recommended maximum allowable ground cover above pipe
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the value for the recommended maximum allowable ground cover above the pipe. This entry is used to check that the pipe is not placed too deep below the terrain surface, where an excavator cannot dig the required trench depth to bury the pipe.
    Notes:
    • This checkbox option is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if there is no terrain elevation surface defined in the model.
    • If the computed ground cover is larger than the value defined in this entry, the corresponding cell will be displayed in red color.
  • Recommended minimum allowable ground cover above pipe
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the value for the recommended minimum allowable ground cover above the pipe. This entry is used to check that the pipe does not come too close to the terrain surface, preventing the pipe from being crushed due to vehicular travel or freezing during the winter season.
    Note that this checkbox option is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if there is no terrain elevation surface defined in the model.
  • Recommended maximum allowable peak pipe velocity
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the maximum allowable pipe velocity during the storm peak to prevent pipe joints from separating and to provide sufficient flow to flush debris. In cases where the pipe velocities are larger, anchor collars may be required.
    Note that if the computed velocity is larger than this entry, the corresponding cell will be displayed in red color.
  • Recommended minimum allowable peak pipe velocity
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the minimum allowable peak pipe velocity during the storm peak to prevent the build-up and deposition of solids.
    Note that if the computed velocity is less than this entry, the corresponding cell will be displayed in red color.
  • Recommended maximum and minimum allowable pipe slopes
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the maximum and minimum allowable pipe slopes from a design perspective. Clicking the [Define] button will display the Allowable Pipe Slopes dialog box that provides an editable table, allowing the user to edit the maximum and minimum allowable pipe slopes along with pipe diameter values.
    Allowable Pipe Slopes dialog box

    After editing the required table values, the user can click the following buttons:

    • [Calc] - This button will cause the software to compute the maximum and minimum pipe slopes using the predefined equations.
    • [Reset] - This button will restore the default values in the table.
    • [OK] - This button will save the user's changes and close the dialog box.
    • [Cancel] - This button will discard any changes made by the user and close the dialog box.

    Note that if the pipe slope is outside the defined allowable pipe slopes, the corresponding table value will be displayed in red color.

  • Recommended maximum pipe capacity ratio
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the ratio of peak flow to design flow capacity to make certain that there is a reserve built into the pipe. The user can adjust the value for the recommended pipe maximum capacity ratio using the spin control.
    Notes:
    • The user can enter different values ranging from 50 to 100.
    • If the computed ratio for a pipe is above the defined value, the corresponding cell will be displayed in red color.
  • Recommended maximum allowable reach velocity
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the maximum allowable reach velocity during the storm peak.
  • Recommended minimum allowable reach velocity
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to define the minimum allowable reach velocity during the storm peak.
  • Recommended minimum allowable reach slope
    This checkbox entry allows the user to define the minimum allowable reach slope from a design perspective.

Resetting Profile Design Checks

The [Reset] button allows the user to reset the options available in the Profile Design Checks section to their default values. Clicking the [Reset] button displays the following confirmational dialog box.

Resetting Profile Design Checks

Click the [Reset] button again to reset the design check values back to their default values. To abort the process, click the [Cancel] button.

Profile Plot Manhole/Junction Labels

This section allows the user to define manhole/junction labels in the published pipe profile path.

Profile Plot Manhole/Junction Labels section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Manhole/Junction ID
    This checkbox option is used to include the manhole/junction ID with a vertical leader above the manhole/junction in the published pipe profile path.
  • Horizontal station, format
    This checkbox option is used to include the horizontal station with a vertical leader above the manhole/junction in the published pipe profile path. The user can select a horizontal station format from the following horizontal station formats listed in the adjacent dropdown combo box:
    • 100
    • 1+00
    • 1000
    • 1+000
      Horizontal station, format checkbox option
  • Starting station
    This entry field is used to define the starting horizontal station for the leftmost manhole/junction. The default horizontal station value is 100. The value defined in this entry field is saved at the project level.
  • Rim elevation
    This checkbox option is used to include the rim elevation with a vertical leader above the manhole/junction in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Rim Elev.
  • Invert (sump) elevation
    This checkbox option is used to include the invert elevation with a vertical leader above the manhole/junction in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Invert Elev.
  • Pipe/reach invert elevations
    This checkbox option is used to include the invert elevations of the pipes/reaches connected to the manhole/junction with a vertical leader above the manhole/junction in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding labels displayed in the published pipe profile path are Pipe In and Pipe Out.
  • Max HGL elevations
    This checkbox option is used to include the HGL (Hydraulic Grade Line) elevations in the pipes/reaches connected to the manhole/junction with a vertical leader above the manhole/junction in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding labels displayed in the published pipe profile path are HGL In and HGL Out.
  • Max EGL elevations
    This checkbox option is used to include the EGL (Energy Grade Line) elevations in the pipes/reaches connected to the manhole/junction with a vertical leader above the manhole/junction in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding labels displayed in the published pipe profile path are EGL In and EGL Out.

Profile Plot Pipe/Reach Labels

This section allows the user to define pipe/reach labels in the published pipe profile path.

Profile Plot Pipe/Reach Labels section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Pipe/reach ID
    This checkbox option is used to include the pipe/reach ID below the pipe/reach in the published pipe profile path.
  • Pipe/reach length
    This checkbox option is used to include the pipe/reach length below the pipe/reach in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Len.
  • Pipe diameter, units
    This checkbox option is used to include the pipe diameter below the pipe in the published pipe profile path. The user can select a pipe diameter unit from the following unit formats listed in the adjacent dropdown combo box:

    US Units

    Metric (SI) Units

    Inches

    mm

    Feet

    cm


    Meters


    The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Dia.
  • Pipe/reach slope, format
    This checkbox option is used to include the pipe/reach slope below the pipe/reach in the published pipe profile path. The user can select a pipe/reach slope format from the following slope formats listed in the adjacent dropdown combo box:
    • %
    • ft/ft (or m/m)
      Pipe/reach slope, format checkbox option

      The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Slope.

  • Minimum ground cover
    This checkbox option is used to include the minimum ground cover label below the pipe/reach in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Min Cover.
  • Maximum ground cover
    This checkbox option is used to include the maximum ground cover label below the pipe/reach in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Max Cover.
  • Maximum pipe/reach flow rate
    This checkbox option is used to include the maximum flow rate below the pipe/reach in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Max Flow.
  • Maximum pipe/reach velocity
    This checkbox option is used to include the maximum velocity below the pipe/reach in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Max Vel.
  • Maximum capacity ratio
    This checkbox option is used to include the maximum capacity ratio below the pipe/reach in the published pipe profile path. The corresponding label displayed in the published pipe profile path is Max Cap.

Profile Results

The Profile Plot section under the Profile Results panel allows the user to view the profile plot along with the computed results displayed in the table under the plotted pipe profile.

Profile Results panel

The following options are available on the Profile Plot section header:

Profile Plot section header
  • Increase/decrease label font size
    The user can increase or decrease the label font size in the profile plot using the label font size formatting buttons.
    Increase/decrease label font size buttons

    These changes are remembered for each pipe profile path. Therefore, each pipe profile path can have its own font sizes defined.

  • Add/remove grid space
    The user can add/remove grid space to/from the top or bottom of the profile using the grid space formatting buttons.
    Add/remove grid space buttons
  • Base scenario
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select a specific scenario from the available scenarios contained within the project. By default, the current scenario, along with the corresponding pipe profile path, is displayed.
    Note that if the user selects a scenario that does not contain a valid pipe profile path, the Profile Path dropdown combo box is displayed cleared. Additionally, nothing will be plotted in the pipe profile plot.
  • Compare with
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the scenario(s) with which the base scenario can be compared. The HGL and EGL of the selected scenarios under this dropdown combo box will be plotted in the pipe profile plot if the EGL and HGL Hide/Show buttons are enabled.
  • Profile Path
    The Profile Path dropdown combo box lists all the pipe profile paths that are valid for the selected scenario. Note that this dropdown combo box displays the last defined pipe profile path if the user just switched from the Plot Specifications panel.
  • Publish
    The [Publish] button allows the user to print or export the profile plot to a PDF, graphic, or CAD file.
    [Publish] button
    Clicking the [Publish] button displays the Publish Plot dialog box.
    Publish Plot dialog box
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about exporting profile plots.

Profile Plot Toolbar Commands

The toolbar commands available under the Profile Plot section allow the user to adjust the display properties of the profile plot.

Profile Plot Toolbar Commands

The following toolbar commands are available under the Profile Plot section:

  • Undo/Redo
    The Undo command is used to reverse the last changes made by the user. The Redo command is used to reverse the changes just made by the user using the Undo command.
  • Maximize/Minimize Plot
    This command is used to maximize or minimize the profile plot.
  • Show Profile View Outline
    This command is used to enable or disable the display of the profile view outline.
  • Manhole/Junction/Storage Area/Terminal Outfall Labels Hide/Show
    This command is used to enable or disable the display of the manhole, junction, storage area, or terminal outfall labels in the profile plot.
  • Pipe/Routing Reach/Roadway Crossing Labels Hide/Show
    This command is used to enable or disable the display of the pipe, routing reach, or roadway crossing labels in the profile plot.
  • Ground Surface Hide/Show
    This command is used to enable or disable the display of the ground surface in the profile plot.
  • EGL Hide/Show
    This command is used to enable or disable the display of the energy grade line(s) in the profile plot.
  • HGL Hide/Show
    This command is used to enable or disable the display of the hydraulic grade line(s) in the profile plot.
  • Intersecting Pipes Hide/Show
    This command is used to enable or disable the display of the intersecting pipes in the profile plot.
  • Graphical Element Editing Lock/Unlock
    This command is used to lock or unlock the functionality for editing graphical elements in the profile plot.
  • Data Grid Hide/Show
    This command is used to enable or disable the display of the data grid available under the profile plot.

Profile Plot Data Grid

The following manhole/junction and pipe/reach parameters are provided in the data grid available under the Profile Plot section:

Profile Plot Data Grid
  • Manhole/Junction ID
    This editable entry displays the IDs of all the manholes/junctions contained within the selected scenario. The user can rename a manhole ID for the current scenario.
    Note that renaming the manhole ID invalidates the computational results and clears the analysis result fields contained in the data grid.
  • Rim Elev
    This read-only entry displays the rim elevation for the corresponding manholes/junctions.
  • Invert Elev
    This editable entry displays the invert elevation for the corresponding manholes/junctions.
  • Max HGL
    This read-only entry displays the computational maximum HGL for the corresponding manholes/junctions.
  • Max EGL
    This read-only entry displays the computational maximum EGL for the corresponding manholes/junctions.
  • Pipe/Reach ID
    This editable entry displays the IDs of all the pipes/reaches contained within the selected scenario. The user can rename a pipe ID for the current scenario.
    Note that renaming the pipe ID invalidates the computational results and clears the analysis result fields contained in the data grid.
  • Length
    This read-only entry displays the length of the corresponding pipes/reaches.
  • Diameter/Depth
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the internal diameter of the profile pipes or the depth of the reaches.
  • Upstream Invert
    This editable entry displays the upstream invert elevation of the pipes/reaches. The following buttons are available in this entry:
    Invert Elevation buttons
    • Match Crown: The user can click the Match Crown button to match the crown of the pipe to the largest diameter pipe that already connects to the manhole.
    • Match Invert: The user can click the Match Invert button to match the pipe invert elevation to the connecting node invert elevation (or the top of the manhole sump, if defined).
    • Match Sump: The user can click the Match Sump button to match the pipe invert elevation with the connecting node's sump elevation.
  • Downstream Invert
    This editable entry displays the downstream invert elevation of the corresponding pipes/reaches. The following buttons are available in this entry:
    • Match Crown: The user can click the Match Crown button to match the crown of the pipe to the largest diameter pipe that already connects to the manhole.
    • Match Invert: The user can click the Match Invert button to match the pipe invert elevation to the connecting node invert elevation (or the top of the manhole sump, if defined).
    • Match Sump: The user can click the Match Sump button to match the pipe invert elevation with the connecting node’s sump elevation.
  • Slope
    This read-only entry displays the slope of the pipes/reaches. If the slope is less than the recommended minimum pipe/reach slope or greater than the recommended maximum pipe/reach slope, the corresponding cell is displayed in red.
  • Max Flow
    This read-only entry displays the computational maximum flow rate for the pipes/reaches.
  • Max Velocity
    This read-only entry displays the computational maximum velocity for the pipes/reaches. If the maximum velocity is less than the recommended minimum pipe/reach velocity or greater than the recommended maximum pipe/reach velocity, the corresponding cell is displayed in red.
  • Max Ground Cover
    This read-only entry displays the computed maximum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe/reach length based upon the selected terrain surface. If the ground cover is greater than the recommended maximum ground cover, the corresponding cell is displayed in red.
  • Min Ground Cover
    This read-only entry displays the computed minimum ground cover measured from the top of the pipe (crown) along the pipe/reach length based upon the selected terrain surface. If the ground cover is less than the recommended minimum ground cover, the corresponding cell is displayed in red.
  • Max Capacity Ratio
    This read-only entry displays the maximum capacity ratio for the corresponding pipe/reach. If the capacity ratio is greater than the recommended maximum capacity ratio, the corresponding cell is displayed in red.

The user can click the [Assign] button to assign the changes made in the profile plot data grid. Note that the [Assign] button will be disabled if the user does not make any changes in the profile plot.

Computing Profile Results

After defining the data in the profile plot data grid, the user can directly click the [Compute] button to perform stormwater analysis and compute the results. Alternatively, the user can close the dialog box and select the Compute Analysis command from the Analysis ribbon menu to perform stormwater analysis.

Reporting & Output › Profile Plots

Exporting Profile Plot

In GeoSTORM software, the user can view the pipe profile path, connected over a path of drainage system links (i.e., pipes and reaches) and nodes (i.e., manholes, junctions, and terminal outfalls) using the Profile Plot command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Profile Plot command.

Once the pipe profile is plotted, the user can print the profile plot or export the profile plot to a PDF, graphic, or CAD file.

Follow the steps below to export a profile plot using the Profile Plot command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Profile Plot command.
    Profile Plot command
  2. The Profile Plot dialog box will be displayed.
    Profile Plot dialog box
  3. From the Profile Results panel, click the [Publish] button.
    Profile Results panel
  4. The Publish Plot dialog box will be displayed.
    Publish Plot dialog box

The following sections describe the Publish Plot dialog box and how to print or export a profile plot.

Profile Plot Publishing Options

The Choose Target section allows the user to select the format in which the profile plot needs to be printed or exported. The following format options are available in this section:

  • Send to printer
  • Send to PDF
  • Send to graphic file
  • Send to CAD
    Choose Target section

Publish Specifications

This section allows the user to define the specifications for the profile plot to be printed or exported. The following panels are available in this section:

  • Profile Paths
  • Plot Labels
  • General Options
  • Layer Options
  • Printer & PDF Details
    Publish Specifications section

Note that these panels will be enabled or disabled based on the target format selected by the user.

Profile Paths

This panel allows the user to select the pipe profile paths available in the current scenario. The available pipe profile paths will be listed in the Profile Path table under the Select Profile Paths subsection. Note that this panel is only enabled when the user selects Export to CAD as the exporting option.

Profile Paths panel

The user can click the [Select All] button to select all the profile paths listed in the Profile Path table. Alternatively, the user can manually select the profile paths by checking or unchecking the listed entries in the Profile Path table. Clicking the [Clear All] button deselects all the selected profile paths listed in the Profile Path table.

Plot Labels

This panel allows the user to define the profile plot labels to be exported. The user can edit, change, and define labels that will appear on the profile plot. Note that this panel is only enabled when the user selects Export to CAD as the exporting option.

Plot Labels panel

The Profile path plot title entry is used to define the profile path plot title. The Title location dropdown combo box entry is used to define the location for placing the profile path plot title on the plot sheet. The Title location dropdown combo box entry has two options—Above Plot and Below Plot.

Other options provided in this panel to define the other profile plot labels include Vertical axis label, Horizontal axis label, Node label, Link label, and Elevation/station tick mark labels.

General Options

This panel allows the user to define the tick mark spacing, plot scaling, and plot layout specifications to be used when exporting the profile plot. Note that this panel is only enabled when the user selects Export to CAD as the exporting option.

General Options panel

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Tick Mark Specifications
    This subsection is used to define the distance between tick marks for vertical and horizontal axes. The following options are provided for both vertical and horizontal tick mark spacing:
    • Automatic
    • User-defined
  • Plot Scale Specifications
    This subsection is used to define the scale to be used for the vertical and horizontal axes.
  • Plot Layout Specifications
    This subsection is used to define the grid spacing for vertical and horizontal axes, along with the number of plot columns to be used. The Export each profile plot as a block checkbox option causes the entire profile plot to be a single block, allowing the user to easily move it within CAD.

Layer Options

This panel allows the user to define the drawing layers (or levels for MicroStation) to be created for the exported CAD drawing. Note that this panel is only enabled when the user selects Export to CAD as the exporting option.

Layer Options panel

This panel contains a CAD Layer Properties table that allows the user to define and modify the stylization of CAD layers. The user can use this table to edit or change the width, style, and color of the CAD layers.

The Internal Layer Name read-only column displays the internal layer name used for reference by the software. The Exported Layer Name editable column displays the layer (or level) name to be used when constructing the profile plots.

The visibility of the layers can be controlled by the [Show All] and [Hide All] buttons. Alternatively, the user can manually select the layers to be visible by checking or unchecking the checkboxes under the Visible column.

The Fill ground area, Fill structures, and Fill water area checkboxes control the filling of the ground terrain, structures (dams, bridges, etc.), and water area on the profile plot, respectively.

Printer & PDF Details

This panel allows the user to configure the print and PDF details to print the profile plot or export the profile plot to a PDF document. Note that this panel is only enabled when the user selects Send to printer or Export to PDF as the exporting format.

Printer & PDF Details panel

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Paper size
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the page dimensions to be used for the print or PDF document. The following options are provided:
    • A4 – 21.0 x 29.7 cm
    • Letter – 8.5” x 11”
  • Orientation
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the page orientation to be used for the print or PDF document. The following options are provided:
    • Landscape: This option is used to organize the content of the document horizontally, with the left and right margins being larger than the top and bottom margins.
    • Portrait: This option is used to organize the content of the document vertically, with the top and bottom margins being larger than the left and right margins.
  • Margins
    This subsection allows the user to set the page margins to be used for the print or PDF document. The user can set the top, bottom, left, and right margins using the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Scale options
    This subsection allows the user to scale the print or PDF document to fit the paper size. The following options are provided:
    • Auto size: This option automatically scales the document to fit the selected paper size.
    • Fit on page: This option scales up the content on the document to make it more readable or scales it down to fit more content on a page.
    • Manual scale, percent: This option scales the document by the amount entered or set in the adjacent spin control entry field.
  • Position on page
    This subsection allows the user to set the position of the profile plot on the printed or exported PDF document. The user can click the specific direction arrow button to set the position of the profile plot. The defined position of the profile plot will be displayed in the Preview subsection.

Saving and Loading Settings

The user can click the [Default] button to restore the publish plot specifications to default settings.

[Default] button

The user can save the defined settings to be used for exporting the profile plot for all future projects by clicking the [Save Settings] button.

[Save Settings] button

Clicking the [Save Settings] button will display the Save Settings dialog box. The user can enter the file name and click the [Save] button to save the defined settings. The saved file will have .pppltcfg as the file extension.

Save Settings dialog box

The user can click the [Load Settings] button to load the previously defined settings.

[Load Settings] button

Clicking the [Load Settings] button will display the Open Setting File dialog box. The user can select the file with the .pppltcfg extension and click the [Open] button to load the defined settings.

Open Setting File dialog box

Once the required publish plot settings are defined, click the [OK] button to print the profile plot or export the profile plot to a PDF, graphic, or CAD file.

Reporting & Output › Underground Storage Chamber Report

Generating Underground Storage Chamber Report

In GeoSTORM, the Underground Storage Chamber Report command allows the user to generate a consolidated report of the storage chamber system containing the input and output results. The report can be generated as a Microsoft Word or a PDF format.

Most aspects of the report are automatically generated by the software so that the users do not have to worry about adding different figures, graphs, tables, and more into the report.

Once the report is created, it can then be saved as a template and can be used in other engineering projects. In addition, users can simply adopt a previous engineering report to be used as a template by modifying the report to fit the current engineering project.

Follow the steps below to generate the underground storage chamber report:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Storage Areas dropdown menu and select the Storage Area Data command.
    Storage Area Data Command
  2. The Storage Area Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Storage Area Data Dialog Box
  3. Select the Underground Storage Chamber option from the Storage area volume dropdown combo box, as shown below.
    Storage Area Volume Dropdown Combo Box
  4. Now, from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box, select the Underground Storage Chamber option.
    Storage Area Specifications Dropdown Combo Box
    Note that the Underground Storage Chamber option in the Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box will be displayed as enabled only when the user selects the Underground Storage Chamber option from the Storage area volume dropdown combo. Otherwise, this option will be disabled.
  5. The following Underground Storage Chamber panel will be displayed. From the Summary subpanel available in the Underground Storage Chamber section, click the [Chamber Report] button.
    [Chamber Report] Button
  6. The Underground Storage Chamber Report dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Underground Storage Chamber Report Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to generate a report for an underground storage chamber system and interact with the above dialog box.

Report Specifications

The Report Specifications section contains the following panels:

  • Report Settings
  • Project Map
  • Contents
  • Default Settings

Report Settings

This panel allows the user to specify general format settings for the report pages.

Report Settings Panel

The following sections are available in the Report Settings panel:

Title Page Contents

This section allows the user to define content for the project. Note that the following options in this section are only enabled if the Title Page Contents checkbox is checked.

  • Project title
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to enter the text that will be shown as the title of the project.
  • Project subtitle
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to enter the text that will be shown as the subtitle of the project.
  • Prepared for
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to enter the text that defines the purpose of the project.
  • Report date
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to include a date on the report's title page. By default, this entry displays the current date. The user can click on the calendar icon to select a specific date.

Note that the format of the listed date will be based on the computer’s location settings. For example, dates in the USA are formatted differently than in Europe. In addition, the user can manually type in the date—"July 2021", for example— where it is just a month and year, with no date listed. If this entry is unchecked, no date will be listed on the title page.

  • Watermark
    This editable dropdown combo box lists watermarks that can be included in the page background. This entry is saved at the project level. The user can click the [Add New Watermark] button to add new watermarks.
    [Add New Watermark] Button
    In addition, the user can rename the existing watermarks by clicking the pencil icon adjacent to this dropdown combo box.

Report Template

This section allows the user to select either the default or custom template for generating the report.

Report Template Section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Use default template
    This radio button option allows the user to select the default template. Selecting this radio button option enables the Include Report Sections section in the Contents panel, along with the Paper Settings, Additional Title Page Content, and the Page Header and Footer sections in the Default Settings panel.
  • Use custom template
    This radio button option allows the user to select a custom template. Selecting this radio button option enables the corresponding […] browse, [Edit], and [Restore] buttons.
    • The user can click the […] browse button to select a cover page template file to use.
    • The user can click the [Edit] button to edit the cover page template.
    • The user can click the [Restore] button to restore the cover page template to its default version.

Project Map

This panel allows the user to define the project map to be displayed in the generated report.

Project Map panel

If the user unchecks the Project Map checkbox, then the subpanels under the Project Map subsection will be disabled. In addition, the project map will not be included in the report. Note that this panel is disabled if the user has not defined a base map layer for the project. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to add a base map layer to a project.

The Project Map panel contains the following subpanels:

Project Area

This subpanel displays an independent base map view of the main Map View. The subpanel shows the current Map View extents by default. However, the user can zoom and pan this view using the mouse cursor. It is used to determine the extents of the project area map to be shown in the report.

Project Area subpanel

The user can select the project base map from several high-quality base maps available in the Project base map provider dropdown combo box. The Use grayscale base map checkbox option allows the user to toggle the color scheme of the base map from color to grayscale. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.

Region Area

This subpanel displays an independent base map view of the main Map View. By default, the subpanel shows four times the current Map View extents. However, the user can zoom and pan this view using the mouse cursor. It is used to determine the extent of the region area map to be shown in the report. The Map View window defines the final project area map.

Region Area subpanel

The user can select the region base map from several high-quality base maps available in the Region base map provider dropdown combo box. The Include project area border, color checkbox option allows the user to include a border around the region area. The user can select the color for the border lines from the corresponding dropdown color palette. By default, this checkbox is checked.

Map Preview

This subpanel displays the project map constructed using the project area map and the region area map. This subpanel shows the project map that will be included in the generated report.

Map Preview subpanel

The user cannot adjust the project area map and the region area map from this subpanel. The user needs to return to the previous two subpanels (i.e., Project Area and Region Area) to make those adjustments. However, the user can draw basic elements on top of the project map, such as lines, shaded polygons, arrows, and text using the [Edit] button. Clicking the [Edit] button displays the Edit Project Map dialog box. This dialog box contains a diagram editor that allows the user to edit the Map Preview. To learn how to use the Edit Project Map diagram editor, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Edit Project Map dialog box

Contents

This panel allows the user to define the entire contents of the generated report.

Contents Panel

The following section is available in the Contents panel:

Include Report Sections

This section provides a table that allows the user to define which sections should be included in the generated report. The following columns are available in this table.

  • Report Section
    This column lists all the available report sections. The user can select or deselect the checkbox corresponding to the section name that is to be included or excluded from the generated report.
  • Custom Title/Options
    This column allows the user to edit the custom title of the report section to be listed in the generated report. It allows the user to place a more meaningful name in the report section. For example, the user may want to translate the report section title into a different language (i.e., German).

Default Settings

This panel allows the user to specify general page format settings to be used for the generated report.

Default Settings panel

The following sections are available in the Default Settings panel:

Paper Settings

This section is used to define the page size, page numbering format, and date formats of the report. The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Paper size
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the paper size from the available standard paper sizes. The selected size is stored at the application level and recalled for future applications. Note that the content of this dropdown combo box changes based on project units.
  • Image output quality
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the image output quality format. The following formats are available:
    1. Draft
    2. Publication
  • Page numbering
    This dropdown combo box lists different page numbering formats. The following formats are available:
    1. Page # (default)
    2. Page # of ##

Note that page numbering is not available for the Cover Page or the Table of Contents section.

  • Title page date format
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the date format for the title page from the listed formats. The following formats are available:
    1. DD-MM-YYYY
    2. DD Month, YYYY
    3. DD Mon, YYYY
    4. Month DD, YYYY

Additional Title Page Content

This section allows the user to define the Company logo and the Prepared by content to be placed at the top of the page. Note that this section is stored at the application level so that the next report already includes the company logo and the Prepared by information.

Click the […] browse button to display the Select Company Logo dialog box that allows the user to select the company logo file.

Select Company Logo Dialog Box

Numerical Formatting

This section contains a Use delimiters for large number formatting checkbox option. It causes the software to format large numbers using a delimiter. By default, this checkbox is checked.

Page Header and Footer

The section allows the user to include header and footer sections in the report pages. By default, this section is enabled. The user can define the header and footer text for odd and even pages in the respective entry fields of this section.

Note that only two lines of text are allowed. If the user unchecks the Page Header and Footer checkbox, this section will be disabled, and the header and footer will not be included in the report pages.

Report Output Options

In the Report Output Options section, the user can define where to save the generated report, whether to overwrite an existing file, and open the report automatically for viewing and editing.

Report Output Options Section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Report file
    This entry allows the user to specify the file path and name where the generated chamber report will be saved. The user can either use the default location or click the […] browse button to choose a different file path and name.
  • Overwrite existing report file
    This checkbox option causes the software to overwrite the existing report file. By default, this checkbox option is checked. The user can uncheck this option to prevent overwriting an existing report.
  • Open report file for viewing and editing
    This checkbox option allows the user to view and edit the just created report file. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

Generating Chamber Report

Once all the report specifications are defined, click the [Generate] button to generate the chamber report at the specified location. The chamber report will be generated either as a Microsoft Word document or a PDF file.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Copy & Paste Element Properties

In CivilGEO’s software, users can use the Copy Properties and Paste Properties commands to copy and paste the hydrologic/engineering properties between similar Map View elements, such as subbasins, reaches, storage areas, manholes, pipes, and more.

Copy and Paste Element properties commands

Follow the steps below to copy and paste properties from one element to another element:

  1. On the Map View, select the element whose properties are to be copied.
  2. Right-click the selected element and choose Copy Properties from the displayed context menu.
  3. Right-click the target element on the Map View where the copied properties will be pasted.
  4. Select Paste Properties from the displayed context menu.
  5. The properties will now be pasted to the target element.

Notes:

  • You can only copy and paste properties between elements of the same type.
  • Geometric properties, such as elevations, area, lengths, etc., along with the computed results, cannot be copied and pasted since they are considered element specific. Only engineering properties, such as curve numbers, percent impervious, routing methods, etc., can be copied.
  • The hydrologic results of project elements, such as Junction and Sink, obtained after computing the analysis, cannot be copied and pasted among similar element types.

HEC-HMS Element Properties

The following list outlines the engineering properties eligible for copying and pasting among similar HEC-HMS elements.

unknown node

GeoSTORM Element Properties

The following list outlines the engineering properties that can be copied and pasted among similar GeoSTORM elements.

unknown node
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Reversing Project Elements

The GeoSTORM software facilitates the ability to reverse the flow direction of certain project elements, such as pipes, routing reaches, roadway segments, and roadway crossings on the Map View. The following list represents the types of commands that can be used to reverse the assigned flow direction of project elements:

  • Reverse Pipes
  • Reverse Routing Reaches
  • Reverse Roadway Segments
  • Reverse Roadway Crossings

In this article, we will use the Reverse Routing Reaches command to describe how to reverse the routing reach(s) in GeoSTORM software.

Follow the steps below to use the Reverse Routing Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Reverse Routing Reaches command.
    Reverse Routing Reaches command
  2. The Reverse Routing Reaches dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Reverse Routing Reaches dialog box
  3. The Select Routing Reaches section lists all the available routing reach(s) of the current scenario and allows the user to select single or multiple routing reach(s) defined in the project. The user can select the desired routing reach(s) using the checkbox option.
    Select Routing Reaches section
    The user can also use the checkbox contained within the column header to select/deselect all the routing reaches.
  4. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to manually select the routing reach from the Map View and then press [Enter] or right-click and select Done from the context menu to complete the selection. The number of selected routing reach(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.
    Total Selected Read-only Field
  5. After selecting the routing reach(s), click on the [Reverse] button and the software will then reverse the flow direction of the selected routing reach(s) as shown below.
    Reverse Button
  6. Alternatively, the user can select the routing reach(s) directly from the Map View and reverse its flow direction using the Reverse Routing Reach (Swap Direction) command from the right-click context menu.
    Reverse Routing Reach (Swap Direction) command
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Contributing Streams Command

Contributing Streams command is used to automatically compute and trace the upstream drainage tributaries that contribute runoff to the selected location (Outlet point) on the Map View.

Follow these steps to use Contributing Streams command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Contributing Streams command.
    Contributing Streams Command
  2. The Contributing Streams dialog box will be displayed.
    Contributing-Streams-Command-image-2.png
  3. Provide the preferred name for the layer group in the Layer group name input field. This input field identifies the layer group that displays the contributing stream network on the Map View in the Map Data Layers panel.
  4. Select Delete previously computed contributing streams(s) check box to delete any previously traced contributing stream network.
  5. Click on [OK] button. The Contributing Streams dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar.
    Contributing-Streams-Command-image-3.png
  6. Click on a point on the Map View to place the downstream outlet point. The software will snap the outlet point to the nearest stream, and then compute and trace the upstream drainage stream network.
  7. Once the process is complete, a delineated contributing stream network will appear on the Map View as shown below.
    Contributing-Streams-Command-image-4.png

Products

  • Free Trial
  • GeoSTORM
  • GeoHECRAS
  • GeoHECHMS

Customers

  • Customer Portal Login
  • Customer Reviews
  • Customer Stories
  • Customer Videos
  • Case Studies
  • Wall of Love

Training

  • Training Classes
  • Training Webinars
  • Product Tutorials
  • Engineering Resources

Company

  • About Us
  • Contact
  • Privacy Center
  • Terms of Use
  • Brand Assets

Support

  • Knowledge Base
  • Contact Support
  • Feature Requests
  • General Feedback

Contact Us

  • info@civilgeo.com
  • +1 608-729-5100
CivilGEO United States
708 Heartland TrailSuite 3000Madison, WI 53717-2174Tel: 608-729-5100 or 800-488-4110
G2 Best Software 2026 — Top 50 CAD PLM ProductsAutodesk Authorized DeveloperFind us on Ariba Network
Copyright © 2026 CivilGEO, Inc. All rights reserved. The CivilGEO logo, “GeoSTORM”, “GeoHECHMS”, “GeoHECRAS”, and “Ready To Engineer” are registered trademarks of CivilGEO, Inc. All other brands, company names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.